Workshop Manual Triumph Tiger - 1050 - 2006

U MpH
TIGER
TIGER (ABS)
Part Number 385736S Issue 1, 11.2006
UMW Service. Manual - Tiger

Table of Contents
pT1IIIIbiIl
Service Manual - Tiger iii
t1 rTii i.iii
Table oof Contents

Howto use this manual ......................................................................iv
Warnings, Cautions and Notes ................................................................. iv
Tamperingwith Noise Control System Prohibited ................................................ v
References................................................................................. v
Dimensions...........................................................................v
Re airsandReplacements.. . .. . . .. ... ....... .............. ............................v
p
Force••••••••••• ♦••••...••••.•••••••..•.••••.••.•.•.••.. ..••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••V
Edges• ............................................................................. v
Tighteningprocedures .................................................................v
Service Manual - Tiger V

TRJUMPON
1 1
rrr .i
This manual is designed primarily for use by trained
technicians in a properly equipped workshop. However, it
contains enough detail and basic information to make it To assist in the use of this manual, the section title is given
useful to the owner who desires to perform his own basic at the top.
maintenance and repair work. The work can only be Each major section starts with a contents page, listing the
carried out if the owner has the necessa ry hand and information contained in the section.
special service tools to complete the job.
The individual steps comprising repair operations are to
A basic knowledge of mechanics, including the proper use be followed in the sequence in which they appear.
of tools and workshop procedures is necessa ry in order to
carry out maintenance and repair work satisfactorily. Adjustment and repair operations include reference to
Whenever the owner has insufficient experience or doubts service tool numbers and the associated illustration depicts
his ability to do the work, an authorised Triumph dealer the tool.
must undertake all adjustments, maintenance, and repair Where usage is not obvious, the tool is shown in use.
work.
Adjustment and repair operations also in cl ude reference
In order to perform the work efficiently and to avoid costly to wear limits, relevant data, torque figures, specialist
mistakes, read the text and thoroughly familiarise yourself information and useful assembly details.
with procedures before starting work.
All work should be performed with great care and in a Warnings, Cautions and Notes
clean working area with adequate lighting.
Particularly important information is presented in the
Always use the correct special service tools or equipment following form:
specified. Under no circumstances use makeshift tools or
equipment since the use of substitutes may adversely
affect safe operation.
Where accurate measurements are required, they can
only be made using calibrated, precision instruments. This warning symbol identifies special instructions or
For the duration of the warranty period, an authorised procedures which, if not correctly followed, could result
Triumph dealer must perform all repairs and scheduled in personal inju ry, or loss of life.
maintenance.
::
t.^ ^..^.v ; ^1.X';.;r. :1s.: ..X ,a::i{: .,'` :',:.Y.•<:,.
, ;} : a3: }
n:W ^ ,+'^
, 'î
^
i:;++'h d:4fwc::? ?f .'i:t 1 ;
To maximise the life of your Motorcycle: ^.^ , .}
^:?
:{:., 'r. ^.:^
s^+ ru
n..
.w,q
.+y, : n
^{,:•^;.:.4......,.
}^:t£^.ia.,s ''szr{::,
'" :v^; •?'• .` `
• • V:
^ •
t: v: ' v.: a •. i
A
fi... t•
>
• Accurately follow the maintenance
t t'^ +X.
2G' ^" ^.:;^.4...,
:.3T.% ^ ^ ^^r,
`., it ^: `' '^...
:J ^', :1§. +5 r.., ây^fi•.. ..::^,^^
a.a:. «,,t:#...ah:''t
+
ifi.
Y!
§ £x.
n +a
:fi•,.. to
>X
:
^:n..,•,a V ^w. •
^.:' $$ is
:3;'+'+ J: ,.N. ^.f^.^<'^t`,
re quirements of the periodic maintenance This caution symbol identifies special instructions or
chart in the service manual. procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to or destruction of equipment.
• Do not allow problems to develop.
Investigate unusual noises and changes in the Note:
riding characteristics of the motorcy cl e.
Rectify all problems as soon as possible • This note symbol indicates points of
(immediately if safety related). particular interest for more efficient and
convenient operation.
• Use only genuine Triumph parts as listed in
the parts catalogue/parts microfiche.
• Follow the procedures in this manual
carefully and completely. Do not take short
cuts.
• Keep complete records of all maintenance
and repairs with dates and any new parts
installed.
• Use only approved lub ri cants, as specified in
the owner's handbook, in the maintenance of
the motorcycle.
vi Service Manual - Tiger •

Tampering with Noise Control Edges
system Prohibited Watch for sharp edges, especially during engine
disassembly and assembly. Protect the hands with
Owners are warned that the law may prohibit: industrial quality gloves.
a) The removal or rendering inoperative by any When replacement parts are required, it is essential that
person other than for purposes of maintenance, only genuine Triumph parts are used.
repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for the Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments
purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery embodied in the motorcycle may be impaired if other
to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; and than genuine Triumph parts are fitted. In certain territories,
legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to the
b) the use of the vehicle after such device or element
manufacturer's specification.
ofdesign has been removed or rendered
inoperative by any person.
Tightening Procedures
Generally, when installing a part with several bolts, nuts or
screws, they should all be started in their holes and
References to the left-hand or right-hand side given in this
tightened to a snug fit, evenly and in a cross pattern. This
manual are made when viewing the motorcycle from the
is to avoid distortion of the part and/or causing gas or oil
rear.
leakage. Conversely, bolts, nuts, or screws, should all be
Operations covered in this manual do not always include loosened (in sequence if specified) by about a quarter of a
reference to testing the motorcycle after repair. It is turn and then removed.
essential that work is inspected and tested after
Where there is a tightening sequence specified in this
completion and if necessary a road test of the motorcycle
Service Manual, the bolts, nuts, or screws must be
is carried out particularly where safety related items are
tightened in the order and by the method indicated.
concerned.
Torque wrench setting figures given in this Manual must
be observed. The torque tools used must be of accurate
calibration.
The dimensions quoted are to design engineering Locking devices, where specified, must be fitted. If the
specification with service limits where applicable. efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it
During the period of running-in from new, certain must be renewed. This applies particularly to micro-
adjustments may vary from the specification figures given encapsulated fixings which must always be replaced if
in this manual. These will be reset by the dealer at the disturbed. Where necessary, the text in this manual will
500 mile/800 km service, and thereafter should be indicate where such a fixing is used.
maintained at the figures specified in this manual.
Repairs and Replacements

Before removal and disassembly, thoroughly clean the
motorcycle. Any dirt entering the engine or other parts
will work as an abrasive and shorten the life of the
motorcycle. Particular attention should be paid when
installing a new part, that any dust or metal filings are
cleared from the immediate area.
Force
Common sense should dictate how much force is
necessary in assembly and disassembly. If a part seems
especially difficult to remove or install, stop and examine
what may be causing the problem. Never lever a
component as this will cause damage both to the
component itself and to the surface being levered against.
Whenever tapping to aid removal of an item is necessary,
tap lightly using a hide or plastic faced mallet.
Twumm
Service Manual - Tiger VI'
fl h.Ii
This page intentionally left blank
V ile Service Manual - Tiger UP

[Lci ir i I TI11MI'I1i
^
Y
^^ .^ P': X11 ^ ^ 'w
IgnitionSystem Safety Precautions ........................................................... 1.3

DangerousSubstances ..................................................................... 1.3
Fluoroelastomers.......................................................................... 1.3
Oils..................................................................................... 1.3
Health Protection Precautions ............................................................... 1.3
EnvironmentalProtection Precautions ........................................................ 1.4
Brakes................................................................................... 1.4
yInstructions
Safet ......................................................................... 1.5
Jacking and Lifting .................................................................... 1.5
Precautionsagainst Damage ........................................................... 1.5
Coolant .............................................. 0 .......................... 0 ... 1.5
Cleaningcomponents ................................................................. 1.6
Lubrication........................................... 0 ..................... 0 ........ 1.6
Joints and Joint Faces ..................................... 0 ........................... 1.6
Gaskets, O- ri ngs ................................................. 0 ................... 0 1.6
Liquidgasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent ............................................ 1.6
ScrewThreads ........................................................0.............. 1.6
Locking Devices ...................................................................... 1.7
a
Fittin Split Pin ..................................................................... 1.7
g
Circlips, Retaining Rings .......................................... 0 .............. 0 ..... 1.7
Self Locking Nuts ...............................................0..................... 1.7
Encapsulated Bolt ..................................................................... 1.7
Oil and Grease Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Press. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
BallBearing .......................................... 0 ............................... 1.7

FuelHandling Precautions .................................................................. 1.7
General.. ............................................................................ 1.7
Petrol - Gasoline ...........................................0.......................... 1.8
FuelTank Removal .......... ...... ... .... ... .................................. .... .... 1.8
Chassis Repairs .... . . . .0 ........................
.. . . . 1.8
1.8
Electrical Precautions ...................................................................... 1.9
BatteryDisconnecting ................................................................. 1.9
Disciplines..................................................................... 0 ..... 1.9
Electrical Wires ................................................... 0 .................. 1.10
Manuall -Ti9er
Service M 1.1
uP
General Information
ElectricalTesting ......................................................................... 1.10

BasicElectrical Circuits ......................... . ......................................1.10
CircuitDiagrams ......................................................................... 1.11
Glossaryof Circuit Diagram Symbols ........................................................ 1.11
TracingCircuits .......................................................................... 1.12
ToCheck Continuity :................................................................. 1.13
ToMeasure Voltage :................................................................. 1.13
CAN(Controller Area Networking) ......................................................... 1.14
Alternator/Charging System ............................................................... 1.15
StartingCircuit .......................................................................... 1.16
GeneralFault Finding - Starter Motor and Rela .............................................. 1.16
Inspection......... . ... . . . ........ .................................................. 1.18
Replacement Parts . . 1.18
1.18
ServiceData ........................................................................ 1.18
Specification........................................................................ 1.18
ServiceTools and Garage Equipment ......................... ................................ 1.19
SpecialService Tools ................................................................. 1.19
Full Specification.. 1.24
1.24
TorqueWrench Settings .................................................................... 1.31
CylinderHead Area .................................................................. 1.31
Clutch .. . 1.31
Balancer, , Crankshaft and Crankcase .................................................... 1.31
EngineCovers ...................................................................... 1.3 2
Transmission........................................................................ 1.32
LubricationSystem .................................................................. 1.32
FinalDrive .......................................................................... 1.33
CoolingSystem ..................................................................... 1.33
FuelSystem, System and Airbox ................................................ 1.33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-. . . 1 . 34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..........
Rear Suspension.....
FrontSuspension .................................................................... 1.34
Wheels............................................. ...............0000....,..000.6 1.34
FrontBrakes ........................................................................ 1.35
RearBrakes ...............................................I......................... 1.35
ABS System ........................................................................ 1.35
Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings ............ . ............................. 1.36
Electrical............... ......................................................... . . . 1.36
Bodywork.......................................................................... 1.36
ThrottleCable Routing ............................. ..............................0 0 0 0 ...... 1.37
ClutchCable Routing...... ................................................................. 1.38
Fuel Tank Breather Hose Routing - Models without Evaporative Emissions ........................ 1.39
Fuel Tank Breather Hose Routing - Models without Evaporative Emissions ........................ 1.40
Mainwiring Harness Routing .............................................................. 1.41
FrontBrake Hose Routing - Models without ABS Brakes ........................................ 1.42
Rear Brake Hose Routing - Models without ABS Brakes ........................................ 1.43
BrakeHose Routing - Models with ABS Brakes ................................................ 1.44
1.2
Service Manual - Tiger .
uM
jiiiIi'i iiTh
l i ci © ^n
^gf System safety P recautio ns
The ignition system produces extremely high. voltages.

Do not touch any part of the ignition system or any
cables while the engine is running.
An electric shock caused by contact with the ignition
system may lead to illness, inju ry or death.
Wearers of surgically implanted heart pacemaker

devices should not be in close proximity to ignition
circuits and or diagnostic equipment.
The ignition system and any diagnostic equipment may
interrupt the normal operation of such devices causing
illness or death.
Many liquids and other substances used in motor

vehicles are poisonous and should under no
circumstances be consumed and should, as far as
. possible, be kept from contact with the skin. These
substances among others include acid, anti-freeze,
asbestos, brake fluid, fuel., lubricants, and various
adhesives. Always pay dose attention to the instructions
printed on labels and obey the instructions contained
within. These instructions are included for your safety
and well-being. Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead
NEVER DISREGARD THESE INSTRUCTIONS! to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition used
engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants
which can cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and
avoid skin contact.
Health Protection Precautions

• Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
oils, particularly used engine oils..
• Wear protective clothing, including
impervious gloves where practicable.
• Do not put oily rags in pockets.
• Overalls must be cl eaned regularly. Discard
heavily soiled clothing and oil impregnated
footwear.
• Fi rst aid treatment should be obtained
immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Always be aware of who your nearest first-
Service Manual - Tiger 1.3

U
aider is and where the medical facilities are
kept.
• Use barrier creams, applying before each
work period to protect the skin from the
effects of oil and grease and to aid removal of
the same after completing work. Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb
moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture will
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid
removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will causing a reduction in braking efficiency.
help). Preparations containing lanolin replace
Replace brake fluid in line with the routine maintenance
the natural skin oils which have been
schedule. A dangerous riding condition could result if
removed. this important maintenance item is neglected!
• Do not use petrol, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas Do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork
oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. as this will damage any painted or plastic surface.
• If skin disorders develop, obtain medical Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container and
advice without delay. never use fluid from an unsealed container or from one
that has been previously opened.
• Where practicable, de-grease components Do not mix different brands of fluid. Check for fluid
prior to handling.
leakage around brake fittings, seals and joints.
Check regularly for brake hose damage.
FAILURE TO OBSERVE ANY OF THE ABOVE
WARNINGS MAY REDUCE BRAKING EFFICIENCY
LEADING TO AN ACCIDENT.
Any risk of eye injury must be avoided. Always wear eye
protection when using a hammer, air line, cleaning
agent or where there is ANY risk of flying debris or
chemical splashing.
Environmental Protection If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the
fluid in either brake fluid reservoir, consult your
Precautions .authorised Triumph dealer for advice before riding.
If the brake lever or pedal feels soft when it is applied, or
if the lever/pedal travel becomes excessive, there may
be air in the brake lines or the brake may be defective.
Do not pour oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle under such
or into water courses. To prevent pollution of water- conditions and remedial action must be taken by your
courses etc., dispose of used oil sensibly. If in doubt authorised Triumph dealer before riding the motorcycle.
contact your local authority. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking
efficiency leading to an accident.
Burning of used engine oil in small space heaters or
boilers can be recommended only for units of approved
design. If in doubt, check with the appropriate local
authority and/or manufacturer of the approved appliance.
Dispose of used oil and used filters through authorised
waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites, Use only D.O.T. 4 specification brake fluid as listed in
or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the general information section of this manual. The use
your local authority for advice on disposal facilities. of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in
the general information section may reduce the
efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident.
Failure to change the brake fluid at the interval specified
in the routine maintenance schedule may reduce
braking efficiency resulting in an accident
1.4 Service Manual - Tiger

t1M
General Information
Never use mineral based grease in any part of the Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is. hot.
braking system or in any area where contact with the When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is
braking system is possible. Mineral based grease will hot and also under pressure. Contact with the
damage the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
cylinders.
Damage caused by contact with mineral based grease
may reduce braking efficiency resulting in an accident.
The coolant anti-freeze contains -a corrosion inhibitor

Safety Instructions which helps prevent damage to the metal surfaces inside
the cooling system. Without this inhibitor, the coolant
Jac ing and Lifting would 'attack' the metals and the resulting corrosion
would cause blockages in the cooling system leading to
engine overheating and damage. Always use the correct
anti-freeze as specified in the Owner's Handbook.
Never use a methanol based anti-freeze as this does not
contain the required corrosion inhibition properties.
Always ensure that any lifting apparatus has adequate
load and safety capacity for the weight to be lifted.
Ensure the motorcycle is well supported to prevent any
possibility of the machine falling prior during lifting or
jacking or while repairs and servicing are carried out.. Distilled water must be used with the anti-freeze (see
Never rely on a single means of support when working specification for anti-freeze) in the cooling system.
with the motorcycle. Use. additional safety supports and If hard water is used in the system, it causes scale
straps to prevent toppling. accumulation in the water passages, and considerably
Do not leave tools, lifting equipment, spilt oil, etc. in a reduces the efficiency of the cooling system. Reduced
place where they could become a hazard to health. cooling system efficiency may lead to the engine
Always work in a clean, tidy area and put all tools away overheating and engine damage.
when the work is finished.
Precautions against Damage

Avoid spilling brake fluid or battery acid on any part of the
bodywork. Wash spillages off with water immediately.
Disconnect the battery earth lead before starting work, see
ELECTRICAL PRECAUTIONS.
Always use the recommended service tool where
specified.
Protect exposed bearing and sealing surfaces, and screw
threads from damage.
Coolant
Coolant mixture, which is blended with anti-freeze and

corrosion inhibitors contains toxic chemicals which are
harmful to the human body. Never swallow anti-freeze,
corrosion inhibitors or any of the motorcycle coolant
TMumpi Service Manual - Tiger 1.5

[iTTh1 I rirtim-r11
Cea1ng components Apply sparingly as excessive amounts of sealer may block
engine oil passages and cause serious damage.
A high flash-point solvent is recommended to reduce fire
hazard. Prior to reassembly, blow through any pipes, channels or
crevices with compressed air.
Always follow container directions regarding the use of
any solvent.
Always use the recommended cleaning agent or
equivalent.
Do not use degreasing equipment for components To prevent injury, always use eye, face and ear
containing items which could be damaged by the use of protection when using compressed air. Always wear
this process. Whenever possible, clean components and protective gloves if the compressed air is to be directed
the area surrounding them before removal. Always in proximity to the skin.
observe scrupulous cleanliness when cleaning dismantled
components. Screw Threads
Metric threads to ISO standard are used.
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be
The majority of engine wear occurs while the engine is discarded.
warming up and before all the rubbing surfaces have an
Castellated nuts must not be slackened back to accept a
adequate lubrication film. During assembly, oil or grease
split-pin, except in those recommended cases when this
(whichever is more suitable) should be applied to any
forms part of an adjustment.
rubbing surface, which has lost its lubrication film. Old
grease and dirty oil should be cleaned off. This is because Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind threaded holes.
used lubricants will have lost some lubrication qualities The hydraulic action on screwing in the bolt or stud could
and may contain abrasive foreign particles. split the housing.
Use recommended lubricants. Some oils and greases in Always tighten a nut or bolt to the recommended torque
particular should be used only in certain applications and figure. Damaged or corroded threads can affect the
may be harmful if used in an application for which they torque reading.
are not intended. ` This manual makes reference to Unless specified, threaded fixings must always be fitted
molybdenum disulphide grease in the assembly of certain dry (no lubrication).
engine and chassis parts. Always check manufacturer
recommendations before using such special lubricants.
Joints and Joint Faces

Assemble joints dry unless otherwise specified in this Never lubricate a thread unless instructed to do so.
Manual. When a thread of a fixing is lubricated, the thread
friction is reduced. When the fixing is tightened,
If gaskets and/or jointing compound is recommended for reduced friction will cause overtightening and possible
use; remove all traces of old jointing material prior to fixing failure.
reassembly. Do not use a tool which will damage the joint
A fixing which fails in service could cause component
faces and smooth out any scratches or burrs on the joint
detachment leading to loss of control and an accident.
faces using an oil stone. Do not allow dirt or jointing
material to enter any tapped holes.
Gaskets, 0-rings
Do not re-use a gasket or 0-ring once it has been in
service. The mating surfaces around the gasket should be
free of foreign matter and perfectly smooth to avoid oil or
compression leaks.
Liquid gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent

Follow manufacturer's • directions for cleaning and
preparing surfaces where these compounds will be used.
1 .6
LiM
Lockig Devices Protect the seal from any surface which could cause
damage over which it has to pass when being fitted. Use a
Always release locking tabs and fit new locking washers, protective sleeve or tape to cover the relevant surface and
do not re-use locking tabs. avoid touching the sealing lip.
Lubricate the sealing lips with a recommended lubricant.
Fitting a Split Pin This will help to prevent damage in initial use. On dual
Always fit new split-pins of the correct size for the hole in lipped seals, smear the area between the lips with
the bolt or stud. Do not slacken back castle nuts when appropriate grease.
fitting split pin, except in those recommended cases when When pressing in a seal which has manufacturer's marks,
this forms part of an adjustment. press in with the marks facing out.
Always fit new roll pins of an interference fit in the hole. Seals must be pressed into place using a suitable driver.
Use of improper tools will damage the seal.
Circlips, Retaining Rings
Replace any circlips and retaining rings that are removed. Press
Removal weakens and deforms circlips causing looseness A part installed using a press or driver, such as a wheel
in the circlip groove. When installing circlips and retaining bearing, should first be coated with oil or grease on its
rings, take care to compress or expand them only enough outer or inner circumference so that it will locate smoothly.
to install them.
Always use the correct replacement circlip as Ball Bearing
recommended in the Triumph parts catalogue.
When installing a ball bearing, the bearing race which is
an interference fit should be pushed by a suitable driver.
Self Locking Nuts This prevents severe stress or damage to the load
carrying components. Press a ball bearing until it touches
the shoulder in the bore or on the shaft.
Press or drift seals to the depth of its housing, with the
sealing lip facing the lubricant to be retained if the
housing is shouldered, or flush with the face of the
housing where no shoulder is provided.
Fuel Handling Precautions
General
The following information provides basic precautions
which must be observed if petrol (gasoline) is to be
handled safely. It also .outlines other areas of risk which
must not be ignored. This information. is issued for basic
guidance only and if in doubt, appropriate enquiries
should be made of your local Fire Officer.
Oil and Grease Seals

Replace any oil or grease seals that are removed.
Removal will cause damage to an oil seal which, if re-used,
would cause an oil leak.
Ensure the surface on which the new seal is to run is free
of burrs or scratches. Renew the component if the original
sealing surface cannot be completely restored.

•mty!!j3H
:cii:t;i I 'EiTh}i1
Petrol - Gasoline
When petrol (gasoline) evaporates it produces 150 times
its own volume in vapour which when diluted with air
becomes a readily ignitable mixture. The vapour is heavier Draining or extraction of petrol/gasoline from a vehicle
than air and will always fall to the lowest level. It can fuel tank must be carried out in a well ventilated area.
readily be distributed throughout any indoor environment The receptacle used to contain the petrol/ gasoline must
by air currents, consequently, even a small spillage of be more than adequate for the full amount of fuel to be
petrol (gasoline) is potentially very dangerous.
extracted or drained. The receptacle should be clearly
marked with its contents, and placed in a safe storage
area which meets the requirements of local authority
regulations.
When petrol/gasoline has been extracted or drained
Petrol (gasoline) is highly flammable and can be from a fuel tank, the precautions governing naked lights
explosive under certain conditions. When opening the and ignition sources should be maintained.
fuel tank cap always observe all the following items;
Failure to observe ` any of the above warnings could
Turn the motorcycle ignition switch OFF. bring about a safety hazard leading to a risk of personal
Do not smoke. injury.
Always have a fire extinguisher containing FOAM, CO2,
HALON or POWDER close at hand when handling or Fuel Tank Removal
draining fuel or fuel systems. Fire extinguishers must
also be present in areas where fuel is stored. Fuel tanks should have a 'PETROL (GASOLINE)
Always disconnect the vehicle batte ry, negative (black) VAPOUR' warning label attached to them as soon as they
lead first, before car rying out dismantling or draining are removed from the vehicle. In all cases, they must be
work on a fuel system. stored in a secured, marked area.
Whenever petrol (gasoline) is being handled, drained,
stored or when fuel systems are being dismantled, make Chassis Repairs
sure the area is well ventilated. All potential forms of
ignition must be extinguished or removed (this includes
any appliance with a pilot light). Any lead-lamps must
be flame-proof and kept clear of any fuel spillage.
Warning notices must be posted at a safe distance from If the motorcycle is involved in an accident or collision it
the site of the work to warn others that petrol is being must be taken to an authorised Triumph dealer for
openly handled. The notice must instruct the reader of repair or inspection. Any accident can cause damage to
the precautions which must be taken. the motorcycle, which if not correctly repaired, may
Failure to observe any of the above warnings may lead cause a second accident which may result in injury or
to a fire hazard which could result in personal inju ry. death.
The frame must not be modified as any modification to
the frame such as welding or d ri lling may weaken the
frame resulting in an accident.
No one should be permitted to repair components

associated with petro l/gasoline without first having
specialist training on the fire hazards which may be
created by incorrect installation and repair of items
associated with petro l/gasoline.
Repairs carried out by untrained personnel could bring
about a safety hazard leading to a risk of personal injury.

. 1UM^
iIiii1']iiiM
any protective covers and substances are replaced if

disturbed.
The following guidelines are intended to ensure the safety
of the operator whilst preventing damage to the electrical Having confirmed a component to be faulty, switch off the
and electronic components fitted to the motorcycle. ignition and disconnect the battery negative (black) lead
Where necessary, specific precautions are detailed in the first Remove the component and support the
relevant sections of this manual which should be referred disconnected harness. When replacing the component
to prior to commencing repair operations. keep oily hands away from electrical connection areas and
push connectors home until any locking mechanism
Equipment - Prior to commencing any test procedure on becomes fully engaged.
the motorcycle ensure that the relevant test equipment is
working correctly and any harness or connectors are in
good condition, in particular mains leads and plugs. Battery Disconnecting
Before disconnecting the battery, switch off all electrical
equipment
The ignition system produces extremely high voltages.

Do not touch any part of the ignition system or any
cables while the engine is running. To prevent the risk of a battery exploding and to prevent
An electric shock caused by contact with the ignition damage to electrical components ALWAYS disconnect
system may lead to illness, injury or death. the battery negative (black) lead first. When
reconnecting the battery, always connect the positive
(red) lead first, then the negative (black) lead. Always
disconnect the battery when working on any part of the
electrical system.
Wearers of surgically implanted heart pacemaker Failure to observe the above warnings may lead to
devices should not be in close proximity to ignition electrical damage and a fire hazard which could cause
circuits and or diagnostic equipment. personal injury.
The ignition system and any diagnostic equipment may Always ensure that battery leads are routed correctly and
interrupt the normal operation of such devices causing are not close to any potential chafing points.
illness or death.
Disciplines
Switch off the ignition prior to making any connection or
disconnection in the system. An electrical surge can be
The battery contains harmful materials. Always keep caused by disconnecting 'live' connections which can
children away from the battery whether or not it is fitted damage electronic components.
in the motorcycle. Ensure hands and work surfaces are clean and free of
Do not jump start the battery, touch the battery cables grease, swarf, etc. as grease collects dirt which can cause
together or reverse the polarity of the cables as any of tracking or high-resistance contacts.
these actions may cause a spark which would ignite Prior to commencing any test, and periodically during any
. battery gasses causing a risk of personal injury. test, touch a good earth to discharge body static. This is
because some electronic components are vulnerable to
High Voltage Circuits - Whenever disconnecting live H
static electricity.
circuits always use insulated pliers. Exercise caution when
measuring the voltage on the coil terminals while the
engine is running, high voltage spikes can occur on these
terminals.
Connectors and Harness - The engine of a motorcycle is a
particularly hostile environment for electrical components
and connectors. Always ensure these items are dry and oil
free before disconnecting and connecting test equipment.
Never force connectors apart either by using tools or by
pulling on the wiring itself. Always ensure locking
mechanisms are disengaged before removal and note the
orientation to enable correct reconnection. Ensure that
UMW
General Information
Electrical Wires the current flowing in the circuit can be

•
All the electrical wires are either single-colour or two- calculated by using -
colour and, with only a few exceptions, must be
connected to wires of the same colour. On any of the two-
colour wires there is a greater amount of one colour and a W
=1 60 =5
V 12
lesser amount of a second colour. A two- colour wire is
identified by first the primary colour and then the • the bulb resistance can be calculated by
secondary colour. For example, a yellow wire with thin using -
red stripes is referred to as a 'yellow/red' wire; it would be
a 'red/yellow wire if the colours were reversed to make
red the main colour. V
=R 12
=2.4
1 5
Electrical Testing To use either of the following triangles, put your finger
over the value you want to find. Multiply the remaining
For any electrical system to work, electricity must be able values if side -by-side, or divide if one is over the other.
to flow in a complete circuit from the power source (the
battery) via the components and back to the battery. No
circuit means no electrical flow Once the power has left W V
the positive side of the battery and run through the V I I R
component it must then return to the battery on its
negative side (this is called earth or ground). To save on
Basic Electrical Circuits
wiring, connections and space, the negative side of the
battery is . connected directly to the frame or engine.
Around the frame and engine will be various other
ground points to which the wiring coming from
components will be connected. In the case of the starter 1
motor it bolts directly to the engine, which is bolted to the
frame. Therefore the frame and engine also form part of
the earth return path. Basic Circuit Diagram
Ohm's Law In the above circuit an electrical reservoir (the battery) is
connected via a cable to a terminal on the controlling
The relationship between voltage, current and resistance device (the switch) whose contacts are either open or
is defined by Ohm's Law. closed. The other terminal on the switch is connected via a
• The potential of a battery is measured in cable to the consumer (the bulb), and the, other side of the
Volts M. bulb filament is connected to ground (earth) by another
cable. The ground point is usually a part of the frame or
• The flow of current in a circuit (I) is measured
engine, to which the battery negative terminal is also
in Amperes.
connected.
• The power rating of a consumer is measured When the switch contacts are open (as shown in the
in Watts (W). diagram), the circuit is broken and no current flows. When
• The resistance (R) of a circuit is measured in the switch contacts . are closed the circuit is made and
Ohms (Q). current flows from the battery positive terminal through
the switch contacts and bulb filament to ground. The
Ohms law, for practical work can be described as - frame completes the circuit to the battery negative
terminal and the bulb illuminates.
Voltage
Resistance Although some circuits on the circuit diagram may at first
Current seem more complicated, it will generally be found that
Power is calculated by multiplying Volts x Amps - they can be broken down into sections which do not differ
greatly from the basic circuit above.
Watts = Volts x Amps
By transposing either of these formulae, the value of any

unit can be calculated if the other two values are known.
For example, if a battery of 12V is connected to a bulb of
60W:

UMW
identify each connector. An additional number outside the
box will identify the component.
Circuit diagrams are created to provide a 'picture' of the
electrical system and to identify the route taken by each
individual wire through the system, in order to identify
which components it feeds and which connectors the wire
runs through. Circuit diagrams are an essential tool for
fault finding, as it is possible to locate start and finish
An electrical one-way valve. Diodes allow current to flow
points for a circuit without having to manually trace the
in one direction but will not allow it to return. The arrow,
wire through the motorcycle itself. Circuits diagrams may
which forms part of the diode symbol, indicates the
look confusing at first but when they are studied closely
direction of current flow.
they soon become logical.
Due to the complex circuits and the number of individual Electromagnetic Winding (solenoid)
wires, Triumph uses two types of circuit diagram in its
service manuals.
® Within the manual conventional circuit
diagrams are used to show the layout of the An electromagnetic winding (or solenoid) is used to
main circuits of the motorcycle. These are: convert an electrical current into a lateral movement. This
Engine management/ignition, Lighting, can then be used to operate switches (as used in relays) or
Starting and Charging and Auxiliary and other components such as fuel injectors or secondary air
Accessory. In these diagrams no attempt is injection solenoids.
made to show the components of the system
in any particular order or position in relation
to the motorcycle.
At the back of the service manual a full
colour layout circuit diagram is used to show 2
or
the main electrical components in a position
si milar to the actual position on the t
motorcycle. 11
A fuse is a device which protects a circuit in the event of a
Both of these circuit diagrams use similar symbols to fault. The fuse will 'blow' should a short circuit occur,
illustrate the various system components and will be protecting that circuit from further damage. The number
accompanied by a key to circuit diagram components and next to the fuse on the circuit diagram indicates the
wiring colour codes. position of the fuse in the fusebox.
Circuit diagrams also depict the inner workings of a switch
cube (I.E. which wire connects to which when a switch is Ground or Earth Point
turned from one position to another) so that a . test of that
switch can be made using the wire terminals in the
connector instead of disassembling the switch itself. Ion
This symbol is used to show ground points. This is the

Glossary of Circuit Diagram Symbols
negative connection to either the frame or engine, and is
The following is a description of the symbols found in the a common cause of intermittent faults due to loose or
circuit diagrams used in all Triumph Service Manuals. corroded connections.
Connector Lamp or Bulb
2
3
4
This illustration is used to show all multi-plug type

electrical connectors on Triumph circuit diagrams. The This symbol is used to show all types of light bulbs. The
numbers in the box relate to the terminal numbers of the numbers in the box relate to the terminal numbers of the
connector pins. On ECMs with two connectors, the connector pins. An additional number outside the box will
number would be prefixed with the letters 'A' or 'B' to identify the component.

TwumeH
Genera l Information
Switches
Normally Normally Change

Open Closed Over
Triumph use LEDs for the alarm warning light, instrument 1•-
illumination and warning lights, gear change lights and
rear light/brake lights on various models. o 0-----0 0 0
[0]
Motor
or or or
..0
0 0
An electric motor. This could be the starter motor or a

motor within an actuator, for example within the ABS A mechanical device for completing or breaking a circuit.
modulator. There are three common types of switch: Normally open,
normally closed and change-over.
Relay
Tracing Circuits
The following is a description of two types of

common electrical failures, and some of the
1 6 4 8 methods which may be used to find them.
Open circuit
A relay is effectively an electromagnetic switch. To close
the relay contacts and complete the circuit, an
Break
electromagnet in the relay is energised which causes the
relay contacts to close, making the circuit complete.
Relays are used when the electrical current is too great for
a mechanical switch, usually when the switching must be A break in an electrical circuit - current cannot flow.
done quickly to prevent arcing across the switch contacts. Usually caused by a break in a wire or cable or by a loose
If a mechanical switch were used, the mechanical switch connection. Open circuits can often by intermittent,
contacts would quickly burn away. making diagnosis difficult.
Resistor Short circuit
A device placed in a cable to reduce a voltage or restrict

the maximum current a device can draw.
Splice A 'short cut' in an electrical circuit - current by-passes the

intended circuit, either to earth or to another, different
circuit. Often caused by failure of the cable insulation due
to chafing or trapping of the wire. There are two different
types of short circuit - short to ground and short to Vbatt.
A short to ground means that the current is going to earth
A hard cable joint where two or more cables are joined in
before it reaches the component it is supposed to feed.
the wiring harness. A potential source of both open and
These are often caused by chafing of the harness to the
short circuits.
frame or wires trapped between a bolted component, and
will often blow the fuse on that circuit
1.12 Service Manual - Tiger . UMP

General
A short to Vbatt is a short to battery voltage (12 Volts) • A high resistance figure could indicate a dirty
and is caused by a live power supply wire contacting an or corroded connection.
adjacent cable. Note that it is also possible for a 5 Volt
• If there is a break in the wire, the meter will
sensor reference voltage to short to an adjacent circuit,
not bleep or register a resistance.
which can also cause electrical failures and DTCs
(Diagnostic Trouble Code) to be stored. • By probing the wire in various places, the
When tracing a wire that is suspect, carefully check the position of a high resistance or break in the
circuit diagram before starting. Remember: wire (open circuit) can be narrowed down
until it is found.
• a wire may diverge at a splice and go off to
feed other circuits. If these circuits are To Measure Voltage:
working, check for wiring faults from the
splice onwards. In the example below, the circuit voltage is being
measured at the bulb positive (+) terminal.
• the circuit diagram is not an accurate guide
to the actual location of the parts when fitted
on the bike. It is a schematic diagram of the
circuits.
• particularly where engine management items
are concerned, the circuit is only completed
by the ECM. If the ECM is not connected, the
circuit may register as open.
To Check Continuity:
Ensure the circuit being tested is switched off before

measuring continuity. Damage to the Digital Multi Voltage Check
Meter (DMM) may result from testing a 'live' circuit with
the meter set to resistance (Q). • Turn the circuit to be tested 'ON'
• Set the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) to Voltage
In the example below, the ground circuit continuity is
check (V). Ensure the multi meter is set to dc
being tested from the battery to the frame.
volts for direct current circuits (most circuits)
or ac volts for alternating current circuits
(typically alternator output voltage tests).
• Set the range of the DMM to the range best
suited to the voltage of the circuit being
tested (typically 20 volts for most DMMs).
Refer to the DMM manufacturers
instructions.
• Connect the black (ground) lead of the DMM
to a reliable ground connection (usually the
battery or frame ground).
• Locate the positive terminal of the wire or
component to be tested.
Continuity (resistance) Check
• connect the red (positive) lead of the DMM
• Locate each end of the wire. to the positive terminal.
• Set the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) to Read the voltage from meter.
resistance check (9).
• Probe each end of the wire.
• If there is continuity, the meter will usually
bleep or register the resistance of the cable.

71tiumeH
cabling required to allow ECMs to communicate with
Splices are probably the most common cause of wiring each other is greatly reduced.
faults after connectors. Splices are made where two or This saves cost, weight and space, and makes the system
more wires come together and diverge in different more reliable, as the physical number of wires and
directions, usually to feed a different circuit. connections is reduced.
To locate a splice, it is necessary to peel back the insulation
and examine the splice for its integrity. The most common
fault is where one of the wires at the joint has come adrift Pair of Twisted
usually causing the circuit it feeds or earths to become Wires ^_ 4
ate R
'dead'.
B27 u Instrumentt
Pack
Switches 16
To check a switch, set the multimeter to resistance/ ECM

continuity and probe the two pins that form a closed
circuit when the switch is pushed. If the switch is working
correctly, the resistance should register or the meter will A34 3
bleep. 2
B
Vehicle Speed
Sensor
All relay cases have a circuit path engraved on them
showing the circuit path across the electromagnet and the Extract from the circuit diagram showing CAN
switch. Before making any checks, first note the pin connection between ECMs
designations, current paths, and whether or not there is a CAN works by each ECM sending out 'packets' of
zdiode in either circuitp ath. information (such as engine speed or fuel consumption
information) on to the network bus (note that the network
must be free of data before any ECM is allowed to
transmit). This data is given a priority according to its
importance (for example 'engine speed' may have a
higher priority than 'low fuel level'), so that even if two
ECMs send data at the same time, high priority
information is always sent first. Lower priority data is then
resent after the high priority data has been received by all
ECMs on the network.
The receiving ECM confirms the data has been received
Make continuity checks across the electromagnet first, correctly and that the data is valid, and this information is
usually from pin 86 (positive) to pin 85 (negative). If a then used by the ECM as necessary. Specific data not
diode appears in the circuit use the diode check on the required by an ECM will still be received and
multimeter (volts scale) in the direction of current flow. If acknowledged as correct but then disregarded (for
there is no diode, use the resistance check facility. An example if an ECM does not require 'clutch switch
open circuit or unusually high resistance value indicates a position' information, this data packet would be ignored).
faulty relay.
This allows for a very high speed system of
To check the switch side, apply a 12 volt supply between communication, which is also very reliable. Should one
pins 86 and 85. With the supply connected the relay ECM fail or transmit corrupted or otherwise incorrect
should be heard to click and there should be continuity messages, none of the other ECMs on the network will be
between pins 30 and 87. An open circuit indicates a faulty affected, and after a certain time that ECM will be
relay. prevented from transmitting further messages until the
fault is rectified. This stops the ECM from clogging the
CAN (Controller Area Networking) network with incorrect data and preventing other
messages from getting through. The fault would then be
CAN (sometimes called CANbus) is a protocol for data reported by a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code).
communication between Electronic Control Modules
Triumph currently use CAN for communication between
(ECMs). Each ECM on the network is connected by a
the engine ECM and the instruments.
single pair of twisted wires (or bus) which are used for the
transmission of vehicle sensor data. By using CAN, the
overall number of system sensors, and the amount of

l^l'Kr
1s • Information
t:iiiI
uses diodes to convert the alternator output to dc volts

and limit the resulting output to the correct figure
The charging system consists of an alternator and a required for optimal battery charging.
rectifier/ regulator assembly and the battery. The
alternator is made up of two parts, the stator, which is If the charging circuit does not operate correctly, the
mounted to the crankcase or the engine cover, and the following basic checks must be carried out before further
rotor, mounted to the end of the crankshaft. The stator is diagnosis is performed:
an assembly of 18 coils, arranged into 3 phases. The rotor ® Check the battery terminals are dean and
is a series of magnets mounted in the engine flywheel, tight.
which are arranged so as to be positioned around the
outside of the stator coils. As the engine rotates the • Check the frame and engine earth
alternator produces an ac (alternating current) voltage in connections are clean, tight and free from
each of the three phases of the alternator, typically of corrosion.
around 35 to 40 volts ac at 4000-5000 rpm, although • Ensure the battery is fully charged and in
this figure varies between models. As the battery requires good condition.
dc (direct current) voltage for correct charging, this ac
voltage must be first rectified to dc current, and then • Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown
regulated to the correct voltage for the battery of 14.5 and is of the correct rating (See page 17-19.
±0.5 volts. This is done by the rectifier/regulator, which Rectify any defects as necessary.
ENSURE THE BATTERY IS IN GOOD

Not OK RECHARGE OR REPLACE FAULTY
CONDITION AND FULLY CHARGED.
BATTERY AND/OR REPAIR DIRTY/
CHECK ALL BATTERY AND GROUND
LOOSE CONNECTIONS
TERMINALS ARE CLEAN AND TIGHT
OK
OK
i i
WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AT Above
AROUND 2000 RPM, MEASURE THE 15 Volts
BATTERY VOLTAGE AT THE BATTERY. FAULTY RECTIFIER/ REGULATOR
THE BATTERY VOLTAGE SHOULD BE
14.5 ±0.5 VOLTS
Below
14 Volts
STOP THE ENGINE AND DISCONNECT THE

ALTERNATOR CONNECTOR. RE-START
THE ENGINE AND ALLOW TO IDLE.
MEASURE THE ALTERNATING CURRENT
(AC) VOLTAGE FROM THE 3 ALTERNATOR
OUTPUT.WIRES IN TURN.
THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE MUST EXCEED 10
VOLTS AC FROM EACH WIRE
Above 10
Volts AC
RAISE THE ENGINE SPEED ABOVE

4000 RPM. MEASURE THE Below 30
ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) Volts AC
VOLTAGE FROM THE 3 ALTERNATOR
FAULTY ALTERNATOR
OUTPUT WIRES IN TURN.
THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE MUST NOW
EXCEED 30 VOLTS AC FROM EACH
WIRE
Above 30
Volts AC
FAULTY RECTIFIER( REGULATOR
Service Manual -Ti9er 1.15

nW!I1
.
:T1iDi;1 I
• Check the frame and engine earth

connections are clean, tight and free from
All Triumph models are equipped with an electric start corrosion. •
system. This system consists of a starter relay, starter
motor, starter switch, sidestand switch, engine stop switch, • Ensure the battery is fully charged and in
clutch switch and the sprag clutch. The starter motor is good condition.
connected to the starter relay and the battery by heavy • Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown
duty cables in order to supply the large currents required and is of the correct rating.
by the motor to start the engine. When the starter button
is pressed the relay is energised, which then allows current • Using the triumph diagnostic tool, check the
to the starter motor. The starter motor will not operate operation of the neutral switch or gear
unless the clutch lever is pulled in Also, the starter will not position sensor (if fitted), sidestand and clutch
operate if the sidestand is down, unless the transmission is switches.
in neutral. If the starter motor does not operate, the Note:
following basic checks must be carried out before further
diagnosis is performed: • On all new models from Daytona 675
onwards, which use a CAN connection
• Check the engine stop switch is in the 'RUN' between the instruments and the ECM, the
position. engine will not crank if the instruments are
• Check the battery terminals are dean and disconnected.
tight. Rectify any defects as necessary.
_C[4T:;I 1 1 IfI Thw 51aii ii I
Symptom Possible cause(s)

Starter relay does not click, starter motor does not turn Battery discharged or defective
Blown main or starter relay fuse
Defective starter relay wiring or starter switch
Check that the sidestand, transmission and clutch lever are
positioned for engine starting I.E. transmission in neutral,
clutch lever pulled in and the sidestand down
Defective alarm system - ensure any alarm fitted is working
correctly
Starter motor turns slowly Battery discharged or defective
Loose, corroded or dirty battery connections
Loose, corroded or dirty starter motor or starter relay
connections
Defective starter motor
Loose, corroded or dirty battery ground connections
Starter relay clicks but engine does turn over Battery discharged or defective
Crankshaft does not turn due to engine defect
Defective starter motor
Starter cable open circuit
Defective starter relay
Starter motor turns but engine does not turn over Defective sprag clutch
Defective idler gear, reduction gear or starter motor S
1.16 Service Manual - Tiger UMw

General
Diag ic î ta r ^r Orcult
WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH ON AND

USING A SUITABLE HEAVY DUTY
THE ENGINE STOP SWITCH AT RUN', Clicks JUMPER CABLE, CONNECT THE
CHECK FOR A CLICK AT THE STARTER
STARTER POSITIVE TERMINAL TO THE
RELAY WHEN THE STARTER SWITCH
BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL
IS PRESSED
Starter Starter motor

motor turns does not turn
LOOSE OR FAULTY
DISCONNECTED STARTER
WIRE OR CABLE. MOTOR
FAULTY
No Click STARTER
RELAY/
SOLENOID
FAULTY NEUTRAL SWITCH

No FAULTY CLUTCH SWITCH
DISCONNECT THE STARTER RELAY Continuity FAULTY SIDESTAND SWITCH
SWITCH CONNECTOR. CHECK THE BAD CONTACT AT CONNECTOR
RELAY COIL EARTH (GROUND) WIRE OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING LOOM
FAWLTYALARM OR ENGINE ECM (IF
FITTED)
Continuity
FAULTY IGNITION SWITCH/ENGINE

CONNECT THE STARTER RELAY No STOP SWITCH
SWITCH CONNECTOR. MEASURE THE Voltage BROKEN STARTER SWITCH CABLE
STARTER RELAY VOLTAGE AT THE
BAD CONTACT AT CONNECTOR
STARTER RELAY SWITCH
OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING LOOM
CONNECTOR
FAULTY ALARM
Voltage
Measured
CHECK THE STARTER RELAY Normal LOOSE OR POOR CONTACT AT

OPERATION STARTER RELAY
Abnormal
FAULTY STARTER RELAY
Service Manual - Tiger . 1.17

11tiumem
iiITI imirTn
r ^
Disassembled parts should be visually inspected and The service data listed in this manual gives dimensions
replaced with new ones if there are any signs of the and specifications for brand new, original parts. Where it is
following: permissible to allow a part to exceed these figures, then
Abrasions, cracks, hardening, warping, bending, dents, the service limit is given.
scratches, colour changes, deterioration, seizure or The terms of the motorcycle warranty will be invalidated
damage of any nature. by the fitting of other than genuine Triumph parts.
All genuine Triumph parts have the full backing of the
Replacement Parts motorcycle warranty. Triumph dealers are obliged to
supply only genuine Triumph recommended parts.
Specification
Only Triumph genuine parts should be used to service, Triumph are constantly seeking to improve the
repair or convert Triumph motorcycles. To ensure that specification, design and production of their motorcycles
Triumph genuine parts are used, always order parts, and alterations take place accordingly.
accessories and conversions from an authorised While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy
Triumph dealer. The fitting of non-approved parts, of this Manual, it should not be regarded as an infallible
accessories or conversions may adversely affect the guide to current specifications of any particular
handling, stability or other aspects of the motorcycle motorcycle.
operation which may result in an accident causing
Authorised Triumph Dealers are not agents of Triumph
serious injury or death.
and have no authority to bind the manufacturer by any
expressed or implied undertaking or representation.
Always have Triumph genuine parts, accessories and

conversions fitted by an authorised Triumph dealer. The
fitment of parts, accessories and conversions by a dealer
who is not an authorised Triumph dealer may affect the
handling, stability or other aspects of the motorcycle
operation which may result in an accident causing
serious inju ry or death.
Always have Triumph approved parts, accessories and

conversions fitted by a trained technician. To ensure
that a trained technician is used, have an authorised
Triumph dealer fit the parts. The fitment of parts,
accessories and conversions by personnel other than a
trained technician at an authorised Triumph dealer may
affect the handling, stability or other aspects of the
motorcycle operation which may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.

UMW
i.iDitii r.
e vice c a age
ge Equiprnert
Special service tools have been developed to facilitate removal, dismantling and assembly of certain mechanical
components in a practical manner without causing damage. Some operations in this Service Manual cannot be carried
out without the aid of the relevant service tools. Where this is the case, the tools required will be described during the
procedure.
Special Service
ice Tools
T3880375 — Alternator Rotor Holder T3880203 — Puller, Alternator Rotor
cche
T3880016 — Holder, Balancer Gear T3880017 — Holder, Sprag Clutch*
*Older versions of tool T3880017 require modification to function correctly with later models. Refer to Technical News
issue 86 (April 2006) for information.
Service Manual - Ti g er 1.19

•lP,L!j }I 9
aI TtiiJi
T3880250 —Engine Management/ABS Diagnostics T3880105 —Angular Torque Gauge
Increment
/markings
9 ae 9 I rr cb
3880160 — Fork Filler / Evacuator T3880027 - Chain Link Took Kit
cdob
ccha
T3880003 -.Fork Seal and Bush Fitment 3880085-T0301 - Fork Damper / Holder
ccxb cogs
1.20 Service Manual - Tiger .

9 UMP
General Information
T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor T3880104 — Wrench, Swinging Arm Adjuster
cdoa v v
T3880377 — Wrench, Engine Mounting Adjuster
caoa, .^ V
T3880315 — Extractor, Cylinder Liners
gakh

T uM H
General Information
BatteryMate Battery Charger - See Latest Parts Catalogue T3880002 — Support Plate
for Part Number Information
T3880371 — Holder, Oil Pump Drive Gear
cczb
3880053 — Extraction Kit, Wheel bearings

3880070 — T0301 — Bearing Installer T3880004 - Holder, Damping Cylinder
rep
cd et
T3880023 - Headstock Bearing Wrench T3880123 — Extension Cable
cdbp

l^Mr
L iT;Thi I mitiT
lI specification Tiger 1050 cc
Engine
Engine Configuration ...... ............. ................ 3 Cylinder 12 valve DOHC
Arrangement............................ ................ Transverse in-line
Displacement............................ ................1050 cc
Borex Stroke ............................ ................ 79 x 71.4 mm
CompressionRatio ........................ ................ 12.0:1
Cylinder Numberin g ...................... ......... ..... Left to Right (no.3 adjacent to cam chain)
CylinderSequence ........................ ................ Number 1 at left
Firing Order ............................. ................ 1-2-3
MaximumPower ...................:..... ................ 115 PS (114 bhp) at 9,400 rpm
MaximumTorque ........................ ................100 Nm (74 ft.lbflat 6,250 rpm
Cylinder Head Valves

ValveHead Diameter .. ................... In............... 33.5 mm
....................................... Ex ............... 27.0 mm
ValveLift ................................In............... 8.75 mm
....................... .............. Ex .............. 7.45 mm
Inletvalve Stem Diameter .................. ................ 4.975-4.990 mm
ServiceLimit ............ ............. ................ 4.965 mm
Exhaust Valve Stem Diameter ................ ................ 4.955-4.990 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 4.945 mm
Inlet Valve Guide Bore Diameter ............ ................ 5.000-5.015 mm
Service Limit .......................... ............... . 5.043 mm
Exhaust Valve Guide Bore Diameter .......... .............. ... 5.000-5.035 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 5.063 mm
Valve Stem to Guide Clearance ..............In............... 0.010-0.040 mm
....................................... Ex..............0.030-0.060 mm
InletValve Seat Width (in head) ............. ................ 0.9-1.1 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 1.5 mm
Exhaust Valve Seat Width (in head) .......... ................1.1-1.3 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 1.7 mm
ValveSeat Width (valve) ................... ................1.5-1.9 mm
ValveSeat Angle ......................... ................ 45°
Inlet / Exhaust Valve Spring 'Load at Length
' ... ................ 470 N +/-30 at 26.3 mm (inner)
ValveClearance ........... ................ In..... ........ 0.10-0.20 mm
....................................... Ex . ............ 0.20-0.30 mm
ValveBucket Diameter .................... ................ 28.476-28.490 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 28.549 mm
ValveBucket Bore Diameter ................ ................ 28.515-28.535 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 28.549 mm
1.24 Service Manual - Tiger luM

General Information
FQflSpecification Tiger 10 cc
Camshafts
CamTiming Inlet ......................... ................ Open 9.25° BTDC (@ 1.0 mm lift)
Close 39.25° ABDC (@1.0 mm lift)
....................................... Duration .........228.50°
CamTiming Exhaust .. .................... ................ Open 31° BBDC (@ 1.0 mm lift)

Close 1° ATDC (@ 1.0 mm lift)
....................................... Duration ....... 212°
CamshaftJournal Diameter ................. ................ 22.930-22.960 mm

22.953-22.956 mm (outrigger)
CamshaftJournal Clearance ................ Std............... 0.040-0.091 mm
ServiceLimit .... ....................... ................ 0.13 mm
....................................... Outrigger ........ 0.044-0.068 mm

ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 0.13 mm
Camshaft Journal Bore Diameter ............ ................ 23.000-23.021 mm
CamshaftEnd Float ....................... ................ 0.03-0.12 mm

ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 0.20 mm
CamshaftRun-out ........................ ................ 0.05 mm max.
PrimaryDrive ............................ Type ............ Gear

ReductionRatio .......................... ................1.750 (60/105)
Clutch.................................. Type ............ Wet multi-plate

No. of Friction Plates ...................... ................10
PlateFlatness ............................ ................ Within 0.2 mm

Friction Plate Thickness (inner and outer) ...... ................ 3.80 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 3.60 mm

Friction Plate Thickness (all others) ........... ................ 3.30 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 3.10 mm

ClutchActuation Method .................. ................ Cable
CableFree Play (at lever)................... ................ 2.0-3.0 mm
Balancer
EndFloat ................................ ................ 0.06-0.41 mm
Cylinder Bore Diameter..................... ................ 79.040-79.060 mm

ServiceLimit ....... I .................. . ................ 79.110 mm
Piston Diameter (at 90° to gudgeon pin) ..... . ................ 78.970-78.980 mm

ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 78.930 mm
Piston Ring to Groove Clearances

Top.................................... ...... a ......... 0.02-0.06 mm
Service Manual - Tiger

er 1.25
TwumaH g
General Information
Full Specification Tiger 1050 cc

ServiceLimit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0.075
Second................................ . ................ 0.02-0.06 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 0.075
Piston Ring End Gaps
Top...................................... ................ 0.28-0.49 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 0.61
Second................................ . ................ 0.43-0.64 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 0.76
oil. ................................... ........ ....... 0.33-0.89 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 1.03 mm
Gudgeon Pin Bore Diameter in Piston ....... . ............ 16.993-17.001 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 17.029 mm
GudgeonPin Diameter.................... ................ 16.984-16.989 mm
ServiceLimit .................. ...... . ................ 16.974 mm
Connecting Rods
Connecting Rod Small End Diameter ......... ................17.005-17.018mm
ServiceLimit. ..... ............... .. .. ................ 17.028 mm
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance . ..... ................ 0.15-0.30 mm
ServiceLimit ............. . ............ ................ 0.50 mm
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Big End Journal Diameter......... ... ..... ...... 34.984-35.000 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................34.960mm
Crankshaft Big End Bearing Clearance......... ................ 0.036 mm-0.066
ServiceLimit ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0.10 mm
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter ... . ................ 37.960-37.967 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . .... .... ........ 37936 mm
CrankshaftEnd Float ..................... . .......... ...... 0.05-0.20 mm
ServiceLimit........................... ....0..0.....0..0.40mm
CrankshaftRun-out ............ .......... . .. .............. 0.02 mm or less
ServiceLimit........................... ................ 0.05 mm
Transmission
Type.................................... ................ 6 Speed, Constant Mesh
GearRatios .............................. 1st ..............2.733:1 (15/41)
.....................................2nd .............1.947:1 (19/37)
....................................... 3rd .............. 1.545:1 (22/34)
...................................4th ............. 1.292:1 (24/31)
...................................... 5th ............. 1.154:1 (26/30)
........................................ 6th ............. 1:1 (28/28)

UM
EI imii I
e
ai9 Specificadon Tiger 1050 cc

Gear Selector Fork Thickness .............. . ................5.8-5.9 mm
ServiceLimit .............. .......... . ................ 5.7 mm
Gear Selector Groove Width ............... . ................6.0-6.1 mm
ServiceLimit ......................... . ................ 6.25 mm
Gear Selector Fork to Groove Clearance ..... . ................ 0.55 mm max.
FinalDrive ............................. . ................ Chain

FinalDrive Ratio ......................... . ................ 2.444:1 (18/44)
ChainType ............................. . ................ RK 530 FXW
Numberof Links ........................ . ................114
20 Link Length .. ....................... . ................320 mm
DriveChain Play ........................ . ................ 35-40 mm
ChainLubrication......................... ................ Mobil chain spray
Type................................... ................ Pressure Lubrication, Wet Sump

OilCapacity (dry fill) . . . . . .................I ................ 3.50 litres
Oil Capacity (wet fill including filter) .......... ................ 3.20 litres
Oil Capacity (wet fill excluding filter) .......... ................ 3.00 litres
Oil pressure (in main gallery) ............... ................ 40.0 lb/in 2 min. @ 80°C oil temperature @ 5000
RPM
OilPump Rotor Tip Clearance .............. ................ 0.15 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 0.20 mm
OilPump Body Clearance. . . .............................. 0.15-0.22 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 0.35 mm
OilPump Rotor End Float .................. ................ 0.02-0.07 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 0.10 mm
Ignition System
Type..................................... ................ Digital Inductive
ElectronicRev Limiter .................... . ................ 9,500 (r/min)
Pick-up Coil Resistance ................... . .......... 0 ..... 0.56 KQ +/-10% @ 20°C
IgnitionCoil Type........................... ................ Plug-top
SparkPlug Type ......................... . ................ NGK CR9EK
SparkPlug Gap ........... ............... . ................0.7 mm
Fuel System
FuelType ................................................ Unleaded, 95 RON (U.S. 89 CLC/AKI
FuelTank Capacity ........................ ................ 20 litres
LowLevel Warning Lamp .................. ................ 3.5 litres remaining

iiNI11 I
Full Specification _ Tiger 1050 cc
FuelPump Type .......................... ................ Submerged
FuelPressure (nominal) .................... ................ 3.0 bar
Purge Control System ..................... ................ Electronic, via fuel system ECU
Fuel Injection System

Type.................................... ................ Electronic, sequential
IdleSpeed ............................. . ................1170RPM
In ectorTe
j ............................ . ................ Twin jet, solenoid operated plate valve
Throttle...................................
.. ................ Cable/twist grip/electronic throttle potentiometer
ControlSensors.......................... ................ Barometric pressure, manifold absolute pressure,
throttle position, coolant temperature, crankshaft
position sensor, lambda sensor, induction air
temperature
Emissions Controls*
Catalysts.............................. . ................ 1, in exhaust header pipe
Oxygensensor............................ ................ Heated, in exhaust header pipe
SecondaryAir Injection ................... . ................ Solenoid controlled, reed valve type
Evaporativecontrol ...................... . ................ Activated carbon canister (California only)
* Catalysts, Oxygen sensors and Secondary Air Injection fitted in all markets except Australia, New Zealand and South
Africa.
Coolant System
Coolant Mixture .......................... ................ 50/50 Distilled water / anti-freeze
Anti-Freeze Type ......................... .... .......... Mobil anti-freeze
Freezingpoint ........................... ................ -35°C
Cooling System Capacity ................... .............. . . 2.3 litres
RadiatorCap Opening Pressure ............. ................1.1 bar
Thermostat Opening Temperature ........... ................ 85°C (nominal)
Cooling Fan Switch On Temperature ......... ................103°C
Temperature Gauge Sensor Resistance ....... ................ 2.9 — 3.3 KQ @ 15°C
Suspension
FrontFork Travel ........................ . ................150 mm
Recommended Fork Oil Grade ............ . ................ Showa SS8
Oil Level (fork fully compressed) ........... . ................ 30 mm (with springs installed)
OilVolume (dry fill) ...................... . ................ 581 cc
ForkPull Through ....................... . ................ (see section 13)
RearWheel Travel ....................... . ................ 150 mm
Rear Suspension Bearing Grease ........... . .... ............. Mobil grease HP 222
1.28
I iiTI
FllI
Full Specan do Tiger 1050 cc
FrontType ............................... ................ Two hydraulically actuated four piston calipers

acting on twin discs
CaliperPiston Diameter .. . ................ ................ 33.96 mm / 30.23 mm
DiscDiameter... ............. .. ... ............. 320 mm
DiscThickness ........................... ................ 4.5 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 3.5 mm
DiscRun-out Max ......................... ................ 0.3 mm
MasterCylinder Diameter .................. ................15.8 mm
Recommended Fluid ....................................... Mobil universal brake and clutch fluid DOT4
RearType .............................. ................ Hydraulically actuated 2 piston caliper, single disc
CaliperPiston Diameter .................... ....... . ........ 27 mm
DiscDiameter ............................ ................ 255 mm
DiscThickness .......................... ................ 6.0 mm
ServiceLimit .......................... ................ 5.0 mm
DiscRun-out Max ......................... ................ 0.3 mm
MasterCylinder Diameter ...................................14 mm
Recommended Fluid ...................... ................ Mobil universal brake and clutch fluid DOT4
Wheels and Tyres

FrontWheel Size ......................... ................ MT 3.5 x 17
FrontTyre Size ........................... ................120/70 ZR 17
FrontTyre Pressure ........................ ................ 2.34 Bar (34 PSI)
FrontTyre:.............................. Option 1......... Michelin Pilot Road S
Front Wheel Rim Axial Run-out ............. ................ 0.5 mm
Front Wheel Rim Radial Run-out ............. ................ 0.5 mm
RearWheel Size . ............: ............ ................ MT 5.5 x 17
RearTyre Size ............................ ................180/55 ZR 17
RearTyre Pressure ........................ ................ 2.90 Bar (42 PSI)
RearTyre:............................... Option 1......... Michelin Pilot Road S
RearWheel Rim Axial Run-out .............. ................ 0.5 mm
RearWheel Rim Radial Run-out ............. ................. 0.5 mm

Twumm
Ge ^! Information
Full Specification Tiger 1050 cc
FrameType ............................ . ................ Twin-spar aluminium

Overall Length .......................... . ................ 2,110 mm (83.1 in)
Overall Width ... ....................... . ................ 840 mm (33.1 in)
Overall Height ....... ....... . ........:.:.....1,320 mm (52.0 in)
Wheelbase .............................. ................1510 mm (5 in)
Seat Height ............................ . ................ 835 mm (32.8 in)
Castor ................................. . ................ 23.2°
Trail ................................ . ................87.7mm
DryWeight (non ABS) .................... . ................198 kg
DryWeight (ABS) ....................... . ................ 202 kg
Maximum Payload........................ ................ 200 kg (rider, passenger, luggage and accessories)
Electrical Equipment
BatteryType ............................. ................ YUASA YTX12-BS
BatteryRating ............................ ................12V —10 Amp. Hour
Alternator Ratin g ............. ............ ................ 34A
Fuses..... .............................. #1.. ............ Starter solenoid, dip I main beam headlights
#2 Ignition switch, tail lights, number plate light, side
lights, fuel pump
....................................... #3 .............. Indicators, brake light, horn
.............................. ........ . #4 .............. Blank
........... ............................. #5 .............. Blank
............................; .......... #b .............. Accesso ry socket, heated grips
....................................... #7 .............. Cooling fan
....................................... #8 .............. Engine management system
....................................... #9 .............. Alarm, diagnostic connector, instruments

uMT
General Information
c H 1 : v
Application Torque (Nm) Notes

Cam cover to cylinder head 10 Lubricate seals with
engine oil
Secondary air injection valve covers to cam cover 9
Cam chain tensioner to crankcase 9
Cam chain tensioner centre bolt 23
Camshaft bearing caps and camshaft bearing ladder to head See section 5 Lubricate threads
Camshaft sprocket to camshaft 15 Use new fixings
Cam chain tensioner blade to crankcase 18 Use new fixings
Cam chain top pad to head 10 Use new fixings
Cylinder head to crankcase (M6 screws) 10
Cylinder head to crankcase bolts See section 3
Sound suppression bolt in head 10
Oil feed pipe 25
Spark plug to cylinder head 12
Clutch

Clutch cover to crankcase 9
Clutch centre nut 105
Clutch pressure plate to centre 10
Clutch lever to handlebar 15
Clutch lever pivot bolt 1
Clutch lever pivot nut_ 3.5
Bala n cer, Crankshaft and Crankcase

Crankcase lower to upper (M8 fixings) See section 6
Crankcase upper to lower (M6 fixings) See section 6
Connecting rod big end nut See section 6
Balancer retaining bolt 60 Apply ThreeBond
1305 to the threads
Big end bearings See section 6
Sprag clutch to crankshaft 54
Starter drive cover to crankcase 9
^r Service Manual - Tiger 1.31

-. I

Clutch cover to crankcase 9
Clutch cover sound suppression plate to cover 9
Sprocket cover to crankcase 9
Water outlet cover 9
Alternator cover to crankcase 9
Crank cover to crankcase 9
Starter cover to crank cover 9
Plug, crank cover 18

Output sprocket to output shaft 132 Use new tab
washers
Detent wheel to selector drum 12 Use a new fixing
Detent arm bolt 12 Use a new fixing
Selector drum bearing retaining screw 12 Use a new fixing
Selector shaft retainer 12 Use a new fixing
Spring abutment bolt 23
Neutral switch 10
Gear pedal pinch bolt 9
Gear change rod locknuts (upper nut is left hand thread) 6
Gear pedal pivot bolt 22
Lubrication System

Sump to crankcase 12
Sump drain plug to sump 25 Use a new washer
Oil pressure relief valve to crankcase 15 Apply ThreeBond
1305 to the threads
Low oil pressure warning light switch to crankcase 13 Use new washers
Oil filter to adapter 10
Oil cooler pipe union bolts 10
Oil cooler to mounting bracket/radiator 9
Oil pump to crankcase 13.7
Oil pump drive sprocket to pump shaft • 15
Oil feed pipe union to head 25
Transmission oil feed pipes to crankcase 8
Oil cooler bracket to crankcase 9

UMr
Ieiii r ii Im(.Tn;ir;11

Rear sprocket to sprocket carrier 55
Rear sprocket studs to sprocket carrier 30 Use new fixings
Chain guard bolts 4.5
Cooling System

Water pump to crankcase 10
Radiator to frame 9
Water elbow to head 12
Thermostat housing to head 12
Fan shroud to radiator 2.5
Expansion tank to frame 4
Fuel System,
, Exhaust System and Airbox

Fuel tank to frame (front fixing) 9
Fuel tank to frame (rear fixing) 9
Fuel tank brackets to frame (rear) 9
Fuel cap to fuel tank 3
Fuel pump mounting plate to fuel tank 9
Throttle body transition piece to cylinder head 12
Fuel rail to bracket 6
Throttle potentiometer to throttle body 2
Throttle restrictor bracket to throttle body 2 Apply ThreeBond
1360 to the threads
Exhaust downpipe to cylinder head 19 See section 10
Airbox to bracket 5
Airbox upper to lower section 3
Exhaust downpipe to frame 15
Exhaust clamp to downpipe 22
Silencer mounting bracket to frame 15
Catalyst heatshield to downpipe (only if catalyst fitted) 5
Exhaust pipe heatshield 5
Silencer heatshield 5

11J%qjjkI
General Information
Rear Suspertson

Swinging arm spindle bolt 110
Swinging arm end-float adjuster sleeve 6
Chain rubbing strip bolts 4.5
Chain adjuster locknut 20
Chain guard bolts 4.5
Rear suspension unit upper mounting bolt 48
Rear suspension unit lower mounting bolt /drop to drag link pivot 48
Drag link pivot at frame 48
Drop links to swinging arm 48
Front Suspension

Handlebar clamp bolt 26
Handlebar lower clamp to top yoke nut 35
Handlebar end weight bolt 5
Upper yoke pinch bolt 20
Lower yoke pinch bolt 20
Fork top cap to inner tube 35
Upper yoke centre nut 90
Damping cylinder bolt 19

Front wheel spindle / axle bolt 110
Front wheel spindle pinch bolts 20
Rear wheel spindle/axle bolt 110
1.34 Service Manual - Tiger . IuM

Front ra ges
Application Torque ) Notes

Front brake disc to wheel 22 Use new fixings
Front brake caliper to fork 35
Front brake pad retaining pin 17
Front brake caliper bleed screw 5.5
Front brake hose to caliper 25 Use new sealing
washers
Front brake master cylinder to handlebar 15
Front brake master cylinder reservoir to mounting 5
Front brake hose to master cylinder 25 Use new sealing
washers
Front brake lever to master cylinder bolt 1
Front brake lever to master cylinder nut 6
Rear Brakes
Rear brake disc to wheel 22 Use new fixings
Rear brake caliper to carrier 40
Rear brake pad retaining pin 17
Rear brake caliper bleed screw 5.5
Rear brake hose to caliper 25 Use new sealing
washers
Rear brake master cylinder to frame 27 Use new fixings
Rear brake master cylinder reservoir to frame 9
Rear brake hose to master cylinder (brake light switch) 15
Rear brake pedal pivot bolt 22

Front wheel speed sensor to fork leg 9
Rear wheel speed sensor to caliper carrier 9
Front pulser ring to front wheel hub 5
Rear pulser ring to rear brake disc 5.
ABS modulator to mounting bracket 9
ABS modulator mounting bracket to frame 9 Use new fixings
Brake line unions to ABS modulator 17

TWUMEH
Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings

Upper crankcase to frame See section 9
Lower crankcase to frame See section 9
Cylinder head to frame See section 9
Control plate to frame bolts 9 Use new fixings
Heel guard to Control plate bolts 7
Rear footrest hanger to frame 27
Side stand mounting bracket 40
Side stand pivot 20

Alternator rotor to crankshaft 105
Alternator stator to cover 12
Alternator regulator to frame 7
Starter motor to crankcase 10
Alternator cover to crankcase 9
Headlight to cockpit fram e 3.5
Rear light fixings 4
Licence plate lamp fixing 3
Horn to lower yoke 18
Bodywork

Front mudguard to fork 3
Side panels to brackets/fuel tank 3
Cockpit to headlight 3
Side fairings to frame/headlight 3
Rear panel to subframe 3
Infill panels to cockpit 3
Mirrors to handlebars 25
Windscreen to cockpit subframe 1.5
Cockpit subframe to frame 30
Rear mudguard to frame 6
Rear mudguard end section to bracket 6
Rear hugger to swinging arm 7
Belly pan to brackets 3
1:36 Service Manual - Tiger

UMW
I sIiijNt.
Ii iI-
UMW Service Manual - Tiger 1.37

o1^j

LiMM
l TrI

General Information

C I TI kiiiiThitii
Service Manual - Tiger . 1.41

Tq!Lm^
p
GeneralInformation
uI : : ;mJi

UN[P
11111 IitThTt(eTiiiMi
tt

UNf^
General Information

I UMW
2 Scheduled M
Table of Contents
Introduction ....................................................................... 2-2
ScheduledMaintenance Chart .......................................................... 2-3

TLffl I
2.2
Service Manual - Tier
9 uMp
Odometer Reading in Miles (Kms) or time period,
whichever comes first.
Operation Description Every 500 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
(800) (10000) (20000) (30000) (40000) (50000) (60000)
1 month 1 year 2 years 3 years 4 years 5 years 6 years
Engine 8. oil cooler - check for leaks Day • • • • • •
Engine oil - renew - 0 • • • • • •
Engine oil filter - renew - • • • • •
Valve clearances - check • •
Air cleaner - renew - •

Engine ECM - check for stored DTCs - • • • • • •
Spark plugs - check - • •
Spark plugs - renew - • • •
Throttle bodies - balance - • • •

Throttle cables - check/adjust Day • • • • •
Cooling system - check for leaks - • • • • •
Coolant level - check/adjust - • • • •
Coolant - renew - S • •
Fuel system - check for leaks Day • • • • •

Lights, instruments & electrical systems - check Day • • • • • •
Steering - check for free operation Day • • •
Headstock bearings - check/adjust - • • • s s • •
Headstock bearings - lubricate - •
Forks - check for leaks/smooth operation Day + • • • s • •
Fork oil - renew - •
Brake fluid levels - check Day • • • • • •
Brake fluid - renew Every 2 years
Brake pad wear - check Day • •
Brake master cylinders - check for leaks - • • • S • • •
Brake calipers - check for leaks and seized pistons - S S S • • S •
Drive chain - lubricate Every 200 miles (300 kms)

Drive chain - wear check Every 500 miles (800 kms)
Drive chain slack - check/adjust Day S • • • • +
Drive chain rubbing strip - check - • • • • •

Fasteners - inspect visually for security Day + • • •
Wheels - inspect for damage Day S S S S S •
Tyre wear/tyre damage - check Day • + • • •

Tyre pressures - checkladjust Day •
Clutch cable - check/adjust Day S S • • S • •
Stand — check operation Day S S S S • • •
Secondary exhaust clamp bolt - check/adjust - • • • S • • •
Service Manual - Tiger • 2.3

TWUMEM
scheduled Maintenance
Odometer Reading in Miles (Kms) or time period,

whichever comes first
Operation Description Every 500 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
(800) (10000) (20000) (30000) (40000) (50000) (60000)
1 month 1 year 2 years 3 years 4 years 5 years 6 years
Secondary air injection system - check - . .
Fuel and evaporative loss* hoses - renew -
--tvaporaave system nuea to c.aiirornia models only

LUMP
1
1 1=
ExplodedView - Cylinder Head and Valves ........................... . ........................ 3.2

ExplodedView - Cam Cover ................................................................ 3.3
ExplodedView - Camshaft and Camshaft Drive ................................. . .............. 3.4
ylind rHe a d Description ................................................................... 3.5
C e
CamCover ............................................................................... 3.5
Removal ........................................................................... 3.5
Installation.......................................................................... 3.6
CamChain Tensioner ...................................................................... 3.8

Removal ........ ................................................................ 3.8
Installation.. ......................................................................... 3.9
Camshafts. . . . .. . . . . ... ... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Removal ..................:.:..................................................... 3.10
Camshaftand Bearing Cap Inspection .................................................. 3.11
Installation. ....................................................................... 3.12
ValveClearances.... ................................................................ 3.13
ValveClearance Measurement ......................................................... 3.14
ValveClearance Adjustment .......................................................... 3.14
CamChain .............................................................................. 3.15
Removal........................................................................... 3.15
Inspection.......................................................................... 3.16
Installation....................................... . .................................. 3.17
CylinderHead . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Removal.......................................................................... 3.17
Inspection........................................................................ 3.18
Installation......................................................................... 3.18
Valves Valve Stem Seals ...............................................................
and 3.20
Removalfrom the Cylinder Head ..................................................... 3.20
Installation......................................................................... 3.20
Valveto Valve Guide Clearance ....................................................... 3.21
ValveFace Inspection ............................................................... 3.21

I- Mr
Cylinder Head
ru
10 Nm
10 Nm

uM
Cylinder Head
Lubricate sea
with engine c

Cylinder Head
=
5 Cain iuui n d r rirN
9Nm
18 Nm
3.4
Service Manual - ^ Ti g er
9 UP
r rirt
The engine is fitted with an aluminium alloy cylinder head,

which carries the camshafts, valves and spark plugs. The
cylinder head is cast as a single entity and various
components are permanently added after machining. 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9.).
The camshafts run directly in the head without separate 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
bearings. Valve clearances are adjusted by changing 3. Remove the side panels (see page 16-10).
variable thickness shims which sit between the valve
4. Remove both side fairings (see page 16-13).
tappet bucket and the valves.
5. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99).
The camshafts are driven by a silent-type chain. The cam
6. Remove the airbox (see page 10.104).
chain is tensioned by a spring loaded device fitted in the
cylinder head, and is guided by two rubber blades. 7. Remove the secondary air injection solenoid valve
(see page 10-123).
Oil is supplied to the head by an external feed pipe which
is situated at the right hand rear side of the head. Once 8. Remove the ignition coils from the head by pulling
supplied to the head, the oil is distributed along internal them upwards.
drillings within the head casting and camshaft.
Single valve springs are used to close the inlet valves and
single springs to close the exhaust valves. These valve
springs have close wound coils at one end to assist in the
prevention of valve bounce at high engine speed and to
give a smooth valve actuation. When assembling the
cylinder head it is important that the close wound, colour
coded ends of the springs are fitted downwards (towards
the piston). Both the tip and seating face of the valves are
hardened to give a long service life.
Due to the methods used to assemble the valve seat and
valve guides to the head, these parts cannot be replaced.
1. Coils
9. Detach the secondary air injection hose from the
In any of the following operations which necessitate the reed valves on top of the cam cover (see page 10-
removal or disconnection of the cam chain, NEVER turn 123).
the engine without the cam chain and tensioner
correctly fitted and adjusted. In the disassembled
condition, the pistons will contact the valves if the
crankshaft is turned, causing severe engine damage.
0
1. Spring-close hose clip

2. Secondary air injection hose
3. Reed valve assembly
10. Release the throttle cables at the throttle bodies (see
page 10-111).
11. Progressively release the cam cover bolts in the
sequence shown below.

TWUMBH
Cylinder Head
f— L
0 0
o o 0
1
capb
5 2 1. Cam cover seal groove

ca9a
Cam cover bolt release sequence 4. Fi t the plug tower seals to the cam cap ladder.
12. Ease the water hoses to allow the cover to be
removed from the left hand side of the motorcYcle. 1
¢
a a 7'^,
h4 U ;ia
4i
' i{{
ti t '` t '
5 82 ; l e
``^ ' 6 ra ,
i h?3 vs3 Y
, LIIrIN1
p 2.,r`&^yx•^ k
v ^ ^v k,
4+. ^ '• gym'
1:.. ^;s
L
" ^s;.c s1C'' S•s °
a y\v;•+•. c
^ ^ i1:1
?.!.y r Y r
,.
,?.(d'c:; ',:••;x.:C.f.
::1i,xn.,,;;.:^':....a
.:i. v.:z3.Y.. fin.,
v :kC;aafi.S
a. ;.a., 'a.S
a)
a ,
^ .. ,:SP.:
< .•Yfk+,,1".,: . .,' ., .
+^
i;:,,`N2La,r7.2,;s:'2;:%',f,.À7v .,t'r'..;kr3{.JtS`:6'r.'9bnii:: :.y ,:d: `.. •,,s,Lt'.7,;
.. v`>:;i
Never use a lever to remove the camsha ft cover from I

the head.
Using a lever will cause damage to the head and cam
cover which could lead to an oil leak.
13. Remove the cam cover gasket and plug tower seals.
If necessary, recover the dowels from the seconda ry
air injection holes in the head (these may come away
in the cover or gasket). ,' Cam
14. Remove any residual oil from the front of the head '. Pl ug tower seals
using a syringe or lint free cloth. 5. Apply silicone sealer to the areas arrowed in the
diagram below.
Installation
..
1. Check the condition of the cam cover gasket and
f2
i
plug tower seals. Replace as necessa ry. )
2. Check the condition of the cam cover bolt seals.
Replace as necessa ry.
a o
CBS)
6. Fit the cam cover, ensuring that the gasket and seals
remain in the correct positions.

uM
Cyli nder Head
cast 1 1. Coils
1. Dowels 14. Refit the secondary air injection solenoid valve (see
8. Lubricate the screw seals with clean engine oil prior page 10- 123).
to installation. 15. Refit the airbox (see page 10-106).
9. Fit the cam cover screws and screw seals, then 16. Refit the fuel tank (see page 90-100).
tighten until finger tight.
17. Refit the side fairings (see page 16-13).
10. Finally, tighten the cam cover screws, in the same
18. Refit the side panels (see page 16-10).
order as for removal, to 10 m. p pg
19. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first.
11. Refit the throttle cables and adjust (see
Pga e 10-112).
20. Refit the seat (see page 16-9).
12. Refit the secondary air injection hose to the reed
valves (see page 10-124).
1.Spring-close hose clip


Twumem
gaaa
Camshaft to Cylinder Head Alignment Marks
4. Place a suitable wedge between the tensioner blade
and crankcase, to hold the cam chain taut during
1. Inspection plate removal of the tensioner.
3. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction
of rotation), using the bolt fitted to the end of the
crankshaft Stop rotationwhen number 1 cylinder is
at top dead centre (TDC), that is when the 'T1 mark
on the sprag clutch aligns with the line at the bottom The tensioner centre nut is under spring tension. Always
of the cover. wear hand, eye and face protection when withdrawing
the centre nut and take great care in order to minimise
the risk of injury and loss of components.
5. Carefully remove the centre nut from the tensioner

and withdraw the tensioner spring.
1. 'T1' Mark
2. Marker line
caom
I. Centre nut
2. Spring
6. Remove the bolts securing the tensioner to the
cylinder head. Remove the tensioner and gasket.
3.
8 Service Manual - Tiger
UMW
1 1 1
6. Fit a new sealing washer to the centre nut. Using

finger pressure only, push the ratchet section of the
1. Check that number 1 cylinder is still at top dead tensioner into firm contact with the tensioner blade.
centre (TDC). Refit the spring and centre nut to the tensioner.
2. Ensure that the wedge fitted earlier is still holding the Tighten the centre nut to 23 Nm.
tensioner blade in contact with the cam chain. Check 7. Check that the tensioner plunger is correctly located
that the camshaft timing marks point inwards and in the middle of the tensioner blade when viewed
are level with the joint face of the head. from above.
3. Set the tensioner plunger onto the first tooth of the 8. Rotate the engine through 4 full revolutions, and
ratchet (i.e. minimum extension) by manually lifting reset number 1 cylinder to TDC. Ensure that the 'T1'
the tensioner pawl. mark on the sprag clutch aligns with the line at the
bottom of the cover.
gabh
it-i
kaid
2
Tensioner Plunger Set-up

1.`T1'Mark
4. Fit the tensioner, complete with a new gasket, to the
2. Marker line
cylinder head and tighten the retaining ; bolts to 9
Nm. 9. Check that the camshaft timing marks align as
illustrated below.
Note:
• If fitting a new tensioner, observe the
following:
• Remove the new tensioner assembly from
the packaging. On examination, it can be
seen that the tensioner nut will not be
tightened fully into the tensioner body and
that the tensioner 'nose (i.e., the part which
actually contacts the chain rubbing strip) is
fully retracted into the housing.
® Prior to assembly into the engine it is
necessary to disassemble the tensioner nut,
washer and spring. To do this without
damaging the internal components, turn the
gaaa
tensioner nut at least a half turn clockwise
Camshaft to Cylinder Head Alignment Marks
(i.e. tighten it further into the housing) until
the plunger springs outwards. The tensioner 10. Re-check the tensioner plunger location against the
nut can then be withdrawn safely without tensioner blade.
causing internal damage to tensioner 11. Refit the cam cover (see page 3-6).
components. 12. Check the 0-ring in the crank cover inspection plate.
5. Remove the tensioner blade wedge, taking care not Renew as necessary.
to move or damage the tensioner blade. 13. Refit the crank cover inspection plate, tightening it to
18 Nm.
Camshafts
Service Manual - Ti 9 r 3.9

AMP
Cylinder Head
R ovaI 6. Progressively release the bolts securing the cam cap

ladder to the head in the sequence shown below. ..•
1. Remove the cam chain tensioner (see page 3-8).
Mote: 7 3 11
• It is not necessary to remove the cam chain
completely.
•
Each camshaft and sprocket is removed as
an assembly.
• Before commencing work, ensure the
crankshaft T1 mark is in alignment with the
line in the crank cover inspection plate.
2. Remove the cam chain top pad from the cam caps
and cylinder head. 6 42 \ 10
12
caqm
Cam Ladder Bolt Release Sequence
7 Remove the cam cap ladder and collect the dowels
(if loose) and spark plug tower 0-rings.
8. Lift the cam chain from the exhaust camshaft
sprocket and remove the exhaust camshaft.
9. Repeat the procedure for the inlet camshaft.
1.Cam chain top pad

2. Cam caps
3. To ensure that all components are refitted in the
same positions as prior to removal,
y mark the position
of each cam cap and the orientation of the cam
bearing ladder in relation to the head.
Note:
• A laundry marker or similar may be used to
mark the cap positions. 1. Cam chain
2 • Inlet camshaft
4. Progressively
9 Y release each of the remaining9 fasteners
securing the individual cam caps to the cylinder
head.
5. Remove the caps.

UMW
JiT ,:r=: Y a 1
2. Measure the camshaft journals with a micrometer. If

® The inlet and exhaust camshafts are any journal is outside the specified tolerance, replace
different. They can be identified by a plain
the camshaft.
section in the centre of the exhaust cam and Outrigger Journal Diameter
a groove in the same place on the inlet cam.
I Standard: 1 22.953 - 22.956 mm
Standard Journal Diameters

Standard:
I I 22.93 - 22.96 mm
::, gabo q,
1. Exhaust camshaft
2. Plain section
3. Inlet camshaft
4. Grooved section
Camshaftand Bearing Cap Inspection

1. Outrigger journal
1. Inspect the camshaft sprockets for damaged and 2. Standard journal
worn teeth. Replace as necessary. 3. Examine all camshaft and camshaft bearing caps for
excessive wear and damage, paying particular
attention to the outrigger caps.
4. Check the journal-to-head clearances, using
The same sprocket is used for both inlet and exhaust 'Plastigage' (Triumph part number 3880150-T0301)
camshafts. To attach the sprocket to the different as follows:
camshafts, different bolt holes are used. • Ensuring that the camshaft sprocket
Never fit a camshaft sprocket to a camshaft using alignment marking is located as for removal,
incorrectly identified bolt holes. Severe engine damage assemble one camshaft to the head and
will result from incorrect attachment. progressively tighten the bearing caps and
cam cap ladder to 10 Nm.
1 Remove the cam cap and cam cap ladder

using the bolt release sequence given earlier.
Wipe the exposed areas of both the camshaft
joumal and a single cap or cap area of the
ladder.
• Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal
and a small quantity of silicone release agent
to the cap.
• Size a length of the Plastigage to fit across the
camshaft journal. Fit the Plastigage to the
2 camshaft journal using the grease to hold the
strip in place.
gaab
• Refit the cap and cam cap ladder then evenly
1. Inlet camshaft bolt holes and progressively tighten all the camshaft
2. Exhaust camshaft bolt holes cap and ladder bolts to 10 Nm in the correct
sequence (see camshaft installation).

•IRt!:!!.!?kI
tTri :
® Release the cap bolts and remove the cap/ , Installation
ladder. Using the gauge provided with the
Plastigage kit, measure the width of the now 1. Thoroughly clean the camshafts and journals. Inspect
compressed Plastigage. the ends of the camshafts for correct fitment of the
ote:
sealing plugs. Lubricate the camshafts with clean
engine oil before fitting to the head.
® The camshaft caps and ladder are unique to 2. Locate each camshaft to the head ensuring the
each cylinder head and are, therefore, not camshafts are correctly identified (inlet and exhaust)
available individually. If a camshaft cap or and are also correctly located over their respective
the ladder is worn or damaged, the valve banks.
complete cylinder head must be replaced.
3. Working on one camshaft at a time, locate the cam
chain over the cam sprocket. Position the camshaft in
the same position as for removal before attempting
to fit the caps and ladder (that is, with the timing
marks on the camshaft sprockets level and pointing
inwards, and with the 'Ti mark on the sprag clutch
in alignment with the line at the bottom of the
cover).
Camshaft journal clearance, Standard
Standard: 0.040 - 0.091 mm 1.Cam chain

Service limit: 0.13 mm 2. Inlet camshaft
4. Repeat the procedure for the other camshaft
Camshaft journal clearance, Outrigger
af:"
f:4 "'`4^
Y^;.••^,^^'
°.Y:. ,f..».;ti
'^ ^^'^^..?i„ ^' :i,c'.Irr^k
Standard: 0.044 - 0.068 mm î
' :i''x^Y ^ ?A r
^^y
at {•U.'?.:^':x'.
:'y,.^^'^;f^Gy^' :Y•:.^'..siN,^?^'cA,^?,^.,°,,;
î,. ^:^,,:' ;^
.^5a^ ffr:dk^: ,^'`?,
r ,L'::' ,)+'; ''
^•' ` „ Vo ,Y? i .{n
2:^'t
y
A^:{s, • '••,.,
;•;,f$In.^, .i.: r • c
.:,i^'.:,.5.: 1:. ^;,{L^.:,•f": •..k. .,•>;a: . .q>. a:.4un.,: A:f^: {nlf^. ^ ".. . ` . „•:. ys.,.^':^
a
a t )
• x':
•fi:.4:VF,va\^. .t. ;<. S!/ :
"'?..;:: ^+ '\.,,,,M^Yg. :^'>^'.^
Â".Jfa.
t...`\.
.:y>f^fu,;.;:,.,,::.,q . `
•
n^+;:,
Service limit: 0.13 mm If the camshafts and caps/ladder are fitted without first
• If the clearance measured is within the aligning, the timing marks on both the crankshaft and
specified tolerance, remove the cap/ladder camshaft sprockets, the inlet and exhaust valves will
and dean off all traces of Plastigage. contact each other causing damage to both the head
Assemble the camshafts. and the valves.
Note:
• If the measured clearance is outside the
tolerance, and the camshaft journals are
within tolerance, the cylinder head must be
replaced
^:, . •;' . : r^ ,:is ti$ ,\,''y^

Wf
^;:P.,^:o f
.
.: o`
^ :
,
x s
' f• .CY: f;:•.^:t
`T<, ^ f„
•^;If;,;
A^ wt:.y C.thn';t^,.?.•q ^'',^.' •:.\,:.::Y:f.: ^^
, A
:::ws'::i;•
•• y
•<Q.x;`,a,F` :f^
..Y..>., .^ txi..\.R.^:.\^•y:,xw::43if...
.v,,;<.,;,.,,p,.t;;...::.x .,.,(.
;.•^•°3.SUR'^k,.•+ „•!^'':Y^^SL:•5.,;
:..y, •^.S^ ^
"
:.^.. S. .:.....;
^: ^•:,v^
. ^,.,
..,{#Ff.!, 2^: :.,tp; .. .3'\1;r•},"^?"x:^
`
. "`:
o^: '3?ic,^ ,a '^",.
d
:.xs
:
" :,'o::• ::K•
q:<: •^"^n:.,,•:
::.5.f..: H^. !, :+.fi
a^^..,,
Yv'...,..d:>Id'itiM: :.. .\;2?i.n..::^y:,•<}Ai:.:::;.,.;:.nH>i::.....x%i•......tr1..nl.^....
:,y,
',, r.
y {^4.;, i. ,x..y
ki .• ...i'w..x:::if.
:y:y.C....:!M
A
a
:.... :..:x,$,.
F.,. ..v:.`^<t .:..:>. :,';:,<y:.Y:":.t'f n^'cy.'.F....
:.f .: 'v^r.•
.:'^•^R.:: ,ya:.^,•:..'"tu(.
..'ki''`• {A,.,r '':,' i<yi .:.
,: S:s
Although Plastigage is oil soluble; all traces of the

material must be removed to prevent blockage of the oil
drillings and resultant engine damage.
3.12 Service Manual - Tiger uM^

5. Assemble the_cam caps, dowels, cam ladder and top 9. Rotate the engine through 4 full revolutions, and
pad in the same location and orientation as prior to reset number 1 cylinder to TDC. Ensure that the 'T1'
removal. mark on the sprag clutch aligns with the line at the
bo ttom of the cover.
.- ., ► ' . l 1.^ - I
1. Cam chain top pad 1. 11' Mark
6. Fit and evenly tighten the cam cap screws to 10 m, 2. Marker line
in the sequence shown below. 10. Check that the camshaft timing marks align as
illustrated below. Rectify any misalignment before
7 3 proceeding.
11
t
Ilni ^1 /
13
O Q O
15 ^
^
16 g6 4 2 `12 10
Cam-can and Ladder Bolt Tiahtenina Sequence

7. Before fitting the cam chain tensioner, ensure that gaaa
each camshaft rotates freely. Do not rotate either Camshaft to Cylinder Head Alignment Marks
camshaft by more than 5° 11. Check the valve clearances. Adjust as necessary (see
.t Y. $ $ , i ,.s : page 3-14).
s r t Y^
^
a, '^$• ^
, a w .
yi ti, 3
Yfi. Aâ.7R
bu
Ia
A .f ;$,?$ x <)„A ^ S: } ' k^ H.p
f .,
''$. nri, A 4 ; S:u ': ^ iS.0 ). fv.•E.,$ ) Y,

y
1 ' 5:
$
^;
:. <) j t;N
Y
` <<'
; :. Ta 4
v
:
^^
Y i• ) . )f
: ^
+ 12. Re fi t the cam chain tensioner{s ee pagee 39)
-.
'
EF.:..:yy'za\4i:}.} t.^;...
ki^2i.
.. y0 HS :,
.u:,
,.:
:';;k>.'i: ^ .:C(::><:i.5:ka:A...:,a):).ti3;xh.
l
i$i$': .
...........
Q;:.
:; i
'' .b ^`
v y ca::)
.. gin , ..r'.::4..4.' }'.
^v }.^
^
t ^k
.•
. Y•
. $d.:,
.:): Y: > 44: 'K': .."LA's'•..
nn
,A`^',h:.
.
$
.iri
\ i .' ,
,
.1:^ }:;'.
,..
"J^ î}
î.::^,,. .c.4^^^ .nx
n^:i ):4 :m...
^
:..,{,v:,
h, ^îÎX.
^{^^Â,\
^,^
^•,:':
If any components have been renewed, the valve

clearances must be checked and adjusted.
n Run ing with Clearances
alve C
Valve
incorrectly adjusted valve clearances may cause excess Camshaft, valve, valve shim and valve seat wear affects the
engine noise, rough running and engine damage. valve clearances. The effect of this wear is to change the
gap between the camshaft and tappet bucket, causing
8. Assemble the cam chain tensioner using the engine noise and improper running. If the valve
instructions given earlier in this section. clearances become too small, permanent damage to the
valve and valve seat will take place. If the valve clearance
becomes too great, the engine will become noisy and will
not run correctly.
Service Manual - Ti g er 3.13

:I1Rty± H
Cylinder Head
Value Clearance Meastnemnt Typical Valve Clearance Chart

Note:
g Inlet Valve No. Gap Measured
Valve clearance measurement must be
carried out with the engine cold. 1 as measured (mm)
2 as measured (mm)
1. Remove the cam cover (see page 3-5).
3 as measured (mm)
2. Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression
4 as measured (mm)
resistance when turning the engine.
3. Select a high gear and, using the rear wheel, turn the 5 as measured (mm)
engine until a pair of camshaft lobes are positioned 6 as measured (mm)
pointing away from the valves. Exhaust Valve 'No. Gap Measured
4. Using feeler gauges, measure and record the 1 as measured (mm)
clearances for this pair of valves only.
2 as measured (mm)
5. Repeat the process until the valve clearances for all
valves have been checked. 3 as measured (mm)
Note: 4 as measured (mm)
5 as measured (mm)
® If the measurement does not fall within the
specified range, adjustment must be made. 6 as measured (mm)
Note:
e
Valve Clearance Adjustment
The correct valve clearances are in the
range given. Note:
• To adjust the valve clearances the camshafts
Inlet: 0.10 - 0.20 mm must be removed. Follow the camshaft
removal procedure (see page 3-10).
Exhaust: 0.20 - 0.30 mm
1. Remove the camshafts (see page 3-10).
2. Remove the tappet bucket from the cylinder head.
6. Record the measured valve clearances on a chart

similar to the example shown.

UP
r ri
3. Remove the shim from the valve head. Cam Chaim
Removal

2. Remove the starter gear cover (see page 7-20).
3. Remove the right hand crank cover (see page 7-20).
4. Remove the sprag clutch and drive gear (see page 7-
1 __Li Z °2_ 20).
I/ 5. Remove the bolt from the centre of the cam chain
/
I' .
housing in the cylinder head.
( A
0
1. Shim
4. Measure the original shim, using a micrometer and
select the appropriate new shim as required.
Clearance too small:
1 I
• Fit a thinner shim. I
Clearance too large:
• Ft a thicker shim. ^
Note:
• Shims are available ranging from 1.70 mm 1. Centre bolt
to 3.00 mm in increments of 0.025 mm. 6. The cam chain is removed from inside the head-
5. Fit the new shim to the valve head. space or through the crankcase, after first detaching
6. Lubricate the tappet bucket(s) with a 50/50 solution the chain from the crankshaft gear.
of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
7. Refit the tappet bucket.
8. Refit the camshafts (see page 3-12).
9. Re-check all valve clearances.
10. Repeat the procedure if the valves require further
adjustment.

:rRt!:!.H
Cylinder Head ___
Inspection 3. Measure across 23 links as shown in the diagram

below. If the chain is within limits, the measurement
Visual in-situ checks can also be made as follows:
should be . no longer than 150.14 mm.
Measurements beyond 150.14 mm indicate that the
1. Check for significant blue discolouration of the chain
chain must be replaced.
plates indicating excessive heat build-up.
2. Examine all pins for signs of rotation.
3. Check for cracking or deep scratching of the chain
plates.
4. Check for severe wear of the inner plates as
indicated in the diagram below.
4. Check for severe wear of the inner surface of the

outer plates at the side-contact points with the
sprocket teeth.
5. Check for signs of stiffness or kinking.

6. Check for severe wear of the plates in the area
shown below.
00
0
0
o
0
oo OO 1
0
If any of these symptoms are evident, the cam chain must
be replaced.
3.16 Service Manual - Ti g er

g UMP
Cylinder Head
Ins atio Cylinder K ad
1. Fit the cam chain and locate the lower end around
the crankshaft gear. Removal
2. Refit the bolt to the centre of the cam chain housing Note:
in the cylinder head, tightening to 10 m.
• The rubbing blades for the cam chain
3. Refit the camshafts (see page 3-12). protrude from the crankcase such that
removal of the head while in the frame is
made extremely difficult and - may lead to
damage to the head, rubbing blades and
frame.
1. Remove the engine from the frame (see page 9-2).

3. Note the position of all tappet buckets and shims
such that they can be refi tted in the same positions.
Remove all the tappet buckets and shims.
1. Shim
Note:
• To prevent the tappet buckets and shims
from becoming mixed, place the shim and
tappet together in a marked container. The
components must be refitted- in their
original positions.

TWU î^
'mTri : rri •
4. Release the screws securing the outside of the Inspection

cylinder head to the upper crankcase.
1. Thoroughly clean the surface of the head and check
1 ^^^^ ^ for damage and pitting of the combustion chambers.
2. Using a straight edge, check the cylinder head
gasket face for warp which could lead to gasket
^^, ^ failure. Replace the head if warped.
1. Cylinder head to upper crankcase screws

5. Progressively release the cylinder head bolts in the
order shown below.
9abP
In-n 3 1 8 1. Straight edge

2. Cylinder head gasket face
3. Check the cam chain rubbing blade. Renew if worn
or damaged.
Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the upper faces of the crankcase

taking care not to damage the mating surfaces.
2. Fit a new cylinder head gasket ('top' marking
uppermost) ensuring that the head to crankcase
location dowels are correctly in place.
Cylinder Head Bolt Release Sequence
6. Lightly tap the cylinder head with a rubber mallet to
break the seal of the gasket.
7 Lift the head directly upwards until clear of the cam 0
chain rubbing blades
ca rt
1. Cylinder head gasket

3. Ensure that the cylinder head face is completely
clean.
4. If removed, install the cam chain rubbing strips.
5. Carefully lower the cylinder head over the cam chain
and rubbing strips and locate the head onto the
dowels.

IUMP
: r .I
Using the correct procedure to fit and tighten the

cylinder head bolts will ensure the long term reliability of
the cylinder head gasket.
Clean each bolt, paying particular attention to the
threads and under-bolt-head areas. If any of the threads
or bolt-head areas are damaged, replace the bolt(s). 1 R
Lubricate the threads with engine oil, and then wipe
clean with a lint-free cloth leaving minimal oil on the
threads (that is, almost dry to touch).
Tighten the bolts using the three-stage procedure given
below.
Failure to observe these important items may lead to
engine damage through a damaged head gasket.
r —r v
cary
Cylinder Head Bolt Tightening Sequence

7. Fit the screws securing the side of the cylinder head
to the crankcase and tighten to 10 Nm.
ars r h```. , ' -I I

1. Rubbing strips
6. Fit the bolts to the head and tighten until finger tight.
The head bolts are finally tightened in three stages.
This is to ensure that the cylinder head gasket seals
correctly to the head and crankcase. The three stages
are as follows:
Note:
• For stages A and B of the head bolt
tightening operation, a torque wrench of 1. Cylinder head to upper crankcase screws
known, accurate calibration must be used. 8. Clean and lubricate the tappet buckets with clean
• Tighten the head bolts, in the same engine oil and refit the buckets and shims in the
numerical sequence used to release the same locations from which they were removed.
bolts, to 20 Nm. 9. Refit the cam shafts (see page 3-12).
• Tighten the head bolts in the same 10. Install the engine to the frame (see page 9-6).
numerical sequence used to release the
bolts, to 35 Nm.
• For the final torque operation, which again is
carried out in the same numerical sequence
used ` to release the bolts, a 'torque turn'
method is used. The bolts must be turned
0
through 90 to reach. the final setting. To
0
accurately -gauge the 90 turn, use service
tool 3880105-T0301 as follows:

TWUMOH 9
•
Note:
• Ensure inlet and exhaust valve components
do not become mixed.
\3
^^g \ 45
1. Collets
2. Valve spring retainer
3. Valve spring
4. Valve spring platform
gadh
S. Stem oil seal
Valve Removal 6. Valve
2. Once the collets are released, remove the following
items: Installation
• collets
1. Apply a thin coat of molybdenum disulphide grease
• valve spring cap to the valve stem.
• valve spring 2. Install the valve into the valve guide and refit the
spring platform to the valve spring recess in the
• valve stem seal head.
• spring platform 3. Fit the valve stem seal over the valve stem and, using
• valve (de-burr before removal) a suitable tool, press down fully until the seal is
correctly seated over the valve guide.
Note:
• During fitment of the valve stem seal, two
disti nctly different degrees of resistance will
be noted when the seal is correctly fitted.
• Firstly, press the seal down the valve stem
until the lower side of the seal comes into
contact with the valve guide. Greater
resistance is felt at this contact point and
further gentle pressure is then required to
locate the seal over the top end of the valve
guide.
• On application of this pressure, the seal can
be felt to positively locate over the top face
1. Valve stem seal of . the valve guide. Once correctly
positioned, the seal cannot be pushed down
any further.
3.20
Service Manual - Ti g er .
9 - t^P
Cylinder Head
= Valve to Valve Guide Clearance

r t
s
{
.t ir .
^'^
t •4
+. '^ •
f
A
^ ;'44
< 3' r.' ^y
r S ro w ^. Y
Gt if[ .G X
t^
y
S"
> TZ
^ r"^`^ ^{â
,^., n hca:^) F
s
y^J ^^[
S'^q^'a ^3
> cs "'kX' s'r s.^ \ r J $n ^
\ \'F,t ^£' Q ^'
^
{ ^ 3 ♦yF ^
^
[
t ^
',1 '. A
h .. i)Y
\7C t r
'
:.
x^
. F
Citlr ;fib"r 'Y''^.Ye}^•RX:,

E
'{ +::r:•., ;•:v:tJ,.:

V and these rv'ice f i mit Q'i ven
...C.Y::ivx:
tiii:^; :f:Y#;'`'3i7Yî:..
If the valve guides
Q aides are worn be
(
i::t. ..Et::•
JF:
.: `.. ^^.^;
':;33^:> ...f}` "'ij.`'' . . :`;n;. • ..Yid»ia
::pi: t;2
.,:..:U..
i.0 .Yv:
^-^..^';;.L:::: :,
5+y:71...:.:f^^:v{."•;Rt
..::..:.»...
"J::.J:vi::i:::v::•.
J..>^;.::.; \::i`;}:\:f:J: ...
.:r}'
::.S:.iiF' y .:.:.: :....:....33.J vr..:liv::: e:^.`Y^•
::.â
.. kt;;.v,:
.''':^: .tlY:C'}
,.,::'.•' 3
; . .. ^Ri ..K.... \. fi;.,' y
.....
: v : :F?
:. . , ,U.^v :R ii %
, :v..ry
: {. :f'i:: kv.: JnNN, ..
A'.iq} ' vhY kkY'F nî. E:^;FJ.<A.v •`Yti[!,
F::;k:,.:;:nYYi..}..}.,^:.......:>:::......:vF:^.`.Y:[J •ii%Ci::.v
4.:..v:.w:iLY:iCf;}:Y;}:.yi;;vyih:.vvn.Y:`:}:6?:'ii:[,:['..;}nY;:;; t '
.v.::Y:::Y::i::::.n:r.Yn.:n.v:::::.v;.....:..... v.
below, the cylinder head must be replaced.
..: yirC•.,.^.., . 0 JY:::. .. :^Y.n:t
^}::r:.. ... . :.
Incorrect fitment of the valve stem oil seals could lead to

high oil consumption and blue smoke emissions from Valve Stem to Guide Clearance
the exhaust system. Do not use excessive force in fi tting
the seal as this may break the seal ring.
Inlet: 0.010 - 0.040 mm
4. Install the valve spring over the valve stem. Exhaust: 0.030 - 0.060 mm
5. Compress the valve spring ensuring that the spring Valve Guides
is compressed squarely to prevent damage to the
valve stem and cylinder head. If a valve guide is found to be worn beyond the service
limit, the complete cylinder head must be renewed.
6. Fit the valve collets ensuringg correct collet location in
the spring cap and valve as the spring compressor is
released. Valve Face Inspection
.v...},
a::..h;.:ji. n
Y:.rY+: fh.
Wi,...fia`, .0 i:. }^... v.::C: Yh ^}if::)::•'îrc 3 ;4,t'...I
A. u n i y V•.
.}.tr ..:}.S
.:h
Y
.,!it{G Y:S .,.
i'`.'^[Y:x ti... ^, r 'r.:}4C:r{'? ;. t t
n
.eV"
.:5.^
w4:
^^;n..,v{^'t,•',
: . Ja,:
:;4 i}:F:^r^
+,^^'F.^
y :sJ.. :
F .3 't\•.::..di..
',„.:2,.:
':^t ••^^v.
i ^ :'S^;
\.
:.,^..
.f5i.»
..:kt:,:k
:: :.k^:., :
;Fyi?:','s::v::
.: ^^,.,:ii, f •
.»J^.::` 1„i. ,:t
:a.a. »:,.^
'C3r..:•::.,
:r: [:ti
?S:fa•..:+i:;ti
\:,,.
nC.:.x; `tttJ:
.: ,: J^,, :
t :^â.`î^^:^^:°,,
..^:^•Â{£#:...
y,..••^',•:°.. `:';,.,» .:
•\..r •{,t
.: v . w:.. ^
:L,..
,
si'k: M9
h.
,$ v::
,..Y .s'....
...\.:
\.:
1 Rem ve
o a nV ca r b on build -
J
u pfrom the valve head
Ox” Qf sCJ:;isFFF}. .D A ::::v5'''•i>: t aJk'nv
y` i. :
^''S .<i ^.YÂ'R ; L.^:h., ' S ' ^^::^
^t checking in
WNv I•
nro. ^" ¢^' r.' rv,'•:t>:»F'u..4\v'ty
.'în
i:Y'r
\4 ^'î„
' S::v:..:' hn n ,.V,» ,hJv,
'
tiS: »,"F<^..
. , C:
i 'S7": Gâ:
..•f';..
yiL,.k.
xry;:•r ^'' ..u ; ::w' ..bA: `.•y^';i''`<v,. ,f^:X'
Jty..,[.,h. 'tF<.^[:.h•:.: ii:t'•Y.
°i;. .,.^^::::.,3:..:.:}i .s,â:Jt}::.:v
A l>^^t ..,:.•:; ..^.
. .^, t y
^
..,•</:
area. Examine the valve seat face, the
Always check for correct location of the valve collets particular for signs of cracking or pitting.
during and after assembly. If not fitted correctly, the
collets may become dislodged when the engine is
running allowing the valves to contact the pistons. Any
such valve to piston contact will cause severe engine
damage.

•Tt.iH
U:M
Cylinder Head
3.22 Service Manual - Tiger u Mp

ExplodedView - Clutch Cover ............................................................... 4.2
Exploded View - Clutch Assembly ........................................................... 4.3
e
Exploded Vi w - Clutch Controls ............................................................ 4.4
Clutch Cable ............................................................................. 4.5
Removal ........................................................................... 4.5
Inspection.......................................................................... 4.5
Assembly ........................................................................... 4.6
Clutch ................................................................................... 4.6
Disassembly ........................................................................ 4.6
Friction Plate Insection ..................................................................... 4.8
.
Thickness ..........................................................................
. 4.8
Bend/warp ......................................................................... 4.8
Assembly ........................................................................... 4.9
. Service Manual - Tiger 4.1

TqU M^
Clutch
Ixmi
1 i/
/-
9Nm

IUM^
Service Manual -Tiger 4.3
UMW
Clinch
Eloded V c^w - Clutch Cantrols
15 Nm
1 Nm
6Nm

Limp
:, 6. Pull in the clutch lever and turn the inner cable, anti-
clockwise through the slots in the adjuster and lever
bracket, until the cable can be detached from the
lever by pushing downwards.
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).

2. Disconnect the battery (see page 17-7).
3. Slacken the cable locknut and release the adjuster at
the clutch cover end to give maximum play in the
cable.
gaau
1.Adjuster slot
2. Cable release point
7. Remove the cable from the motorcycle noting the
cable routing.
Inspection
1.Clutch cable
2. Adjuster 1. Check the inner cable for free movement through
4. Release the clutch cable from the actuating arm by the outer cable.
pushing the inner cable nipple through the arm and 2. Examine the inner cable for frayed strands.
sliding the cable out of the slot Detach the cable
3. Examine the two inner cable nipples for signs of
from the bracket.
looseness and damage. Replace the cable if
necessary.
aij
1.Actuating arm
2. Inner cable
5. Align the lever adjuster and lever bracket slots.
Service Manual- Tiger 4.5

•I RL!:!! H
Clutch
Assembly Clutch
1. Position the cable to the motorcycle using the same
routing as noted du ri ng removal. Disassembly
2. Attach the inner cable to the clutch lever and
actuating arm using a reversal of the removal 1. Release the clutch cable from the a ct uating arm (see
process. page 4-5).
3. Refit the outer cable to the adjuster bracket at the 2. Remove the sta rter cover, right hand crank cover
clutch end. and associated sta rter gears to gain access to the
clutch cover bolt at the centre-right hand side.
dote:
• Ensure that the two adjuster nuts a re S ^^/
positioned one either side of the bracket.
0
4. Set the lever adjuster to a point where an equal ._ 2
adjustment is possible in both directions. I Q ° 0
5. Set the adjuster at the clutch end to give a 0
ry 0
prelimina setting of 2-3 mm of free play as
measured at the lever. Tighten the locknut. p
6. Operate the clutch lever several times and recheck i 0 p
the amount of free-play present,
7. Set the final adjustment of the cable to give 2-3 mm " 'k
of free-play at the lever by turning the adjuster nut at
the lever end. 1
Imp J XN
1. Right hand crank cover (starter cover removed)
2. Aluminium washer position
3. Remove the clutch cover.
4. Undo the bolts and springs and remove the clutch
pressure plate.
5. Remove the clutch pull rod.
iav 1
1.Clutch lever
2. Correct setting, 2-3 mm
8. Reconnect the battery positive (red) lead first.
kaik
1. Clutch pull rod
4.6 Service Manual - Tiger Twumem

6. Remove all the clutch friction plates and steel plates 8. Depress the rear brake pedal to prevent the engine
together with the anti-judder spring and anti-judder from turning, then release the clutch centre nut.
seat washer. 9. Remove the centre nut, belleville washer, clutc
te , inner drum and thrust washer.
Record the orientation of all components as , o
they are removed. The plates must be Q ° (7 ,
assembled in the same order.
T( "/
1
i
-wry
1. Centre nut
2. Belleville washer
3. Inner drum
scan 4. Thrust washer
1.Friction plate 10. Slide the clutch outer drum assembly gently
2. Steel plate backwards and forwards to dislodge the inner
3. Anti-judder spring bearing sleeve. Carefully remove the bearing sleeve
4. Anti-judder seat washer while supporting the clutch drum.
Note:
The outermost and innermost friction plates
differ from all others and must not be fitted
in any other positions. They are thicker and
are also darker in colour.
o
Refer to the following page of this section
for details of dutch friction plate checking.
® It is not normally necessary to disassemble
the clutch further, but if the clutch inner and
outer drums are to be removed, proceed as
follows:
7. Engage second gear and lock the inner and outer
clutch drums together using service tool T3880305.
1. Outer drum
2. Bearing sleeve
ii 11. Remove clutch outer drum leaving the oil pump
drive sprocket, bearing and sleeve in place on the
input shaft.
1. Service tool T3880305

11RIUMEM
Clutch
o hpection Bend/wairp
Check all plates for bend and warp as follows:
. is ess
1. Place the plate being checked on a clean surface
plate and attempt to pass a feeler gauge of the
1. If any friction plate thickness is outside the service
maximum specified thickness between the friction
limit, replace the friction plates as a set.
plate and surface plate at several points around the
plate. If the feeler gauge can be passed beneath the
friction plate at any point, renew the plates as a set.
H-if 3
ga
L1% ; NA
1. Clutch friction plate
2
Fri ion plate thickness - inner and outermost plates Baas
1. Friction plate
Standard 3.80 mm 2. Feeler gauge
Service limit 3.60 mm 3. Surface plate
Friction plate bend/warp

Friction Plate thickness - all other plates
P
Standard up to 0.15 mm
Standard 3.30 mm
Service limit 3.10 mm
4.8
Service Manual - Tiger uM
Assembly
1. Position the clutch outer drum assembly to the input

shaft and align the oil pump d ri ve pegs with the
corresponding holes in the rear of the clutch outer
drum.
0
0
Wo
1
i ^ 1
n 1. Outer drum
2. Bearing sleeve
0 Note:
0 / I • When the bea ri ng sleeve is correctly fitted,

it will be a flush fit with the clutch drum face.
ri;; tch outer drum In addition, a groove around the input shaft
will be visible.
21 Oil pump sprocket d ri ve pegs
3. Oil pump drive holes 4. Fit the thrust washer to the shaft.
2. To fully engage the outer drum, insert a suitable tool 5. Fit the clutch inner drum.
to preload and align the prima ry gear and backlash 6. Fit a new belleville washer ('OUT' mark facing
eliminator gear through the hole shown in the outwards), and refit the centre nut.
illustration below.
UUoo Belleville Washer 'OUT Mark `
1.Alignment hole
2. Outer drum
3. While holding the clutch outer drum in position and
ensuring correct engagement with the oil pump
drive, refit the bearing sleeve.

•flLqJ3H
Clutch
7. Lock the inner and outer drums together using 10. Refit the clutch pulirod.
service tool T3880305. Depress the rear brake pedal 11.. Refit the clutch pressure plate together with the
to prevent the engine from turning, and tighten the springs and bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 m.
clutch centre nut to 105 Nm. Remove the service
tool. Note:
• The pull rod should be free to move in and
out and also it should be free to turn.
12. Clean and refit the clutch cover incorporating a new
gasket Tighten the clutch cover bolts to 9 Nm.
13. Refit the starter cover and gears (see page 7-22).
14. Refit the outer cable to the adjuster bracket at the
clutch end (see page 4- 6) .
15. Set the clutch adjustment (see page 4-6).
gaaz 1
1. Service tool T388030S

8. Disengage second gear and check for free rotation
of the clutch inner drum.
9. Coat all clutch friction plates in clean engine oil
before fitting the friction plates, steel plates, anti-
judder spring and anti- judder seat washer to the
clutch basket in the same order and orientation as
noted during removal.
Note:
• The innermost and outermost friction plates
are different to the remainder.. For
identification, they are darker in colour and
are thicker.
• The outermost clutch friction plate is fitted
such that the outer tags of the plate are
engaged with the corresponding -individual
tags in the clutch outer drum.
Kan
1. Outer clutch friction plate

a. Outer drum
3. Individual tags

UMW
Ztrti _; i M ii ir TiJ;!1 ('I'
;]1T' I -I(.]Th
Exploded View - Crankshaft, Connecting Rod, Piston and Liner ................................... 5.2
ExplodedView - Crankcase ................................................................. 5.3
Crankcases............................................................................... 5.4
Disassembly........................................................................ 5.4
Assembly........................................................................... 5.4
Crankshaft............................................................................... 5.7
Removal........................................................................... 5.7
Installation.......................................................................... 5.7
R ds
Con n ecting o . ......................................................................... 5.8
Removal.......... .................................................................. 5.8
Installation.......................................................................... 5.9
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Selection/Crankpin Wear Check ............................... 5.10
ConnectingRod Bearing Selection ..................................................... 5.11
Pistons.................................................................................. 5.13
Disassembly........................................................................ 5.13
Piston Wear Check ................................................................... 5.13
Piston Ring Gap.... .
5.14
PistonAssembly ..................................................................... 5.15
CylinderLiners ........................................................................... 5.16
Removal............................................................................ 5.16
Installation..........................................................., ............... 5.17
CrankcaseBreather ....................................................................... 5.18
TOUMM Service Manual - Tiger 5.1

Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons
iAIk
5.2 Service Manual - Tiger LIMP

I
Service Manual - Tiger 5.3`

Tq^!M^p
[iiii ' al
rii 3. Release the lower crankcase bolts in the sequence

shown in the diagram below.
19 13 15 17 18 16 14 20 23
The upper and lower crankcases are machined as a 21
matched set and must never be assembled to non- 22 24
matching halves. Doing so may cause seizure of the 32

30
engine. 26
28 25
29
2. Remove the sump (see page 8-12).
27
3. Remove the engine covers.
4. Remove the clutch (see page 4-6).
5. Remove the oil pump drive chain and gears (see
page 8-9).
Disassembly
Lower Crankcase Bolt Release Sequence
v. y :
+
e;5: o.
,: .M't
. ,y^:'.,.:sv .o
,:{ :s:x;: ,v?.;r,..:
:,.^.:..:.:^:,.....:••
S
^:;xix#:af<si.. ;;T F ,^>
3...,o:.U,
at C.h
v <, N Y x^.,swR;;r;^f•C,?;v
... JJ bl \ K
.^.4s}
...,C:
)
\'t;"''}k,
1,: ,t, 'f 's> ^`J.:q . K^..5. ,'.G., : •a^"r.': ', ^^
'i .tF\^{
t5h $t
5 t^'
Cy6. o 'y
1 ' ),
^:R..Y^','w^Y^^S•..yi^ti,;rvj,•4,'S'.'R^^:^
,vy.
h`f i
`,},Zyyiy,.•'
^ÛJ^v ^
Y.
^'^ 'k
x:;X,,:,.nYY•.t`t:•'i^3'^^v3 .,yp.^^.^:n^L:^
t v'P\
4. Separate e and upper crankcases ensuring
SePa a e tthe lower
'^
`:^':'
w.:.,..
`ybvZ o n c:s. `r:,^,!`: ,
r,
tt ': •1 v^.':"r::,;o.,:,;
;: C.^.v, L.
a<x•:j;•.ty,
;:v
..,yS;•;:•,',u:; n .'?„^
t:
^`.+ J Y v
sR.,,x h.. <`v. "Ray 4:f:`
Caution
t.wi^ $V4^*y.
s .: yy,. . ,. '^r,:^?.s^:M. X,,. f .4^.• ;•.s.: ., ^,). t^\+^.. x.3ssîs^::;'{,:'y,^:yF,
:YV ^ W\v`'vp.^ ^, ^ S:.^Z'i
,..,oS;i;:':'\sA,`,;%^ ; ^':•aîE^,.v3i2y.o4,,.
Kiup5
• Fq f;
'^
'•r^ „\
,.a x:^;st: t:;C

t
^,,;' x
^::.uK\•'.' 5:(.
"^'. t `@X.. a^.
^:;^cai:
.i ^Js:^
p\ii• r^ ^
i :r ...R..:
:^ZV>,v
1. o:x;. yn
fik .v:
:x: rvx 3i...
y.
::.^ t
.s\?a:?:'{t:
is
that the 3 locating dowels remain in the upper
crankcase.
Failure to follow the correct screw release sequence may F.
:'t'JF: i i: $
•'<):nc',^^^
i ^ r v '\r
^”' f
r k x' ; So- ",i • a t v\1 r a
result inPpermanent crankcase

nk damage.
9e
y sS
;:' ^;.r4':.YS'y^.1:'Cn
.:,5.
L
^s'..i5i
^ 1` 2 to- p t s.
"K "
= :.. v1„1. :'
t >.C$t} ,h:j^ +
'^+'
- r+:
. : :^?.,s ^
v
t".k`^^`'hâ+:::i
'à's,"r.^'.+^`” . Y>r^.'•".,
t;•. t.^:`.;
A
^.^ ^^^.:•.a^.^..+d.'a:')n..
; : ,i ^vk ,. v:,
::,u,?i,.,,
"Y 1, CM Y
( iJ h^'•
s„'Sh•;::.'^:YS.::o,:t;!.t5:;.h^, ,•SO.M,.^;q,...
s D'j h\, ^j.^
^»...; .,.; ^:^h.,. ^,
,.,
'fit ^.^:: v^•2^• ,;;.,.^:.;'^:;^\?F;}:ti:?^
^Jt.,t,), ^t^f
v. •^: ^'s tY,^
v; '< y^. .
xis
1. Working on the upper crankcase bolts first, release
5
. r•... ;, . ^ ,.. ,t, ...
the bolts in the sequence shown below. Do not use levers to separate the upper and lower
sections of the crankcase or damage to the crankcases
could result.
G C G C C Note:
• At this point the transmission shafts,
balancer, crankshaft, bearings etc. can be
removed.
4
• Note the position of each individual bea ring
7 10
screw prior to removal.
9 8
11 Assembly
2
1. Use high flash-point solvent to dean the crankcase
mating faces. Wipe the surfaces clean with a lint-free
5 1 3 6 cloth.
Upper Crankcase Bolt Release Sequence 2. Fit the gearbox shafts (if removed), ensuring the
locating ring on the input shaft is in position in the
2. Invert the engine to give access to the lower circlip groove on the crankcase.
crankcase bolts.
3. Ensure that the transmission is in neutral.
5.4 Service Manual - Tiger IUM^

ii iiirii 1T ti ii .
I iiii
4. Ensure that the 3 locating dowels are in position in 8. Locate a new oil gallery 0-ring to the upper
the upper crankcase. crankcase.
ccyr 't ^\ I! _ nti 3 If

cc
1. 0-ring
1. Locating dowels 9. Position the lower crankcase to the upper, ensuring

5. Apply a thin bead of silicone sealant to the lower
that all selectors engage correctly. An assistant may
crankcase mating faces. (At the factory, Three Bond be required to support the crankcase during
12155 is used). alignment.
10. Fit the screws into the lower crankcase and hand
tighten until the bolt heads are near contact with the
crankcase.
11. Invert the engine.
12. Fit the screws into the upper crankcase and hand
tighten until the bolt heads are near contact with the
crankcase.
Note:
• The crankcase screws are tightened in
stages.
• Two different sizes of crankcase screw are
used. All screws are tightened through the
first stage of the tightening procedure but
1. Sealer areas only the M8 size screws are tightened at the
: second stage.
a., •
uv 5t`Cihr
:,^vnt
:r}'^ :; v;:•'
>,"?tt^.'.n•:,,.
:,
xW."'}i! :aa. rfi : .'`:.
:: •.
^5.3 : !,si;;: .a:"r.
•:,.{:Yv'
,Q
:SYS.:'4R •.oi;:..?.:ADC, uxaY.a Srh^.'.:'4r v: 'S',ti." a
fif?' ^5"
, aMv.
•
,,
rx, ..,h
CS:fma
..^••A x...
.vW:•. ,.. ^.:`l.'.::.:
:v:n.:,^^.i:..S,i<..:.SSV::y..:::..:..a^^,',.:?':,
<
:k .:....
"^ AS
::::.^,..... C'.tn.
,
t^'t"..n n
L.#.....::n.
,t
:
. :,
'uXr
b.
h♦
Caution
..., .: ..^...n^Â;^
^`
...:::n,..t..,
(,
ro.. • r$t.' w.Y
C
7'
Cy
,^• ^. q sth ^..`^9
^n...,,....:....:.:,.,•.:..,^:
.r .t. ,I,..L..> . sh
`
S•:
ô,
k
...nn:Sn.:s}.v::YC
c,î
C
, i:. ..:f ."...?.:}.v..r.n.

n..
t.. .is
x •.
A te..r:.l.. "
it^ ^
Sii£
• '
c` u`Si: "tee'"'•
•
•fit
♦
♦
5
^^}
^^,? t ,:sf
7t"
,..,a35ff;` '
5
t
'^'Y'
r î
?,
^m
< ,,^^^
e ^
#
SNt
p
T. f . 4..
'1 f+
t
u..
c
y ♦, ^•
^•
:.d .
âutioii+'{^ f ^$:. 's..

":^?:
n .# ... S,'s^":tb `L' v^ ^
i!5.?r:^+1:::
^
n f`^' x'^J^., , > • h♦ '.''?a:^:'ta• ^;`s,;

,'.^.n««:,
`^5
v}wsn. v.,n
.^•` M1 73' f
. 'i .. t•. r.)a..'Y.a...
t'
a
^. ^ "a`^,4:;
..a•..
Do not use excessive amounts of sealer. The extra sealer r :n3 ..:......:>
"o. ...s::^;,t.t.::.
^`S^+K,':}°k'SE• rc; amt..:: ^.....^::^.
, t n stta»vtY.Y,' Y... "D5:'. .c.:. .:.»
,..{::f:. t:. `^
YL,..
may become dislodged and could block the oil passages Failure to fo ll ow the correct screw tightening sequence
in the crankcases causing severe engine damage. may result in permanent crankcase damage.
6. Install and lubricate the crankshaft bearing shells Stage I - all screws
with clean engine oil (see bearing selection before
proceeding). 1. Invert the engine.
7. Lubricate the crankshaft journals with clean engine
oil.

MM
Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and P istons
2. In the correct sequence, tighten all lower crankcase Stage 2 - M8 screws only
screws to 12 Nm.
1. In the correct sequence, tighten only the M8 size
14 20 18 16 15 17 19 13 10 upper crankcase screws (numbers 22 to 29) to
12 \\ 28Nm.
11 ^ G 9
/ 3 2. Invert the engine.
1
'— 3. In the correct sequence, tighten only the M8 size
7
lower crankcase screws (number 1 to 14) to 28 Nm.
8
^^' j 4. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Check for tight spots
4 and rectify as necessary.
s
5. Refit the oil p umP drive chain and9 ears (seep9
a e 8-
2 21 1Q).
6. Refit the clutch (see page 4-9).
7. Refit the engine covers.
8. Refit the sump.
Lower Crankcase Bolt Tightening Sequence 9. Install the engine in the frame (see page 9-6).
3. Invert the engine.
4. In the correct sequence, tighten all upper crankcase
screws to 12 m.

U
Connelitting Rods
Installation
e oval
1. Remove the sprag clutch (see page 7-20). Always check the bearing journal clearance (see page 5-
12), before final assembly of the crankshaft. Failure to
correctly select crankshaft bearings will result in severe
engine damage.
1. If removed, insert the three piston cooling jets into

the main bearing housings in the upper crankcase.
kaji
1. Needle roller bearing

2. Gear/sprag clutch assembly
3. Plain washer
2. Remove the alternator rotor from the crankshaft (see
page 17-16).
3. Separate the two halves of the crankcase (see page 1. Piston Cooling Jet
5-4). 2. Select and fit new main and big end shell bearings
4. Remove the connecting rods (see page 5-8). using the selection processes detailed later in this
5. Remove the cam chain (see page 3-15). section.
6. Release and remove the crankshaft from the upper
crankcase.
Note:
® Identify the location of each bearing shell.
® Remove all bearings, and inspect for
damage, wear, overheating (blueing) and
any other signs of deterioration. Replace the
bearings as a set if necessary.
7. Remove the balancer (see page 6-3).
8. Collect the piston cooling jets from the crankcase
oilways beneath the crankshaft bearings.
Note:
This engine is fitted with a balancer drive 1. Big end shells
gear that is bolted on to the crankshaft. 3. Lubricate all bearings with engine oil.
Under no circumstances should the bolts be 4. Ensure that the crankshaft is clean, and that the
disturbed as • the crank and gear are not oilways within the crank are clean and free from
individually serviceable. blockages and debris.
5. Refit the balancer (see page 6-4).

Twumem 9
[ iii thtIt 1i..tTikI 1iP1
6. Install the crankshaft ensuring that the crank pins

align with the big ends and that the crankshaft and
balancer gear markings align as shown in the next
illustration.
Connecting rods may be removed from the engine after
first removing it from the frame. The cylinder head must
be removed and the crankcase halves separated.
1. Mark each big end cap and connecting rod to

identify both items as a matched pair and to identify
the correct orientation of the bearing cap to the
connecting rod.
2. Release the connecting rod nuts and remove the big
end cap. Ensure that the bearing shell remains in
place in the cap.
1. Balancer backlash and drive gear markings

2. Crankshaft markings
7. Refit the connecting rods (see page 5-9).
8. If removed, refit the transmission shafts.
9. Assemble the crankcases (seepage g e 5-4).
10. Assemble the alternator rotor (see page 17-17).
11. Assemble the sprag clutch (see page 7-22).
12. Assemble the cam chain (see page 3-17).
1. Big end cap

Note:
It may be necessary to gently tap the big
end cap with a rubber mallet to release the
cap from the bolts.
3. Push the connecting rod up through the crankcase
and collect the piston and connecting rod from the
top.
4. Label the assembly to identify the cylinder from
which it was removed.
Never re-use connecting rod bolts or nuts. If the

connecting rod cap is disturbed, always renew the bolts
and nuts. Using the original nuts and bolts may lead to
severe engine damage.
5. Remove the liner using tool 13880315 (see page 5-

16).
6. Detach the piston from the connecting rod (see page
5-13).
5.8
Twumem
4. Fit the piston and connecting rod assembly into the
liner from the bo ttom.
5. Fit the liner into the crankcase ensuring that the
arrow/dot on the piston faces forward.
Note:
• Ensure that the piston/liner/connecting rod
assembly aligns correctly with the crankpin
during assembly into the crankcase.
Connecting rod bolts and nuts MUST only be used

once. If the bolts or nuts are removed or undone for any
reason, new bolts and nuts MUST always be used.
Re-using bolts can cause connecting rods and their caps
to detach from the crankshaft causing severe engine
damage, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
1. Fit new connecting rod bolts to the big end. ^vni

tei' rr r If -ter i ® \\\i t ►
9ote: 1. Big end
• Ensure the piston is fitted correctly to the 6. Select big end bearing shells (see page 5-10).
connecting rod. 7. Lubricate both halves of the bearing shells with
• If a previously run engine is being rebuilt, engine oil and fit to the connecting rod and big end
always ensure that the piston and con-rod cap.
are assembled in the some orientation as 8. Align the connecting rod to the crankshaft and fit the
p ri or to strip-down. big end cap. Tighten the cap (using new nuts and
2. ` Apply molybdenum disulphide grease to the upper bolts) as follows:
inner surface of the connecting rod big end. 9. Lubricate the threads of the bolt and the face of the
Note: nut with molybdenum disulphide grease. Tighten the
nuts progressively in five stages as follows:
• Avoid touching any bearing surfaces of the
bearing shells with the hand.
3. Apply silicone sealer to the liner-to-crankcase mating
face.
ccvk
1. Liner
2. Sealer area

TwumeH •
T ii I
Connecting RodBig End earing

Selection/Crankpin Wear Check
The torque characteristics of the connecting rod nuts
and bolts are sensitive to the rate at which they are 1. Measure the bearing and crankpin clearance as
tightened. If all the torque is applied in one action, the follows.
bolt may be stretched and the nut may become loose Note:
when in service resulting in an expensive engine failure.
• Do not turn the connecting rod and
a) Tighten to 22 Nm. crankshaft during the clearance
b) Release by 1400.
measurement as this will damage the
'Plastigage'. The crankpin clearances are
c) Tighten to 10 Nm. measured using 'Plastigage' (Triumph part
d) Tighten to 14 Nm. number 3880150-T0301)
e) Tighten through 120° of nut rotation as measured 2. Remove the big end cap from the journal to be
using the Triumph torque turn gauge 3880105- checked.
T0301. 3. Wipe the exposed areas of the crankpin, and the
bearing face inside the cap.
4. Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a
small quantity of silicone release agent to the
Increment
bearing.
markings
5. Trim a length of the Plastigage to fit across the
journal. Fit the strip to the journal using the grease to
hold the Plastigage in place.
6. Release the nuts and remove the cap being
measured. Using the gauge provided with the
Plastigage kit, measure the width of the compressed
Plastigage.
7. Lubricate the threads of the bolt and the face of the
nut with molybdenum disulphide grease. Refit the
cbxt
bearing and cap and tighten the big end nuts (see
Service Tool 3880105-T0301 page 5-9).
9a_
Checking the Measured Clearance
Con rod big end bearing/crankpin clearance
Standard: 0.036 - 0.066 mm

Service limit: 0.1 mm

uMP
!Ti1 . I= (.1i
rote: For instance:

• If the measured clearance exceeds the Con-rod Mark 5
service limit, measure the crankpin Con-rod Big End Diameter 38.002
diameter.
Crankpin Diameter 34.987
Crankpin diameter Required Bearing Red
Standard: 34.984 - 35.000 mm Note:

Service limit: 34.960 mm • Repeat the measurements for all connecting
rods and their respective crankpins.
Note:
• It is normal for the bearings selected to
• If any crankpin has worn beyond the service differ from one connecting rod to another.
li it, the crankshaft must be replaced. Due 3. Install the new bearings in the connecting rod.
to the advanced techniques used during
manufacture, the crankshaft cannot be re-
ground and no oversize bearings are
available. •
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection

Minor differences in connecting rod dimensions are
compensated for by using selective bearings. For further
information on bearing part number to colour cross-
references, see the latest parts information.
1. Select the correct big end bearing shell as follows:

• Measure each crankpin diameter.
• Note the connecting rod marking. I. Big end bearings
2. Select the correct bearings. by matching . the
information found with the chart below.
Big end bearing selection chart Always confirm, using the Plastigage method, that the
running clearance_ is correct before final assembly.
Shell White Red Red Blue Severe engine damage could result from incorrect
Colour
clearance.
Rod 5 5 4 4
Marking
Con-rod 38.008 38.008 38.018 38.018
Big End 38.000 38.000 38.009 38.009
Bore Dia.
Crankpin 35.000 34.991 35.000 34.991
Dia. 34.992 34.984 34.992 34.984
Running 0.066
Clearance 0.036
Service Manual - Tiger 511

TRLqj311
[ iii ir.r flt1 Th*iiI! I TI(.I1T
Crankshaft main bearing/ ournal wear
Main Bearing Selection Chart

(all dimensions in mm's)
Shell Colour White Red Red Blue Blue Green
Crankcase 41.121 41.121 41.130 41.130 41.139 41.139
Bore 41.113 41.113 41.122 41.122 41.131 41.131
Journal Dia. 37.976 37.968 37.976 37.968 37.976 37.968
37969 37960 37969 37960 37969 37.960
Running 0.043 0.044 0.044 0.043 0.043 0.044
Clearance 0.020 0.020 0.021 0.019 0.020 0.020
Minor differences in crankshaft dimensions are Select bearings as follows:
compensated for by using selective bearings. For further
information on bearing part number to colour cross- 1. Measure and record the diameter of each crankshaft
references, see the latest parts microfiche. main bearing journal.
• Measure the bearing to crankshaft main 2. Measure and record each main bearing bore
journal clearance using Plastigage (Triumph diameter in the crankcase (bearings removed).
part number 3880150-T0301) (see page 5-9) Compare the data found with the chart above to select
bearings individually by journal.
For example:
Crankshaft Journal diameter 37972 mm
Crankcase Bore 41.135 mm
Bearing Required Blue
Note:
• It is normal for the bearings selected to
differ from one journal to another.
• It is also normal for there to be two options
of bearing shell colour. In such cases, pick
the shell size which gives the greater
running clearance.
Checking Crankpin Clearance Using Plastigage
Crankshaft main bearing/journal clearance
Standard: 0.019 - 0.044 mm Always confirm, using the Plastigage method, that the
running clearance is correct before final assembly.
Service limit: 0.07 mm Severe engine damage could result from incorrect
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the clearance.
diameter of the crankshaft main journal.
Crankshaft End Float
Crankshaft main journal diameter Standard 0.05 - 0.20 mm
Standard: 37.960 - 37976 mm Service Limit 0.40 mm
Service limit: 37936 mm Note:
Note: • Crankshaft end float is controlled by the
tolerances in crankshaft and crankcase
• If any journal has worn beyond the service
machining. No thrust washers are used. If
limit, the crankshaft must be replaced. Due
crankshaft end float is outside the specified
to the techniques used during manufacture,
limit, the crankshaft and/or the crankcases
the crankshaft cannot be re-ground and no
must be replaced.
oversize bearings are available.

uM
t1j1 ii ii iiI1t;'I
: I i&-
j
jThn piston Wear Check
1. Measure the piston outside diameter, 5 mm up from

0
isassemby the bottom of the piston and at 90 to the direction
of the gudgeon pin.
Note:
It is not necessary to remove the connecting 3
rods from the crankshaft.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 3-17).

2. Remove the liner, using tool T3880315 (see page 5-
16).
3. Remove the gudgeon pin cirdip from one side of the
piston.
z
capf
1. Piston outside diameter

2. Measurement point
3. Circlip removal groove
All Cylinders ( 78.980 — 78.970 mm

Replace the piston if the measured diameter falls outside
the specified limit.
OIII lI\t
Removing the Gudgeon Pin Circlip
4. Remove the gudgeon pin by pushing the pin
through the piston and rod toward the side from
which the circlip was removed.
`• ^c ar >
.
^: r^ ao. d w r â3 û' YF u
v; . !r3
2u^^^
w .a,:a° u' .uuxaA;:;. î q '# i th
•,
a ^ .$ a<
J 2b;2 ;^'^
v
^. 1,: •...:..
x`^'z^ }^
u
q
r ti ev •
3b a^, ) v ^ 4 o
^.vS'yaytti$ 4E;i r•.. C{.5yi"W..4^?:., •r^ ^'w.y'

^+ i ',a a! N +r
:S•
2
<tâ
îî^',^:,<
.i^ ^` 7• ^ ^ ^., .s.7^.S
a ^^' > <<h$ 9
y^^ , ^>:: :yn, Caution'-M

3 ^y ^w)y}^ 3^• 1. ^, ^1. •xa,S
).f ^' ^;:
: Fe•, f
f^
'"' ,, -a {,
). ` ,; g ^(•v`''•k
t F`Rfivf YQ•'K
N ^'f:):^â}^
^v^`^. v^^'
^:xfy:$2:k''; :\ >t :#E^v •i::.
^. ,...,:,
^
.w ^ y
ê
....:.... :,,,. .:::^:.:J.•<;, :v`
+n4::;;`':^4:•^....,....r........,,.:^^+...,..,.. •.,•:nS;?^:' ':5,:'t
^.tii.....,.aa: ^^'0'^.,f3..e
r.A..::.,^'fti.:x.:..r.,»..a :2f. ^wx
..:.... .:....n:.
:.. 'fS ::x.':h:;,. :':: .k',':^t:l`'..^:.:..
^^:.:..xf.....xs nir :.>..,
+.
,,c ,9
â
^.'^ ,:.f} ;k .:. .^.Jo f>: â. ..::k:•,>.2
.. `^' ^,P^$•
Never force the gudgeon pin through the piston. This

may cause damage to the piston which may also
damage the liner when assembled.
Note:
If the gudgeon pin is found to be tight in the
piston, check the piston for a witness mark
caused by the circlip. Carefully remove the
mark to allow the pin to be removed.
5. Piston rings must be removed from the piston using
hand pressure only.

T1ty! H
rankshaft, on ectin g9 Rods and
Pistons
PistonRings/ Ring Grooves Piston Ring Gap

Check the pistons for uneven groove wear by visually Note;
inspecting the ring grooves.
® Before final assembly the piston ring gap,
If all the rings do not fit parallel to the groove upper and when fitted in the liner, must first be
lower surfaces, the piston must be replaced. checked.
Clean the piston ring grooves.
. 1. Place the piston ring inside the liner.
Fit the piston ringsto the pistons. Check using feeler
gauges, for the correct clearance between the ring 2. Push the ring into the top of the cylinder, using the
grooves and the rings. Replace the piston and rings if piston to hold the ring square with the inside of the
outside the specified limit. bore. Continue to push the ring into the bore until
the third groove of the piston is level with the
____ %_ cylinder top, around full circumference of cylinder.
capg
MA
Piston Ring to Ring Groove Clearance Check
Piston ring/Groove Clearance Aligning Piston Rings using the Piston
Top ring 0.02 - 0.06 mm 1. Remove the piston and measure the gap between
Service limit 0.075 mm the ends of the piston ring using feeler gauges.
Second 0.02 - 0.06 mm Piston Ring End Gap Tolerances

Service limit 0.0.75 mm
Top 4.28 - 0.49 mm.
Second 0.43 - 0.64 mm
Oil Control 0.33 - 0.89 mm
2. If the ring gap is found to be too small, the ring end
must be carefully filed until the correct gap is
achieved. If the gap is too large, replace the rings
with a new set. If the gap remains too large with new
rings fitted, both the piston and liner must be
,replaced.

lu
q11T1 i iiiiii iflhi1 T ti iI .iii
1 FRONT
2
4
2
K 4
3 — ^t =
4
cagj
1.Top ri ng
2. Second ring
3. Steel oil control rings
4. Oil control ring expander
Piston Ring Identification Note:

• The top ri ng gap should be positioned in the
1. Fit the piston onto the connecting rod. 7 o'clock position, the second ring gap in the
Note: I o'clock position and the steel oil control
ring gaps in the 9 & 3 o'clock positions (one
• Connecting rods may be fitted either way in each position).
around. However, ensure all three are fitted
6. Fit the piston into the liner using a gentle rocking
the same way.
motion to engage the rings in the bore.
2. Align the small end in the connecting rod with the
gudgeon pin hole in the piston.
3. Lubricate the piston, small end and gudgeon pin
with clean engine oil and fit the gudgeon pin.
4. Fit new cirdips on both sides of the gudgeon pin
ensuring the circlips are correctly fitted in the
grooves.
Service Manual - Ti9er 5.15

rPt!:!. H
: .
[ m ' fITI (!Ii
V,
1. Paint mark
1. Mark each liner to identify correct orientation and

the cylinder number from which it has been
gaep removed.
2. Turn the crankshaft until the piston in the liner to be
Test Positions For Bore Wear Check (bore shown in
removed is at the bottom of its stroke.
section)
1. If any reading is outside the specified limits, replace 2

the liner and piston as an assembly.
3
nalw \mil
1. Tool T3880315
2. Extraction nut
3. Locking nut
3. Check that the locking nut on tool T3880315 is
loose, then fully unscrew the extraction nut.
4. Carefully fit the tool fully into the cylinder bore,
positioning the tool legs on the crankcase. Turn the
locking nut clockwise until the rubber sleeve on the
tool tightly grips the bore of the liner.
5. Check that the tool legs are positioned to allow
withdrawal of the liner, then turn the extraction nut
clockwise to extract the liner. Take care to ensure that
the piston / connecting rod is not allowed to fall
against the inside of the crankcase.
6. Turn the locking nut anticlockwise to release the liner.
5.16 Service Manual - Tier

9
I T ']iT1
Note: ^
5
. . r s 4f"Y Y}h < i i .
: zi'J
N2^,^.a
T
,ft^
y}.
'ik M x` t
^ .C'2y v "t a^tn , vt. } ^t1^'u "h s r F £ `Q'`
fiSi} ia 3
,` mnJ •^
r
.
f f ,' {'
^ ,t
• "'„}. ^w:•f• . Hra
Caution<`S:'
h> c ^ t o rrh t < ). ti .S
b
t vn. ^. :.vv.f1^}I.'t
e tool ust be used to release the sseal :::` : :
::.x.A{:t.;} t.;:;,:$
x ,.X,v....
1 .
'^.
::.n 2!..G:.a»i.i
v}r:î..,;.u;.,; n.v:.:;..:^N.f.::iii.v:a.
v)
^ ":.ar.:n., x,.;
n : ,.:.v.
t2 r^2 £>:°}:....._,. :i:c;6:=,^ff.y f:^.: raF :• : ,
}r :w. y . t ;;.:::
:L^..re;ld...:. : ; • : ,.x,a
9ka;A.y
t.
fr: : : 'rti:;
v'\nip"y:•v:tvvv}A::: r.::;.r,:,,....,:tv.. v,,:
•. Q' .v .,;t' ^,£.{:
:: .,,Nt.:.:..
h ;. n:::G.I
,
I. . . : n. : . ):}Y.v^te:,ny0.n: :.}^:: .:r.: :.t}:q: :i.,n rn. :.: : b'. hn.\:.v r.;::h :,
'
+.4tnf}R'K°••:..... ' S%Ya . :...u,,.r::a.:,^tiik ^#:.. ,
.i;..: :':\ nfa^^
.'^.•`Kx^:•s: ':6h^^r:?h'i
• :: a.:;:nd;;}}}f f; ...;:.^;rt.;• :;,::;. +.r.d',,, .;r.<•„^,:
.,..t:.:
^'::D
sf:': F:,,:..;..:...:::.::..a.s,a.a}li:^";.f
:.. :. ,s ai':,. to- h
h:rb: ...af;:•yf^ ,x,:. 0:
. :. }:. ^` ì?'2?i ..,}:....
act:Y'ti•b°.;::x. %'X':a"?::
,..?.aw'•1;;n,tf:^;:>.,
.. ^,
Y?.v:...x
u>. •:
between the liner and the crankcase.
.,
't'a'Y^:., a:::.
.,,k^„ . .:..
^fi^.a^ ,ff 4'îif; as;G:;:;
:+ nt:.^.::
,{ ^p.
.v ;^.n,}¢ku..:3..
i4: r<:: s .;,,'C trr ; t .,.K^£:% }.:g S2 ..;:;^^xr....,. ki•::";'.^ro:•>i;^;'F,%f;sAC.p'}..,.
.<x\U;Cn.^.ti:i^t'.i.}1;.;; y0i^5:nw;i<::r;:.:î{.,:n:.:n..{xN:•i:Gp: ^{nriv::::: ::..}.x...... ,°v'x.::^.x.Ê•.
Fit each liner over whichever piston is at TDC. When

It is not intended that the tool is used to I turning the engine, do not allow the pistons to contact
fully extract the liner. Once the seal is
released, the tool must be removed and the the inside of the crankcase and also do not allow fitted
liners to lift off the crankcase base.
liner extracted by hand• I
5. Continue fitting each liner in turn until all are fi tted
p
nstaaion and sealed.
Note:
1. Thoroughly clean the liner removing all traces of old
silicone sealer. • When the liners have been fitted, they
2. Remove all traces of sealer from the crankcase bores. should not be dis tu rbed. If it is necessary to
remove the liner after fitting, the sealer
3. pp y silicone
Apply s cone sealer to the liner to crankcase mating must be re-applied.
face.
1.Liner
2. Sealer area
4. Fit each liner over the piston using a gentle rocking
motion to allow compression of the piston rings.
El
Arrowed: Liner-piston Fitment

Note:
The liners have a large chamfer at the
bottom of . the bore enabling fitting of the
piston without need for a piston ring
compressor.

Twumm
1 R.TiTi
Crankcase Breather 2. The hose is retained by means of a spring-clip and

protrudes into the sump as shown below.
The upper crankcase is fitted with a labyrinth type
breather system, which requires no maintenance.
However, when assembling the crankcases, ensure that
the breather hose is not damaged and is securely fitted to
the breather as follows:
1. The hose should be pushed fully on to the breather

outlet.
0(

uM^
p`
,' S ° °r.wi
ExplodedView - Balancer Shaft .............................................................. 6.2

Balancer......................................................................... . ....... 6.3
Removal ........................................................................... 6.3
Inspection.......................................................................... 6.3
Assembly/Installation ................................................................. 6.4
TRJUM8H Service Manual - Tiger 6.1

Balancer
E^plm d ^d Vaew - Balancer Shaft
C^ J'
60 Nm
6 •2 Service Manual - Tiger . uM

iiwi
ii
The balancer is fitted to control 'pulsing' within the engine. E
Without any form of balancer, the engine would 'pulse'
each time the crankshaft rotated. This 'pulsing' would be
felt as a vibration which would amplify as the engine
speed was increased.
The balancer has the effect of a pair of counterbalance
weights which create an equal amount of energy in the
opposite direction, and at the same time as that produced
by the crankshaft, pistons and connecting rods. Because
the opposing pulses occur at the same point of crankshaft
rotation, and are of an equal magnitude, a state of
equilibrium or balance is reached.
kajq
I t I 1 i I
1.Wave washer
► . . , 2. Circlip
1. Separate the crankcase halves (see page 5-4). Inspection

2. With the crankcase halves separated, lift out the
balancer shaft complete with the shaft bearings/ 1. Inspect all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
circlips. 2. Inspect all bearings for signs of overheating (blue
discolouration), seized or damaged rollers, and any
Note: other damage.
• As the shaft is released from the crankcase, 3. Ensure the breather tube in the centre of the shaft is
the backlash eliminator gear will spring out not blocked by oil, debris etc.
of alignment with the crankshaft. 4. Inspect the backlash spring for deformities, damage
3. To remove the left hand bearing, slide the bearing, etc.
circlip and bearing sleeve from the balancer shaft. 5. Inspect the gear teeth for overheating (blue
4. To remove the right hand bearing, remove the bolt discolouration).
and slide the circlip, bearing race and inner ring from
the shaft. Note:
• Signs of blue discolouration on the gear
centre are due to the manufacturing process
and must be disregarded.
When removing the circlip, always ensure that the area

where the breather seal runs does not become
scratched or damaged. A damaged seal track will cause
oil to be ejected from the engine.
5. To strip the backlash eliminator from the drive gear,

release the circlip and remove the wave- washer,
backlash gear and spring.

TRIUMEH
Asse ly/In Ilation
0
1. If the backlash gear was disassembled, fit the i
backlash spring to the balancer drive gear,
positioning the spring ends on either side of the peg.
2. Fit the backlash gear, ensuring its peg is located
3.
clockwise of the balancer gear peg and also between
the spring ends.
Fit the wave washer and secure all components in
position with the circlip.
i/,7
k
ii
1. Backlash gear line
2. Drive gear dot
8. Using tool T3880016, bring the backlash and drive
gear marks into alignment against the backlash
spring.
Note:
• When in alignment, the line on the backlash
gear must be located directly above the
drive gear tooth marked with a dot.
kalb
1.Wave washer • Since the drive gear dot cannot be seen
when the backlash gear is in alignment,
2. Circlip
always mark the dot-marked gear tooth
4. Lubricate and fit the right hand bearing and circlip to with chalk in order that it can be identified.
the shaft.
9. Secure the backlash gear in position with the fixture
5. Apply Threebond TB1305 locking compound to the supplied with the tool by placing the fixture pegs
threads of the balancer bearing bolt. across two gear teeth (ensure that the fixture will not
6. Fit the bolt and tighten to 60 Nm. be in the way when assembling the balancer to the
7. Lubricate and fit the left hand bearing and circlip. crank).
Note:
• Prior to installation in the crankcase, it is
essential that the markings on the backlash
eliminator and drive gears are brought into
alignment against the tension of the spring.
This will facilitate correct positioning of the
balancer in relation to the crankshaft when
both are installed in the crankcase.
1. Tool T3880016
2. Securing fixture
10. With the drive and backlash eliminator gears still
correctly aligned, locate the balancer to the
crankcase aligning the balancer gears and crankshaft
as shown in the illustration below while ensuring that
the bearing cirdips locate correctly in their
corresponding grooves in the crankcase.
6.4 Service Manual - Ti er

9 Up
kajp
1. Balancer backlash and drive gear markings

2. Crankshaft markings
:.:
w\::.
y:s
.;§:ti :s•.Fx:<c:ia., .JN::
+S:vO.,. 'Ytfv'ftiS`+::uU'.^5::,'!r:i':•,S'•n'
w.•.:. ":S ^;^.• ., : J^•Jd;;i:" .. 'G39::3.^f'Y
.."+^'Y'J+ ..a:i}: ;:•:v.'x."v.',,•.'.;>:::v:;if::. ".:lS::'YRt'^ ..
^ },:"P
,^.;k;>n„
'^` i.^:^'!%R:\ .,^;'^'':
x...
:::.
;'C:..:?'
.:: „q:4.n? na \x....,„,k?, ,
":^ty;. l..K
. O: is f::
x...w':.:1..3.15
Y;ke k:.Yt.:xk\
k.ta^.., .?ni•.t^
f ^ts ` f ..
:^
iF.7^:^ ',U: ':;§: "f:.. ;n.
' ?`Sn.:
v #!uf;,;'Fr
`\':i;!:aY':.: ^'î' ;• .:.
^`:,^;. ^ :.Y
;r; e^^."^^ ::E<^:
J ;
' ^F?A.
^'^ # ' n.
y ' •<
:.f.ia" v
. 5^:,'.•' .^`,^^^.',•ì i 't • 0,:;Â,4x
.
>^ \
`:'. ” J1:•
;..:.0,,.:,. <fvs'^3':.,. J.... xt^ ,` y S:yc• . A .^d ,u\.. c'.f;.,
'F•:., :.vn`C.#.i ,x > .x
>;:.a
kkf^:,^;o
„5:..
,., ;,
:
:i :::.^">w`:f
:•3:'u:
, .;e:,H,r.
:•.k̀?.Y..: .S^:k;':^::.:..:,;!'. ,3;:'^.:::k.,'.,`.'.i
: ;;.:9.
- .:ax::?3f,•,.'4^.:.K^::,...S,:::
,' v'•}.. :::4.+:.
:..2,,..,?:S:f%:? ^:;.Y?k.. 'xî?e..::âv ..^:Ji.
s :..,:.. ^:.?.a:^^^'•.... ..\^,ix:^kf;.f^tv:>x•...
+^T; î;::'\i^:k:,^4,'y':
..k..^ ... :4.. }.vf ';:?k:
If the balancer and crankshaft are not correctly aligned,

severe engine vibration will occur leading to damage to
components.
1 /p) \(o/
1. Circlips
2. Crankcase circlip grooves
11. Remove the securing fixture.
12. Check that the balancer and crankshaft are correctly
aligned before continuing to assemble the crankcase
halves.

TwUmem
6.6
Service Manual - Tiger y I

7 Transissi - n
Table
Contents
View
Ex p l oded - Input and Output Shafts ..................................................... 72
View
Exploded - Sprag Clutch and Starter Gears .............................................. 7.3
Ex lo edView - Gear Selectors and Drum .................................................... 74
p d
ExplodedView - Gear Change Mechanism ............. . ...................................... 75
.
SelectorShaft, Selector Forks and Drum .....` ....... ............
. ............................ 7.6
Removal ............................................................................ 7.6
Inspection........................................................................... 78
Installation........................................................................... 7.8
In utand Output Shafts Assemblies ...... ................... .... .. ...................... 7.11
p
Removal.. .............................................................................. 7.11
Installation........................... . .................... ................. ......... 7.11
InputShaft .............................................................................. 7.12
Disassembly......................................................................... 7.12
Assembly.......................................................................... 714
Output Shaft ............................................................................ 7.16
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Assembly........., ............................................................... 718
Starter Drive Gears /Sprag Clutch . .. ..................................................... 720
Removal. . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Inspection ........................................................................ Z21
Installation..................................... .:................................. 722

1•Rt!:!! H
Transmission
I!!
7.2
Service Manual - Tiger p p-
Transmission
q . X r.^ ^ . ; f - ^ t:
_ J,.
- ;^ ! ^ _^ ^ ^ 1 _^ ^, it
J
o ^.
54 Nm
T uM H Service Manual - Ti9er 7.3

Transmission,:
r;: r I'AIWAV C
I*iJb3 (']'I *1iT! liJillili
12 Nm
N '.
!'1
i^r
O
7.4
Service Manual -Tiger
L1M
Lam'

uM
Transmission-
Selector shaft, Selector Forks and Note:

Drum • The centre selector fork locates in the
selector drum as shown below:
removal

2. Separate the two halves of the crankcase (see page
5-4).
3. Remove the input and output shafts from the
crankcase (see page 7-11).
4. Remove the fixing and take out the 'U shaped
keeper plate from the selector shaft. Discard the
fixing.
1. Selector fork stop

2. Selector fork guide
3. Selector drum
5. Using a suitable tool, push the selector shaft out
3— from the crankcase in the direction of the keeper
plate. Collect each selector fork as they are released
by the selector shaft.
6. If not already removed, note the position and
ka orientation of the gear pedal crank in relation to the
11
shaft, then remove the pedal.
7. Remove the e-clip and washer from the gear pedal
1. Fixing end of the gear change shaft.
2. Keeper plate
3. Selector shaft
The selector forks can be fitted incorrectly. Ensure the

17
position and orientation of the selector forks are marked-
prior to removal. Incorrect fitting of the selector forks will
cause gearbox damage.
1.Gear change shaft

2. E-clip
7.6 Service Manual - Tiger •

UM'
8. Withdraw the gear change shaft from the clutch end 12. Release and remove the bolt securing the selector
of the crankcase and collect the washer from inside drum bearing to the crankcase. Discard the bolt.
the crankcase.
,
1. Bolt
13. Ease the selector drum backwards and forwards to
push the drum bearing out of the crankcase.
14. Withdraw the drum from within the crankcase.
Selector Drum Removal
1.Washer
2. Detent arm
3. Spring
4. Fixing
9. Release and remove the fixing securing the detent
arm.
10. Withdraw the detent arm complete with its spring
and washer. Discard the fixing.
11. Remove the fixing from the centre of the detent
wheel (discard the fixing) and withdraw the wheel.
Note:
• To prevent drum rotation, use a stout rod
through one of the through-holes in the
drum. Care must be taken not to damage
the oil pressure relief valve.

TuM M
Transmission
Inspection Installation
Note:
1. Examine all components for damage and/or wear,
paying particular attention to the selector forks and • The detent wheel is keyed to the selector
selector drum. Replace any parts that are damaged drum
and/or worn.
1. Position the selector drum into the crankcase.
Gtar selector fork thickness
Standard 5.80 - 5.90 mm

Gear selector groove width O

Standard 6.00 - 6.10 mm
Selector fork to groove clearance
0.55 mm max. I kakn

2. Examine the gear change shaft seal for damage and/
or wear. Replace the seal if damaged and/or worn. Locating the Selector Drum
2. Using clean engine oil, lubricate the selector drum
hParina_
3. Position the bearing into the crankcase recess and
engage with the selector drum.
4. Refit the bearing retainer. Secure with a new bolt
and tighten to 12 Nm.
1. Bearing retaining bolt

5. Fit the detent wheel engaging the wheel with the
locator pin in the selector drum. Tighten a new fixing
to 12 Nm.
7.8
UMW
Transmission
6. Assemble the detent arm as noted on removal and 11. Feed the washer onto the shaft and insert the gear
place up to the crankcase. change shaft into the crankcase. Gently push the
gear pedal end of the shaft through the bearing and
seal located, at the gear pedal end, in the crankcase.
________,J 0
\ \ gr \ \\
kaje
1. Washer
2. Detent arm
3. Spring 1. Gear change shaft
4. Fixing 2. Washer
7. Hold the detent arm assembly in position and fit a 12. Ensure that the gear change shaft locates in the
new fixing. Start the thread and push the detent arm, detent wheel/arm and that the spring fits over the
using finger pressure, to locate on the detent wheel. abutment bolt.
Ensure the detent arm remains correctly located on
the detent wheel. Tighten the capscrew to 12 Nm.
8. Rotate the selector drum and ensure a smooth
movement. Rectify as necessary. 2
9. Using clean engine oil, lubricate the lip of the seal on (
the gear change shaft.
10. Lubricate, with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and
molybdenum disulphide grease, both sides of the
fingers of the selector mechanism on the gear
change shaft.
. r ;,,2, „X
n,. T.
+ •i
E, `>,: "; ftifi ; " ,;ti, <; ,:: „y,. "•rb ;thr` !fi
,:+:;. . ,^t.:e: . ,vn.h.,.<.:.o-:.,.i';:^,4:. :;^: ,;: ^. :>:h;\,a.C. a. ^,:•: .: îtì, ;axa:>a
'%C
n.f..:^`^:;r:^^.;;•:R;i:Mb•::^^,t:,^^ :to' wt.,::
•.,•:;^
>.... ,?• X
,.,.^.:,:. ....r.'.4t ." ^ Se
' . ::..., .:^:..J;,+;+:i;.u.
`•^'<
^3'«.
><`t#?.,x^^52^2:.`^
:.:::. i:....;,. .. ... : R,.. .::.n•,.,e^'"?^,...
::;.,
.,...wo.::... . .,,>x.,..,..3+>q
We
Take care to avoid damaging the lip of the seal when

inserting the gear change shaft into the crankcase. A 1. Gear change shaft
2. Detent arm
damaged seal will lead to oil loss and could result in
3 Abutment bolt
engine damage.
4. Spring

UMW
I Ii Ti 1TTI)1
13. Fit the large washer and e-clip to the gear pedal end 17. Push the selector shaft into the crankcase from the
of the gear change shaft. keeper plate end. As the shaft is inse rted locate the
selector forks and also fit a new O- ri ng (0-ring
located at the keeper plate end). Ensure the forks are
2 fitted in the positions noted during removal.
1. Gear change shaft 1

2. -clip
3. Washer 1. 0-ring
14. Fit the gear pedal crank to the shaft in the same Note:
orientation as noted prior to removal. Tighten the
fixing to 9 Nm. ® The centre selector fork locates in the
selector drum as shown below:
15. Position the selector drum in the neutral position.
16. Check that the detent arm locates in the raised
profile in the detent wheel (neutral position).
1 2
1. Selector fork stop

kaks n 2. Selector fork guide
3. Selector drum
1. Raised profile
18. Fit the 'U shaped keeper plate.
2. Detent arm
19. Fit a new capscrew, and tighten to 12 Nm.
h ^^ y"^5,,^n;3;. :
t
t ^ j,;w"r.^ 4 d^1^^ ^^ t^£ Yy+^' ^k." o a'^ ::^^:^} v ^•ZZ^^^^^^^>^"'
«^^.^ ..^$.^.. i: y:'• _^^^: ^.•4 ;^:.:^^;.::....^::.

a # 3
I
?i^
A
M'•.
p M^ ^^' )
'
t
^
:i'<.A ^'^f^ w:,.'

<.
: ,.:.t ^^'!.0
^ ± y: \^:. ^ ^ .l,'S.r :.. ^ i
^^ \
^^:^1e"`Mfii'^ ^`â^ ^ '^y > ^^'i2
^ w > i^' f kf^
(
:t;:
u:. . t k. ...:
t ^ ^%i{4^ ^:i^Y:^'
^ î
.Xti'
L.t§. ">ik
^, #
^^'}S.SY:i:^t
:,:> 20. Fit the in ut and out ut shafts see a e 7j

p
./
1
The selector forks can be fitted incorrectly. Ensure the

position and orientation of the selector forks are the
same as noted during removal. Incorrect fitting of the
selector forks will cause gearbox damage when
changing gear.
7.10 Service Manual - Tiger . UMW

Lam'
Input d Output Shafts Ass b i 5. Ensure the output shaft seal aligns with its recess in
the crankcase.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for the input shaft and ensure
Removal that both sets of gear mesh correctly and that the
half-circlip is correctly located and is not accidentally
1. Remove the engine from the frame (see page 9-2). omitted.
2. Separate the two halves of the crank case (see page
5-4)'
3. Lift the input and output shaft assemblies out of the
upper crankcase.
Installation
llation
1. Place the output shaft in position in the crankcase.
2. Ensure the retaining ring on the bearing locates in
the groove provided in the crankcase.
3. Ensure the output shaft seal aligns with its recess in
the crankcase.
//
1. Groove in crankcase
2. Retaining ring
3. Seal
4. Ensure the dowel in the output shaft needle roller
bearing is positioned to locate in the hole provided
in the upper crankcase.
1
' I
k*
1.Roller bearing
2. Dowel

UMW'
Transmission......
8. Remove the circlip (11) from in front of fifth gear.
7.12
Transmission
ccsa
1.Bearing Sleeve 9. Circlip

2. Half Cirdip 10. Third/Fourth Gear
3.Needle Roller Bearing 11. Circlip
4. Thrust Washer 12. Thrust Washer
5. Second Gear 13. Fifth Gear
6. Sixth Gear 14. Input Shaft
7. Splined Bush 15. Input Shaft Bearing
8. Thrust Washer

TWUMPOjot
I u iiiiirsT1
• f ^
cosh. w
ccsi
Pressing Off The Input Shaft Bearing Pressing On the Input Shaft Bearing
2. Fit fifth gear (13) to the input shaft with the dog teeth
Assembly pointing away from the input shaft bearing.
3. Slide on the thrust washer (12).
tote:
4. Fit a new circlip (11) to the input shaft ensuring that
• Lubricate each gear and bush with clean the clip is located in the circlip groove.
engine oil du ri ng assembly.
® Examine all gears, bea ri ngs and sleeves for 2
damage, chipped teeth and wear beyond 3
the service limits. Replace all s us pect
\
components and always use new circlips to
assemble the shaft. 1
1. Place the input shaft bearing on press bars ensuring

the inner race of the bearing is supported by the
bars and the circlip groove is pointing upwards. j II
Position the mainshaft to the bearing with the clutch
end pointing downwards through the bearing. Press
the shaft through the bearing until the bearing
comes into contact with the fixed gear on the shaft. ,
1. Fifth gear
2. Thrust washer
3. Cirdip
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and 5. Fit the combined. third/fourth gear (10) with the
hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently larger gear facing toward fifth gear. Ensure that the
break-up under load and the debris caused during oil hole in the input shaft DOES NOT align with the
break-up may cause damage and inju ry to unprotected oil hole in the gear.
parts of the body.
Never wear loose clothing which could become trapped
in the press and cause crushing injury to the hand, arms
or other parts of the anatomy.
If the oil hole in the third/fourth gear is aligned with the
corresponding hole in the input shaft, engine oil
pressure and gear lubrication will be reduced.
Reduced oil pressure and gear lubrication will cause
engine damage and could also lead to engine seizure
resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

. UMI^
6. Fit a new circlip (9) to the input shaft ensuring that 11. Fit the thrust washer (4) adjacent to second gear and
the circlip is located in the circlip groove. slide on the needle roller bearing (3).
ccwa
1 Third/forth gear 1. Second gear

2. Thrust washer 2. Thrust washer
3. Circlip 12. Finally, fit the bearing sleeve (1) to the needle roller
7. Fit the thrust washer (8) to the input shaft and slide bearing.
up the shaft until in contact with the circlip.
8. Fit the splined bush (7) from sixth gear taking care
that the oil hole in the shaft aligns with the hole in
the bush.
9. Fit sixth gear (6) with the dog teeth facing third/
fourth gear.
vz
1. Sixth gear
2. Splined bush
10. Fit second gear (5) with the stepped side facing away
from the clutch end of the input shaft.

IUM^
Cutput Thaft 12. Remove thrust washer (16) and slide off second gear
(17).
Working from the opposite end to the drive sprocket,
13. Position the output shaft (18) in a vice with soft jaws
dismantle the output shaft as follows.
fitted. Tighten the vice to prevent the shaft from
turning and release the lock tab (20) from the output
Disassembly sprocket nut (19), then release the nut.
14. Remove the transmission sprocket nut (19), locktab
1. Remove the output shaft bearing sleeve (1), needle (20) and sprocket (21).
roller bearing (2) and hardened thrust washer (3). 15. Collect the oil seal (22) and retaining ring (23).
2. Mark one side of first gear to denote its correct 16. If it is found necessary to replace the large bearing
orientation. Remove first gear (4) from the shaft.
(24) at the end of the shaft, use a press to remove
3. Remove the first gear bearing and thrust washer both the bearing and output sprocket sleeve
.(11). together.
4. Slide fifth gear (5) from the shaft.
5. Remove the circlip (6) from in front of the third gear.
6. Remove the splined thrust washer (7) from the shaft.
7. Remove the third gear (8). When removing the output .shaft bearing, always wear
8. Slide fourth gear (10) off the shaft and also remove overalls, eye, face and hand protection. The bearing
the splined bush (9) and thrust washer (12). races are hardened and are liable to splinter if broken.
9. Remove the circlip (13) from in front of sixth gear. Debris from broken bearings could cause injury to eyes,
10. Remove sixth gear (14) from the shaft. face and any unprotected parts of the body.
11. Remove the circlip (15) from in front of second gear.

UMW
Transmission
1. Bearing sleeve 14. Sixth gear

2. Needle roller bearing 15. Circlip
3. Thrust washer 16. Thrust washer
4. First gear 17. Second gear
5. Fifth gear 18. Output shaft
6. Circlip 19. Nut
7. Thrust washer 20. Lodktab
8. Third gear 21. Output sprocket
9. Third gear bush 22. Oil seal
10. Fourth gear 23. Retaining ring
11. First gear bearing & washer 24. Bearing
12. Thrust washer 25. Sleeve
13. Circlip
Service Manual - Tiger •

7.17
:IRL!!: H
a
i^ y
r i1
Assembly 5. Locate the second gear (17) to the shaft with the
large step side facing away from the output sprocket
Mote: end. Fit the thrust washer (16) and retain with a new
0 circlip (15).
Lubricate each gear and bush with clean
engine oil du ri ng assembly.
® Examine all gears, bearings and sleeves for
damage, chipped teeth and wear beyond
the service limits. Replace all suspect
components and always use new circlips to
assemble the shaft
1. Working from the output sprocket end of the shaft,

fit a new bearing (24) and new sleeve (25) to the
shaft using a press and press bars. Fit the sleeve with
the large chamfer facing outwards. ^, \\V
ccww
1. Second gear
2. Thrust washer
3. Grchip
6. Fit sixth gear (14) with the selector fork groove facing
away from the output sprocket end. Ensure that the
oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the
corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.

Transmission
7. Fit a new circlip (13) to retain sixth gear. 10. Fit the thrust washer (7) and retain with a new circlip
(6).
ccvp ^-1
1. Sixth gear cowe

2. Thrust washer 1. Third gear
3. Circlip 2. Thrust washer
8. Fit the thrust washer (12) to the rear of fourth gear. 3• Circlip
Fit the splined sleeve (9) for fourth gear, taking care 11. Fit the fifth gear (5) to the shaft with the groove
to align the oil hole in the shaft with the facing towards the output sprocket. Ensure that the
corresponding hole in the bush. Fit fourth gear (10) oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the
to the shaft with the large step side facing towards corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
the output sprocket.
If the oil holes in the fifth gear are aligned with the
corresponding hole in the input shaft, engine oil
pressure and gear lubrication will be reduced.
Reduced oil pressure and gear lubrication will cause
engine damage and could also lead to engine seizure
resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
12. Fit the first gear thrust washer and bearing (11).
wnu
1. Fourth gear
2. Thrust washer
9. Fit third gear (8) with the larger step side facing away
from the output sprocket.
Cm
1. Fifth gear
2. Thrust washer
3. Bearing

Tty!H
9M
.-
13. Fit first gear (4) to the shaft as marked during 3. Withdraw the large starter idler gear noting the fitted
disassembly. position of all components.
0 0
► O
0 3 1
®c^
ccwg
1. First gear 1. Idler shaft

2. Thrust washer 2. Wave washer
14. Finally fit the thrust washer (3), needle roller bearing 3. Flat washer
(2) and bearing cap (1) to the end of the shaft. 4. Idler gear
5. Bearing
6. Fl at washer
Starter Dr8, G / ra utch securingthe ririgh
4. Remove the boltssecurin ht hand crank
noting the position of the aluminium washer
under the head of one of the upper bolts.
Removal
Note:
1. Disconnect the batte ry, negative (black) lead first (see e There are two bolts located i nside the cover
page 17-7)
in the area behind the starter idler9ear.
2. Remove the starter cover.
1. Right hand crank cover

1. Starter cover 2. Aluminium washer position

Transmission
U
1. Idler shaft
2. Gear
3. Wave washer
'c_
trail
• Needle roller bearing
2. Sprag dutch and gear
3. Plain washer
9. Recover the washer from the end of the crankshaft.
6. Using tool T3880017, prevent the sprag from
turning and remove the sprag fixing and washer
Inspection
from the end of the crankshaft
1. Examine the sprag clutch for signs of slipping,
overheating (going blue) and for any other damage.
2. Examine all gears for chipped teeth, overheating
(going blue) and for any other damage.
3. Examine all bearings for chipped, broken or seized
rollers, overheating (going blue) and for any other
damage.
4. Examine the end of the crankshaft for damage.
kajk / /
1. Tool T3880017
2. Sprag fixing
7. Slide the sprag clutch and gear from the crankshaft.

IDUUM
Transmissionl
Installation 10. Lubricate then refit the large starter idler gear
ensuring that all components are located in the
1. Fit the sprag's washer to the crankshaft. positions noted on removal.
2. Assemble the needle roller bearing and sprag gear
to the sprag clutch.
3. Locate the sprag clutch assembly to the crankshaft. 0 0
Note: 0
The sprag clutch wi ll only fit with the 0 p
crankshaft when the master splines on both
components are aligned.
3
1 5
62I
D @
1. Idler shaft
2. Wave washer
3. Fl at washer
4. Gear
5. Bearing
6. Flat washer
11. Thoroughly clean the starter cover.
kajm 12. Position a new gasket to the dowels then refit the
1. Sprag clutch starter cover.
2. Crankshaft end 13. Fit and tighten the cover bolts to 9 Nm.
4. Prevent the sprag from turning using tool T3880017 14. Reconnect the battery positive (red) lead first.
then fit and tighten a new sprag fixing and washer to
54 Nm.
5. Lubricate the idler gear shaft.
6. Fi t the small idler gear, shaft and wave-washer
(washer to the outside of the gear) to the crankcase.
7. Thoroughly clean the right hand crank cover.
8. Position a new gasket to the crankcase dowels then
refit the right hand crank cover.
9. Ensure the bolt with the aluminium washer is
correctly located then tighten the cover bolts to
9 Nm.
kajI e^
1. Right hand-crank cover

2. Aluminium washer position

. l^M^
U Ts L mTZ
ExplodedView - Sump ..................................................................... 8.2
ExplodedView - Oil Pump and Gears ........................................................ 8.3
ExplodedView - Oil Cooler ................................................................. 8.4
EngineOil Circuit ......................................................................... 8.5
EngineOil Circuit Description ............................................................... 8.6
EngineOil ............................................................................... 8.6
Specification........................................................................ 8.6
TriumphEngine Oil .................................................................. 8.6
OilLevel Inspection ........................................................................ 8.7
Oiland Oil Filter Change ................................................................... 8.7
Disposalof Used Engine Oil ........................................................... 8.8
OilPump ................................................................................ 8.9
Removal .......................................................................... 8.9
Inspection......................................................................... 8.10
Installation.......................................................................... 8.10
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch ........................................
. .
... ......... 8.11
Installation.......................................................................... 8.11
Sump.................................................................................. 8.12
Removal ............................................ 8.12
. . . 00..0............0..........
Inspection.......................................................................... 8.12
Installation................... .. . .... 8.13
.8.13
OilCooler ............................................................................... 8.14
Removal ........................................................................... 8.14
Inspection.......................................................................... 8.14
Installation.......................................................................... 8.14
.
Twu MJ
1 {-. 1
E2 p^ o d^ d Vi Su m ^
25 Nm a-_________________ 12 Nm
10 Nm
10 Nm

UMP
e T T
13.7 Nm
13.7 Nm
15 Nm

UMW

Lubricati on
s
IA [4 i11:T;1 r
II
:::
: ,
o
^ 10 Nm
8 V
10Nm
1ONm
IA[ 'J1 I i.i u
25 Nm
13 Nm
8 Nm

Ent ine Oil Circuit
D D D
Q 17 17 A - COOLED OIL
111 Q - UNCOOLED OIL
Service Manual - TiTiger

- 8.5
TR!!.M^
p
L r.ra
Oil is collected from the sump and is drawn through a

mesh strainer into the oil pump rotor. The oil pump is Specification
fitted with a single pumping rotor which supplies
pressurised oil to the lubrication circuit and the oil cooler. Use semi or fully synthetic 1OW/40 or 15W/50 motorcycle
engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher)
Pressurised oil is delivered to the outside rim of the oil and JASO MA, such as Mobil 1 Racing 41
filter near to where the oil pressure relief valve is fitted.
The relief valve is set to open at 75 Ib/in2 and when open,, X+ kfi• k x
,^JL ^^ e ^'k) o' ^•^.' °yy• 4 ^" ^s f• rv ; , t w' . t3' t
L
t ;t fi } i Y b #f TLb°t G £^so
2
' 7.,£ap
"f
^
" ..>b z ybL\

in ^git ^.. )'4^ haw '^ss
,. .,,; .3>.. vtv:n,).,:i, r.sL
) }R" a
;; L^.. ,,.^` ^: ,. `^ % . Y . .
returns hi9h ressure o it direct to the sum .
. "^
hC ^
^;i.)c::.
::;1... '
o....s . v{.,.n,.,.u
°.^: :yi. U^t:. ^...^:t
C:^`ci`ti .
.^
x) ..°^
.^•• N 'S
v..vn5.1 ;C
+
wff"^ ;,^L^'^,'x hL i ^ :
.`, A, ^{.
^. ^^Caution
t^:K:^:.^:.

't^)Y:.
S .
•:
Z5. ..:
... ° . .
^"\
p p
J` •G! .
+,: zt:i+^: '

^
•>a ,`:^:3kS^•2î, :..^;

r.^: nc;: :. f{.^;.is';^`
,L ..:`c; t:.)§ '^,^:..r^x::.,'^.f:y;;c>.. ,`:îx,^:x..
>S;:
::?'.S:BYt:^G..,."it^...
>:^2czaL, .i.. ,riî:.. ^•^::n ^^
.... z: :::.::::::::::t:):.:..
^v ;C . :
^.
„s.w3ST.
. C;.)<f .^..
Cao::!'•^r.:
•)m
:,
:t'^ kt,
' ..:^. ......::L`
,::..y..,„•„.
^ + £v `V' $ ..tp,
.,..;a t wi. ,v, ):. #i'x.. :5i;°3s"Ea
`^.;•.
:c' :a,.
\''yr)'''
...h: ^,:t;:::'<v^.:ti^
.,..",'^,y
:,rv..y;;A: ,;?:
.. 3.;:,"'
. ........................,....,v::,::: !t^";l:;.5;:.z::::.:'^:. 'A
<"?;.?,.:uf,::m,:tt:>,S;G;;,t<)L,:::.,:v:):.,:::,::::::::....: ^.^:.:r:.:.„,:.::::».:.:::,::.,:.::.,::'.}d':;:Y..fi^14:::"'
Filtered oil is then fed into the lower crankcase galle ry and
Triump h high g performance fuel injected engines are
from here is distributed around the engine:
designed to use : semi or fully synthetic motorcycle
1. Some oil is sent directly to the cylinder head via a engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher)
AND JASO MA.
drilling in the upper crankcase and an external link
pipe. A low oil pressure warning light switch is Do not add any chemical additives to the engine oil. The
located at the crankcase end of the link pipe. Oil that engine oil also lubricates the clutch and any additives
arrives at the cylinder head is fed to both cams via a could cause the clutch to slip.
galle ry in the cylinder head casting that delivers oil Do not use mineral, vegetable, non-detergent oil, castor
directly to the sprocket end cam bearings. Oil is then based oils or any oil not conforming to the required
fed through the hollow camshafts to the other specification. The use of these oils may cause instant,
camshaft bearings, the tappet buckets and the severe engine damage.
valves. Ensure no foreign ma tter enters the crankcase during an
2. The remaining oil is sent directly to the remote oil oilchange or top-up.
cooler (mounted beneath the radiator). Cooled oil is
returned to the main galle ry located under the Triumph Engine Oil
crankshaft. Here it is delivered to the crankshaft main
bearings and, via drillings in the crankshaft, to the Your Triumph Motorcycle is a quality engineered product
big end bea ri ngs. which has been carefully built and tested to exacting
standards. Triumph Motorcycles are keen to ensure that
Spray jets located in the upper crankcase, behind the you enjoy optimum performance from your machine and
main bearing shells, lubricate the pistons and connecting with this objective . in mind have tested many of the
rod small ends. These jets are fed oil from the crankshaft engine lubricants currently available to the limits of their
oil feed. performance.
Oil is fed to the gearbox via internal oil pipes and drillings Mobil 1 Racing 4T consistently performed well during our
that supply oil directly to the end of each shaft. Oil is tests and has become our prima ry recommendation for
circulated along the gearbox shafts to exit holes that feed the lubrication of all current Triumph motorcycle engines.
directly to the bearings, gears and selectors.
Mobil 1 Racing 4T, specially filled for Triumph, is available
On the Tiger, oil is also fed to the alternator cover to aid from your authorised Triumph dealer.
cooling of the alternator. The oil is taken from the
crankshaft oil feed and directed to the cover via drillings in
the upper crankcase and through a small hole in the cover
gasket.
8.6
L1M
1 1:
3. With the motorcycle upright, remove the filler plug/

dipstick, wipe the blade clean and screw it fully
In order for the engine, transmission, and clutch to home.
function correctly, maintain the engine oil at the correct
level, and change the oil and oil filter in accordance with
scheduled maintenance requirements.
Motorcycle operation with insufficient, deteriorated, or

contaminated engine oil will cause accelerated engine
wear and may result in engine or transmission seizure.
Seizure of the engine or transmission may lead to loss of
motorcycle control and an accident.
Never start the engine or run the engine in a confined 1. Filler

area. Exhaust fumes are poisonous and can cause loss of 2. Filler plug/dipstick
consciousness and death within a short period of time. 3. Upper marking
Always operate your motorcycle in the open-air or in an 4. Lower marking
area with adequate ventilation. 4. Remove the filler plug/dipstick.
5. The oil level is indicated by lines on the filler plug/
dipstick: When full, the indicated oil level must be
level with the upper marking on the dipstick.
Running the engine with insufficient oil will cause 6. If the oil level is too low, add oil a little at a time until
engine damage. If the low oil pressure indicator light the correct level is reached.
remains on, stop the engine immediately and investigate 7. Once the correct level is reached, re-fit the filler plug/
the cause. dipstick.
Note:
• An accurate indication of the level of oil in Oil and Oil Filter Change
the engine is only shown when the engine
oil is at normal operating temperature, the
motorcycl e is upright (not on the side stand)
and the filler plug/dipstick has been fully
screwed home. Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead
to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition,
1. Start the engine and run at idle for approximately used engine oil contains potentially harmful
five minutes. contamination which can cause cancer. Wear suitable
clothing and avoid skin contact.
2. Stop the engine and wait for three minutes to allow
the oil to settle. The engine oil and filter must be replaced in accordance
with scheduled maintenance requirements.
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly, and then stop the

engine and secure the motorcycle in an upright
position on level ground.
2. Place an oil pan beneath the engine.

1•RW!w^H
10. Fill the engine with new oil of the type and grade
listed previously and in the specification section.
11. Start the engine and allow to idle.
. t
oil may
Theoi abe
Y ehot
hoto the touch.
och.Avoid contact
odi with the $ :.x.
.,.,: •^
.. }:4.iv.4:. u ::nS::)xv
Y,.}: ;: :ty.{x^.r:."'^,u. 4>i{'!.}^}iNêt, i•,<^' CNw 338,gyv ra ^t

."
v
c>^ tax.
.
v,
k>.:t
4:v::...v.}:
e^:..
„E.:•;:x
•t:°^ . i. .
..:}
^n..rc r w^::w.' ;.^. .n, . . ..}; l
hot oil by wearing suitable protective clothing, gloves, ,..r
° S4
i
7'
" i
^ : U,"• •:4f: \ "^ it' :.:f}^
: :
•,)7^c ':..
nv4, : } Y>}}: . : \ . . . v
g i•Y:+':^6°
eye protection, etc. Contact with hot oil may cause the P
... L:td:
:n:.. n,. w^:.Yi::.. ,.n »l.,̀Yiu':,x;.:. t }.,.:off
bi .u:m.,.y.P.x.,:n': ,Av4sNV:
:.ftt}+x}?.. ....,.,,.^>};tf:):^. "
s, ...}e!....,f.,
^ .. <,.}}<i '' :'i.^
skin to be scalded or burned. Racing the engine before the oil reaches eve ry part can
cause engine damage or seizure.
3. Remove the oil drain plug. Discard the sealing
washer. 12. Ensure that the oil pressure warning light
extinguishes shortly after starting.
If the engine oil pressure is too low, the low oil pressure
warning light will illuminate. If this light stays on when
the engine is running, stop the engine immediately and
investigate the cause. Running the engine with low oil
pressure will cause engine damage.
13. Stop the engine and check the oil level. Adjust if
necessary.
Disposal of Used Engine Oil

1. Oil drain plug To protect the environment, do not pour oil on the
2.Oil filter ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses.
4. Unscrew and remove the oil filter using Triumph
Dispose of used oil sensibly. If in doubt contact your local
service tool T3880312. authority.
1. Oil filter
2. Tool T3880312
5. Dispose of the old filter in an environmentally
friendly way.
b. Pre-fill a new oil filter with clean engine oil.
7. Apply a smear of clean engine oil to the sealing ring
of the new oil filter.
8. Fit the oil filter and tighten to 10 Nm.
9. After the oil has completely drained out, fit a new
sealing washer to the drain plug. Fit and tighten the
plug to 25 Nm.
8.8
Service Manual - Tiger . UMt
Lubrication
01 Pump Removal

2. Disconnect the batte ry, negative (black) lead first.
. Remove the clutch (see page 4-5).
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead 4 dos on the upper oil
Fit tool T3880371 to the drivedogs
skin d ry ness, irritation and dermatitis. Furthermore,
pump drive sprocket. Hold the tool to prevent
used engine oil contains potentially harmful
rotation and release the bolt securing the oil pump
contaminants which can cause cancer.
drive sprocket to the oil pump.
When handling used engine oil, always wear protective
clothing and avoid any skin contact with the oil. "
0 p
x ..:s.
.. r
R,:'
.4v,
*,<; .::x
r \. d
'. ks;:^°:!fiy:;av;
; t
v n nv.,
':J1a {<YY
7.as}ti.',:.
v q:Y,t:.^:v..w,
^.:+:^'
ttysv>a s:,t • tkb
•a. 3::C!\
r. ^::'
^3^'+.!:asa:. (:''kv^,;s'
,.r^.
h:s:.stkt
.
s ti a a`
••.;C
.., i
4
" s;
i>4' s to \<&^4v . tu.a3
:
< fik ?;: x{
y f s
;,:m"oCa;:: `..r^^:iz. sn
, .r:
:, s`C:ry,;3'
k ,^,
^'a 5
vt. ,Civ^`•:;
< v. . x•kt s Fy03fL^
t .r :!:,.2y,: ^'rc'a : aw f >
3
:.u^.
yx..itr..,;' ..+s+,ra:.::.;tk^
s•::;4•"
,:r «:^^9at::....
,.a^+>! r ^::.:n ..:3'
,:,.c
't
k, '
::• J7Yaa ` ,•` • ati S:`ky^>s^ : .; J.'r?`:}
..!.S, :'a`
ti;^ ra Y
. .
.n
:;
•) ;.vi,^,t.. î i
{ n1^î
:. : t9
+.:
t
!•^, ^`ti•S:':
.l.d{.9: ^>^ J.,^vk
:1
';n"'xCi. ,.:k!:
^C R .s.,: l;,. 5:::
C^ :F.x .a. 'Z: •,,;; , >E .'`•: ^t^t'4:?s. ^N^^.•N \;^4.0. ^. tv'^ ,°..yn+k•;:''q
^^s :^ks?,:^ ,^^,^ ,'
s C.^`:i' ^ :`t2F
. ' n,3,^<:a
^ ^•^ . `se^4kj+:t:. nK:^
^ vv:v t t::<t ^ .:.,\;ffia!sr^•3.,^^.'n..:t.
.:w.^^,J'„)•y„s:,,Ut t •`'^; \; ^ t7.
a!.}:{,..'
`: ,ar.^'
:a ^ a. :S:,y^,."s::v¢
.<^;^,^ki
`"xa^ fk: i^f .N^n:
'v\ tiu Â`!.^'!":r+ tcr^.:.L,;<
r ti., I' .^:. .'•v+:^:.,.
x:.•axd:>.h..Y:^.'':yy
, k,,.,,^ ;t;;:v:r.:ic:....,q.o{:A.^.t<:^':n:. •Yw^: s, <. C^\.^.
..\ ;G^.a:Cl;++'v^.r
.•^.:.: ^n•^
•a,S.:a ;..ys:.,: ':v`û
^^r nr:. ^
^.,':.. :, t
,.:.^., `?^.n• .^s:}a. k:!
^
, '
txsk^;.>:.â'',.x:.!,{:n^:.,,.;?t: ^:'^' ^^q
, x^:^R k<t .
f.•++n `C;ts::us
Do not pour engine oil on the ground, down sewers or

drains, or into water courses. To prevent pollution of a
water courses etc„ disP ose of used oil sensibly. If in 2 4
doubt contact your local authority.
1. Oil pump drive chain

2. Pump drive sprocket fixing
3. Pump drive sprocket
4. Tool T3880371
5. Remove the tool, upper and lower sprockets, upper
sprocket bearing and the drive chain by sliding all
components off the shaft together.
6. Release the bolts securing the oil pump to the
crankcase and withdraw the oil pump.
1. Pump bolts

INJUMeti
brication
Body Clearance
1. Release the screw and withdraw the oil pump plate Standard: 0.15 - 0.22 mm
from the pump body.
4. Measure the pump end clearance.
Pump End Clearance
Standard: 0.02 - 0.07 mm

5. (a) If all clearances are within service limits, liberally
apply clean engine oil to all internal components and
refit the oil pump plate to the oil pump body.
(b) If any clearance measu re d is outside the service
limits, renew the complete pump.
4 6. Inspect the sprocket and chain for wear and/or
1. Oil pump drive shaft
damage. Replace the sprocket and chain if wear and/
2. Oil pump plate
or damage is found.
3. Oil pump body
4. Screw Installation
^^ .,..:,.^::';'niaha:GSd?y.:ii::'';:.;;:?.;;(n:1^„a:ii?o:'^pF:B:;.`•$ii;:':' ;i:::..
If any part of the oil pump is found to be outside the

Before fitting the oil pump to the crankcase ensure the
service limit, the complete pump must be replaced.
pump internal surfaces have been 'wetted' with clean
Severe engine damage may result from the continued`
engine oil. The pump may fail to pick-up oil from the
use of a faulty oil pump.
sump if the surfaces have not been 'we tted'. This will
2. Measure the rotor tip clearance using feeler gauges. cause the engine to run without engine oil pressure and
will lead to severe engine damage.
Rotor Tip Clearance
1. Fill the oil pump with new engine oil, turning the
pump rotor as the oil is poured in to ensure all
Standard: 0.15 mm
surfaces are coated with oil.
Service limit: 0.20 mm 2. Position the oil pump to the crankcase and insert into
the opening provided.
/Ol 2 Note:
• Use the sprocket end of the oil pump shaft
to turn the drive peg into alignment with
the drive on the water pump.
1. Rotor ti p clearance
2. Pump body clearance
3. Measure the pump body clearance using feeler
gauges.
-8.10 Service Manual - Ti er

g M
Lubrication
3. Fit the oil pump to the crankcase, ensure the water Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
pump drive peg locates into the drive on the water
pump shaft. Tighten the bolts to 13.7 Nm. Switch
'r - The low oil pressure warning light switch is located at the
' :::- // lower end of the camshaft oil feed pipe.
0
, '
Pump Insertion
4. As an assembly, slide the upper drive sprocket
bearing, upper drive sprocket, drive chain and pump
sprocket onto the input shaft and oil pump.
0
,-_== \/_ 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
2. Disconnect the battery negative (black) lead first.
O cc
3. Lift the covering boot and disconnect the electrical
D p connection to the switch.
1
3 4. Remove the switch and collect the copper washers.
C0
Installation
4 1. Using new copper washers on both sides of the oil
2 pipe union, fit the switch and tighten to 13 Nm.
ka o 2. Refit the electrical connection.
1. Oil pump drive chain 3. Refit the covering boot.
2. Pump drive sprocket fixing 4. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first.
3. Pump drive sprocket
4. Tool T3880371
5. Locate the pump drive sprocket onto the pump
ensuring that the drive engages correctly.
6. Refit tool T3880371 to the upper drive sprocket and
tighten a new oil pump drive sprocket centre bolt to
15 Nm. Remove the tool.
7. Assemble the clutch (see page 4-9).
8. Reconnect the battery, positive (red lead) first.
9. Refill the engine with oil (see page 8-7).

TRJUMPM
8. Detach the sump and collect the oil transfer tube.
Note:
The oil transfer tube may remain in the
crankcase or become detached with the
sump.
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead

to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition used
1. Oil transfer tube
engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants
2. Transmission oil feed pipe fixings
which can cause cancer. Wear ` suitable clothing and
avoid skin contact 9. Remove the sump gasket.
10. If necessary, remove the oil transfer pipe and collect
4. Remove the belly pan (see page 16:17). the sealing washer from either side of each joint.
5. Remove the exhaust system (see page 10- 11 9).
Inspection
1. Inspect the oil transfer tube 0-rings for damage and

swelling. Renew as necessa ry.
The exhaust system will be hot if the engine has '
been running. Always allow sufficient time for the 2. Inspect the gearbox oil feed pipe 0-ring for damage
exhaust to cool before working on or near the exhaust and swelling. Renew as necessary.
system. 3. Inspect the oil pick-up for correct fitment in the lower
Contact with a hot exhaust could result in burn injuries. crankcase.
6. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-7).

7. Release the bolts securing the sump to the lower
crankcase.

lu1îP
L 1 1Ti 1
Installation S. Pre-fill a new oil filter with clean engine oil.

6. Apply a smear of clean engine oil to the seal of the
1. Fit the oil transfer tube to the crankcase. new oil filter.
7. Fit the oil filter and tighten to 12 Nm using tool
T3880012.
8. Refit the exhaust system (see page 10-120).
Note:
® Use new exhaust gaskets at the downpipe
connections with the cylinder head.
9. Fill the engine with the correct grade of engine oil

11. Start the engine and ensure that the low oil pressure
warning light goes out shortly after starting.
12. Stop the engine and adjust the engine oil level.
13. Refit the belly pan (see page 16-17).
1.Oil transfer tube 14. Refit the seat (see page 16-9).
2. Transmission oil feed pipe fixings
2. If removed, fit the oil transfer pipe incorporating new
washers. Tighten the fixings to 8 Nm.
3. Incorporating a new sump gasket, position the sump
to the lower crankcase.
4. Tighten the sump fixings to 12 Nrn.
1
2
1.Sump
2. Fixings
TWUMEH Service Manual - Ti9er 8.13

Lubrkation V
5. Release the oil cooler fixings.
1.Upper oil cooler fixings

2. Loweroil cooler fixing
6. Detach the oil cooler, collecting the oil cooler infill
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead panel as it is released.
to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition used
engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants Inspection
which can cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and
avoid skin contact. 1. Inspect the oil cooler connection points for fractures
4. Disconnect the oil cooler feed and return hoses. and signs of oil leakage.
V
2. Check the oil cooler fins for damage and leaks.
Installation
1. Position the oil cooler and infill panel to the retaining

brackets.
2. Refit and tighten the oil cooler fixings to 9 Nm.
3. Incorporating new 0-rings, align the oil cooler pipes
to the cooler and tighten the fixings to 10 Nm
4. Refill the engine with oil (see page 8-7).
b. Start the engine and check for oil leaks. Once a leak
check has been made, stop the engine and allow to
1.Oil cooler hose (right hand shown) stand for 10 minutes.
2. Fixings 7. Adjust the engine oil level (see page 8-7).

UM
a
ExplodedView - Engine Mountings .......................................................... 9.2

ExplodedView - Frame Adjuster Sleeves ...................................................... 9.2
EngineRemoval/Refit ...................................................................... 9.3
EngineInstallation ......................................................................... 9.6

9
71RI UM M
' d fl
1 1 t 1 =^ ^ t
^ 1
I) ,iJ
^1 ^ ))ill)) ^! +1
v^l
Refer to text for bolt tightening sequence
Expioded View -Frame Adjuster Sleeves
CwI-
Refer to text for frame adjuster tightening sequence

Engi fle Removal/Refit 14. Remove the sprocket cover.
Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised

and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
falling and causing inju ry to the operator or damage to
the motorcycle.
1. Place the motorcycle on a paddock stand.

3. Remove the ba ttery (see page 17-7).
4. Remove the body rear panel and side fairings (see
page 16-10).
5. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99). 1.Sprocket cover
2. Fixings
6. Remove the airbox (see page 10-104).
15. Remove the clip from the clevis pin at the lower end
7. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-7).
of the brake pushrod. Remove the clevis pin.
8. Remove the oil cooler (see page 8-14).
16. Remove the three fixings and remove the right hand
9. Remove the radiator (see page 11-8). control plate and brake pedal as an assembly.
Note:
® Secure the hoses to prevent damage as the
engine is removed.
10. Remove the exhaust system (see page 10-119).
11. Set the drive chain adjustment to allow maximum
free play in the chain (see. page 12-12).
'4 •
M +,
„t^ ^{
âutioii .3
^ at
. ,3f3^}• ::?
^
.X,); zat `âu'^?„^ .,4^

+. •
.::.7^^'.̀
Y4.
^ ,k; 5 :;;,^c5.,.; bj%`
A::°:.: i'•:}i: C.:.v. .°i :. . . . :. .: : : :.:.: 5}.. ..::.^..,.?.^.. : n.:. : . . . . . "F'4/fi:. . : :^'n A.:.v. 1 N.. n.: ,: . :.: 5y~Y$::.:. : :. : . ^£.,?;«,
. ;.:kE{; $tf ,.sr`"OX:.` . ^;,;
. x,^' ^
^.
^...ti^:; ,::,£ ^..,<:' 5`:
A . f>
` 4`..CR e: awM 1L:
{RC. . ; :.;} i
:
::°:F.::.^.:?..., .
Y4S M.
:. . v:?rc:
i',:Y,.<n:. :.: Y}.: . h..v } }n'RYrvYî:S:Yi<;f M$` <,
^^... ,<^
.y.,
`^Rî
'•'S:.:t:;r.,:tF„ :.w:......a ,;:{'
h... :......:...::..:'C.v.:....
::^:°.9.::5. ,..o .
To prevent chain damage, do not allow the chain to

come into contact with dirt, road grit etc.
12. Remove the bolt and, noting its position, detach the
gear change lever from the transmission shaft.
1. Right hand control plate
13. Remove the three fixings and remove the left hand 2. Brake pedal clevis pin
control plate, heel guard, gear lever and linkage as 3. Control plate fixings
an assembly.
l o
d9a
1. Left hand control plate
2. Control plate fixings
3. Gearchange lever fixing
UMr Service Manual - Tiger 9.3

17. Ease the boot from the starter lead and release the
lead nut. Detach the lead.
18. Disconnect the alternator multiplug.
Failure to ensure adequate support for either the engine
or motorcycle could cause both components to fall or
move unexpectedly. A fall or sudden movement could
lead to inju ry.
27. Place a support beneath the engine and ensure that

the frame is still adequately and securely supported.
N^n
v« S :
S: C }. •.w : i.'.•'d':%1 y . .
..4.! v+,U ^ :ti:4:,:::i}v'}}:: vv. Ti:.V}'`.n+?i : ec
} .,:A. .
^^
^'1.•v: r^$,'.:
G35'$X:.}•^;'}:...:a:^#>;:â':""'a• v}}::#^ ^
pk5' :}: •.d îl vn f.} .:+:1
'..S \:,n }:^%r
...vbv
•.t•
F^t .
.::a.
^ ^+
•^}:«{
^z^
^br..S
.v^^
ae t. :^
^ ^
•.ff',::z
pr!n;^
Jr,
5^^%2'^...F
-
. .
:>t:
'^,'.h,: 1"•,
% } ';fir:.w:fifi
^:...
i:.
^ ,
n\b:
.:: y.}.:`^%"` ve..},"a^• '`' O^.rZ}?.:;..:
Y î:^r act
^,+Y:^'s
^
^
a:.^.^„ i5t
.,. *.:^;.i}. „"..^•.?K
(+`•.:<:
;^'^: .l"f•:
. y,
;1;t:a Z;
N..'Fw^.v...vvr <'
?5^}v'}:::
. .'f ^^
r<:$;.
^'. .k.'S;;'v
^\ni....1 uw ^.:.x
, ^:^1t.tt, y(}.$
^6':'..Kti
v •}
' v.:$.:.:rdi•,.tr..}}'^`)
S..r'^:+i3+fiy
•:5::,:x::
1.:. Snn..
1'ivn: i:m^
. ^.7: a:
v^
li.
ao j ':^î} . < 7yfi )ffK<'M'..r ; ^ , wVn..v>r.
^sy :5 e:}}^ts:':f,A:. 5'.^:iE^r:a'^SR:^`'..:::,. is

•Â^
;•5.^:^;':9}r^
: i }vl#v
v4
z
q S.v,>< •^.K; •
.}:;s>i#" .$c:>::.. Caution
:.fYS`: x< ;cq^l.:ri.^^^f
$},^,aSa_>.y.r
;'•'.TJY.Sm
r ^}f,+t}+$1'l;^^.}
$}Y.(^k,'
: $ ,.. ^:^,•;^
h'^t' .. Y::
.+::%v +.1..r. <n'Ar,,` .:,'•+(:..
G.i
- •' '^û
N^Y ^'''',^"a
", .,t^St<
. :
' 9:} ^ ^
.
v3vn'`^ v{.^Try$i!
+^,
.1
«;^:.X,.:ik^..t:
.^^t#'w
M.
":lî'
.y$:,,
. nS(:$.:
. :Sttig.
y^
:v m':Cs. cf•^
. ah.•S:
`
:^(^^
. .t.,.• .,.n:
^
$:â:• ..' ' f'ii."
,;:'•]tiv:
i , a.
^}p
.
S% ( l:!^'.'1
>R•}^1^^?r!c^s',^:'';}},..(::::a•
S
:rzi^`(
.wY •'t
vv.
5:.
c: ar..}?v;};^F^«`h•.: .t.u^`
$TiSYiiYA+:}i^h + ivSVF'.{';^}}#y,'^
^$$:
Y:^'F,.v vi:{:}:•:•'r ^.:aY":>,v. A:h., :f L.

^ ^{ j .
; : .':w .v'<$
$N n•}:i' <3F..
iti.v'^l r:.v ::.$C'^:i v
'
: :.
To prevent damage to components, lower the engine

very carefully. Particularly vulnerable items include the
throttle position sensor and the throttle body assembly.
28. Release the three bolts and remove the left hand
cylinder head bracket.
1. Alternator multiplug
2. Starter motor connection
19. Ease the boot from the low oil pressure warning light
switch and disconnect the electrical connector.
1. Left hand cylinder head bracket

2. Fixings
29. Remove and discard the nuts securing the three
right hand rear engine mounting bolts (two on the
1. Low oil pressure switch connection
crankcase and one at the rear of the cylinder head)
20. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor multiplug. and remove the bolts.
21. Disconnect the side stand switch multiplug.
22. Disconnect the engine ground connections.
23. Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor multiplug.
24. Disconnect the neutral position indicator switch
electrical connector.
25. Remove the thro tt le bodies, injectors and fuel rail
from the cylinder head (see page 10-113).
Note:
• It is not necessary to disconnect the throttle
cables. position the throttle bodies aside.
26. Disconnect the clutch cable (see page 4-5).
1. Right hand rear engine mounting bolts

UMW
30. Slacken the three frame adjuster sleeves using tool 32. Remove the two bolts, collecting the chain rubbing
T3880377 as shown below. spacer from between the frame and the engine as
the lower crankcase bolt is removed.
1. Left hand crankcase mounting bolts (lower shown)

2. Chain rubbing spacer
33. Slacken the two remaining engine mounting bolts at
the front of the cylinder head.
34. Lower the engine sufficiently to allow the drive chain
to be detached from the output sprocket, pivoting
the engine on the two front cylinder head bolts.
35. With assistance, remove the two front cylinder head
bolts and lower the engine from the frame.
Note:
• The four stainless steel engine mounting
bolts (fitted to the upper crankcase and rear
cejq
1. Lower crankcase frame adjuster position cylinder head mounting positions) 'must not
be re-used.
• Discard the stainless steel engine mounting
bolts.
36. Slacken the front frame adjuster sleeve, on the right
hand side of the frame, using tool 13880377 as
shown below.
Cjp
/ / ( 1 ) ' I
1. Rear cylinder head frame adjuster position
31. Remove and discard the nuts securing the two left
hand crankcase mounting bolts.
1. Special tool T3880377
Service Manual -
Tiger
g er 9.5
l
ifl
EngLi OE1 Itb1 4. Align the engine to the frame and fit the chain
rubbing spacer to the left hand lower crankcase
Mote: mounting and refit the bolt to retain it. Fit a new nut
• The frame is fitted with four frame adjuster but do not tighten at this stage.
sleeves, located on the right hand side of the
frame, as shown below.
1.Left hand crankcase mounting bolt (lower shown)

2. Chain rubbing spacer
5. Refit the engine mounting bolt to the right hand
lower crankcase mounting. Do not fit a new nut at
this stage.
Note:
1.Front cylinder head frame adjuster • The four stainless steel engine mounting
2. Rear cylinder head frame adjuster bolts (fitted to the upper crankcase and rear
3. Rear upper crankcase frame adjuster cylinder head mounting positions) must not
4. Rear lower crankcase frame adjuster be re-used. Always install new stainless steel
engine mounting bolts if they have been
1. Position the engine beneath the frame. removed for any reason.
}.:.,.: , Y M4
6. Apply PP 9grease to the

copper t e threads
th ead of
thet e ounew
four
.:. }+"i' .^
F ) l :h. .
..... PP Y
:`r
Aû
r'
;X,:
•iî ^.
stainless steel engine mounting bolts (two upper

,, . .s'^. ,^"
. F. i:i^^ ":• $
s7A: i' YF '
.f•.;,..^. y :x.: tx.` ^ > ,i'•^n!^.'.;V;'•'"

^.!kC^` .i .^
îfiJ:^^t'::
;
:.a. , }o `
^Îr ^
.,^^^,°.`'
^\
. t;`^}'.. • p .. :.` K^. f.,

a,.:: . SS.:
.
; :g<}r
. :.:ai2•.'<z},...
•.:}moot; kc,
,.à^.
crankcase bolts and two rear cylinder head mounting
%$;" .: .nn. „ h :.):..
x. .. a F
., Y. '¢. ^:.,.. z ',..,. \;f:' ^....x.f `"^, ^\'3̀^
w,...y.y5. ^,F•?.^r.:..'F:
.^,,.,fi.. ,.a.' ^, n `t ;V,,.
ô.\,^>` . a, .:.}.,^;:}^ Sit ,a.:.," ^ Kt•
Unless the following engine mounting bolt tightening bolts).

sequence is precisely followed, severe frame damage
7. Install the two new stainless steel upper crankcase
will occur.
bolts. Fit a new nut to the left hand side only,
Note: but do not tighten at this stage.
8. Install a new right hand rear cylinder head mounting
• Do not fit the left hand cylinder head
bolt. Do not fully tighten at this stage.
bracket until instructed to do so.
9. Refit the left hand cylinder head bracket to the
• Do not fit nuts to the right hand side bolts
cylinder head and install, but do not tighten, the two
until instructed to do so, as these bolts will
smaller bolts. Install, but do not tighten, a new left
be removed during engine installation to
hand rear cylinder head mounting bolt.
tighten the frame adjuster sleeves.
2. Raise the engine and insert the two front cylinder
head bolts to support the engine. Fit a new nut to
the left hand side only, but do not tighten at this
stage.
3. Raise the engine and loop the drive chain over the
output sprocket.
9.6 Service Manual - Tiger '

ifl
10. Tighten the two smaller cylinder head bracket bolts 16. Refit the sprocket cover and tighten the bolts to
to 3 Nm. 91m.
1. Left head cylinder head bracket 1. Sprocket cover

2. Fixings 2. Fixings
11. Tighten the le ft hand engine mounting bolts to 17. Reposition the left hand control plate and gear
20 Nm, in the following sequence: change linkage to the frame. Tighten the fixings to
a) Upper crankcase mounting 9 N.
b) Front cylinder head mounting 18. Refit the gear change lever to the transmission shaft
in the position noted during removal and refit the
c) Lower crankcase mounting
bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm.
d) Rear cylinder head bracket to frame mount
12. Remove each right hand engine mounting bolt, one a j
r d
at a time, and tighten the frame adjuster sleeves until
the adjuster contacts the engine, and then a _ 2
further half turn (180°), using tool T3880377 Re-
insert each bolt immediately after tightening the
JJ
sleeve and fit, but do not tighten, a new nut.
13. Fully tighten the left hand engine mounting bolts in
the following sequence, to the torque shown below:
a) Upper crankcase mounting - 85 Nm
DD
b) Front cylinder head mounting - 80 Nm
c) Lower crankcase mounting - 80 Nm 3 s2
0
d) Rear cylinder head bracket to frame mount - 85
Nm cd9a 0, o ^//^
1.Left hand control plate
14. Remove the support from beneath the engine. 2. Cont rol plate fixings
3. Gearchange lever fixing
15. Fully tighten the right hand engine mounting bolts in
the following sequence, to the torque shown below: 19. Refit the clutch cable (see page 4-6).
a) Upper crankcase mounting - 85 Nm 20. Check the injector 0-rings for splits and other
damage. Replace as necessa ry.
b) Front cylinder head mounting - 80 Nm
21. Refit the throttle bodies, injectors and fuel rail to the
c) Lower crankcase mounting - 80 Nm
cylinder head (see page 10-112).
d) Rear cylinder head mounting - 85 Nm
Operation of the motorcycle with incorrectly adjusted,

incorrectly routed or damaged thro ttle cables could
interfere with the operation of the brakes, clutch or the
thro ttle itself. Any of these conditions could result in loss
of control of the motorcycle and an ac ci dent.
M Service Manual - Tiger • 9.7

:I L!:! ..H
g
Removal/Refit
22. Adjust the throttle cables as necessa ry (see page 25. Using new seals at the cylinder head end, refit the
10-110). exhaust system (see page 10-120).
1. Cylinder head
2. Seals
23. Reconnect all electrical connections to the engine. 26. Refit the radiator (see page 11-9).
24. Reconnect the starter lead to the starter motor and 27. Refill the cooling system (see page 11-5).
tighten the nut to 10 m. Refit the boot. 28. Refit the oil cooler (see page 8-14).
29. Fill the engine with oil of the correct grade and
viscosity (see page 8-7).
30. ` Refit the airbox (see page 10-104).
31. Refit the fuel tank (see page 10-100).
32. Refit the bodywork (see page 16-10 and 16-10).
33. Refit the battery (see page 17-7).
34. Remove the motorcycle from the paddock stand and
place on the side stand.
35. Set the drive chain adjustment (see page 12-12).
1. Starter motor connection
9.8
1^MM
Fi l a!I L i(ii!1 RiT!iiirJ !lit!IIiiNffl
l
ExplodedView - Fuel Tank .................................. ........................610...0. 10.6

Exploded View - Fuel Rail, Throttles and Injectors ............................................. 10.7
ExplodedView - Airbox ................................................................... 10.8
ExplodedView - Exhaust System ........................................................... 10.9
ExplodedView - Evaporative System ....................................................... 10.10
ExplodedView - Secondary Air Injection .................................................... 10.11
FuelRequirements ....................................................................... 10.12
FuelRequirements - all countries except USA ........................................... 10.12
FuelRequirements -USA ............................................................ 10.12
OxygenatedGasoline ............................................................... 10.12
Ethanol........................................................................... 10.12
Methanol........................................... . 10.12
.....0........................
MTBE(Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) .......................... ......................... 10.12

0
Glossaryof Terms ....................................................................... 10.13

EngineManagement System ............................................................... 10.15
SystemDescription ................................................................. 10.15
System Sensors. . 10.15
10.15
SensorLocations ................................................................... 10.16
SystemActuators ................................................................... 10.17
ActuatorLocations .................................................................. 10.18
Engine Management Circuit Diagram - Tiger - without ABS .................................... 10.19
Circuit Diagram - Engine Management System - Tiger - without ABS ...................... 10.20
Engine Management Circuit Diagram - Tiger - with ABS .. ..................................... 10.21
Circuit Diagram - Engine Management System - Tiger - with ABS ......................... 10.22
SystemDiagnostics ...................................................................... 10.23
On-board Fault Detection System . .. ...... 10.23
10.23
TriumphDiagnostic Tool ............................................................ 10.23
CurrentData ...................................................................... 10.24
Freeze-frame Data ................................................................. 10.24
FunctionTests ..................................................................... 10.25
Checks/Adjustments ............................................................... 10.25
Adjustments...................................................................... 10.25
Adaptionstatus ... ..............................................................:.. 10.25
Builddata ........................................................................ 10.25
Checks........................................................................... 10.26
DiagnosticTrouble Codes ........................................................... 10.27

TWUMBH
Fuel System/Engine Management
ServiceDiagnostic Tool ................................................................... 10.29

ToolKeys ......................................................................... 10.29
Initialisation............................................................................. 10.31
Diagnostics............................................................................. 10.32
FunctionTests ...................................................................:...... 10.33
Checks................................................................................ 10.34
d u Tune
A j st ............................................................................ 10.35
UpdateTune ........................................................................... 10.36
UnlockECU ............................................................................. 10.37
ElectricalConnectors .................................................................... 10.62
BeforeDisconnection :.............................................................. 10.62
WhenDisconnecting a Connector.................................................... 10.62
WhenInspecting a Connector: ................................................. . ..... 10.62
WhenConnecting a Connector....................................................... 10.62
Disconnectionof ECM connectors .................................................... 10.62
Reconnectionof ECM connectors .................................................... 10.63
FurtherD iiagnosis ....................................................................... 10.63
CrankshaftSensor ....................................................................... 10.64
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.64
IdleSpeed Control ...................................................................... 10.66
PinpointTests. : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0.66
FuelInjectors ........................................................................... 10.68
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.68
ThrottlePosition Sensor .................................................................. 10.70
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.70
PurgeValve ............................................................................ 10.72
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.72
IgnitionCoils ........................................................................... 10.74
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.74
CoolantTemperature Sensor .............................................................. 10.76
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.76
InletAir Temperature Sensor .............................................................. 10.78
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.78
FuelPump Relay ........................................................................ 10.80
PinpointTests ...:................................................................. 10.80
SystemVoltage.... ....................................................................... 10.81
PinpointTests ...................................................................... 10.81
Coolin Fan
g Relay ....................................................................... 10.82
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.82
LambdaSensor ......................................................................... 10.83
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.83
LambdaSensor Heater ................................................................... 10.84
10.2
Service Manual - Tiger uMt
[ I iiTA iiiit xT1irzn
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.84

EEPROMError ........................................................................... 10.85
Fall Detection Switch ..................................................................... 10.86
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.86
VehicleSpeed Sensor .................................................................... 10.87
PinpointTests ...............................:..................................... 10.87
InstrumentCommunication (CAN) ......................................................... 10.88
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.88
FuelLevel Sensor ....................................................................... 10.89
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.89
AmbientPressure Sensor ................................................................. 10.90
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.90
ManifoldAbsolute Pressure (Map) Sensor ................................................... 10.91
PinpointTests ...................................................................... 10.91
SecondaryAir Injection Valve ............................................................. 10.92
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 10.92
FuelTank.. ........................................................................ 10.93
Removal......................................................................... 10.93
Installation........................................................................ 10.94
FuelPump and Filter Assembly ........................... ............................... 10.94
Removal ............. ... ...... ................... ......... .. ....................... 10.94
Assembly......................................................................... 10.95
Fuel Level Sender Assembly
/ Float Replacement ............................................. 10.95
Removal.......................................................................... 10.95
Inspection....:................................................................... 10.96
Assembly.......................................... 10.96
...................0...........
FuelPressure Checking .................................................................. 10.96

...................................................................................... 10.97
Fuel Delivery System .................................................................... 10.97
Airbox................................................................................. 10.98
Removal......................................................................... 10.98
Inspection........................................................................ 10.99
Installation........................................................................ 10.99
AirFilter Element ........................................................................ 10.99
Removal ......................................................................... 10.99
Installation........................................................................ 10.100
IntakeAir Temperature Sensor ............................................................ 10.100
Removal ......................................................................... 10.100
Assembly......................................................................... 10.100
MapSensor ............................................................................ 10.100
Removal......... .................................................................. 10.100
Installation........................................................................ 10.100
BarometricPressure Sensor ............................................................... 10.101

TLqj3H
Removal......................................................................... 10.101
Installation.........................
nstallation ....................................................................... 10.101
Fall Detection Switch ................................................................... 10.101
Removal......................................................................... 10.101
Installation....................................................................... 10.101
Crankshaftposition sensor ............................................................... 10.102
Removal......................................................................... 10.102
Installation....................................................................... 10.102
ThrottleCable .......................................................................... 10.102
Adjustment....................................................................... 10.102
Removal......................................................................... 10.103
Examination...................................................................... 10.104
Installation....................................................................... 10.104
ThrottleBodies/Injectors ................................................................ 10.105
Removal......................................................................... 10.105
Inspection........................................................................ 10.105
Installation....................................................................... 10.106
ThrottleBody Balancing ................................................................. 10.106
ThrottlePosition Sensor .................................................................. 10.107
Removal......................................................................... 10.107
Installation....................................................................... 10.107
IdleSpeed Control Stepper Motor ........................................................ 10.108
Removal......................................................................... 10.108
Installation....................................................................... 10.109
ExhaustSystem ........................................................................ 10.111
Removal........................................................................ 10.111
Assembly........................................................................ 10.112
SecondaryAir Injection .................................................................. 10.114
SystemPurpose and Operation ...................................................... 10.114
SecondaryAir Injection Solenoid Valve ..................................................... 10.115
Removal......................................................................... 10.115
Installation....................................................................... 10.115
SecondaryAir Injection Reed Valves ...................................................... 10.115
Removal......................................................................... 10.115
Inspection........................................................................ 10.116
Installation....................................................................... 10.116
Evaporative Emissions Control System ...................................................... 10. 117
CaliforniaModels Only ............................................................. 10.117
ComponentLocations .............................................................. 10.117
EvaporativeControl System - Engine ' Off .............................................. 10.118
EvaporativeControl System - Engine Running ......................................... 10.119

. lUM'.
duel System/Engine Management
9Nm
9Nm
se
TRuM ii Service Manual - Tiger

It'
3.5 Nm
3.5 Nm
C•^rr^rif^^
\^
O
10.6 . Service Manual - Ti9er

6
S a s
1 1=1
5Nm
ii
Service Manual -Tiger 107

. ;1 r;; r IA [t1 J
15 Nn
Nm
JTe 25 Nm
Apply anti-sieze
OA
O
e text
Ao
8 Nm compound to threads
15 Nm
4A
O
5Nm 40
See text
5 Nm

LUMP
JI'anagemen
.fl

i i Th
9Nm
1 0.1 0 Service Manual - Tiger

IUP
Lf iiiiA TJ1TI
Fuel Requirements Oxygenated Gasoline

To help in meeting clean air standards, some areas of the
Fuel Requirements- all countries except USA U.S.. use oxygenated gasoline to help reduce harmful
emissions. This model will give best performance when
Outside America, this model must be run on 95 RON using unleaded gasoline. However, the following should
unleaded fuel. be used as a guide to the use of oxygenated fuels.
Fuel Requirements - USA

In the United States of America where the octane rating of
fuel is measured in a different way, the following Because of the generally higher volatility of oxygenated
information may be applied: This model is designed to fuels, sta rting, engine response and fuel consumption
run on unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating may be adversely a ffected by their use. Should any of
(R+M)/2 of 89 or higher. these difficulties be experienced, run the motorcycle on
normal unleaded gasoline.
Note:
• If 'knocking' or 'pinking' occurs at a steady Ethanol
engine speed under normal ` load, use a
Ethanol fuel is a mixture of 10% ethanol and 90%
different brand of gasoline or a higher
gasoline and is often described under the names
octane rating.
'gasohol', 'ethanol enhanced', or 'contains ethanol'. This
fuel may be used in Triumph motorcycles.
The use of leaded gasoline is illegal in some countries, •r rrii

states or territories and will invalidate the vehicle and Y 1 4 1 l^. T F I
y v p
,^^`^ z ^ u r
1
emissions control warranties. t es. Additionally, leaded

,^w < j^ ^
.AF^^t ^:µ?,'ik'i!''R.e.:
"•^ .
x .Y^
,!^
"^`
gasoline will cause damage

gasoline 9 to emissions control y
z3plrai:„.
+^d ,tia, ^.J ^ ^*^1.
,,:r^.: •: ,.+..JS K:$
^1^^^^^^' ,v:
^"^ f.^: »^;^!3.
,. }+ ,.`'
.^,J,;: ^::'
.a^ ;},' N C a,,,
ti ^<^fi:-.:c^£!'i:'
y
." .^,^ l..,ti,ex•,yt.. ^<...f^y.i$:Ufs:
7.",J^.^.::.: ^:^.,v^»,!
4,YOf : ^:.;kt;>
components. Fuels containing methanol should not be used in
Triumph motorcycles as damage to components in the
fuel system can be caused by contact with methanol.
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)

The use of gasolines containing up to 15% MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) is permitted in Triumph motorcycles.
Service Manual - Ti ger 10.11

TWUMBH
iiiAs
ci [ Freeze frame
The following terms and abbreviations will be found in

A data set captured at the time a Diagnostic Trouble Code
this section. Below is given a brief explanation of what
(DTC) is set.
some of the more common terms and abbreviations
Idle fuel trim
mean.
The percentage above or below the nominal fuel
Air temperature requirement for the volume of air entering at idle.
The air temperature in the air box and intake system. Idle fueling
Air temperature sensor Adjustment of fueling at idle to suit the actual air inducted.
Sensor located in the airbox to detect the temperature of Idle reference speed
the incoming air.
The target idle speed as determined by the Electronic
ATDC Control Module (ECM). (it -should be the same as the
After Top Dead Centre (TDC). actual idle speed if the motorcycle is operating correctly.)
Barometric pressure Ignition advance
Pressure of the air in the airbox. The timing of ignition at the spark plug relative to top
dead centre.
Battery voltage
Ignition switch position
The voltage at the input to the Electronic Control Module
(ECM). The 'on' or 'off position of either or both the ignition
switch and the engine stop switch.
BTDC
Ignition timing
Before Top Dead Centre { DC).
Same as 'ignition advance'.
Catalyst
Injector pulse time
Device placed in the exhaust system which reduces
exhaust emissions by stimulating secondary combustion The time during which an injector remains open (i.e.
of the exhaust gases. delivering fuel).
Long term fuel trim

Closed throttle position
Throttle position at idle (i.e. against end stop), measured as Fueling after adapting to the engine's long term fueling
a voltage and expressed as percentage. requirements (closed loop only). See also short term fuel
trim.
Coolant temperature
MAP sensor
The coolant temperature in the cylinder head.
Manifold absolute pressure (the air pressure in the intake
Coolant temperature sensor system).
Sensor which detects coolant temperature. MIL
Cooling fan status Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
The on' or 'off condition of the cooling fan. Illuminates when most Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
are set.
DTC
Neutral switch status
Diagnostic Trouble Code.
The 'neutral' or 'in gear' status of the gear change.
ECM
Off idle fuel trim
Engine Control Module.
The percentage above or below the nominal fuel
Engine speed requirement for the volume of air entering at . engine
speeds other than idle. This function is not currently used
The crankshaft revolutions per minute.
in the Triumph system.
1 0.1 2 Service Manual - Tiger UM'

^. X
Open circuit Short term fuel trim

A break in an electrical circuit - current cannot flow. A correction applied to the fuel mixture during closed
loop catalyst operation. This, in turn has an effect on the
Over temp . long term fuel trim in that if an engine constantly requires
High temperature within the Electronic Control Module mixture correction, the long term fuel trim will adapt to
(ECM) caused by an internal or external failure. this requirement thus reducing the need for constant
short term adjustment.
PrimaryThrottle Position Sensor
Sidestand status
Sensor for the primary (lower) throttle position.
The 'up' or 'down' position of the side stand.
Primary Throttle Stepper Motor
Target dwell time
Stepper motor used to vary throttle opening at idle and
when the engine is cold. The actual time from coil 'on' to coil 'off'.
Purge valve duty cycle Throttle position

The time the purge valve is open in an open / close cycle, The position of the throttle butterfly given as a percentage
expressed as a percentage of the cycle time. of the movement range. When the data is displayed on
the tool, fully open need not be 100% nor fully dosed
Road Speed Sensor 0%1.
Gearbox mounted sensor which delivers information to Throttle voltage

the ECM that is converted to the road speed value that is
displayed on the speedometer. Voltage at the throttle potentiometer.
Sensor reference voltage Vbatt
Supply voltage to the system sensors (nominally 5 volts). Batte ry voltage.
Short circuit
A 'short cut in an electrical circuit - current by-passes the
intended circuit (usually to earth).
10.13
uP Service Manual -Tiger
Fuel System/engine Man ag ement
Engorê Maiaêmer System crankshaft position sensor detects movement

of a toothed wheel attached to the alternator
rotor.
r- , , The toothed wheel gives a reference point
from which the actual crankshaft position is
The Tiger is fitted with an electronic engine management
calculated. The crankshaft position sensor
system which encompasses control of both ignition and
information is used by the ECM to determine
fuel delive ry. The electronic control module (ECM) draws
engine speed and _crankshaft position in
information from sensors positioned aroun d . the engine,
relation to the ` point where fuel is injected
cooling and air intake systems and pre ci sely calculates
and ignition of the fuel occurs.
ignition advance and fueling requirements for all engine
speeds and loads. • Engine coolant temperature sensor -
In addition, the system has an on-board diagnostic
situated at the rear of the cylinder head, on
function. This ensures that, should a malfunction occur in
the left hand side. Coolant temperature
the engine management system, the malfunction type,
information, received by the ECM, is used to
and engine data at the time the malfunction occurred, are
optimise fueling at all engine temperatures
stored in the ECM memory. This stored data can then be
and to calculate hot and cold start fueling
recovered using a special service tool which is mandato ry
requirements.
for all Triumph dealers. In this way, precise diagnosis of a • Throttle position sensor - situated at the left
fault can be made and the fault quickly rectified. end of the throttle body. Used to relay
throttle position information to the ECM.
Throttle opening angle is used by the ECM to
System Sensors
determine fueling and ignition requirements
Intake air temperature sensor - situated in for all throttle positions.
the top of the airbox. As the density of the air
• Road speed sensor - situated in the upper
(and therefore the amount of oxygen
crankcase, on the left hand side, above the
available to ignite the fuel) changes with
sprocket cover. The road speed sensor
temperature, an •intake air temperature
provides the ECM with data from which road
sensor is fitted. Changes in air temperature
speed is calculated and displayed on the
(and therefore air density) are compensated
speedometer.
for by adjusting the amount of fuel injected
to a level consistent with clean combustion • Lambda sensor - situated in the exhaust
and low emissions. header system upstream of the catalyst. The
lambda sensor constantly feeds information
Barometric pressure sensor - situated
to the ECM on the content of the exhaust
beneath the battery. The barometric pressure
gases. Based on this information, adjustments
sensor measures atmospheric air pressure.
to air/fuel ratio are made.
With this information, the amount of fuel per
injection is adjusted to suit the prevailing • Side stand switch - situated at the top of the
conditions. sidestand leg. If the sidestand is in the down
position, the engine will not run unless the
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
transmission is in neutral.
- situated at the left side of the airbox,
connected to each of the three throttle • Fall detection switch - situated beneath the
bodies by equal length tubes. The MAP battery. The fall detection switch will detect if
sensor provides information to the ECM the motorcycle is on its side and will cut
which is used at shallow throttle angles (very power to the ECM immediately. This
small throttle openings) to provide accurate prevents the engine from running and the
engine load indications to the ECM. This fuel pump from delivering fuel. In the event
degree of engine load accuracy allows the of a fall, the switch is reset by returning the
ECM to make very small adjustments to fuel bike to an upright position and switching the
and ignition which would otherwise not be ignition off then back on again.
possible from throttle angle data alone.
Clutch switch - situated on the clutch lever.
The clutch must be pulled in for the starter
motor to operate.
Crankshaft position sensor - situated in the
crankcase, near the alternator cover. The

UMW
Sensor Locations
-®a
LAMBDA SENSOR

TWUMEH
Fuel System /Engine Management
System Actuators . ® Main power relay - situated under the seat.

When the ignition is switched on, the main
In response to signals received from the sensors, the ECM
power relay is powered up to provide a stable
controls and directs messages to a series of electronic and
voltage supply for the ECM.
electro-mechanical actuators. The function and location of
the actuators is given below. • Fuel pump - located inside the fuel tank. The
electric pump delivers fuel into the fuel
• Primary throttle stepper motor - situated at
system, via a pressure regulator, at a constant
the right end of the throttle bodies. The
3 bar pressure. The pump is run continuously
primary throttle stepper actuates a cam/lever
when the engine is operating and is also run
which causes variations in the closed throttle
briefly when the ignition is first switched on
position. Although used primarily to ensure to ensure that 3 bar is available to the system
target idle speed is maintained, it also as soon as the engine is cranked. Fuel
increases throttle opening when the engine is pressure is controlled by a regulator also
cold. situated inside the fuel tank.
• Canister purge valve (California models • Cooling fan - located behind the radiator.
only) - situated in the vapour return line The ECM controls switching on and off of the
between the carbon canister and the throttle cooling fan in response to a signal received
bodies. The purge valve controls the return of from the coolant temperature sensor. When
vapour which has been stored in the carbon the coolant temperature rises to a level where
canister during the period when the engine is the cooling effect of natural airflow is
switched off. The valve is 'pulsed' by the ECM insufficient, the cooling fan is turned on by
to give control over the rate at which the the ECM. When the coolant temperature falls
canister is purged. sufficiently, the ECM turns the cooling fan off.
• Injectors - located in the cylinder head. The The fan onlybecomes operational when the
engine is fitted with three injectors. The spray engine is running. It will not operate at any
pattern of the injectors is fixed but the length other time.
of time each injector can remain open is • Secondary air injection solenoid - located in
variable according to operating conditions. front of the airbox. The secondary air
The duration of each injection is calculated by injection solenoid controls airflow through
the ECM using data received from the the secondary air injection system.
various sensors in the system.
Note:
• Ignition coils - plug-top coils are located in
the cam cover. There'are three coils fitted, In this system, the starter lockout system
one for each spark plug. The ECM controls (clutch switch, neutral switch, sidestand
the point at which the coils are switched on switch) all operate through the engine
and off. In calculating the switch-on time, the management ECM.
ECM allows sufficient time for the coils to
charge to a level where a spark can be
produced. The coils are switched off at the
point of ignition, the timing of which is
optimised for good engine performance.

uMP
F
- Management
f ` S TFWTI 0 -'
COOLING FAN
PRIMARY THROTTLE
MAIN STEPPER MOTOR
AIR INJECTION
SOLENOID
FALL DETECTION CANISTER PURGE

SWITCH VALVE
l Service Manual - Tiger

Management
6 . m! 1ri
1
1 1 t pi a 9i
Key kern
Item Description Code Wiring Colour
1 Engine Control Module R Red
2 Diagnostic Connector P Purple

3 Vehicle Speed Sensor W White
4 Instrument Assembly Y Yellow
5 Clutch Switch LG Light Green
6 Starter Relay
LU Light Blue
7 Sidestand Switch
8 Fuel level Sender ECM Connector Pin Numbering
9 Fall Detection Switch

10 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Connector A (Black)
11 Intake Air Temperature Sensor
12 MAP Sensor A18 A01
\0=_J 13 n®
13 Coolant Temperature Sensor
14 Lambda Sensor
((S*a a a 0Oaa0000000000a
Throttle Position Sensor O O Oooa®®Oa®O"o®®ooP
¶__
16 Fuel Pump
17 Fuse Box (fuse 5) A36 A19
18 Cooling Fan
19 Cooling Fan Relay
Connector B (Grey)
20 Idle Speed Control Stepper Motor
21 Ignition Coils B18 B01
a
22 Exhaust Air Injection Solenoid = ° IL -^
23 Fuel I njectors O a aOM0ÒOD000OOODOG
O O O
24 Purge Valve II l
a00000a0000®00000c^
25 330 ohm Resistor h
26 Neutral Switch (^
B36 B19
Crankshaft Sensor
z___
28 Engine Management System Relay The above illustration shows the pin numbering system
29 Fuel Pump Relay used in the engine management circuit diagram.
Key To Wiring Colour Codes The black connector's pins are prefixed A and the grey
connector's pins B. As viewed on the mating face with the
Code Wiring Colour ECM (as per the illustration), pins are numbered from
right to left with number one in the top right corner.
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
0 Orange
K Pink

LUMP
w
r ., iii:: ffl
4 6 1 27 1 UP
2 UB
B
i_ I YS
BW_-^
3
26 25
24 B28 R 4 4
B27 5
K K `t 2 YR B9
23
NK 21 1 YK A15
A33 BO
NK 2 2.
1 YP A14 5 5 6
( ''' B 8
NK 2 3
' YB A13 J_. 1
B6 YN 4
22
NK Y B8 A32 BR 1 B 8
NK A6
W 314 7
4
I 14
-BG
' 8
Kg 2
NK 3
NK 1 1 GK 2 817 821 KU 5
7_ 2 K 4 9
NK -GP ---- GP A18
KB 6
NK 2 3 1 GB BIB
Bi K K 3
z
21 A27 1 10
B20 -KB KB 2
A4 ON A22
Al
' A23 Ym
20 B2 OU A20 Y
19 B3 OK A21
All KO
1 11
48 7 KB 2
1 6
KB 2
K
1 M 2
B- P28 K i 12
K 3
17
BY 830
A29 KB 1
KB 2 13
fl
5 29 `
16
A26 B ::: :L1III1 14
W M 2 B 2
3
15
A10 -GY 1
BP 329
B B19
,---B B35

INJUmem
iITI, (:;;iiA
f^r^gic^^ Management CrcuftDiagram Tiger - with ABS
Key To Wi ri ng Circuit Dia gra m Key To Wiring Colour Codes (continued)
Key Item Description Code Wiring Colour

1 Engine Control Module 0 Orange
2 Diagnostic Connector K Pink
3 Vehicle Speed Sensor R Red__
4 Instrument Assembly P Purple
5 Clutch Switch W White
6 Starter Relay
Y Yellow
7 Sidestand Switch
LG Light Green
8 Fuel level Sender
9 Fall Detection Switch LU Light Blue
10 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor ECM Connector Pin Numbering
11 Intake Air Temperature Sensor
12 MAP Sensor Connector A (Black)
14 Lambda Sensor A18 A01
\:::: ®n n3
15
16
iii Fuel Pump
Throttle Position Sensor
((ica a a^ôa
o®oaoaoaooaa
17 Fuse Box (fuse 5) a000000o®0®®00®00=
18 Cooling Fan
19 Cooling Fan Relay A36 A19
20 Idle Speed Control Stepper Motor
21 Ignition Coils
22 Exhaust Air Injection Solenoid Connector B (Grey)
23 Fuel Injectors
B18 B01
24 Purge Valve LJI
>;E I LPJ TE/
25 330 ohm Resistor
26 Neutral Switch
(e13 aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
ôaaaoaooaooaooaa c'
27 Cranksha ft Sensor
A
28 Engine Management System Relay
B36 B19
Fuel Pump Relay
!___
30 ABS Control Module
The above illustration shows the pin numbering
Key To Wiring Colour Codes system used in the engine management circuit
diagram.
Code Wiring Colour The black connector's pins are prefixed A and the
B Black grey connector's pins B. As viewed from the mating
face with the ECM (as per the illustration), pins are
U Blue numbered from right to left with number one in the top
N Brown right corner.
G Green
.S Slate/Grey
10.20 Service Manual - Tiger UMW

Management
Circuit Dagrarn Engine Management System - Tiger - with ABS
28
1 BG -II 30
1
r
i
1'Rt!:!.! H Service Manual - Tiger 10.21

The engine management system has an on -board

diagnostics feature which allows service technicians to
retrieve stored data from the ECM using a Triumph
service tool. Full details of the tool's operation and
how to interpret the results are given elsewhere in
this section.
The tool is connected to the motorcycle using a dedicated
diagnostic plug situated beneath the seat. By using a
dedicated plug, no electrical connectors associated with
the system are disturbed, reducing potential connector Note:
damage. • In most cases, when a fault is detected, the
The tool allows the user to retrieve data associated with engine management system will revert to a
the system sensors and actuators, test various component 'limp-home' mode. In this mode, the engine
functions, read build data and make minor adjustments to will still function though the performance
the set-up of the system. The data and tests available are and fuel economy may be marginally
described on the following pages. affected. In some cases, the rider may not
notice any appreciable difference from
normal operation.
a _. !
The on-board diagnostic system has two stages to fault
detection. When a fault is detected, the DSM (Diagnostic
Status Manager) raises a flag to indicate that a fault is
present and increments a counter. The counter checks the
number of instances that the fault is noted. For example, if
Ic'
there is a fault in the crankshaft position sensor, the
counter will increment its count each time the crankshaft
turns through 360°, provided the fault is still present
When the count begins, the fault is detected but not
confirmed. If the fault continues to be detected and the
count reaches a pre-determined threshold, the fault
'/,"
becomes. confirmed. If the fault is an emissions related
fault or a serious malfunction affecting engine
performance, a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and
freeze-frame data will be logged in the ECM's memory Triumph Diagnostic Tool
and the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) on the
Described on the following pages is the range of
motorcycle instrument panel is illuminated. Once a fault is
information which can be retrieved from the ECM's
confirmed, the number of warm-up cycles made by the
memory and the adjustments which can be performed
engine is counted. If the fault clears, the warm-up cycle
using the Triumph service diagnostic tool.
counter will extinguish the MIL (Malfunction Indicator
Lamp) at a pre determined count, and erase the DTC and The tables indicate which tests are performed by the on-
freeze frame data from the ECM memory at another board system and what information can be retrieved by
(higher) count. the Triumph diagnostic tool.
A single warm-up cycle is deemed to have taken place Full details of how to operate the tool and how to interpret
when the following criteria have been met: the data follow later in this section.
• The coolant temperature must be raised to
72°C or more.
• The coolant temperature must have risen by
23°C or more from its start temperature,
when 72°C is reached.
• A controlled power-down sequence must
take place. •

• iirA ;r; iii:;j i iiiiiI
Currert
By using the Triumph diagnostic tool, live engine data When a fault occurs which causes a DTC to be stored in
(engine running) can be recovered from the motorcycle. the memory, the engine condition data at that instant is
The data available is: logged in the ECM. If another, more serious DTC is
subsequently set, the original DTC data is automatically
Function Examined Result Reported (Scale) erased and new data associated with the latest DTC is
logged in its place.
Engine speed RPM
By calling up freeze frame data associated with the
Calculated load recorded DTC, the technician can check the engine
Coolant temperature °C condition at the time the fault occurred. The data available
is:
Short term fuel trim
Throttle position ^/o Function Examined Result Reported (Scale)
Intake air temperature °C Engine speed RPM
Vehicle speed km/h Calculated load %
Ignition advance degrees Coolant temperature °C
Heated oxygen sensor volts Short term fuel trim %
output voltage Throttle position
Intake manifold absolute mm/hg Intake air temperature °C
pressure
Vehicle speed km/h
Fuel system status open or closed loop
operation Ignition advance degrees
Heated oxygen sensor volts
output voltage
Intake manifold absolute mm/hg
pressure
Fuel system status open or closed loop
operation

MUMM
rr '.,
Adaption status
The system allows the diagnostic tool to perform a series Because the fuel system is adaptive, it is able to
of function tests on various actuators in the engine automatically adjust to new working conditions. This
management system. In some cases it is necessa ry to screen displays information as to the adaption status of the
make a visual observation of a component and in other, if vehicle which will show if it has adapted or not.
faults are present, DTCs will be logged.
The function tests available are: Function Examined Report Method
Closed throttle position adapted/not adapted
Function Examined Report Method reference status
Instrument panel Visual inspection of Idle speed control
instruments adaption status
Idle • speed control stepper Stored fault code* Oxygen sensor adaption %
motor status (off idle)
Purge control valve Stored fault code* Oxygen sensor adaption %
Fuel pump relay Stored fault code*
range (off idle)
Oxygen sensor adaption %
Fuel pump operation Stored fault code*/Fuel
pressure test
status (idle)
Cooling fan Stored fault code*/fan

Oxygen sensor adaption
operation
range (idle)
It a tault is detected.
Build data
Checks/Adjustments The following items of build data can also be read.
Function Examined
Adjustments
Vehicle Identification Number WIN)
Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, it is possible to reset
the ECU to the facto ry default se ttings and to balance the Triumph ECM part number
throttle bodies. ECM manufacturer's part number
Further facilities are provided to allow correct ECM serial number
replacement/adjustment of the prima ry throttle position
sensor and the prima ry throttle stepper motor. These Software version number (tune number)
facilities are needed as, after replacement of the parts
concerned, adjustments have to be made to specific
voltage settings, all with the throttles in a specific position.
Full details of these procedures are provided later in this
section.

. ûMr
Checks The data available under throttles/coilslinjectors is:
When using this function it is possible to check the status
of various sensors and actuators and also check certain Item Checked - Result Unit
items of factory data logged during vehicle assembly. Injector 1 pulse time milliseconds
The data sets are divided into three groups, voltages/ Injector 2 pulse time milliseconds
pressures, throttles/coils/injectors and other data.
Injector 3 pulse time milliseconds
The data available under voltages is:
Ignition timing cyl 1 degrees BTDC
Item Checked Result Unit Ignition timing cyl 2 degrees BTDC
Throttle position sensor voltage Volts Ignition timing cyl 3 degrees BTDC
Throttle position % open Coil 1 dwell time milliseconds
Manifold absolute pressure sensor Volts Coil 2 dwell time milliseconds
voltage
Coil 3 dwell time milliseconds
Manifold absolute pressure (one mmHg
reading per cylinder) The data available under 'other is:
Atmospheric pressure sensor Volts
voltage Item Checked Result Unit
Atmospheric pressure mmHg Malfunction indicator light status MIL off/on
Battery voltage Volts Fan relay status fan off/on
Battery voltage scaling Volts Starter relay status starter on/off
Coolant temperature sensor Volts Fall detection status normal/over
voltage
Oxygen sensor heater status heater on/off
Air temperature sensor voltage Volts
Secondary air injection status SAI on/off
Oxygen sensor voltage Volts
Engine rpm RPM
Oxygen sensor reading Volts
Vehicle speed km/h
Gear position sensor voltage . Volts
Short term fuel trim +/-100%
Fuel level sensor voltage Volts %
Calculated load
Fall detection switch voltage Volts
Idle reference speed RPM
Fuel sensor voltage Volts
Idle speed control target steps numeric
Purge valve duty cycle °/o
Gear position numeric value
Neutral switch gear/neutral
Clutch switch grip/release
Low fuel alarm status on/off

INJUMEM
L! iiiiA 1' 1 =
uiri 1 ^_ a
Diagnostic Troa^ le_ Codes Similarly, if a fault clears, the ECM also records this fact
and will turn off the MIL when sufficient no-fault warm-up
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the ECM cycles have taken place. Any fault codes will remain in the
memory when there is a confirmed fault in the system. ECM memory until the required number of no-fault
The codes are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a warm-up cycles have taken place. The number of warm-
four digit code. up cycles required to extinguish the MIL will always be
As mentioned earlier, when the system detects a fault, it less than the number required to remove a DTC from the
begins to count the number of times the fault occurs ECM memory. DTCs can be removed at any time using
before illuminating the MIL and storing a fault code. the Triumph diagnostic tool
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed
below/over:
Diagnostic Fault Description Number of Number of MIL

Trouble no-fault no-fault illuminated
Code (DTC) cycles cycles when fault
before before DTC is logged
turning off is erased
MIL
P0201 Injector 1 circuit malfunction 3 40 Yes
P0335 Crankshaft sensor circuit malfunction 3 40 Yes
P0032 Oxygen sensor heater short circuit to battery 3 40 Yes
P0031 Oxygen sensor heater open circuit/short to ground 3 40 Yes
P0030 Oxygen sensor heater circuit malfunction 3 40 Yes
P0122 Throttle position sensor low input 3 40 Yes
P0123 Throttle Position sensor high input 3 40 Yes
P0351 Ignition coil 1 circuit malfunction 3 40 Yes
P0107 Manifold absolute pressure sensor low voltage 3 40 Yes
P0108 Manifold absolute pressure sensor high voltage 3 40 Yes
P1105 Manifold absolute pressure sensor pipe malfunction 3 40 Yes
P1107 Ambient air pressure sensor circuit low voltage 3 40 Yes
P1108 Ambient air pressure sensor circuit high voltage 3 40 Yes
P0112 Intake air temperature too high 3 40 Yes
P0113 Intake air temperature too low 3 40 Yes
P0117 Engine coolant temperature too high 3 40 Yes
P0118 Engine coolant temperature too low 3 40 Yes
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor malfunction 3 40 Yes

LIM
TTA 1iII iiiIn
Diagnostic Fault Description dumber of Numberof MIL

Trouble no-fault no-fault illuminated
Code (DTC) cycles cycles when fault
before before is logged
turning off DTC is
MIL erased
P1552 Cooling fan short circuit/open- circuit 3 40 Yes
P1553 Cooling fan short to battery voltage/over temperature 3 40 Yes
P1231 Fuel pump short circuit to ground or open circuit 3 40 Yes
P1232 Fuel pump relay short circuit to battery 3 40 Yes
PO444 Purge valve system short circuit to ground or open circuit 3 40 Yes
PO445 Purge valve system short circuit to battery 3 40 Yes
PO414 Secondary air injection system short circuit to battery 3 40 Yes
PO413 Secondary air injection system short circuit to ground or 3 40 Yes
open circuit
P0505 Idle speed control system malfunction 3 40 Yes
P1631 Fall detection sensor circuit low voltage 3 40 Yes
P1632 Fall detection sensor circuit high voltage 3 40 Yes
P0560 System voltage - battery circuit malfunction 3 40 Yes
PO460 Fuel level sensor circuit malfunction 0 40 No
P0603 EEPROM fault 0 40 No
P1690 CAN communication fault 0 40 No
P1696 Voltage control circuit short to ground 3 40 Yes
P1697 Voltage control circuit short to Vbatt 3 40 Yes
P1698 Voltage control circuit malfunction 3 40 Yes
P 1602 Tunelock Only if Flashing
Tunelock is
unlocked
P1614 ECM or tune ID Incorrect Only if Flashing
Instrument
ID Matching

MquMpt
u
Fuel SystemlEngine Management
I).. i. >t ®V Cursors to indicate that further lines of text are

available to be seen above and/or below those already in
view, by scrolling the text up or down using the 'Up' or
'Down' keys.
Cursor to show which line of text is 'active'.
'?' Indicates further help/guidance information available
on that line by pressing the help key.
Tool Keys
In most cases, the Return key ( d1) enables the user to

return to the screen last displayed.
gale
1. Memory card
2. Screen
3. Return key
4. Up key
5. Down key
6. Validate key
7. Help key
I f::J \
The memory card (1) contains all the information
necessary to allow the technician to follow a number of
different paths to:
• Diagnose faults gaei
Return Key
S Obtain data
• Make checks I adjustments
It is removable to allow replacement / update cards to be
inserted.
The screen comprises four horizontal lines and twenty
vertical columns forming a series of boxes into which
letters and numbers can be displayed to provide the
necessary question, message, answer etc.
At the left of the screen, one or more symbols as detailed
below may be displayed.
Typical Screen Showing Symbol Examples

The Up and Down. keys - press to move the lines of text The Help key can be used when the '?' symbol shows, to
up or down. They are also used to enter the update tune get more information about that line of text. To return to
password and ECU unlock code. the diagnostic screen from the help area, press the help'?'
button again.
i:I) Î I'
I fr/
9 aeg FI
U ee
p/do wn Keys (2 separate keys) scr I
Help Key
Press the Validation key (*) to move on to the next
message.
Test Procedure
The following describes the procedure to follow when
using the service diagnostic tool. It does not cover the
further diagnosis that must be carried out once a fault
area has been identified. For details of the procedure to
follow when a fault area or fault code has been identified,
refer to the diagnosis details later in this section.
Â Note:
• The tool does not retain any memory of
faults, diagnosis etc carried out on any
particular motorcycle. Any such memory is
only retained in the motorcycle's ECM.
• The following seven pages describe the tool
;.4-ThJ
gaef I
iii operations in flow chart form.
Validation Key

TRJUMOH 9
CONNECT BIKE
SELF TEST SYSTEM ERROR

False
CHECK CARD
Absent
Present
SELECT LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
FRANCAIS
DEUTSCH INSERT MEMORY CARD
ESPANOL
NEDERLANDS
ITALIANO
TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
SOFTWARE VERSION
2006_02
SELECT ECU ABS ABS, DIAGNOSTICS

ABS
SEE SECTION 14
ENGINE
ENGINE
SWITCH ON BIKE I GNITION
False DATA LINK FAULT

VALIDATE
RETRY
ECU
UNLOCK ECU? Confirm UNLOCK ECU
CHECK ECU Locked
CONFIRM
LOCK STATUS
CANCEL 55555555
ECU
Unlocked Cancel I
Main Menu
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS I Quit
CHECKIADJUST
QUIT
10.30
r
i ;
T
iiTA 1 rri s !r_
1agrcstics
Main Menu
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK/ADJUST Error Count
QUIT
STORED ERRORS
FAULT COUNT 02
IGNITION COIL 1 OPEN CIRCUIT
Diagnostics
INJECTOR 3 OPEN CIRCUIT
Stored DTC
DIAGNOSTICS
CURRENT DATA
FAULT CODES
FUNCTION TESTS Fault codes
QUIT STORED ERRORS
FREEZE FRAME DATA

Current data CLEAR DTCS
Freeze frame data

CURRENT DATA
ENGINE SPEED
CALCULATED LOAD
COOLANT TEMPERATURE CURRENT DATA
SHORT TERM FUEL TRIM ENGINE SPEED
THROTTLE POSITION CALCULATED LOAD
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
VEHICLE SPEED SHORT TERM FUEL TRIM
IGNITION ADVANCE THROTTLE POSITION
OXYGEN SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
INTAKE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE VEHICLE SPEED
FUEL SYSTEM STATUS IGNITION ADVANCE
OXYGEN SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
INTAKE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
FUEL SYSTEM STATUS
STORED ERRORS
RETURN TO DTCS
Return
CLEAR DTCS
STOP ENGINE
Clear
STORED ERRORS
ERASE ALL DTC DATA
YES
NO
No
Yes
RESET DTCS

11UU Mj
F ur ct © Test
Main Menu
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK/ADJUST
QUIT
Diagnostics
DIAGNOSTICS
CURRENT DATA
FAULT CODES
FUNCTION TEST
QUIT
Function test
FUNCTION TEST
DTCs present
TEST DTC COUNT
DTCS PRESENT CLEAR
BEFORE TEST ACTION
No DTCs present
FUNCTION TEST
INSTRUMENT PANEL
IDLE SPEED CONTROL STEPPER MOTOR
PURGE CONTROL VALVE Error Count
FUEL PUMP OPERATION Screen
COOLING FAN
SECONDARYAIR INJECTION
AIR FLAP CONTROL SOLENOID
EXHAUST BUTTERFLY VALVE TEST
EXHAUST VALVE CABLE REPLACE OR
ADJUST
FUNCTION TEST
Cancel
"TEST NAME"
PROCEED
CANCEL
Proceed
FUNCTION TEST
TEST NAME
TESTING......
OBSERVE
Zero DTCs
TEST DTCS
DTC present
FUNCTION TEST
FUNCTION TEST
TEST NAME
TEST NAME
TEST FAILED P1111
TEST COMPLETE
SIC TO VBATT
CLEAR DTC
FUNCTION TEST
PERFORM ANOTHER TEST
YES
NO
Yes I No

g SLIM
Main Menu
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK/ADJUST
QUIT
Check/Adjust
Check/Adjust menu
CHECK/ADJUST
CHECK Quit
ADJUST
QUIT
Check
Check menu
CHECK
READ BUILD DATA Quit
READ SENSORS
READ ADAPTION STATUS
QUIT
Build data Adaption status
Read
sensors
ADAPTION STATUS
ECU RESET CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION REF STATUS
IDLE SPEED CONTROLADAPTION STATUS
02 SENSOR ADAPTION STATUS - OFF IDLE
02 SENSOR ADAPTION RANGE - OFF IDLE
02 SENSORADAPTION STATUS - IDLE
02 SENSORADAPTION RANGE - IDLE
BUILD DATA
VIN
XXXXX)0(XXX O(X
TRIUMPH ECU PART NUMBER
x OOO(X
KEIHIN ECU PART NUMBER
x) xxXXXXX OO (
ECU SERIAL NO VOLTAGES
XXXXXXXXXX(X THROTTLES/COILS/INJECTORS
SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER OTHER
)OUC^►XXXXXXX
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
XX)CXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATION ID
XXXXXXX)OO X

11RIUMEH
Main Menu !
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK/ADJUST
QUIT
Check/Adjust
Check/Adjust menu
CHECK/ADJUST
CHECK
ADJUST
Quit QUIT
Adj ust
ADAPTION RESET?
No
Adjust menu YES
NO
Quit CHECK/ADJUST Yes
ADJUST TUNE
UPDATE TUNE
QUIT ECU HAS BEEN RESET
Adjust menu
THROTTLE POT RENEW

ADJUST TUFIE THROTTLE CLOSED
RESET ADAPTIONS CURRENT VOLTS 0.54 V
THROTTLE POT RENEW
ISC STEPPER RENEW
BALANCE THROTTLES
QUIT
REPLACE ISC STEPPER
THROTTLE CLOSED
CURRENT VOLTS 0.54 V
THROTTLE OPEN
CURRENT VOLTS 0.51 V
THROTTLE BALANCE
THROTTLE 1 1234 MM/HG

tUM^
L ii1 ' hDJ i Til
Main menu
4,
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK/ADJUST UPDATE TUNE
LECT MODEL
SELECT
TIGER 1050
I Check/Adjust
Check/Adjust menu
CHECK/ADJUST TIGER 1050

ADJUST TUNE Quit SELECT VIN RANGE
UPDATE TUNE VIN < XXXXXX
UNLOCK ECU VIN > XXXXXX
QUIT
11!
Update TIGER 1050
tune
TUNE XXXXX
TUNE XXXXX
TUNE XXXXX
TIGER 1050
CHECK ECU INCOMPATIBLE TUNE
UPDATE TUNE
STARTUP VERSION SELECTED - PLEASE
??????? RESELECT
1!,
UPDATE TUNE
TUNE XXXX Cancel
CONFIRM
CANCEL
Pass QUIT
TEST PASSWORD
Confirm
Fail
UPDATE TUNE
DOWNLOADING.....
10% COMPLETE
SECURITY
ACCESS DENIED 'I,

DOWNLOAD OK?
Yes I
UPDATE TUNE UPDATE TUNE
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE DOWNLOAD FAILED

AMP 9
Fuel Systern/Engine Management
L!ifl c i
Check/Adjust menu
SELECT ECU CHECK/ADJUST
ENGINE ADJUST TUNE I Quit
ABS UPDATE TUNE
UNLOCK ECU
QUIT
Engine
Unlock
ECU
ECU UNLOCK ECU?

CHECK ECU Cancel
LOCK STATUS CONFIRM
CANCEL
ECU Confirm
Unlocked
Invalid
Unlock
UNLOCK ECU Code UNLOCK ECU
55555555 F- j INVALID UNLOCK CODE
Valid Three
Unlock Invalid
Code Unlock
Codes
Entered
UNLOCK ECU
UNLOCK ECU INVALID UNLOCK CODE
ECU SUCCESSFULLY ECU TAMPER
UNLOCKED DETECTED
RE-DOWNLOAD TUNE
UPDATE TUNE
55555555
Main Menu
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK/ADJUST
QUIT

UMW
L!! I
1.Connection to main harness

2. Triumph service diagnostic tool
Connect the tool to the dedicated multiplug, located in
the storage compartment beneath the seat.
A message appears on the screen and certain checks are
made automatically, e.g. Is the memory card fitted?
'SELECT LANGUAGE will then be displayed.
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to move the cursor in

column 1 and select the language required.
Note:
The tool will always select English as the
default language, and it is only necessary to
use the cursor to select one of the other
languages. The entire diagnostic session will
then continue in the chosen language.
Press the validation key'*' to move on.

TWUMEM
Fuel S Management
r° r
MOTORCYCLES
The screen will display the message 'Triumph Motorcycles Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to scroll the text until the
Diagnostic Tool' and will also give the diagnostic software horizontal arrowhead is positioned opposite the
version and the software release year. 'ENGINE', and press the Validation key '*'.
Press the validation key'*' to move on. 'SWITCH ON BIKE IGNITION' will appear on the screen
(see operation S).
If the Return key O is pressed, the tool will return to the
'SELECT LANGUAGE' display.

IuM^
Switch on the ignition. Do NOT start the engine. If the above is displayed, check that the ignition is
Press the validation key W. During a short delay period switched on.
the tool will carry out certain validation checks. If the ignition is already on, the problem may be caused
If it detects a problem which will invalidate the test, 'DATA by bad connections, faulty ignition switch, cable break,
LINK FAULT RETRY?' will be displayed. faulty ECM, flat battery etc.
If all is OK, the tool will now automaticall Press the Help key'?' for advice.
Y check for a
locked ECM. Either 'UNLOCK ECU' (operation 7) will be Rectify the problem and press the Validation key '*' to
displayed if the ECM is locked, or the 'MAIN MENU' return to 'SWITCH ON BIKE IGNITION'.
(operation 10) will be displayed if the ECM has previously
a dation key *' again.
Press thee Validation ' If the tool accepts that
been unlocked.
the problem has been rectified, the tool will now
automatically check for a locked ECM. Either 'UNLOCK
ECU' (operation 7) will be displayed if the ECM is locked,
or the 'MAIN MENU' (operation 10) will be displayed if
the ECM has previously been unlocked.

71PJUMEH
galu ) gain I (
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to position either Enter the numerical password supplied by Triumph using
'CONFIRM' or 'CANCEL' opposite the cursor. the 'Up' and 'Down' keys as described below.
If 'CONFIRM' is selected, press the Validation key '*' to The number '55555555' is displayed, with the cursor
unlock the ECM. Operation 8 will be displayed. pointing down at the first digit.
If 'CANCEL' is selected, the 'MAIN MENU' (operation 10) Press the 'Up' or 'Down' keys to change this digit to the
will be displayed. Note that if cancel is selected, the ECM first digit of the numerical password.
will remain locked until the ECM unlock sequence is
Press the Validation key'*'.
carried out, but all other diagnostic data will be available.
The cursor will now re-position over the second digit '5'.
Enter the 2nd digit of the number in the same way.
Continue until all 8 digits of the number have been
entered.
Note:
If any digit has been entered incorrectly,
press the 'Return' key (i) to start again.
When all 8 digits have been entered correctl y press the
Validation key'*'.
If the numerical password entered is invalid, the screen
shown in operation 9 will be displayed.
If the numerical password entered is valid, the screen will
display 'ECU SUCCESSFULLY UNLOCKED'. The ECM is
now unlocked, and the engine can be started.
Note:
Each new Triumph model will have a unique
pass code (i.e. all 2007 model year onwards
Tiger motorcycles will have the same pass
code). The pass code will be released via
Triumph On Line' on a pre-arranged date.
The specific date when this code will be
released will vary from model to model.

TuMPH
i iIi
L LOCC CM
When this screen is displayed, an invalid unlock code has When this screen is displayed, you have to decide
been entered. whether to proceed along one of two routes:
Press the Validation key * key to return to the previous • 'DIAGNOSTICS'
screen. Enter the correct lock code to unlock the ECM.
• 'CHECK/ADJUST'
If an incorrect unlock code is entered three times, the
screen will display 'INVALID UNLOCK CODE ECU The 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu provides access to:
TAMPER DETECTED RE-DOWNLOAD TUNE. No Current data e.g. actual engine temperature, engine
further attempts to enter the unlock code will be allowed. speed etc.
The correct tune must then be re-downloaded in order to
allow further attempts to unlock the ECM. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) i.e. access to codes
stored in the motor cycle ECM which indicate a confirmed
fault(s) in the system.
Function tests e.g. of tachometer, water temperature
gauge, fuel pump etc.
The 'CHECK/ADJUST' menu provides:
Checks i.e. build information, system data.
Adjustments e.g. adjustment of throttle balance etc., and
entry of software updates.
Use the 'Up and Down' keys to position the cursor
opposite the desired choice, and press the Validation key
Either 'DIAGNOSTICS' (operation 11) or 'CHECK/

ADJUST' (operation 29) will be displayed, dependent on
the selection.
Note:
• if 'QUIT' is selected and the validation key
'*' pressed, the display will return to
'TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES'.

110UMEH
L rr F ii71 ThII 1 iI- Im
Start the engine. 'CURRENT DATA' includes the

This display is the 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu. information shown in the table below which can be
accessed by scrolling, using the 'Up' and 'Down' keys. At
Use the 'Up and 'Down' keys to scroll the text until the the end of each line of text, the actual reading at that
horizontal arrowhead is positioned opposite the desired instant is provided to assist diagnosis e.g. ENGINE TEMP
choice, and press the Validation key'*'. - 75C.
The choices are: For a complete list of the items reported, see the table
• 'CURRENT DATA' (see operation 12) titled 'CURRENT DATA' earlier in this section.
• 'READ STORED DTCS' (see operation 14) If further clarification of any line of displayed text is
required, scroll that line opposite the '?' symbol in the left
• 'CLEAR DTCS' (see operation 19) hand column and press the Help key (?). Limited
• 'FUNCTION TESTS' (see operation 20) information on the selected topic will then be displayed.
s
If 'QUIT' is selected, the display will return to Press any key to return to the 'CURRENT DATA' text.
'TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES'. When all information has been noted, press either the
Validation '*' or Return (J) keys.
1'0.42 • Service Manual - Tiger

. luM^
I ii k!kEII in i
- 'J ui.it
_Y I iiii LIi
Switch off the engine.

As the tool is powered from the motorcycle, this will end
the diagnostic session. To continue, return to the power- Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to position the cursor
up section and select tests as required. opposite 'DIAGNOSTICS'.
Press the Validation key '*' to display 'DIAGNOSTICS'
menu.
Select 'READ STORED DTCS', and press the Validation
key '*'.
'STORED DTCS' will be displayed.
Twumem
, Service Manual - Tiger 10.43
j ii A1 lir i fttNiL4iT
5 Tree options are now available:
The second line - 'DTC COUNT', shows the number of Align 'FREEZE FRAME DATA' with the cursor, and press
DTCs stored in the ECM memory. the validation key '*' to display 'FREEZE FRAME'
Lines 3 and 4 display up to two of the DTCs stored (if (operation 17).
any). If additional DTCs are stored, this will be indicated by Align 'CLEAR DTCS' with the cursor, and press the
a downward pointing arrowhead, and it/they can be validation key '*' to display 'ERASE ALL DTC DATA'
accessed using the 'Up' and 'Down' keys. (operation 19).
If there are no DTCs shown, press the Return key (.I) to Press the Return key (j to go back to 'STORED DTCS'
return to MAIN MENU. (operation 15).
(If DTCs are present when the Return key is pressed,
display will read 'STORED DTCS, ERASE ALL DTC DATA
YES/NO').
Information about each DTC can be obtained by scrolling
the text until the appropriate code is opposite the '?' in
line 3; then press the Help key (?).
DTC example: P0117
Help text 17RPSENSOR
LOlPOLTAGE
Press the Validation key's' to continue (operation 16).

IMPORTANT:
If a DTC has an asterisk (*) to its .right, this indicates that a
snap shot of engine data at the time the DTC was stored is
available to aid your fault diagnosis. To access this
information, press the Validation key '*' to go to
operation 16 and open 'FREEZE FRAME DATA'.

9 uM
i Tiir4i1i
When a fault occurs which causes a DTC to be stored in 2 options are now available:
the memory, the engine condition data at that instant is
Scroll to 'RETURN TO DTCS' and press the Validate key
logged in the ECM. If another, more serious DTC is
'*' to return to operation 15
subsequently set, the original DTC data is automatically
erased and new data associated with the latest DTC is Scroll to CLEAR DTCS' and press the Validation key'*' to
logged in its place. go on to operation 19
By selecting 'FREEZE FRAME', this information becomes Note:
available on the screen to aid diagnosis. Scroll the text up
• A full list of all the possible DTCs can be
or down to view the data. More information can be
gained by scrolling the text line in question to line 3 (?), found earlier in this section.
then press the Help key (?) as before. Press the Validation
key'*' to display STORED DTCS' (operation 18).
For a complete list of the items reported, see the table
titled 'FREEZE FRAME DATA earlier in this section.
TR Service Manual - Tiger 10.45

L!:!!!j3PI .
S o
I -`
Scroll to position either 'YES or NO opposite the cursor.

If YES' is selected, press the Validation key'*' to erase all Use 'Up' and 'Down' keys to select 'DIAGNOSTICS'
DTC data from the memory. 'MAIN MENU' will then be menu.
displayed. The following choices are available.
Note: Press the Validation key W. 'DIAGNOSTICS' will be
• If you intend to examine the Function Tests, displayed.
entry will be inhibited unless the DTCs have Select 'FUNCTION TESTS', and press the Validation key
been erased.
If ' NO' is selected, press the Validation key'*' to return to If no DTCs are stored, 'FUNCTION TEST' will be
operation 15. displayed (operation 22).
That completes the DTC cycle. If one or more DTCs are stored, the message 'DTCS
PRESENT CLEAR BEFORE TEST ACTION' will be
displayed (operation 21).
Note:
• The diagnostic tool will not allow Function
Tests to be accessed until all DTCs in the
memory are removed.

LIMP
iiA 1 ji
To clear the DTCs, press the Validation key '*'. 'STORED The following can be tested:
DTCS' will be displayed (see operation 15). a) Instrument panel.
Proceed as before via operations 16 to 19. Scroll to 'YES' b) Idle speed control stepper.
and press the Validation key '*' to erase all DTC data; the c) Purge valve.
MAIN MENU will be displayed again.
d) Fuel pump prime.
Note: e) Cooling fan operation.
• The fault(s) which caused the DTCs to be set 0 Fuel pump operation.
must be rectified and cleared before
If the fault is electrical, this will then be reported as a DTC.
continuing the Function Tests.
• A full list of all the possible DTCs can be Instrument Panel test: A signal is sent which should cause
found earlier in this section. the tachometer to read approximately 7,500 RPM, the
water temperature gauge to show 100 0 C* and the
Select 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu and 'FUNCTION TESTS' speedometer 100 km/h*, all for 10 seconds.
again pressing the Validation key '*' each time.
* Or the imperial equivalents.
Because the DTCs have now been erased, 'FUNCTION'
TEST' (operation 22) will now be displayed. Idle speed control stepper: A signal is sent which should
cause the stepper to be driven to the fully closed position,
then to the fully open position, pausing briefly in each
position. DTCs are set if a malfunction is found.
Purge valve (California models only): This test allows you
to check operation of the valve. To detect valve operation,
use a stethoscope to listen for valve operation. DTCs are
set if a malfunction is found.
Fuel pump prime: This test provides you with the means
to physically check the pump and relay operation. DTCs
are set if a malfunction is found.
Cooling fan test: A signal is sent which should cause the
fan to operate for a 10 second period. DTCs are set if a
malfunction is found.
Fuel pump operation: This test provides you with the
means to physically check the pump operation. DTCs are

Twumpm
1TT.imi
set if a malfunction is found. The pump is energised when

the test is confirmed and ended when the Validation key
'*' is pressed for a second time.
Press the Help key (?) for more information.
Note:
• If the Return key (^J) is pressed, the tool will
return to 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu
(operation 11).
The function selected at operation 22 will now show on

line 2. To show an example of this, we have chosen the
'I NSTRUMENT PANEL' test.
If you press the Help key (?). help relating to the specific
test will be given. In this example, the screen will now
read
• TACHOMETER - 7500 RPM.
• TEMP GAUGE - The temperature gauge
shows from empty to full then flashes twice.
• SPEEDOMETER -100 km/h*.
* Or the impe ri al equivalents.
If you wish to cancel that selection, scroll to 'CANCEL' and
press the Validation key '*'. The display will return to
operation 22.
If you wish to test the component selected, scroll to
'PROCEED' and press the Validation key'*'.

UM!
L iiTk11!I1I1
gai I (
The screen now displayed will be specific to the If the test is satisfactory the display will read 'TEST
component being tested: COMPLETE'. Press the Validation key '*' to display
In the example selected - 'INSTRUMENT PANEL', the 'FUNCTION TEST' (operation 26).
instruction is to observe the gauges.
After a period of time, the screen will automatically
change to either 'TEST COMPLETE' (operation 25) which
will indicate a satisfactory completion, or to 'TEST FAILED'
(operation 27) which will indicate failure

nty!.K
This display allows you to decide whether you wish to test If the test selected at operation 24 is unsatisfactory, a DTC
another component. will be displayed on line 3 of this display.
Either - position the cursor on line 3 'YES and press the Press the Help key (?) to access the diagnosis information
Validation key '*' to return to the 'FUNCTION TEST' associated with that code.
selection menu,
Press the Validation key ' ' if you wish to test another
or - position the cursor on line 4 'NO' and press the component (operation 26).
Validation key '*' to return to 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu
Note:
(operation 11).
• Any DTCs logged in the system will be
automatically cleared at this point.
To return to the 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu, Select 'QUIT'
and press the Validation key '*' to return to the 'MAI N
MENU' (operation 10).
That completes the 'FUNCTION TESTS' cycle.

I' niA ]1I 1ih iIi1
ga iu
^ ! This is the Checks and Adjustments menu.
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to position the cursor
'
Use the 'Up and 'Down' keys to position the cursor as
opposite 'CHECK/ADJUST. follows, and then press the Validation key'*':
Press the Validation key *'; the 'CHECK/ADJUST' menu Opposite 'CHECK' - 'CHECKS' will be displayed
will be displayed. (operation 30).
Opposite 'ADJUST' - 'ADJUSTS' will be displayed
(operation 34).
Opposite 'QUIT' - to return to 'MAIN MENU' (operation
10).

IIRJUMBH
Fuel System/Engine Man agement
!0 C 1 1-c
1IIH1IIIIIUEIE
^v
h
^v v^^.
s
hi IIIIIINI
\ C
f, 7 '
gaiu , gain J
1
You now have the option to access the motorcycle Providing
9 the information was recorded at the time of
DATA', 'ADAPTION STATUS' or the 'SENSOR DATA', or build, the display will show the following information
to quit relating to the motorcycle under test by scrolling up and
down. Before displaying the recorded information, the
Position the cursor as follows and then press the Validation
tool will briefly display the message, 'PLEASE WAIT,
key'*':
CHECKING
Opposite 'READ SENSORS' -'SENSOR DATA' (operation .
32) will be displayed. Vehicle Identi fi cation Number WIN)
Opposite 'READ BUILD DATA' - 'BUILD DATA' • Triumph ECM part number
(operation 31) will be displayed. • Manufacturer's ECM pa rt number
Opposite 'ADAPTION STATUS' - 'ADAPTION DATA' • ECM Se ri al number
(operation 33) will be displayed if the coolant temperature
is higher than 90°C. If not, a holding screen will be • Tune Number
displayed indicating the current temperature. Press the Validation '*' key to return to'CHECK/ADJUST'
Opposite 'QUIT' - to return to 'MAIN MENU' (operation menu (operation 29).
10).
10.52 Service Manual - Ti g er

9 UME
ii L'I^1il
k 4 ►
*' -L W
The display can be scrolled to show: Because adaption only takes place at normal operating
The status of the various sensors and actuators temperature, the above screen will be displayed until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature.
To obtain further data information, scroll the appropriate
line to the help key mark (?) and press the Help key. Until the engine warms or cools to the correct
temperature range, the tool will not allow access to any
Note: other functions. If you wish to escape from this area (and
• The help information shows the likely range not carry out the adjustment) switch o ff the ignition and
of readings for a correctly functioning disconnect the tool.
system at normal operating temperature. Once the correct temperature range has been reached,
That completes examination of the Checks. the 'ADAPTION STATUS' screen (operation 34) will
automatically be displayed.
Press the Validation key':' to return to 'CHECK/ADJUST
(operation 29).

1•Rt!:!!!j3H
Function Examined Report Method
Closed throttle position adapted/not adapted

reference status
Idle speed control %

adaption status

status (off idle)

range (off idle)

status (idle)

range (idle)
The display can be scrolled to show:

• Several forced adaptions may be needed to
The adaption status of the various sensors and actuators fully adapt an individual motorcycle.
involved in the adaption process will give an indication as
to whether or not the vehicle is correctly adapted. If the
readings show an incorrect adaption status, refer to the
table of contents for the location of further information
and the actions necessary to force correct adaption.
See page 10-24 for additional information on forcing
adaption.
The data displayed under this option are:

II^M^
+S y f .'
a ^ p'
/ I t
gain I
Position the cursor on line 2 'ADJUST TUNE if you wish

to check and/or ad j ust the values
e oofcertain tune items. gain
Then press the Validation key *' to display ADJUST The following allow adjustments to be made to items
TUNE (operation 35). which affect the engine operation
In special circumstances, Triumph will request you to Position the cursor opposite the se tt ing you wish to adjust
introduce a completely new engine tune. Given this and press the Validation key'*'.
situation, select UPDATE TUNE' and press the Validation 'RESET ADAPTIONS' -See operation 36.
key ' *' (operation 38). p
BALANCE THROTTLES' - See operation 37.
THROTTLE POT RENEW' - See page 10-115 for details
on when and how to use this function.
'I DLE SPEED CONTROL STEPPER -RENEW' - See page
10-116 for details on when and how to use this function.

UMW
36 ADJUST TUNE (adaption

reset) 37 BALANCE THRCTTLES
THROTTLES BRLRI €D
THROTTLE l 1 23t{f7f /HG
THROTTLE 2 7 23t'17/H6
THRO T TL 8 3 1 23 t1f7f /HG
After selecting the adaption reset option, confirm or reject Using the 'BALANCE THROTTLES' command, the
the option by positioning the cursor opposite the option throttles may be balanced without the need to connect an
chosen and press the Validation key'*'. external device to measure ` the vacuum levels in each
If YES is chosen, a screen will confirm that adaptions have throttle body. The diagnostic tool displays data taken from
been reset. the manifold absolute pressure sensor reading for each
throttle.
If NO is chosen, you will be returned to the adjust tune
menu. Once throttle imbalance has been reduced to a pre-
determined level, the top line of information will display
Note: the word *BALANCED*. Under any other conditions
• Resetting the adaption values does not where imbalance is detected, nothing will be displayed
adapt the motorcycle. This can only be done indicating that the throttles require balancing.
by the method explained later in this
section. Adaption reset only returns
adaption values to their 'start' point.

rr i' 1 ' 4iII fItI1T
(Accessed from operation 34). On receipt of special If the Password number has been incorrectly entered, the
instructions from Triumph you may be asked to input a screen will display ACCESS DENIED'. Press the Validation
completely new engine tune. key'*' to return to MAIN MENU (operation 10) and start
To do this, they will give you a password number which again.
must be entered using the 'Up and 'Down' keys in the If after a second attempt the entry is still invalid, the screen
same way as was done to unlock the ECM. will display 'ACCESS DENIED DISCONNECT AND
After entering the final digit, press the Validation key '*' RETRY'. The diagnostic tool must be disconnected and
again. the complete procedure re-started.
If the password number entered is invalid, the screen

shown in operation 38 will be displayed.
If the password number is valid, the tool will briefly display
the message, 'PLEASE WAIT, CHECKING ECM TYPE'
then, 'UPDATE TUNE' (operation 39) will be displayed.

GIMP
40 UPDATE T NE L DATTUNE
Align the cursor with the model to which a tune is to be Scroll to the tune required and press the Validation key
downloaded and, when satisfied that the selection is '*' to move on to operation 41.
correct, press the validation key'*'.
Press the help key for information on the applicability of
Once a model has been selected and the validation key each tune number.
pressed, screen 40 will be displayed.

UMW
_ n - 4
I !
IL J w_ij , : I I:l
'V
Scroll to either 'CONFIRM', 'CANCEL' or 'QUIT' (quit The screen will show 'DOWNLOADING', and the
option will not be visible until the text has been scrolled) selected software will be automatically downloaded into
then press the Validation key'*'. the ECM.
If 'QUIT' has been selected - this will return to MAIN When complete, the screen will display 'DOWNLOAD
MENU (operation 10). COMPLETE'.
If 'CANCEL' has been selected - return to operation 40. Press the Validation key '*' to return to the 'MAIN
If 'CONFIRM' has been selected, downloading will begin. MENU' (operation 10).
If downloading has been unsuccessful the screen will
display 'DOWNLOAD FAILED'. Should this message
appear, refer to 44, restarting tune download.
Press the Validation key '*' to return to the 'MAIN
MENU' (operation 10).

P 9
L 'r I - .- -
If, for any reason downloading is interrupted, the ECM

will not function and tune download cannot be restarted
in the normal way. This is because the tool's operating
system has been erased from the ECM's memory and
has not yet been fully replaced. From this screen, use the following button press
Download interruption can occur for a variety of reasons sequence:
such as, accidental disconnection of the tool, a flat HELP (?) - HELP (?) - RETURN (J) - HELP (?) VALI DATE
battery, turning the ignition switch to 'OFF' during M.
download etc.
The dealer log-in screen will then be displayed. From that
In these circumstances, a special tool key-press screen, download can be restarted in the normal way.
sequence must be followed which is described below.
Note:
To restart download, switch the motorcycle ignition to
• The software version number is not relevant
'OFF' and disconnect the tool. Reconnect the tool, switch
to this procedure. All versions of the
the motorcycle ignition to 'ON', and scroll through to the
diagnostic software will operate in the way
screen shown below.
described.

TuMTH
Before beginning any diagnosis, the following connector Note:
related information should be noted: o Two different shaped connectors are used in
Note: the ECM which ensures correct connection
is always made.
• A m ajor cause of hidden elect ri cal faults can
be traced
a toofaulty
au aelectrical
ectr connectors. For
connectors
: .
£:; £Y.i;F :):J: . , H^?64r;;.,s. fl. av , YS.fq .i a. . .:Bt;.y,v:;x.: ,;`;,Ca.:,`.:'a,J;^::
::. a
£:...,^kx::
.•k
>r, ^.'
,.. .:,.<:
°_;:^¢'.•'°
^"kas:;
example: SRS L \ 'h:::T1i,

^'x'
pq'
' t^`^^.,
^^7: :ay., ^,p ^?
Caution :^C'y^,Q^ ••.: L^\^^^^:uâ^•^f°';,',c'^h . Yk.^G;.u`.w4<;.
2 `^t^'3.y^L''.r 4.. y Akvhl'l L^1 a y"^. !
{^
N
•;.^! Y:A`.a:.u,:;nY. ^ û"^[a;. : ti•^

>,^,",c y:^;if2•,.:6;^ầii"^^•^l• ..,.^ ' .
:v .,o^•`^w ^
i:
^,;.,•.n{^ ,y J ..a ,.^•.,i: Y:: r. _:,. °•.r';,+`L•`¢ZC;..M,s;"Y xv f3:'F,C`.7x. ,J
^;•y;, ::•:`r^;:{
: v'. .r. .,?; •.:.<:,x,..;^ \.a ..%3......,
h.;\x.t;;..
: ,.^ .:.
,..o
:a ..si} +^.
.Jt.Yrol. l , ox..9^Jx Jx .,br3.,s,.^.."Ssr^
,, #''•`r:::.
.{,:^.:^tx:nx":, .£^•.•^,^Yri^.:r::x;:, .:.,^ :7.1,`N4,.xs`,;:^`x:"^.C'.s^;..:..v,...^.'1•,si
1^• ° .i ^ ;:a.... .:,..,x::.: ..
• Dirty/corroded terminals. When disconnecting a connector, never pull directly on
• Damp terminals. the wires as this may result in cable and connector
• Broken or bent cable pins within multi- damage.
plugs.
For example, the electronic control module (ECM) relies
on the supply of accurate information to enable it to plan
the correct fuelling and ignition timing. One dirty terminal
will cause an excessive voltage drop resulting in an Never disconnect an ECM when the ignition switch is in
incorrect signal to the ECM. the'ON' position as this may cause multiple fault codes
to be logged in the ECM memory.
If, when carrying out fault diagnosis, a fault appears to
Always disconnect an ECM after disconnecting the
clear by simply disconnecting and reconnecting an
battery negative (black) lead first.
electrical plug, examine each disconnected plug for the
following. 1. Turn the ignition to the 'OFF position and wait at
least 1 minute for the ECM to complete its power
;— r - 1 e: down sequence.
2. Press down on the locking device and gently pull
• If testing with a voltmeter, the voltage
back on the connector to release it from the ECM.
across a connector should be virtually
battery volts (unless a resistor is fitted in the
ci rcuit). If there is a noticeable change,
suspect faulty/dirty connections.
When Disconnecting a Connector:

• Check for a security device that must be
released before the connector can be
separated. E.G. barb, hook and eye etc.
When Inspecting a Connector:

• Check that the individual pins have not been
bent.
• Check for dampness/dirt/corrosion. 1. Locking device
• Check cables for security. Note:
• Check cable pin joints for damage. • The ECM is located under the seat, forward
of the battery.
When Connecting a Connector:
• Ensure there is no dirt around the
connector/seal.
• Push together squarely to ensure terminals
are not bent or incorrectly located.
• Push the two halves together positively.

1mRL!:!! H
Reconnection of E CM conne ctors Further Dagnosis

'
a::x+;.:..::..:::...,4ox&....at}.:
;^:...?.,.,:.:.:,..3a,}::.
.:v,.,..,.:.rt..,..:o, .,..,,..r. ,v,
t::::..:::. ... . .
:::M:?:}:: ; »;:X F" :c,.:.
::^ : ^^^ , ^H^+t.^^:.::..
•
:.... ::o:< ,. t::• .k....:.v.:::4>t.....

A:n:: :.:. ..:.,.::c.,
m:9::..
Y.::., o,.... a;fY;:"1^"5.:
v.,
} ..5,..,:..
^ 5^...SF'.:.. ?.ir.^:^;:p:,a .,.^ :,l :: f}
:,:,t' ?r :.•,:^:,,..
,.:.^ ^
...? :v;..:ea,a.,,.....,,...
^nV»:•Yx .^.^
, ........
.::.v...
f:
+•::: , S
.,.^ ,,., +
:..^...
.ts..:. • t .;:53?b ;..,S:Y..4:i.c}.:,Y..."::.^'ti;3i
... 7.:^.;:::F:.::tt:.,a,:A..f?,,:t:,?:L}.N.y<.:
.. i
: :::. ,F':.ift:?'
. i:,,
;,:.,..:?..::
..:.:.......:.... :....
• %.: r.., .<a.:.
The tables that follow will, if used correctly,
1 y / P to
n.,L$F$^stt;,k::ak:P^`6$^.f:., > .$ . . r^` . „\ofre;'i:
Caution
:
k :i :3'S ? .u;tf^t... , ^£ .
.0.:"•\:f. ^p J... . C^ti`^
: JJis SAf i
}$.`.k^f v!>?} C:IJ.I:: ^:',:..

^.
#t \+Y.6
,: (^
^t..,. :.,,».r
:^ .... $?^. ..t:.aw^ff
v'v:a^.vw^::<l},:l•..: P P oint f ul in h s stem once a d ia nostic trou
+,<:^.:S.:k. •' Y.»>
,
N..^,<
L$ì$$`}' ,i}}k'v'•"a 3^•n}f$ik:Can.
.:n' :n ... •x ^::.r.. "C
I
': •avt..,.
,54`x:.;:.. ..?)::: "N5,+r}.;y?
î}i :Si'2..
ri;<{i5...}^1 }?'î.... n }...., v.:.1,
%: v',.:tia1.'L :.1•,f ,3Y;t.,. E;^:}.:.
:..}.,::..( ^.:. }n, ,.:J:::
code has been stored.
..i....<ae.$s$:o^^k.., i.rYh:•..
}iY,.
t:6i t:t:
5:•k>..
.. tGt,...i:^
za+'$:Î
:ft2Y. ,;'55x:
. t..::$o'C.k n n:
^.i.,..Y,.:.:}YFd::v.v:.......p•...A. t :N:..:6'S:F:
v.... ..
}u>:.:a:c.+: 5.
:kK;.S
., t•.N':O.n.a..,.t?^q_.n.::.
.o+?: »
..,.:i.Cc,••....:...:......,
:...., ... b ?'^
Damage to the connector pins may result if an attempt

to fit the connectors incorrectly is made.
a 1 0
0
0 2
1. ECM
2. ECM raining tang
3. Fit the connector into its socket and, whilst holding
the connector in place, insert it fully into the ECM
until the locking device retains it.

I2iiA iiti
WTi iiii I
Fault Code Possible cause Action

P0335 Crankshaft sensor system fault View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
frame' data if available.
Ensure sensor is fitted correctly and
connector is secure.
Disconnect ECM and proceed to
pinpoint test 1:
';T T
Test Result Action
1 Check terminal and cable integrity: OK Disconnect sensor and proceed to

- ECM pin A9 test 2
-ECM pin Al
Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 6
2 Check cable for short circuit: OK Proceed to test 3
- ECM pin A9 to earth Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin Al to earth 6
3 Check cable continuity: OK Proceed to test 4
- ECM pin Al to sensor pin 1 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A9 to sensor pin 2 6
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew crankshaft sensor, proceed to test 6
- ECM pin A9 to ECM pin Al Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
6
5 Check crank toothed wheel: OK Proceed to test 6
- Damage to teeth - magnetic debris
contamination
Faulty Clean/renew toothed wheel, proceed to test 6
6 Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run OK Action complete - quit test
engine to verify fault cleared
Fault still present Contact Triumph service
Circuit Diagram
Crankshaft Engine
Sensor Control Module
1 UP At
2 UB A9

UMW
1

P0505 ISC stepper motor / wiring fault View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
frame' data if available.
View & note diagnostic tool 'sensor'
data.
Ensure sensor connector is secure.
pinpoint test 1:
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Proceed to test 2
- ECM pin A22 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 7
-ECM pinA23
- ECM pin A20
- ECM pin A21
2 Check resistance value: 49 to 125 Disconnect stepper motor and proceed to test
3
- ECM pin A22 to ECM pin A23 Open circuit Proceed to test 4
- ECM pin A20 to ECM pin A21
Short circuit Disconnect stepper motor and proceed to test
5
- ECM pin A23 to earth Y 7
- ECM pin A20 to earth
- ECM pin A22 to stepper motor pin A Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A23 to stepper motor pin Al 7
- ECM pin A20 to stepper motor pin B
- ECM pin A21 to stepper motor pin B 1
- ECM pin A22 to ECM pin A23 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A20 to ECM pin A21 7
6 Check stepper motor resistance: 4 to 12Q Proceed to test 7
- Motor pin A to motor pin Al Faulty Renew stepper motor, proceed to
- Motor pin B to motor pin B 1 test 7
diagnostic tool function test to visually verify
operation of stepper motor
10.64 Service Manual - Tiger UM

Idle Speed Control Engine
Stepper Motor Control Module
Service Manual - Tiger.

er. 10.65
I MP
P0201/02/03 Injection system fault - Injector 1/2/3 View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
- Misfire indicates open circuit frame' data if available.
- Flooding indicates short circuit Ensure relevant injector connector is
secure. Disconnect ECM and proceed
to pinpoint test 1:
Test Result Action

- ECM pin A14
-ECM pinA13
2 Check resistance value: 12.59 to 14.OQ Proceed to test 3
- ECM pin A6 to ECM pin A15 (injector 1)
Open circuit Disconnect relevant injector and proceed to
test 4
Short circuit Disconnect relevant injector and proceed to
test 5
3 Check cable for short circuit to ground: OK Proceed to test 7
- ECM pin A14 to earth 7
- ECM pin A6 to relevant injector pin 2 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A15 to injector 1 pin 1 7
- ECM pin A14 to injector 2 pin 1
- ECM pin A13 to injector 3 pin 1
5 Check cable for short circuit to supply box: OK Proceed to test 6
- ECM pin A6 to ECM pin A15 (inj 1) Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A6 to ECM pin A14 (inj 2) 7
- ECM pin A6 to ECM pin A13 (inj 3)
6 Check relevant injector resistance: 12.55 to 14.O Proceed to test 7
- Injector pin 1 to injector pin 2 Faulty Renew relevant injector, proceed to test 7

Ul^^
EMS Relay
ECM
NK
NK
2^ 1
2 2
2 1
Fuel Injectors

tl1M
L iiA1ri'tii i t t 5

P0122 Throttle position sensor low input View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
P0123 voltage (short to ground or open frame' data if available.
circuit) View & note diagnostic tool 'sensor'
Throttle position sensor high input data.
voltage (short circuit to sensor supply) Ensure sensor connector is secure.
pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect sensor and proceed to
-ECM pin B1 test2
- ECM pin B20
-ECM pinA10
- ECM pin A10 to ground
Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
- ECM pin A10 to sensor pin 1
- ECM pin B20 to sensor pin 2
- ECM pin B 1 to sensor pin 3
Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew throttle position sensor, proceed to
- ECM pin A10 to ECM pin B1 test 5
- ECM pin A10 to ECM pin B20
5
10.68 Service Manual - Tiger UM

Throttle ECM
Position Sensor
1 GY A10
2 KB B20
3 K B1

I t!:! M .H
: .
I ii*''T 1i TI:iiI:1iT
Puree
PO444 Open circuit or short circuit to earth View & note diagnostic tool 'sensor'
data.
Ensure purge valve connector is
secure.
pinpoint test 1:
PO445 Short circuit to battery+ Disconnect purge valve and proceed
to pinpoint test 5:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

- ECM pin B9 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 7
2 Check resistance value: 245 to 28Q Disconnect purge valve and proceed to test 3
- ECM pin A6 to ECM pin B9 Open circuit Proceed to test 4
Short circuit Disconnect purge valve and proceed to test 5
- ECM pin B9 to earth Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
7
- ECM pin B9 to valve pin 2 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A6 to valve pin 1 7
5 Check cable for short circuit: ` OK Proceed to test 6
- ECM pin A6 to ECM pin B9 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
7
6 Check purge valve resistance: 245 to 285 Proceed to test 7
- Valve pin 1 to valve pin 2 Faulty Renew purge valve, proceed to test 7
operation of purge valve
1 0.70 Service Manual - Tiger

!iM
L IT.iA
EMS Relay
ECM
1 6 4 a
PurgeValve
NK 2 YR B9
NK A6

TwumeH
Fuel S Management

P0351/52/53 Ignition system fault - Ign coil 1/2/3 View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
frame data if available.
Ensure relevant ign coil connector is
to pinpoint test 1:
Test Result Action

-ECM pinA18
-ECM pinB18
2 Check resistance value: 0.8Q to 1.2Q Proceed to test 3
ECM pin A6 to
- ECM pin (ign coil 1) B17
Open circuit Disconnect relevant ignition coil and proceed
to test 4
Short circuit Disconnect relevant ignition coil and proceed
to test 5
- ECM pin to earth B17 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin to earth A18 7
- ECM pin to earth B18
Power latch relay pin 8 to any ign coil pin 2 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin B17 to ign coil 1 pin 1 7
- ECM pin B18 to ign coil 2 pin 1
- ECM pin B18 to ign coil 3 pin 1
ECM pin A6 to Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin (ign coil 1) B17 7
- ECM pin (ign coil 2) A18
- ECM pin (ign coil 3) 818
6 Check relevant ign coil resistance: O.8 1.2Q Proceed to test 7
- Ign coil pin 1 to ign coil pin 2 Faulty Renew relevant igni ti on coil, proceed to test 7

luM^
Circuit Diagram
EMS Relay
ECM
A6
B17
A18
VN
-t-j
1141% %J
Ignition Coils
IMP Service Manual - Tiger • 10.73

System/Engine •'- 1

P0118 Open circuit, or short circuit to View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
battery+ frame' data if available.
data.
pinpoint test 1:
P0117 Short circuit to ground Disconnect sensor and proceed to test
6:
Test Result Action

- ECM pin B20
2 Check resistance value: OK Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 6
- ECM pin A29 to ECM pin B20 Open circuit Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 3
(Temperature dependent, see below)
Short circuit Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 4
- ECM pin A29 to sensor pin 1 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin B20 to sensor pin 2 7
7
5 Check sensor resistance: OK Proceed to test 7
- Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2 Faulty Renew temp sensor, proceed to test 7
(Temperature dependent - see below)
- ECM pin A29 to ground Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
7
Resistance data under typical conditions:

Warm engine: 200 to 400Q
Cold engine:
20°C ambient 2.35 to 2.65KQ
-10°C ambient 8.50 to 10.25KQ
10.74 Service Manual - Tiger UM'

Coolant
ECM
Temperature
Sensor
2 KB B20
1 KG A29
UP Service Manual - Tiger 10.75

1 e-iiA aI Iziiii ffl
I^vlet Air Temperature Sensor

P0113 Open circuit, or short circuit to View & note diagnostic tool 'freeze
battery+ frame data if available.
data.
pinpoint test 1:
P0112 Short circuit to ground Disconnect sensor and proceed to
pinpoint test 6:
^ f
Test Result Action

- ECM pin All Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 7
- ECM pin B20
2 Check resistance value: OK Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 6
- ECM pin All to ECM pin B20
(Temperature dependent—see below) Open circuit Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 3
Short circuit Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 4
- ECM pin All to sensor pin 1 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
4 Check cable for short circuit: a
OK Proceed to test 5
- ECM pin All to ECM pin B20 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
7
5 Check sensor resistance: OK Proceed to test 7

- Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2 Faulty Renew temp sensor, proceed to test 7
(Temperature dependent—see below)
- ECM pin All to ground Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
7
If engine is warm, remove sensor and allow time to cool to
ambient prior to test.
Resistance data:
Ambient temp Resistance value
80°C 200 to 4005
20°C 2.35 to 2.65KQ
-10°C 8.50 to 10.25KQ

IuM^
£^ ..
I nlet Air
ECM Temperature
Sensor
B20 KB 2
A11 K0 1

TI.ty! kI

P1231 Fuel pump relay open circuit, or short Check if pump runs briefly when
circuit to ground ignition is switched on.
Ensure fuel pump relay connector is
secure.
pinpoint test 1:
P1232 Short circuit to battery+ Disconnect fuel pump relay and
proceed to pinpoint test 4:
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect fuel pump relay and proceed to
test 2
- ECM pin B29 to earth Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
- ECM pin B29 to fuel pump relay pin 2 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- Fuel pump relay pin 1 to EMS relay 5
pin 6
- ECM pin B29 to ALARM pin 1 or 3 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
diagnostic tool function test to verify fault
cleared
Circuit Diagram
EMS Relay Fuel Pump Relay
FrT1
3 1 2 5 ECM
BP B29
10.78 Service Manual - Tiger liNit

Fault Code Possible cause . Action

P0560 Bike voltage system fault View & note diagnostic tool 'sensor'
data.
Ensure voltage across battery is
acceptable, note voltage.
pinpoint test 1:
Test Result Action

ECM pin A6 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 3
2 With Ignition 'ON', check voltage at Same as 'across Proceed to test 3
battery' voltage
- ECM pin A6 - Less than 'across Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
battery' voltage 3
Circuit Diagram
EMS Relay
!__..
NK Ab
B B19
B B35
B A3S

Twumm
System/Engine • •
[ r i i';i
P1552 Fan relay open circuit, or short circuit View & note diagnostic tool 'sensor'
to ground data.
Ensure fan relay connector is secure.
pinpoint test1:
P1553 Short circuit to battery+ Disconnect fan relay and proceed to
pinpoint test 4:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect fan relay and proceed to test 2
- ECM pin B30 to ground Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
- Fan relay pin 4 to ECM pin B30 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- Fan relay pin 6 to EMS relay pin 8 5
- ECM pin B30 to ECM pin A6 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
diagnostic tool function test to,visually verify
operation of cooling fan
EMS Relay Cooling Fan Relay
1 6 4 8 ECM
K Y B30
K A6
10.80 Service Manual -Tiger

IkIUM8H
iii k Fi [1ThLFlI
.
I i iit flI ii ]u

P0130 Lambda sensor circuit fault View & note 'freeze frame' data if
available.
View & note 'sensor' data.
pinpoint test 1:
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect lambda sensor and proceed to
test 2
- ECM pin B20
- ECM pin A26 to ECM pin A6 4
engine. Check adaptation status.
Circuit Diagram
EMS Relay Lambda Sensor
ECM
W B14
B -26
KB B20
NK A6

TwumeH,
L ! i i 4 1iitz
rm;; . : Sensor _
P0031 Lambda sensor heater circuit short View & note 'freeze frame' data if
circuit to ground or open circuit available.
pinpoint test 1:
P0032 Lambda sensor heater circuit, short Disconnect lambda sensor and
circuit to battery proceed to pinpoint test 4:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect lambda sensor and proceed to
-ECM pinB14 test2

5
- ECM pin B14 to sensor pin 1 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew lambda sensor and proceed to test 5
- ECM pin B14to ECM pin A6
5
5 Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run OK Action complete, quit test
engine. Check adaption status.
Circuit Diagram
EMS Relay Lambda Sensor
ECM
W B14
6 6
KB B20
NK 6
10.82 Service Manual - Tiger LAM

- p y^ : e •
x

P0603 EEPROM error View & note 'freeze frame' data if
available.
No tests available - contact Triumph
service.

IrRJUMM
•

P1631 Fall detection switch low input voltage View & note 'freeze frame' data if
available. .
P1632 Fall detection switch high input
voltage or open circuit View & note sensor' data
Ensure switch connector is secure.
pinpoint test1:
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2
- ECM pin B21 to ECM pin A6 6
- ECM pin B20 to sensor pin 6
- Sensor pin 4 to sensor pin 5 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- Sensor pin 4 to sensor pin 6 6
5 Check voltage (with ignition on): 5V Renew fall detection switch and proceed to
test 6
- Sensor pin 4 Less than 4.8V Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
6
6 Reconnect harness, clear fault code. OK Action complete, quit test
Circuit Diagram
Fall
ECM Detection
Switch
B20 KB b
B21 KU 5
Bl K 4

Fue l SystemlEngin e Management
Fault C®e Possible cause . Action

P0500 Vehicle speed sensor circuit fault View & note 'freeze frame' data if
available.
pinpoint test1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect ambient pressure sensor and
proceed to test 2
- Instrument pin 16
- ECM pin A34 to ground Faulty Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A34 to ECM pin B1 4
- ECM pin A34 to battery
3 Check cable for continuity: OK Renew vehicle speed sensor and proceed to
test 4
- Sensor pin 2 to ground 4
- Instruments pin 16 to sensor pin 1
engine.
Circuit Diagram
Alarm Kill
Control Unit Switch
1 2 5 4
Instruments 0° Fuse Box

^ G 1I
3 GR
16 BY
KM
3 KY
2 B
Road
Speed Sensor

Twumm
= iii 2
1 i - t ^4
Fault Code Possible cause • Action

P1690 Fault in CAN communication between View & note 'freeze frame' data if
ECM and Instrument pack available.
Ensure Instrument connector is secure.
pinpoint test 1:
P ^
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2
- ECM pin B27
- Instrument pin 4
- Instrument pin 5
- ECM pin B28 to ground Faulty Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin B27 to ground 4
3 Check cable continuity: OK Contact Triumph service
- ECM pin B28 to Instrument pin 4 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin B27 to Instrument pin 5 4
engine
Circuit Diagram
ECM
Instruments
4 R B28
S U B27

UM'
1Tftt!I4iI!Frni
S
i

PO460 Fuel level sensor circuit fault View & note 'freeze frame' data if
available.
pinpoint testl:
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2
- ECM pin B20
5
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew fuel level sensor and proceed to test 5
- Sensor pin 3 to sensor pin 4 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
5 Reconnect harness, clear fault code OK Action complete, quit test
Circuit Diagram
Fuel
Level ECM
Sensor
EIJ=;L;I

Twummi 9
L iiA miinriu
Ambient Pressure nsor

P1 107 Ambient pressure sensor circuit short View & note 'freeze frame' data if
circuit to ground available.
pinpoint test1:
P1108 Ambient pressure sensor circuit, short Disconnect ambient pressure sensor
circuit to supply or open circuit and proceed to pinpoint test 4:
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect ambient pressure sensor and
proceed to test 2
- ECM pin B20
-ECM pin B1
- ECM pin A27 to ECM B20 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
3 Check cable for continuity: OK Renew ambient pressure sensor and proceed
to test 5
- ECM pin B 1 to sensor pin 3
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew ambient pressure sensor and proceed
- ECM pin A27 to ECM pin B1 to test 5

5
engine
Circuit Diagram
Ambient
ECM Pressure
Sensor
B20 KB 2
A27 KP 1
B1 K 3
1 0.88
Service Manual - Ti er
9 iLIMP
IciiiA a 1

P0107 MAP sensor circuit short circuit to View & note 'freeze frame' data if
ground available.
pinpoint test1:
P0108 MAP sensor circuit, short circuit to Disconnect MAP sensor and proceed
supply or open circuit to test 4:
P1105 MAP sensor pipe fault Check connection/condition of pipe
from MAP sensor to throttle body
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect MAP sensor and proceed to test 2
- ECM pin B20
- ECM pin B 1
ECM pin A28 to ECM B20 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
5
3 Check cable for continuity: OK Renew MAP sensor and proceed to test 5
ECM pin B 1 to sensor pin 3
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew MAP sensor and proceed to test 5
- ECM pin A28 to ECM pin B1
5
engine
ECM MAP
Sensor
B20 KB 2
A28 K5 1
B1 K 3

ery
er 10.89
Twumpm 9
II$Ijj i! • ir;iiwi

P00413 Open circuit or short circuit to earth View & note diagnostic tool 'sensor'
data. Ensure SAI valve connector is
to pinpoint test 1:
PO414 Short circuit to battery positive Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to
pinpoint test 5:
Pinpoint
oint Tests
Test Result Action

2 Check resistance value: 20Q to 25Q Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to test 3
- ECM pin B08 to ECM pin A06 Open circuit Proceed to test 4
Short circuit Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to test 5
7
- ECM pin B08 to valve pin 1 Open Circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin A06 to valve pin 2 7
- ECM pin B08 to ECM pin A06
7
6 Check SAI valve resistance: 205 to 25Q Proceed to test 7
- Valve pin 1 to Valve pin 2 Faulty Renew SAI valve, proceed to test 7
operation of SAI valve
1 0.9 Service Manual - Tiger IUP

.
System/Engine ,. •
ii i iriii
• i ^ ia a
^..
1'? t
EMS Main Relay
ECM
3 1 ^ 5
Secondary AirValve
NK YO B08
NK A06

UMm
Fuel System /Engine Mana g e me nt
EMS Moro Relay Orculk

P1685 EMS Main Relay circuit fault Note that the Starter Motor cannot be
powered if a Main Relay fault exists.
Ensure the EMS Main Relay connector
is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Test . Result Action

1 Ensure ignition has been switched off for OK Proceed to test 2
greater than one minute. Identify EMS
Main Relay on the harness.
Check that relay operates when the ignition Faulty Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 4
is switched ON.
2 Check fuse box Fuse 6 integrity OK Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 4
Faulty Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 3
3 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace Fuse 6 and proceed to test 4
- ECM pin A06 to ground Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace Fuse 6
- EMS Main relay pin 3 to ground and proceed to test 7
4 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect Main Relay and proceed to test 5
-ECM pinB15
- EMS Main Relay pin 1
7
6 Check cable continuity: OK Replace EMS Main Relay and proceed to test
7
- ECM pin A06 to EMS Relay pin 5 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin B15 to Relay pin 1 7
- EMS Main Relay pin 2 to ground
- EMS Main Relay pin 3 to Fuse box Fuse 6
7 Reconnect harness, clear fault code. Switch OK Action complete - quit test
ignition off for longer than one minute.
Switch ignition on and check that the EMS
main relay operates. Start engine as final
check

l uP
1Tri i
Fuse box EMS Main Relay
KM
A06
615

TwumeH
Y 1 ._ 1
EMS Iiri V©Ote Circul

Fault Code Possible cause • Action
P1659 EMS Ignition Voltage input circuit fault Disconnect ECM and proceed to
pinpoint test 1:
Test Result Action

1 Check Fuse box Fuse 2 integrity OK Proceed to test 3
Faulty Proceed to test 2
2 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace Fuse 2 and proceed to test 3
- ECM pin A19 to ground
Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace Fuse 2
and proceed to test 5
- Alarm Connector pin 1
- Alarm Connector pin 2
- Right hand switchcube pin 2
- Right hand switchcube pin 5
- ECM pin A19 to fuse box Fuse 2, note that Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring, immobiliser or
the engine stop switch must be in the engine stop switch fault, proceed to test 5
'RUN' position and any Alarm fitted must
be disarmed
Circuit Diagram
Engine
Stop Alarm
Switch Control Unit
2 5
Fuse Box
4-ij ECM
I
G GN-b £
10A
10.94 Service Manual - Tiger UP

P1696/P1697/P1698 Sensor supply circuit shorted Sensor View & note sensor' data. Note ECM
supply circuit shorted to ground sensors requiring a power supply will
Sensor supply circuit shorted to not be active. Disconnect ECM and
battery positive proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

- ECM pin B20
2 Check cable for short circuit OK Proceed to test 4
- ECM pin B01 to ECM pin B20
Faulty Proceed to test 3
3 Disconnect the following sensors in turn: OK Replace sensor last removed and proceed to
test 5
- MAP sensor Faulty Proceed to test 4
- Ambient pressure sensor
- Throttle position switch
- Exhaust control valve actuator
-Fall detection sensor and retest for short
circuit
- ECM pin B01 to ECM pin B20
- ECM pin B01 to ground- Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
- ECM pin B20 to ground 5
- ECM pin B01 to A06
- ECM pin B20 to A06
- ECM pin B01 to battery positive
- ECM pin B20 to battery positive
7 Reconnect harness, clear fault code and use OK Action complete - quit test
service tool to check for correct sensor
outputs and 5V sensor supply voltage level
Circuit Diagram
Ambient ExhaustValve
Pressure MAP Sensor Fall Detection Throttle Position Sensor
Sensor Switch Position
2 3 2 3 6 4 2 3 3 1
I I
i j
ECM
B20
B01
KB
K j j I
Twitimpm Service Manual - Tiger 10.95

rr i - jiiiri i i Iiti

P1602 ECM is locked to prevent the This is also identified by a fast flashing
motorcycle from being operated MIL indication, and a disabled engine
management system. Unlock the
ECM using the service tool and
supplied unlock code from Triumph
service

UM
L IW
P1614 ECM or Tune is incorrect, causing the This is also identified by a fast flashing
ECM to be disabled to prevent the MIL indication, and a disabled engine
motorcycle from being operated. management system.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check ECM part number is correct for the OK Proceed to test 2
motorcycle
Incorrect Replace ECM with correct part and proceed
to test 3
2 Check that the tune is correct for the OK Proceed to test 3
motorcycle, using the diagnostic tool
Incorrect Update tune using service tool, proceed to
test 3
3 Clear fault code, check for normal operation OK Action complete - quit test

TRJUMM 9
Fit F - N n E rc 6
Symptom Possible cause(s)
Poor throttle response at low RPM Low fuel pressure caused by filter blockage/leaks
Cutting out at idle Throttle bodies out of balance

ISC (Idle Speed Control) actuator inoperative
Low fuel pressure
Weak mixture caused by air leak at the throttle body/
transition piece to cylinder head face
Idle speed too low/high ISC (Idle Speed Cont rol) actuator sticking
Incorrect closed throttle position setting
Mechanical fault with the throttle linkage
Diagnostic tool malfunctions during tune download Low battery voltage
procedure
Throttle hang-up Incorrect closed throttle position setting
Bike will start but cuts out immediately ISC motor stuck
Low fuel pressure caused by filter blockage/leaks
Abnormally high fuel pressure Fuel pressure regulator inoperative
Temperature gauge reads cooler than normal Cooling system air—locked resulting in coolant
temperature sensor operating in air instead of coolant
10.98 Service Manual - Tiger u p

Observe the warning advice given in the general
information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel
containers.
A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property,
could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or
stored correctly.

2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
3. Remove the side fairings (see page 16-13).
4. Remove the side panels (see page 16-10).
5. Remove the fairing infill panels (see page 16-11). 'c ® I
1. Fuel tank front cover
\ '® ,/ 1 ! ®®1
6. Release and remove the two bolts securing the rear 2. Fixing
of the fuel tank to the frame. 8. Raise the rear of the tank and disconnect the fuel
hose by squeezing the sides of the connector and
pulling the hose free from the spigot.
9. Disconnect the electrical connections to the fuel level
sender and the fuel pump.
1. Fuel tank to frame bolts
cegn
1. Fuel hose
2. Fuel pump electrical connection
3. Fuel level sender electrical connection
Note:
• When the hose is disconnected, the fuel

tank is self-sealing although some fuel may
dribble from the hose.

T1L!:!!!j3K
Fuel Systern( ngine Management
Installation
Note:
• If removed, ensure the fuel tank front cover
is installed prior to fuel tank installation.
1. Position the fuel tank to the mounting points.

2. Connect the two breather hoses as noted prior to
removal.
1. Fuel filler drain hose

2. Fuel tank vent hose (connects to roll-over valve &
marked with a white paint dot)
1. Fuel filler drain hose
11. Remove the fuel tank,
2. Fuel tank vent hose (connects to roll-over valve
marked with a white paint dot)
3. Reconnect the fuel pump electrical connection.
4. Reconnect the fuel level sender electrical connection.
5. Raise the rear of the fuel tank and reconnect the fuel
feed hose by gently pushing inwards until the hose
engages with a click.
6. Align the fuel tank to the front mounting point and
tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
7. Align the fuel tank to the rear mounting points and
tighten the two fixings to 9 Nm.
8. Refit the fairing infill panels (see page 16-11).
9. Refit the side panels (see page 16-10).
10. Refit the side fairings (see page 16-13).
12. Start the engine and check carefully for fuel leaks.
Rectify as necessary.
10.100. Service Manual - Tiger

UMP
imi
Fuel Pump and Filterr Assembly 8. Disconnect the fuel level sensor elect rical connector
and remove the fuel pump and filter assembly.
Removal `^--
ote. U i
® The fuel pump and filter assembly is a
sealed for life unit and must be replaced as a
complete assembly.

3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99). 0
4. Drain the fuel tank into a suitable container.
1. Fuel level sensor elect rical connector

9. Noting its orientation, remove and discard the
Observe the warning advice given in the general sealing ring from the fuel pump assembly.
w ._ information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel
containers.
A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property,
could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or
stored correctly.
5. Invert the fuel tank and place on a protective surface

to prevent paint damage.
6. Remove the fixings securing the fuel pump
mounting plate to the tank. Remove the plate.
arch
Fuel Pump and Filter Assembly
Assembly
0 1. Install a new sealing ring into the fuel pump
assembly, with the seal lip facing uppermost, and
ensure that it is correctly seated.
ceha
2
1. Fuel pump
2. Mounting plate
3. Mounting plate fixings P'
7. Lift the fuel pump and filter assembly and
manoeuvre it from the fuel tank aperture.
1.Sealing ri ng
2. Seal lip

TwuMW
L I ii Fiii T it Iffl
2. Taking care to ensure the sealing ring is not

damaged or dislodged, manoeuvre the fuel pump
assembly into the tank aperture.
3. Reconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector
and locate the fuel pump and filter assembly.
4. Ensure the locating peg on the fuel pump assembly
is located in the cut out on the mounting plate and 2. Disconnect the ba tte ry, negative (black) lead fi rst.
the offset hole is positioned as shown below. 3. Remove the fuel pump and filter assembly (see page
10-101).
I 4. Release the two side tangs securing the fuel level
sender to the bracket inside the fuel tank and
carefully withdraw the fuel level sender.
0
nh.a
1. Offset hole position

2. Locating peg
5. Tighten the fixings in the sequence shown below to
m. ceax
1. Fuel level sensor
2. Tangs
Assembly
1. Refit the fuel level sender assembly to the fuel tank

ensuring that the upper tang and two side tangs are
correctly attached to the bracket inside the fuel tank.
Pump Mounting Plate Torque Sequence

7. Refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained earlier.
Rectify as necessary.
10. Refit the seat (see page 16-9). 1. Upper tang
2. Side tangs
2. Refit the fuel pump and filter assembly (see page 10-
101).
3. Refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained earlier.
Rectify as necessa ry.
1 0.1 02 •

M^
„r
Riel Pressure Checking 4. Connect the adapter between the fuel pump plate
outlet and fuel hose as shown in the illustration
below. Insert the gauge to the adapter also as shown
in the illustration.
1. Fuel pump plate outlet connection

2. Fuel hose
3. Tool T3880001
Note:
• To release the fuel pressure gauge from the

adapter, slide the outer ferrule downwards.
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). This will allow the gauge to spring upwards
from the adapter.
2. Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel pump plate
by squeezing the sides of the connector and pulling • To insert the gauge to the adapter, push the
the hose free from the spigot. gauge spigot into the adapter until a click
can be heard.
5. Ensuring the gauge is visible to the side of the
motorcycle.
6. Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure
reading on the gauge.
Note:
• The fuel pressure should be 3.0 bar
nominally.
7. When fuel pressure checking is complete, disconnect
the fuel pressure gauge adapter.
8. Reconnect the fuel hose and refit the seat (see page
16-9).
1. Fuel hose
3. Select the fuel pressure gauge adapter marked 'B'
from service tool T3880001.
Always use the correct fuel pressure gauge adapter

(adapter 'B' for 2007-onwards Tiger). Use of an
incorrect adapter will result in a fuel leak. A fuel leak can
result in a fire causing damage to property and injury to
persons..

1Rt!:!!!J3H
1 1 Â 3
Fuel loeêry System Aorx

Fuel is delivered to injectors by a pump located inside the •
fuel tank. Fuel fl ows in the di re ction of the a rrows shown Removal
in the diagram below.
Incorporated in the system is a fi lter, a pressure regulator 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
and a pick up strainer. 2. Disconne ct the ba tte ry, negative (blac k) lead first.
4. Disconne ct the air temperature and map sensor
connectors.
1. Map sensor connector

2. Intake air temperature connector
5. Disconnect the map sensor hose.
6. Release the fixings secu ri ng the airbox to its bracket.
1. Airbox fixings

1.Breather hose
2.Airbox
9. Gently lift the rear of the airbox to release it from the
throttle bodies.
1. Secondary air injection control valve
2. Valve retainer
3. Hose
12. Release the secondary air injection control valve from
the retainer on the airbox and remove the airbox.

TwUmem
Fuel S Management
Air Fiter Egeirnent

1. Inspect the intake rubbers for splits, damage and
distortion. Removal
2. Inspect the intake rubber retaining rings for loss of
elasticity. 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
3. Check the airbox itself for damage. 2. Disconnect the batte ry, negative (black) lead first.
Installation 4. Remove the airbox (see page 10-104).
5. Release the ring of bolts securing the upper half of
1. Position the airbox to the motorcycle and refit the the airbox to its corresponding lower section.
seconda ry air injection control valve to the retainer. 6. Release the airbox centre fixing which is accessed
2. Reconnect the secondary air injection hose at the through the centre hole in the airbox upper section.
airbox.
2 2
3. Refit the airbox into the front locating grommet. 2 1
4. Lubricate the intake rubbers with a suitable lubricant.
2
5. Press down on the rear of the airbox to locate the
intake rubbers to the throttle bodies. 2f
ir +, } }k. ^¢5 AS.4
^
k':b,rw^L. ^,^^f,,j^q.} ,^. r,^

^,w.., .,n....'
;3:: y
4
, , +.^:., . : ,<}•
:>......}:::n.::,::.... ti ^C"v.v. v,i :}:.y: ,:.0>.n.;. .kv.. 'nî,'. ; :a• ?:{:£hv; .••p `t:+„
u
A.::n+:'}rp^'!2e.....:n,:..:.v:::e:...:•e`.•:.v..
.R:., ..Y /:..,.^.E.:,,.5.<:,.::...f..,:::.•>.>..'^
a.
s. zê: ....... .:n+..:.....c•< ^}.
'}v:+. r^ p. ».:Wt.;.+^2ctl.
..^ ^,.)....,?x>:^rv?:
.... o...,,::.:.r.
,^ '
"q^^'ps^:.>^
..,n3i..v:..vvi..F}i:.:..
5.:^,,w.+>:a.+s...a.}:..::..,
...sn,.. H t ?r h?.
}^:;^;^.,sv:+e;+..v}..t:^R::1,3c::r:^Fc,,:>>:CC'e
.v......vv..n.E:A,
.:ti»,,.... C. f.. t...
'^.. ,...
Always ensure that 0all 3 intake rubbers seal to the 2^

throttles through 360 . as poor performance and lack of
power can result from incorrect sealing.
6. Fit and tighten the airbox fixings to 5 Nan. 2 ^ 2

War 2
7. Reconnect the map sensor hose. 1. Airbox`
8. Reconnect the air temperature and map sensor 2. Ring of bolts
connectors. 3. Centre fixing location
9. Reconnect the airbox breather hose. 7. Separate the two halves of the airbox and recover
10. Reconnect the airbox drain tube. the air filter element.
12. Reconnect the batte ry, positive (red) lead first. .1
cdau
1. Airbox upper section

2. Airbox lower section
3. Air filter element
1 0.1 06 Service Manual - Tiger UMW

nstaHatEon Intake fir Tempture Sensor
1. Thoroughly clean the inside and outside of the

airbox. a oval
2. Seat the air filter element in the lower section.
3. Locate the upper section to the lower and secure
with the fixings. Tighten to Z. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
4. Refit the airbox (see page 10-106). 3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99).
5. Refit the fuel tank (see page 10- 100). 4. Disconnect the multiplug from the air temperature
sensor.
6. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first
1. Intake air temperature connector

2. Intake air temperature sensor
Note:
The intake air temperature sensor has a
threaded base.
5. Unscrew the sensor to remove it from the airbox.
Assembly
1. Fit the air temperature sensor to the airbox. Tighten

to 4 Nm.
2. Reconnect the air temperature sensor.

tl1M^
Removal Removal
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99). 3. Remove the battery (see page 17-7).
4. Disconnect the multiplug from the map sensor. 4. Disconnect the barometric pressure sensor
multiplug.
5. Release the fixing screw securing the sensor to the
mounting bracket and remove the barometric
pressure sensor. Collect the mounting screw from
below the battery tray.
1.Map sensor
2. Multi-plug
3. Air hose
5. Disconnect the air hose from the sensor.
6. Release the fixing screw securing the sensor to the
airbox. 1. Barometric pressure sensor
7. Raise the sensor to remove it from the airbox and
collect the 0-ring. Installation
1. Fit the mounting screw to the battery from below.

2. Fit the barometric pressure sensor to the mounting
1. Take a new 0-ring and lubricate it with a smear of screw, fit the nut and tighten to 3 Nm.
petroleum jelly. Fit the 0-ring to the sensor, then fit 3. Connect the barometric pressure sensor multiplug.
the sensor to the airbox, tightening the screw to 4. Refit the battery (see page 17-7).
3Nm.
2. Refit the air hose.
3. Reconnect the multi-plug.
1 0.1 08 Service Manual - Tiger 11M'

PIc eto a Switch Cranks aft positionsensor
Note:
Removal
The air gap
9 for the crankshaft position
sensor is not adj ustable.
Removal
3. Remove the battery (see page 177).
4. Disconnect the fall detection switch multiplug. 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
5. Release and discard the fixing screws securing the 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
switch to the mounting bracket and remove the
3. Remove the fixing securing the sensor bracket to the
switch. -
crankcase. Ease the sensor from the crankcase.
a Y 'A
e
1. Fall detection switch
1. Sensor
2. Sensor bracket
Installation 4. Disconnect the sensor multi-plug.
1. Fit the fall detection switch to the mounting bracket,

fit new fixing screws and tighten to 4 Nm. Installation
2. Connect the fall detection switch multiplug.
1 Checkthe sensor 0-ring a ng for o damage
g or
3. Refit the battery (see page 17-7). deterioration. Renew as necessary.
the seat (see page 16-9).
6
t 5. Refit
'\ \
2
ccwy
1 . Sensor
2. 0-ring
Manual - Ti er 10.109
Tkiumm 9Servic
Fuel system/Engine Management
1. Apply a smear of oil to the sensor 0-ring to aid
assembly.
2. Refit the sensor taking care not to damage the 0-
ring. Adjustment
3. Refit the sensor bracke t Fit and tighten the fixing to Note:
10 m. s
Minor adjustments to the opening cable can
4. Reconnect the sensor multi-plug. be made using the adjuster near the twist
5. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first. grip end of the throttle. Where a correct
6. Refit the seat (see page 16-9). setting cannot be achieved this way, the
adjusters at the throttle end of both cables
must be used. The opening cable must be
set first followed by the closing cable.

3. Set the 'opening' cable adjuster at the twist grip end
such that it has an equal amount of adjustment in
each direction. Tighten the locknut.
egs
1. 'Opening' cable adjuster (twist grip end)

6. Set the 'opening' cable adjuster at the throttle end to
give 2-3 mm of play at the twist grip. Tighten the
locknut
ccwq
1. 'Opening' cable adjuster (throttle end)

2. 'Closing' cable adjuster (throttle end)

tUl^[t
ii!k11 iIJ
7. With the throttle fully closed, ensure that there is 2- Removal
3mm of free play in the 'closing' cable. Adjust if
Note:
necessary ensuring that the locknut is secure
afterwards. ® Before beginning to remove the throttle
cables, note the. exact routing and location
of both cables to help ensure that they are
returned to the same locations and routing
on assembly.

(see page 17-7).
5. Slacken the adjuster locknuts at the throttle body end
of the cables such that they will allow the outer
cables to be detached from the cable bracket.
6. Detach the inner portion of the cables from the
throttle cam.
1.Throttle cam
2. Closing cable
3. Opening cable

TWUMEH
i'r I Ifi Fi t!IiiitIil
7. At the twist grip end, slide off the rubber boot and 2. Engage the inner cable nipples to the twist grip.
release the screws which secure the two halves of the
twist grip guide to each other.
1.Twist grip
2. Twist grip guide
3. Screws
8. Separate the two halves of the guide then release the
inner cables from the twist grip.
,tcc 11 W- ' / / vuqq
1. Closing cable 1. Twist grip

2. Opening cable 2. Twist grip guide
3. Screws
9. Detach the cables from the motorcycle.
4. Refit the boot.
5. Attach the other end of the inner cables to the
Examination throttle cam ensuring the opening cable is fitted to
the bottom of the throttle cam and the closing cable
1. Check that both the throttle cables operate smoothly, to the top.
without sticking or binding. Replace the cables if
6. Locate the outer cables to the bracket and secure
there is any doubt as to their correct operation.
with the adjuster and locknuts.
7. Set the cable adjustment (see page 10-110).
Installation
8. Refit the airbox (see page 10-106).
1. Locate the cables to the frame following the routing 9. Refit the fuel tank (see page 10-100).
noted during removal. 10. Reconnect the ba ttery, positive (red) lead first

Y Fa iiFTilI
10. Release the bolts securing the fuel rail to its bracket.
If the fuel rail is dismantled without first reducing bolts

1. Fuel rail
pressure fuel may escape causing clothing and
components to be coated with fuel. 11. Ease the fuel rail and injectors from the cylinder
head.
This would represent a serious fire hazard which could
lead to burn injuries and damage to property.. 12. To detach the injectors from the fuel rail, release the
clip at the fuel rail end of each injector and ease the
injector from the rail.
3. Remove the side panels (see page 16-10).
6. Disconnect the throttle position sensor.
7. Release both throttle cables from the throttle cam
(see page 10-110).
8. Release the clips securing the throttle bodies to the
transition pieces.
1
1. Injector
2. Clip
3. Fuel rail
13. To detach the transition pieces from the head,
release the screws, ` raise the transition pieces and
collect the 0- rings.
Inspection
1. Check all joints and seals for splits, cuts and damage.
1.Throttle body 2. Check the throttles for sticking, loose or damaged
2. Transition piece (one per cylinder) throttle plates.
3. Clip (one per cylinder) 3. Check the 0-rings for damage.
9. Ease the throttle bodies from the transition pieces
and lay the assembly on the crankcase.

uM
1. Thoroughly clean the transition piece to cylinder

head mating faces.
2. Refit the transition pieces to the head incorporating
new 0 -rings to the joint face. Tighten the transition
piece fixings to 12 m.
1.Transition piece
2. 0-ring
3. If the injectors have been removed from the fuel rail,
refit them to the rail and secure with the clips.
4. Check the injector 0-rings for splits and other
damage. Replace as necessary.
5. Refit the injectors and fuel rail to the cylinder head.
Tighten the fuel rail fixings to 6 Nm.
Balance throttles screen

Note:
• The balance throttle screens show the

vacuum value of each throttle . in mm/hg. In
addition, when the throttles are balanced to
an acceptable range of each other the word
'balanced' will appear in the top right hand
corner of the screen. At this point, no
1. Fuel rail bolts further adjustment is necessary or
productive.
6. Refit the throttle bodies to the transition pieces and
secure with clips.
7. Re-attach and adjust the throttle cables (see page 10-
110).
10. Refit all bodywork.
.1 2. Refit the seat (see page 16-9).
1 0.1 14 • Service Manual - Tiger up

9. Using the throttle adjusters, make adjustments until Installation
the word 'BALANCED' appears
1. Fit the replacement throttle position sensor ensuring
ii the 0-ring is positioned correctly between the sensor
and throttle body.
2. Engage the new screws and washers supplied and
part tighten such that the sensor can still be rotated.
3. Position the throttle body assembly near to its -fitted
position and reconnect the sensor.
5. Attach the Triumph service diagnostic tool to the
dedicated plug.
6. Turn the ignition to the ON' position.
7. Connect . the diagnostic tool and scroll through to,
and select the 'ADJ UST TUNE' option.
8. At the next screen, align the cursor with 'THROTTLE
1. Adjusters
POT RENEW' (see below) then press the validation
10. When balanced, stop the engine and disconnect the key which is marked'*'.
diagnostic tool.
11. Refit the airbox (see page 10- 106).
9. On pressing the validation key, the diagnostic tool

1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). will send a command, which drives the primary
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. throttle to the fully closed position. The tool will also
3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99). display the voltage reading coming from the throttle
position sensor.
5. Remove the throttle body assembly (see page 10-
113).
6. Remove the throttle position sensor from the left
hand end of the throttle body. Collect the 0-ring on
disassembly.
10. Gently rotate the new throttle position sensor until

the voltage reading on the tool shows 0.6 volts + 1
-0.2volts
Note:
• This is a setting voltage only. Because of the
adaptive nature of the engine management
system, in-service voltage may vary from
this setting figure.
11. Tighten the sensor retaining screw to 3.5 Nm and
recheck the voltage reading shown on the tool.
Repeat the adjustment if the reading is outside the
1. Throttle position sensor specified range.

TMUMBH
12. Press the validation key marked '*' to return the
throttle to normal control and return the diagnostic
tool to the ADJUST TUNE menu.
13. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.
14. Disconnect the batte ry negative (black) lead first.
15. Check that the throttle opens and closes without
obstruction/sticking and has a smooth action
throughout the full range of its movement. Rectify 3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99).
as necessary. 4. Remove the airbox (see page 10-104).
5. Remove the thro ttle bodies (see page 10-113).
6. Remove the nylon nut, metal washer and plastic
washer attaching the idle control stepper arm to the
idle speed control lever
Operation of the motorcycle with an incorrectly adjusted
throttle position sensor, or a throttle position sensor that
causes the throttle to stick could result in loss of throttle
control. Loss of throttle control could result in loss of
control of the motorcycle and an accident.
Operation of the motorcycle with an incorrectly

adjusted, incorrectly routed or damaged throttle cable
could interfere with the operation of the brakes, clutch
or the thro tt le itself. Any of these conditions could result
in loss of control of the motorcycle and an accident. cdav
1. Idle control stepper arm

16. Refit the throttle body assembly (see page 10-114).
2. Idle speed control lever
17 Refit the airbox (see page 10-106). 3. Nut etc.
18. Refit the fuel tank (see page 10-100). 7. Remove the two screws securing the idle speed
19. Reconnect the batte ry, positive (red) lead first. control stepper motor to its bracket, then remove the
20. Check and clear any stored faults using the same stepper motor in the direction shown.
tool.
0
3
cdaw
1. Idle speed control stepper motor

2. Bracket
3. Fixings
4. Direction of removal

. luM^
8. Collect the plastic collar and spring from the control 2. Loosley fit the spring and collar on the stepper arm.
stepper arm.
F
I
cdax / 4 -x1 i II-,.J

1.Collar
1.Collar 2. Spring
2. Spring 3. Locate the stepper motor to its bracket and tighten
the fixings to 3.5 Nm.
nstaationn
1. Ensure the Idle speed control lever is correctly

positioned in relation to the throttle cam as shown 0
below.
3 `.!,L v N
cday
1.Idle speed control stepper motor
2. Bracket
3. Fixings
cdgr
4. Direction of fitting
4. Fit the plastic washer through the lever then fit the
metal washer and nut.
5. Mount the throttle body onto the engine.
6. Temporarily reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead
first
7. Turn the ignition to the 'ON' position.
8. Connect the service diagnostic tool and scroll
through to, and select the 'ADJUST TUNE' option.
cdgs

TRiumem
e e
9. At the next screen, align the cursor with 'ISC* 14. Gently turn the throttle position sensor until the
STEPPER RENEW' then press the validation key voltage reading on the tool shows 0.6 volts +/- .0.02
which is marked '*'. volts. MAKE A. NOTE OF THE EXACT VOLTAGE
READING.
D
ISC = Idle Speed Control 15. Tighten the sensor retaining screw to 3.5 Nm and
recheck the voltage reading shown on the tool.
Repeat the adjustment if the reading is outside the
specified range, NOTING THE FINAL VOLTAGE
READING IF ADJUSTMENT IS MADE.
16. Press the validation key marked '*' to progress to
the next adjustment.
17. On pressing the validation key, the diagnostic tool
will send a command that drives the throttle to the
10. On pressing the validation key, the diagnostic tool fully open position. The tool will also display the
will send a command that drives the throttle to the voltage reading coming from the throttle position
fully closed position. The tool will also display the sensor.
voltage reading coming from the throttle position
sensor which will be needed for a check/adjustment
made later in the process.
18. With the stepper fully opened, check the voltage

shown on the tool and adjust the nut on the top of
the stepper arm until the tool . shows a voltage
Tighten the stepper arm until a clearance of 0.5 mm equivalent to X+0.15 (+/- 0.05V) where X= the
can be measured between the idle speed control voltage measured in step 12 (or 14 if re-adjusted).
cam and the throttle roller. For example, if the voltage measured was 0.6 volts,
then the correct setting would be 0.70-0.80 volts.
cda
Idle speed control lever cdba
2. Throttle roller 1. Adjustment nut

12. Check the voltage reading on the tool. If the reading 19. Press the validation key marked '*' to fully close the
is 0.6 volts +/ 0.02 volts, MAKE A NOTE OF THE idle speed control stepper motor. After a minimum
EXACT VOLTAGE READING then proceed to step of 15 seconds (the tool will not allow further actions
16. If the reading is not within this tolerance band, to take place during this period), press the validation
adjustment must be made as described in key again to return the ECM to normal control.
paragraphs 13 to 15.
13. Slacken the screws on the throttle position sensor.

uM^
I iiiA TThmi
21. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust
22. Check and adjust the throttle cable settings (see system will be hot. Before working on or near the
page 10-110). exhaust system, allow sufficient time for the exhaust
system to cool as touching any part of a hot exhaust
b .. .
syst em WLIIJ
Id cause1JUl11 inlune.

Move the handlebars to left and right full lock while 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
checking that the cables and harnesses do not bind. A 3. Remove the rear bodywork (see page 16-10).
cable or harness which binds will restrict the steering 4. Release the clamp securing the silencer to the
and may cause loss of control and an accident. exhaust pipe.
cegv
1. Silencer
2. Clamp
3. Exhaust pipe
5. Support the silencer and release the bolt and nut
securing the silencer mounting bracket to the rear
subframe. Discard the nut.
1. Silencer mounting bracket/fixing

6. Move the silencer rearwards to disengage it from the
header pipes and remove.
T Service Manual - Tiger 10.119

ty H .
7. Disconnect the oxygen sensor.
1. Oxygen sensor
8. Remove the oil cooler (see page 8-14).
9. Remove the radiator (see page 11-8).
10. Release the fixings securing the exhaust pipe joints
to the cylinder head.
1.Cylinder head
2. Seals
2. Locate the exhaust pipes and align the exhaust pipe
flanges to the fixing points.
3. Assemble the rear mounting point fixings but do not
tighten at this stage.
4. Tighten the exhaust pipe to cylinder head fixings in
the following sequence:
Tighten the nuts numbered 1 to 6 to 23 Nm
in the sequence shown below, then tighten the
nuts numbered 1 to 3 again to 23 Nm.
1.Down pipes
2. Fixings (upper fixings shown) 2 3 1
11. Remove the bolt from - the exhaust pipe rear
mounting point.
Exhaust Pipe Fixings Tightening Sequence

5. Tighten the rear mounting point fixing to 15 Nm.
6. Refit the radiator and refill the cooling system (see
page 11-9).
cegt % 7. Refit the oil cooler (see page 8-14).
1. Exhaust pipe rear mounting point 8. Fit a new gasket to the exhaust header pipe.
.1 2. Detach the exhaust pipe assembly and collect the 9. Position and engage the silencer to the exhaust pipe.
seals from the head ports.

v 4 Management
10. Align the silencer mounting bracket to the frame and 11. Align the clamp to the silencer to exhaust pipe joint
refit the bolt and a new nut. Tighten to 15 . and tighten to 15 m.
13. Refit the rear bodywork (see page 16-10).
Do not install the exhaust system or run the engine

without the exhaust heatshields fitted. Components
protected by the exhaust heatshields may suffer severe
damage or a fire if the motorcycle is operated without
the heatshields being fitted.
15. Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leaks.
Rectify if necessary.
1. Silencer mounting bolt

TLY.!:WkI
Fuel S Management _________
- ' ..` ' Vii .. x
The secondary air injection system is an aid to reducing levels of pollutants in the exhaust gases. It does this by
introducing a small amount of air into each exhaust port as the exhaust valve opens. The introduced air helps promote
further combustion of the fuel mixture in the exhaust system after it has left the combustion chamber.
At certain specific engine speeds above idle (determined by the factory programming of the engine management
system), the secondary air injection control valve is opened by the ECM and allows an air feed into the secondary air
system where, each time a pair of exhaust valves open, the exhaust gases in the exhaust port create a depression which
causes reed valves in the secondary air injection system to open. When open, the depression in the exhaust port draws air
from the control valve, through the open reed valves, into the exhaust port. This air promotes secondary combustion of
the exhaust gases in the ports and the header system.
At other engine speeds, the system is disabled by closing the control valve in the system. This allows an oxygen sensor to
control air to fuel ratios. If air was fed to the exhaust system when the oxygen sensor was operational, the incoming air
would cause inaccuracies in the readings sensed by the oxygen sensor (which requires access to 'raw' combustion gases)
which would lead to rough running.
1 0.1 22 Service Manual - Tiger . UMW

L I iii iii jjjj
Secon&5'y AEr Q p ' n ©ei©d Secondary Atr Qnctoi R Values

Valve
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. 3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99).
3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99). 4. Remove the airbox (see page 10-104).
4. Remove the airbox (see page 10-104). 5. Remove the secondary air injection solenoid valve
5. Release the valve from the hose. (see page 10-123).
6. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the 6. Detach the secondary air injection feed hoses from
valve. the reed valves on the cam cover.
1. Spring-close dip
1. Solenoid valve
2. Electrical connector
3. Secondary air injection hose dip
7. Release the bolts securing the valve covers to the
cam cover.
Installation 8. Ease the valve covers from the valves.
1. Refit the valve to the hose. 9. Detach the valves from the cam cover.
2. Reconnect the electrical connector.
3. Refit the airbox (see page 10-106
cbqx
1. Valves

UP
Inspection 4. Refit the secondary air injection solenoid valve (see

page 10-123).
1. Check for cracks, bending or other damage to the 5. Refit the airbox (see page 10-106).
valve flaps. Replace as necessary. 6. Refit the fuel tank (see page 10-100).
2. Check for damage to the seal areas. Replace as 7. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first
necessary.
8
9)
3. Check the valve body to cylinder head seal for
damage.
Installation
1. Fit the reed valves to the cam cover.

2. • Refit the valve covers and tighten the fixings to
9 .
3. Refit the air hoses to the reed valves.
1. Spring-close hose clip


System/Engine .• •-
f . 71 .71 . iiTh
CaIiforra Models Only

All California models are fitted with a system to control the evaporation of fuel vapour to the atmosphere.
A carbon canister absorbs vapour while the engine is not running. When the engine is started, the vapour is returned to
the engine and burnt.
There are two distinct phases to the system's operation, engine off and engine running. These two conditions are
explained overleaf.
Component Locations
Carbon Canister - behind the throttle bodies
Purge Control Valve - Behind the carbon canister, mounted to the same bracket (electronically controlled by the ECM)
To Throttle bodies
To fuel to
\
I
4
Purge control valve
\\\
Vacuum pipe
Carbon canister
I 10.125
IRUU Mr
Tr
When the engine is stationary any pressure increase in the fuel tank due to a rise in ambient temperature will cause the
fuel vapour to pass down the breather pipe A to a carbon filled canister which stores the vapour.
Once in the canister, vapour cannot return to the fuel tank because of a one-way valve in the canister.
Pipe A
Carbon Canister
1 0.1 26 Service Manual -Tiger

una
Evaporative Control System - Engine Rurning
When the engine is started, a vacuum is applied via pipe A to a vent valve on the canister, causing it to open.
Simultaneously, vacuum is applied along pipe B, via the purge control valve to the canister vent port.
Because the vent valve has been opened, the vacuum applied at point B begins to draw stored vapour from the carbon
filled area of the canister via the vent port and returns it to the throttle bodies for burning in the engine.
In order to control the speed at which vapour is purged from the canister, the engine management system regularly
shuttles the purge control valve between open and closed positions.
e control valve
pe A
Carbon Canister

Twumm
___j I
1 0.1 28 Service Manual - Ti er

9 îMP
11 Cooling
ExplodedView - Cooling System ........................................................... 11.2

Coolant................................................................................. 11.3
CoolantLevel Inspection .................................................................. 11.3
CoolantReplacement ..................................................................... 11.4
Drainage ........................................................................... 11.4
Filling.............................................................................. 11.4
RadiatorHoses ........................................................................... 11.5
Radiatorand Cooling Fan ................................................................... 11.5
CoolantPressure Ca p ..................................................................... 11.6
Ins ection... ........................................................................
p 11.6
Water Pump ............................................................................ 11.6
Removal.., ....................................................................... 11.6
Inspection.......................................................................... 116
Installation....s .................................................................... 11.7
Thermostat.............................................................................. 11.7
Removal ........................................................................... 11. 7
Inspection.......................................................................... 11.7
Installation......................................................................... 11.8
Radiator................................................................................ 11.8
Removal ........................................................................... 11. 8
Inspection.......................................................................... 11.9
Installation........................................... 11.9
. ......................60.69...

Twumem
Cooling
r; i'
10Nm
X°
I 2Nm
ij
Ir
'iiii
9Nm

UM
L1 ::T; flI;!lfIIiT.i iDI1 i
A permanent type of anti-freeze is installed in the cooling
system when the motorcycle leaves the factory. It is
coloured blue, contains a 50% solution of ethylene glycol,
and has a freezing point of -35°C (-31 °F). Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the
Always change the coolant at the intervals specified in the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside
scheduled maintenance chart. the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with
the pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin
damage.
1. Position the motorcycle on level ground and in an

Coolant mixture which contains anti freeze and upright position.
corrosion inhibitors contains toxic chemicals which are 2. Check the coolant level in the expansion tank by
harmful to the human body. Never swallow anti-freeze looking up, through the centre opening of the front
or any of the motorcycle coolant. fairing. The coolant level should be between the
'MAX and 'MIN.' marks.
The coolant anti-freeze contains a corrosion inhibitor

which helps prevent damage to the metal surfaces inside
the cooling system. Without this inhibitor, the coolant
would 'attack' the metals and the resulting corrosion
would cause blockages in the cooling system leading to
engine overheating and damage. Always use the correct
anti-freeze as specified in the owner's handbook. Never
use a methanol based - anti-freeze as this does not
contain the required corrosion inhibition properties.
1.Expansion tank
2. 'Max' mark
Distilled water must be used with the anti-freeze (see 3. 'Mm' mark
specification for anti-freeze) in the cooling system. 3. If the level of coolant is low, coolant must be added
If hard water is used in the system, it causes scale as follows:
accumulation in the water passages, and considerably Note:
reduces the efficiency of the cooling system. Reduced
cooling system efficiency may cause the engine to • It is not necessary to remove the left hand
overheat and suffer severe damage. cockpit infill panel in order to remove the
coolant expansion tank cap.
cecv
Coolant Expansion Tank Cap

TwumeH
1 1: 4=
4. Remove the cap from the expansion tank, located

below the left hand cockpit infill panel, and add
coolant mixture through the filler opening until the
level reaches the 'MAX mark.
3
C \ R)) ^ A R \ 'n ^' <^
} ^x'.
x^ s
a •, 'Y:
.f.^Q'`.,Y^.
(.;.^.:; :
..^:3^3." A^ ' ' 'F)U:in:r' :3}, .:,.df•H^r`;$:i'}t:3"Ya;. 3^::%^'G:Yc;::
If the coolant level is found to be low, or if coolant has to

be added regularly, inspect the cooling system for
coolant leaks. If necessary, pressure test the system to
locate the source of the leak and rectify as necessary.
Loss of coolant may cause the engine to overheat and
suffer severe damage.
1. Radiator cap
5. Position a container to collect the displaced coolant
1. Bottom hose
6. Release the bleed screw on the right hand side of the
2. Water pump
radiator.
11.4 Service Manual - Tiger . luM^

^ 1 1 1
1. Reconnect the bottom hose and tighten the clip. Regularly check. all radiator hoses and hose clips for
cracks, leaks or deterioration in accordance with the
2. Incorporating a new sealing washer, refit the
scheduled maintenance chart.
crankcase coolant drain plug and tighten to 13 m.
3. Slowly add coolant mixture to the system, through
the filler opening in the radiator, until the system is Radiator 1
full. If the system has filled correctly and fully, there

should be coolant visible through the bleed screw
opening as well as in the filler opening.
4. If there is no coolant visible through the bleed screw
opening, but the filler side appears to be full, attach a
length of clear tubing to the bleed screw spigot and
syphon coolant into the bleed screw side of the
radiator.
Note:
® A hand operated vacuum pump or similar
ould be used to syphon the coolant
should
through the system.
5. If necessary, top up the system through the filler and
refit the coolant pressure cap. Using high-pressure water, such as from a car-wash
b. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first facility, can damage the radiator fins and impair the
7 Start the motorcycle and allow the engine to idle for radiator's efficiency.
a short period of time to allow any air to be expelled Do not obstruct or deflect airflow through the radiator
from the system. by installing unauthorized accessories in front of the
radiator or behind the cooling fan. Interference with the
radiator airflow can lead to overheating and consequent
engine damage.
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the

engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside
the cooling system is hot and also under pressure.
Contact ° with the pressurised coolant will cause scalds
and skin damage.
8. Stop the engine and top up the coolant level in the

radiator as necessary.
9. Fit the coolant pressure cap.
10. Check the expansion tank level and top up if
necessary.
12. Refit both side fairings (see page 16-13).

P 9
1. Lower seal
2. Upper seal
3. Spring
Note:
1. Bottom hose
If there is any sign of damage or
22. Bypass hose
deterioration replace the cap.
3. Water pump
2. Pressure test the cap to the blow off pressure of 1.1
5. Release the bolts securing the water pump to the
bar. If the cap opens at a lower pressure or fails to
crankcase.
open at 1.1 bar, replace the cap.
6. Withdraw the water pump.
Inspection
1. Check the water pump shaft and shaft bearings for

side and end float. Renew if necessary
2. Check for corrosion and scale build-up around the
impeller and in the pump body. Renew if necessary.

UM
Cooling
vU 1 IUL I CI I IUVC Lilt LUUIdI 1L pI CSSUI C LCIP wl ICI 1 l! Ic

the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with
damage.
4. Detach the top hose from the thermostat elbow.
Sae
1. Water pump slot

3. Fit the pump and tighten the fixings to 10 Nm.
4. Refit the hoses to the water pump and tighten the
clips.
5. Refill the cooling system (see page 11-5).
1. Top hose
5. Release the fixings securing the thermostat elbow to
the cylinder head.
6. Remove the thermostat housing. Discard the 0-ring.
7. Remove the thermostat from the cylinder head.
Inspection
1. Inspect the thermostat at room temperature. If the

valve is open, the thermostat must be replaced.
2. To check the valve opening temperature, suspend
the thermostat in a container of water and raise the
temperature of the water until the thermostat opens.
The thermostat should start to open at 88°C +/- 5°C.
3. If the temperature at which thermostat opening
takes place is incorrect, replace the thermostat
Installation
1. Locate the thermostat into the cylinder head.

NI
:mw..?Î1
1 1 I I
Removal

Do not remove the coolant ` pressure cap when the

the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with
damage.
3. Drain the coolant (see page 11-4).

4. Disconnect the top hose at the radiator.
1. 0-ring/groove
3. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm.
4. Reconnect the top hose clips.
1. Top hose
5. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first. 5. Disconnect the bottom hose, expansion tank and
6. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). bypass hose from the radiator.
1.Bottom hose
2. Expansion tank hose
3. Bypass hose

lliN[t
6. Release the oil cooler fixings from the radiator lower Inspection
mounting. Collect the oil cooler infill panel.
1. Check the radiator for stone damage.
2. Check the radiator core, for damage to fins or
obstructions to air flow.
3. Repair any damage and clear all obstructions.
•
:::{x':;,a;.t•.:Â,:'t!?": .:{i'•:'%':t:a'•;'5.,
:`\^:^.',•': i:•'xti'. ^: ,•• • :t : \::iii' ' 'i. ':o
, . rc. nAv.. .. , n. •y;^S>
'4`'n^S`v.:tit;}:^.
Q ^j ...5$•
^... t.:SS'+•.t
vn
•:M::."'v}°.1:.,. 3:':',^^^'{, .w'<v:, tn4.a^':
;<>^,:: n n{,, . .. zar...i,n. ;`k:;;<• . n„a:::.a • ) )
... FS:'.S. o,'f::.
\.>;£ 7;.
A
$': . M• '^ 1rv^"<:
t $t:ftxv^:•.SA.;...,5„ ^{i:t. •.za
}.,. .'1 xx:
: ^f^ , ytyk"t^<•:^t5't•'I :<3^ e
• :? , ;,:h^tay.:.\ò'^^{
' .:' "^4'r;.;
,a':S{':i,;^ ., ;•û}n fi\ y .` .. " i ':,.
;$^F:G+
:^t'3^j•'e^.^d,\..tr^^ "', ^^^» +.^..t' C :

,' i. `.:,\r:S.:{: e.Jt Si.;v
", tg`g
SO : i 'f
"v ^.;.â
.:s., ::.\v,.
,. v.w:;;'.t•+C^^.^rc 1 e>
f, an. i`:4ê ^ , ^:^ `
} .4,.? l:
n;n%,n r S :
Y,. ,;.:`;u^:t^
i^.},a.: ,.<îsy,•^
..,6y.
,
,. t. ` ,:.£?AS.:„'fi,6.
,:.;p'.;.nv:.:`.;knit:. .v ,v:,u r x;'
.':^:.
':. i•^^.?^ .r.;.
nnL.\
,$ia?ti{<.'2'F:r
.^`''s'iSir^ ?•oT .aa.
^ Cauti9n' ^^t.:• {,^. ^,.,
.:$ '^^+.
r. .;,t ,; y:. :,:'?%i'::: +f Sb`
^^
^
,...^•`3...'^1,:: .: 6'^^.W^'h+i^ ':^,:• .;^.
To avoid overheating and consequent engine damage,

replace the radiator if the cores are blocked or if the fins
are badly deformed or broken.
4. Check that the fan spins freely and without tight

spots.
5. Check the fan blades for signs of heat distortion.
1. Radiator lower fixings
2. Oil cooler infill panel
7. Disconnect the cooling fan multiplug located above
Installation
the cam cover, which is accessible without removing
1. Align the radiator to the frame and fit the upper
the fuel tank, from the right hand side of the
mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm.
motorcycle.
2. Reconnect the cooling fan.
8. Release the bolts securing the radiator to the frame.
3. Align the oil cooler and infill panel to the radiator. Fit
the lower mounting bolts and tighten to 9 Nm.
4. Reconnect the top, bypass, expansion tank and
bottom hoses to the radiator. Tighten the hose clips.
8. Fill the cooling system (see page 11-5).
9. Remove the radiator.
Service Manual-Tiger 11.9

TRL!!+!j3H
1 1 ^
11.10 Service Manual - Tiger U

[fri i#i' 1iIiN
[sIi
ExplodedView - Swinging Arm ............................................................. 12.2

ExplodedView - Rear Hub and Wheel ....................................................... 12.3
View
Exploded - Rear Suspension Unit ...................................................... 12.4
Exploded View - Drop/Drag Link ........................................................... 12.5
RearSuspension Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
Removal .......................................................................... 12.6
Inspection.......................................... .....................0......... 12.7
Installation.......................................... ............0.................. 12.7
DragLink ................................................................................ 12.8
Removal... ........................................................................ 12.8
Inspection......................................................................... 12.9
Installation......................................................................... 12.9
Drop Link Plates ......................................................................... 12.9
Removal ..........................................................................
} 12.9
Inspection ......................................................................... 12.10
Installation......................................................................... 12.10
DriveChain ............................................................................ 12.11
ChainLubrication ..................................................................... 12.11
Chain Adjustment ....................................................................... 12.11
ChainFree-movement Inspection ..................................................... 12.11
ChainFree-movement adjustment .................................................... 12.12
ChainWear Inspection ............ .......................... . 12.12 12.12
Swin in Arm/Drive
g g Chain ................................................................ 12.13
Removal .......................................................................... 12.13
.............................................................................12.14
Inspection.... ..........................................:........................... 12.14
Assembly
Assembly..... . . ........................... 12.15
DriveChain Replacement ................................................................. 12.16
Rivetlink ty pe ..................................................................... 12.16
• 12.1
INJUMEN
j
7Nm
4.5 Nm
110 Nm

'Service Manual - Tiger 12.3
TRMMO
48 N m
ll

er
48 Nm
Twummi
P ^ e , ^ , ^3 a 1 q
Rear S pisi©i Unit 7. Detach the starter solenoid from its two retaining
blades on the rear mudguard. It is not necessary to
remove the solenoid completely or to disconnect the
P s ^ starter cables.
8. Remove the nut and bolt securing the rear
suspension unit lower mounting to the drop link.
Discard the nut.
If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust

system will be hot. Before working on or near the
exhaust system, allow sufficient time for the exhaust
system to cool as touching any part of a hot exhaust
system could cause burn injuries.

falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
the motorcycle.
1. Rear suspension unit
Mote: 2. Rear suspension unit lower bolt
® A stand that supports the rear wheel or 9. Remove the rear suspension unit upper mounting
swinging arm will not support the nut and bolt. Discard the nut.
motorcycle when the suspension linkage is
removed.
1. Raise and support the rear of the motorcycle under

the frame or engine. Position a block to support the
rear wheel.
4. Remove the battery (see page 17-7).
5. Remove the rear panel (see page 16-10).
6. Support the silencer and release the bolt and nut
securing the silencer mounting bracket to the rear
subframe. Discard the nut. It is NOT necessary to
remove the silencer completely.
2. Rear suspension unit upper bolt
10. Slacken the two lower rear subframe bolts.
1. Silencer mounting bracket/fixing

UMW
Rear Suspension
11. Remove the two upper rear subframe bolts and Installation
allow the rear subframe to pivot downwards on the
lower bolts. 1. Locate the rear suspension unit and loosely fit the
upper mounting bolt (from the left) and a new nut.
--^ Note:
•
2 1 The unit must be fitted such that the preload
o adjuster faces to the right hand side of the
l motorcycle.
ce
je ' I 1 `&, \\ ^ ► \\\ 1
1. Rear subframe
2. Upper fixings
3. Lower fixings ®ef hand shown)
12. Withdraw the rear suspension unit upwards between
the frame and the rear subframe.

Inspection 2. Rear suspension unit lower bolt
2. Align the rear suspension unit to the drop link.
1. Clean all components and inspect for damage and Loosely fit the bolt (from the left) and a new nut.
wear to:
• rear suspension unit upper and lower
mountings, o
® lower mounting sleeve.
00 p
2. Renew parts as necessary, ^ o 0 o
1 ''`--may ô p

2. Rear suspension unit lower bolt
3. Tighten the rear suspension unit upper mounting to
48 Nm.

l^Mr
lower bolts. Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised
® Tighten the upper bolts to 60 Nm, and the and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
lower bolts to 40 Nm. falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
the motorcycle.
1. Raise and support the rear of the motorcycle under

the frame or engine. Position a block to support the
rear wheel.
1.Rear subframe
2. Upper fixings
3. Lower fixings (left hand shown)
6. Align the silencer mounting bracket to the frame and
refit the bolt and a new nut. Tighten to 15Nm.
7. Refit the starter solenoid to its two retaining blades
on the rear mudguard. .
8. Refit the rear panel (see page 16-10).
9. Refit the battery (see page 17-7).
10. Connect the battery, red (positive) lead first.
1. Drag link
12. Remove the support. 2. Drag link bolts
2. Remove the nut (discard the nut) and bolt securing
the drag link to the drop link.
3. Remove the bolt and nut (discard the nut) securing
the drag link to the frame.
4. Detach the drag link from the frame and drop link.

er
Suspensior-
Inspection
1. Clean all components and inspect for damage / wear

to:
® drag link bearings, sleeve and seals
® fixing bolts
2. Renew as necessary.
1 the motorcycle.
1. Drag link bearing

2. Drag link seals
3. Drag link sleeve
Installation
1. Pack the drag link bearings with grease to NLGI 2

specification (we recommend Mobil HP222).
2. Fit the drag link sleeves and seals.
3. Position the drag link to the frame and drop link and
refit the bolts. Fit new nuts and tighten both bolts to
48 Nm.
4. Remove the support block from the rear wheel and
lower the motorcycle to the ground.
1.Drag link
2. Drop link plate (left hand shown)
2. Remove the nut and bolt securing the drag link to
the drop link plates. Discard the nut.
3. Detach the drag link from the drop link plates.
4. Remove the nut and bolt securing the rear
suspension unit to the drop link. Discard the nut.
5. Ease the suspension unit and spacer forward to clear
the drop link plates.
6. Remove the nut and bolt securing the drop link
plates to the swinging arm. Discard the nut
12.9
Service Manual -Tiger
TRIUMEM 9
Note:
• Both drop link plates are marked as shown
below. Both plates are identical, and must be
1. Remove the drag link sleeve and pack the bearing
fitted with the bolt hole markings facing the
with fresh grease. Refit the sleeve.
right hand side of the motorcycle. 2. Remove the rear suspension lower sleeve and pack
the bearing with fresh grease. Refit the sleeve.
3. Remove the swinging arm drop link sleeve and pack
the bearing with fresh grease. Refit the sleeve.
1
Note:
5 Front • The drop link plates are marked as shown
- below. Both plates are identical, and must be
fitted with the bolt hole markings facing the
right hand side of the motorcycle.
R 2
L27?3 1
Front
1. Swinging arm bolt position
2. Rear suspension bolt position
3. Drag link bolt position
7. Noting their orientation, remove the drop link plates
from the swinging arm. \2
Inspection
1. Clean all components and inspect for damage / wear

to: 1. Swinging arm bolt position (marked 'S')
2. Rear suspension bolt position (marked 'R')
• drag link bearings, 3. Drag link bolt position
• drag link sleeve and bolt, 4. Locate the drop link plates and, from the left hand
0 side, loosely fit the bolts and new nuts.
rear suspension unit lower mounting,
0
drop link bearings and seals (in the swinging
arm).
2. Renew as necessary.
3. Check the drop link upper bearings for wear.
tea,
1.Drag link (drive chain not shown for clarity)
2. Drop link plate
4. Fixings
5. Tighten the three drop link fixings to 48 Nm.
6. Remove the support block from the rear wheel and
lower the motorcycle to the ground.
1 2.1 0 Service Manual - Tiger uM1

îa a
'Y
._^ Chain Adjustment
For safety and to prevent excessive wear, the drive chain Note:
must be checked, adjusted and lubricated in accordance
with scheduled maintenance requirements. Checking,
® The correct adjustment set ting is 3 5-
40 mm.
adjustment and lubrication must be carried out more
frequently for extreme conditions such as salty or heavily
gritted roads. Chain Free- ove ent Inspection
If the chain is badly worn or incorrectly adjusted (either
too loose or too tight) the chain could jump off the
sprockets or break.
A chain that breaks or jumps off the sprockets could

snag on the engine sprocket or lock the rear wheel,
severely damaging the motorcy cle and causing an
accident. Never neglect chain maintenance.
Note:
® Lub ri cation of the drive chain should ideally

be carried out with the motorcycl e set up so
that the rear suspension hangs free. 1. Maximum movement pos ition
® The chain must be adjusted with the
motorcycle in an upright position, resting on
its wheels, and with no additional weight it.

Chain Lubrication and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
Lubrication is necessa ry eve ry 200 miles (300 km) and falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
also after riding in wet weather, on wet roads, or any time the motorcycle.
that the chain appears d ry.
Place the motorcycle on a level surface and hold it in
Use the special chain lubricant as recommended in the an upright position with no weight on it.
specification section.
Rotate the rear wheel by pushing the motorcycle to
Correct application is critical for chain lubrication. Apply find the position where the chain has least slack.
the lubricant for one full chain revolution only, then leave Measure the chains vertical movement, mid-way
for eight hours before ri ding. This allows the lubricant's between sprockets.
solvent (used to thin the oi l) to evaporate and the oil to If correct, the vertical movement of the drive chain
'soak' into all parts of the chain. If the lub ri cant is applied midway between the sprockets should be 35-
and the motorcycle is ridden shortly afterwards, the 40 mm.
lubricant is unlikely to reach all parts and the majority will
be flung off and wasted. Applying excessive amounts is
not helpful under any circumstances.
It should be noted that the lubricant is applied to the chain
to lubricate its action across the sprockets. In an 0-ring
chain, external lubrication does not penetrate to the
bushes and rollers as the 0-ring seals prevents this from
happening.
`
1 5 FS'}.i V $',$! 1E :, +' 1x ; w y 5 v w, p, t }.s
yJ.•.v .K•,r.+y
wL"' ..... }
^`l > 5$i` {lS
i'SF!ny^
Y
e`; 5. ^, St .+ £
L' tY ^... t• ^tfi"..k^^ Y5 L S'i
5^^
Caution
^ 5 ti
, 5.. l .^. ,. •,
. w^.ti:
k.......Y. s.....:f
`'m 'ni`:,
..5..:. .c :i .;`
..x Q
w...... ^11
,.:^*... :..,7,R..::S...
.,N
.. :. ....h...:^;:<5#:;C
£r'S7,11^`....:..::..c..,:v,: rta .°.`^
Do not use a power 'jet' wash to clean the chain as this

may cause damage to the chain components.

IRUU
Chain Free-movement adadjustment
1. Loosen the wheel spindle nut.

2. Release the locknuts on both the left hand and right
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective
hand chain adjuster bolts.
brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer
take remedial action before you a ttempt to ride the
motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may
reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle
control and an accident.
Chain Wear Inspection
ceCtic
1. Adjuster bolt locknut

2. Adjuster bolt
3. Rear wheel spindle nut
3. Ensure the wheel is in firm contact with the adjusters.
4. Moving both adjusters by an equal amount, turn the ^..._
adjuster bolts clockwise (viewed from the rear of the cecx
motorcycle) to increase chain free movement and

1. Measurement ac ro ss 20 links
counter clockwise to reduce chain free movement
2.10-20kg Weight
Note:
Check for equal adjustment on both sides
using ` the graduation marks on the
swinging arm. Before starting work , ensure the motorcycle is stabilised
5. the adjuster bolts and tighten both
Counter hold and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
adjuster locknuts to 20 Nm, and the rear wheel falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
spindle nut to 110 Nm. the motorcycle.
6. Repeat the chain adjustment check. Re-adjust if
1. Remove the chain guard from the swinging arm.
necessa ry.
2. Stretch the chain taut by hanging a 10-20 kg (20-40
Ib) weight on the chain.
3. Measure a length of 20 links on the straight part of
the chain from pin centre of the 1 st pin to pin centre
Operation of the motorcycle with insecure adjuster of the 21 st pin. Repeat the test at various sections of
locknuts or a loose wheel spindle may result in impaired the chain to establish an average reading. This is
stability and handling of the motorcycle. This impaired because the chain may wear unevenly.
stability and handling may lead to loss of motorcycle 4. If the length exceeds the service limit of 320 mm
control and an accident. (12.59 in), the chain must be replaced.
7. Check the rear brake effectiveness. Rectify if
necessa ry.
A chain that breaks or jumps off the sprockets. could

snag on the engine sprocket or lock the rear wheel,
severely damaging the motorcycle and causing loss of
1 2.1 2 Service Manual - Tiger .

^1M^
Rear Suspension
5. Examine the whole length of the chain. If there are Sw2n9ing Arm/Drive Chain
any excessively tight or loose sections, loose pins or
damaged rollers, the chain should be replaced.
6. Inspect sprockets for unevenly or excessively worn
teeth. Also examine the sprockets for damaged
teeth.
chains installed by an authorised Triumph dealer.
7. If there is any irregularity found in any of the

components, replace the drive chain and/or any
other damaged components.
8. Refit the chain guard, tightening the fixings to
4.S Nm.
1. Rear brake hose

2. Rear brake hose clips
10. Remove and discard the swinging arm spindle nut.

TRIUMEM
11. Partially withdraw the swinging arm spindle from the 16. Collect the spacer tube.
left hand side, to allow access to the frame adjuster
sleeve located on the right hand side of the frame.
e
^-^ \2 1
^^ 7
8
10
1. Seal
2. Sleeve
3. Needle roller bea ring
1.Swinging arm 4. Spacer tube
2. Spindle 5. Ball Bearing
6. Circlip
12. Engage tool T3880295 in the slots of the frame
7. Seal
adjuster sleeve and rotate anti-clockwise to slacken
8. Spacer
the sleeve fully.
9. Washer
10. Nut
Note:
• The needle roller bearing in the left hand
side of the arm cannot be removed
undamaged.
17. if required, remove the fixings securing the chain
guard and drive chain rubbing strip and remove
both items.
18. If required, remove the fixings securing the hugger
and remove the hugger.
Inspection
1. Frame adjuster sleeve
2. Tool T3880104 1. Check all swinging arm bearings for damage, pi tt ing,
13. Withdraw the swinging arm spindle from the left and cracks. Replace as necessa ry.
hand side and remove the swinging arm, together 2. Check the swinging arm for damage. Replace as
with the drive chain. necessary.
3. Check the wheel bearings for damage, pitting, and
• Support the drive chain while the swinging
cracks. Replace as necessary.
arm is being removed to protect it from
contamination. 4. Check all bearing seals for damage, splits etc.
If the swinging arm is to be replaced remove Replace as necessary.
the drive chain (see page 12-16). 5. Check the chain for wear, damage etc. Replace as
necessary.
14. Remove the bearing sleeves from both sides.
15. Remove the right hand bearing by drifting through 6. Check both sprockets for wear, damage etc. Replace
from the left. as necessary.
7. Check the drive chain rubbing strip for wear and
damage. Replace as nec essary.

tuM^
Assembly 12. Release the caliper and refit the rear brake hose clips
to the swinging arm. Tighten the fixings to 4.5 Nm.
1. Install the bearings (marked faces outwards), sleeves
etc. into the swinging arm in the order shown on the
previous page. Use new seals throughout.
2. Position the hugger to the swinging arm and secure
with the fixings. Tighten to 7 Nm.
3. Fit the drive chain rubbing strip and chainguard.
Tighten the fixings to 4.5 Nm.
4. Fit the drive chain to the swinging arm (see page 12-
16).
5. Position the swinging arm to the frame ensuring the
drive chain is in position on the rubbing strip.
6. Refit the swinging arm spindle from the left hand
side such that it will support the swinging arm, but
not pass all the way through the frame adjuster
sleeve. This will allow tool T3880104 to engage in
the slot in the frame adjuster sleeve. 1. Rear brake hose clips
7. Using tool T3880104, tighten the frame adjuster 13. Refit the rear suspension unit (see page 12-7).
sleeve to 6 Nm. 14. Refit the rear wheel (see page 15-10).
15. Refit the exhaust system (see page 10- 120).
16. Connect the battery, red (positive) lead first.
17. Fit the seat (see page 16-9).
18. Pump the rear brake pedal several times to position
the brake pads in the caliper. Rectify as necessary if
correct brake operation is not restored (see page 14-
25)

take remedial action before you ride the motorcycle
again. Failure to take remedial action may result in
1. Frame adjuster reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle
2. Tool T3880104 control and an accident.
8. Fully insert the swinging arm spindle.
9. Fit a new swinging arm spindle nut and tighten to
110 Nm.
10. Fit the drive chain to the output sprocket.
11. Refit the sprocket cover and tighten the bolts to
9Nm.

UMW
3. Position the chain to the tool ensuring that the chain
link pin which is to be removed is aligned with the
holes in the chain cutting tail piece and the large
pressure screw. Tighten the large pressure screw by
hand to grip the chain.
As the drive chain passes through the swinging arm
casting, the chain must be split for removal from the
motorcycle. Removal of the swinging arm is not required
for drive chain replacement. The following instructions for
the replacement of RK rivet link type drive chains requires
the use of service tool T3880027.

the motorcycle.
1. Support the motorcycle on a stand so the rear wheel

is clear of the ground. 1. Tool T3880027
2. Insert the hollow chain cutting tail piece into the tool 2. Large pressure screw
body so its larger diameter end is facing towards the 3. Chain
large pressure screw as shown. 4. Chain cutting tail piece
4. Insert the small pressure screw into the larger
pressure screw as shown below, until the cutting pin
on the small pressure screw contacts the link pin.
Ensure that the cutting pin is centralised on the link
pin to be removed.
cdqk
1. Tool T3880027
2. Large pressure screw
3. Chain cutting tail piece
1.Tool T3880027
2. Small pressure screw
5. Retain the tool body then tighten the small pressure
screw until the link pin is pressed out from the chain.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 on the remaining chain link pin.
7. Remove the tool and separate the two ends of the
chain.
8. Remove the chain cutting tail piece from the body.

l^M^
L i i iwr=
Mote: 11. Insert the riveting tail piece into the tool body so its
. larger diameter end is faring towards the large
® The replacement chain s supplied on a split
pressure screw as shown.
condition, complete with a link knt to join the
tw© ends. 9ote:
nra::
:::;;.:'o:a:)r:.+!v::......•:•::;^...:::.;
:;;Y::::. ::.n::;:C;r^,.•
:.,.. :::
: ;.P. o5:e;
.;:.Y.o'ta..t•:.. ^Y.... ...'t•:.: .•
r•#•Cv'.hv:)
:.:wr:•oS+t<. .vn:
::.
'A)^r:3:
: a?.,, :^0.. x
• t{ „
i : :'..
....^.+.
...<aau;<S
+::^.^:; '^.
.
:n :
:E:^"+arP.•.^?•
..^+^..:...
.:%::i'::n:.i3Y 'oY:•::,:£:.;E...• ..
+ ^'':i:::::7'r rix3)
:::: .b
i..^t.:Z...."•,xr : `ni;.: y.; +^.
.35....
..
l:.:.".t•:' P::nf
Tool T3880027 includes two I^^ k pplate
\
,+i :+x.':;"^'^3'i ):R`.•::e.3 kk,'i ^.v
+vr..
.v.:. .:
':v
Caution
1
holders, one is for riveted I nk plates

n1::,
^.+(• np • •
,u;^
+t.:•:P:.'Y?i+::w.
::r:`}..;il:.u
^'... ,.+ ,i.:^ y ;
::;.;r..
,
, :vi^'j'o , 3 S' :' ^' :;:Y • {!
:r.+>i , ,.i.::. ^:ti : <: , :.:•^,: . Y.. ,:,3f.:,:
k
nL?t;^5v.•.: '
: . :, ^^' i:
\
^?n^"i:..; îR). .,i r;3R...t&A.:.•• ^ . ^ ; 't ^k ^

3R:rS:..,.. {x:.`ê^^;•,
v.• t^'R :,;4,r.; :i2:^'it3x'.t'i.•.x:a..; ♦
. , ::3^ ;:'';rt5^:..:, 2::^.:otL:): u. :. wi":' •
v
+
Y:J;:. ..:+ C!::; b:^3:
..::..:.....:..:...+;:. ^'fa,:
::::;5...:v
iti )"(:•f'::^îi ^'. •.
...E.^,ù. .>.::
.i!:;:.»c.+t.."+:a3;: \ +N ........
k :Y''
.,.Y^;i
o. ; : ,a_ .
::. . (,
a „F"
. Yv:..c
w ^^;:!:r^:.:+?>Y ....3......::.,^::,:...,,
.,.ao
. :'F,r:,. . :.....kR; '.1
^•:5^:..,Y:. .,.f^
.. k..;
"::,"i2:: .+:`:iti4::.:!•Yis
..w....
4marked P50606^, the other is for link
The component parts of the new link kit are coated with plates retained by a spring clip (marked
a special grease which must not be removed. Removal PH406OC)• The holder- for riveted link plates
of this special grease will severely reduce the service life has a shallow groove to allow for chain link
of the chain clearance, the holder for dipped link plates
has a deep groove to allow for chain link
9. Use the old drive chain to pull the new chain into clearance.
position as follows: Temporarily attach the end of the 12. insert the link plate holder (marked PHSO60R) into
new chain to a free end of the old chain using the the large pressure screw
old connector link. Carefully pull the other end of the
old chain to pull the new chain around the sprockets.
4
Note:
®
Do not use the new connector link as the
special grease on it may be removed. 1
10. Using the new link supplied with the chain kit, join
the two ends of the chain. Ensure that the 0-rings 2
-Ii
are positioned as shown below and the link plate is
fitted with its markings facing outwards.
1. Tool body
3. Link plate holder (marked PHSO60PJ
4. Riveting tail piece
13. Position the tool to the chain. Ensure the link plate
holder is correctly located in the large pressure
screw.
1. 0-rings
2. Link
3. Link plate
cdor
1.Tool body
2. Link plate holder (marked PHSO60R)
3. Link plate
4. Link
S. Large pressure screw
TWUMEH Service Manual - Tiger 12.17

Rear Suspension
14. Locate the split link pins such that the pins will enter 20. Retain the tool body and tighten the large pressure
the groove in the link plate holder when the link screw until the split link end is riveted-over.
plate is pressed on to the link.
2 1
caqn
I II I I I I
•
1. Tool body
1. Link plate holder 2. Large pressure screw
2. Chain link 3. Flare pin
3. Link plate 21. Back off the large pressure screw and rivet the
4. Link plate holder groove remaining split link pin as described above.
15. Retain the tool body and tighten the large pressure 22. Remove the tool from the chain and check that both
screw until the link plate is pressed fully onto the link the split link pins are correctly riveted as shown
16. Back off the pressure screw, slide the tool assembly below
to one side and check that the split link is correctly
assembled.
17. Remove the link plate holder from the tool. Do not
remove the riveting tail piece from the tool
18. Insert the flare pin into the large pressure screw.
1. Correct riveting
2. Insufficient riveting
3. Excessive riveting
4. Riveting off-centre
cdqn
1.Tool body
3. Riveting tail piece If either split link pin is not correctly riveted, the split link
4. Flare pin must be removed and replaced with a new link. Never
19. Locate one of the split link pins into the riveting tail operate the motorcycle with an incorrectly riveted split
piece and screw the large pressure screw in until the link as the link could fail resulting in an unsafe riding
flare pin contacts the split link end. Ensure the split condition leading to loss of control and an accident.
link pin is centrally located on the flare pin.

inijri iiiii.ii
ExplodedView - Front Fork ................................................................ 13.2

Ex lodedView
p - Handlebars ............................................................... 13.3
FrontSuspension ......................................................................... 13.4
ForkInspection ..................................................................... 13.4
FrontFork .............................................................................. 13.4
Removal........................................... . .........................0,.000 13.4
Installation......................................................................... 13.5
ForkOil Change ......................................................................... 13.6
Draining........................................................................... 13.6
OilRefilling ........................................................................ 13.6
ForkOil Level Chart ................................................................. 13.7
Front Fork ............................................................................... 13.7
Disassembl y....................................................................... 13.7
Inspection................................................................:....... 13.9
Assembly.......................................................................... 13.10
HeadstockBearing Check/Adjustment ...................................................... 13.12
Check............................................................................ 13.12
Adjustment........................................................................ 1312
Headstock Bearing Renewal ... ............................................................ 13.14
Removal .......................................................................... 13.14
Inspection......................................................................... 13.14
Installation......................................................................... 13.15
Handlebars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Removal 1316
Installation.. . .: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317

Th.L!:!! H
Suspension
90 N m --^
See text
Jm
\\ \\
'\ \\
\ 0
\ ¶\\
\ \\\
N \ \\\
\ \ \\\
\\ \
\\ %\\
, \\
\ \ \
\ \
\ 20 Nm

. MP
Exploded View -Handlebars

:mI!:! H
;r.rtt1;T;k
The Tiger 1050 is equipped with hydraulic, adjustable,
telescopic front forks. Both forks are adjustable for spring
pre-load; the right hand fork is adjustable for compression
damping and the left hand fork for rebound damping.
Periodic inspection for damage and fluid leaks is essential
for safe riding. Always follow the inspection instructions at
the intervals stated in the scheduled maintenance chart. Before starting work, ensure the motorcy cl e is stabilised
W- falling and causing inju ry to the operator or damage to
the motorcycle.
Examine each fork for any sign of damage or scratching
of the slider surface or for oil leaks. 1. Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
If any damage or oil leakage is .found, strip and repair as 2. Remove the front wheel (see page 15-6).
described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph 3. Remove the front mudguard (see page 16-16).
dealer.
Check for smooth operation of the forks as follows:
Place the motorcycle on level ground.
® While holding the handlebars and applying Rz
the front brake, pump the forks up and down
several times.
If roughness or excessive stiffness is detected, repair as
described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph
dealer.
Never allow the brake calipers to hang on the brake

hoses as this may damage the hoses. A damaged brake
hose can cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading
to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
13.4 •
uM^
5. Slacken the top yoke clamp bolt. installation
1. Position the fork within the yokes so that the lip of

the outer tube, not the top cap, is flush with the flat
upper surface of the top yoke as shown below.
1. Top yoke clamp bolt
Note:
® If the forks are to be disassembled, slacken `

the top cap a little before loosening the '. Outer tube
yoke clamp bolts, to allow easier 2 Top yoke
,
removal during strip-down, 3. Straight edge

. >
`^;': :} l 3:^
} a s . vi4
.:::\v".'^
m iG<S:C:ftia+^ ) Y1 f $ .^.
f
\\ r ) :r
ffi
î. Flat area
^: Caution.,5x.:.`
? v^ "# a ^x: vi, 3 X, <++E < ,1a,. '` g 1 0Y1t w' f v}L e ^' r t J F 'S e
} 4^S. ^x Y aF vn1+a^
<nf y)^
r C \Y
12b?1v\
fa.^ `' ^Y
h
r,?
)oyl!a^ p
,
. }^ ^`.\
:
v S:R £.
Y',:} L
., };...} ;\;:
«
..
:y
Y`foS"11aS7'•f?, + ,F+:
^ :;%fir
.
r.:%
nCi+<.
:::
oT.,,
:p$.r'
'
•.;?,e
.: f.
:'}
f+ ..:•„ , i . f,,'1,x,^j1.}•1[
4.. ,N`Y: r,.r?=r:s .
1<rly . 2. clamp bolts to 20 m.
Tighten the bottom Voke clam
p2.:
..,r}^, ,'.'!^"
:i^<s^^' "^N`^'.;f;:'.:H•'.
"+ ^t;$.<:^.L? +u;.fiU.r:}}
1•.' '; '^' ,'
^n % . . `;1?
r,E .}:. ^5•rlfk: a'kk a, L^> $x}.^+,.:._,
X, x.{ $$. mn,l v^,.
cW}i: ' PF
C,w rv . ., ^:i^N
:$:Ti.'^7
v?:3r^`: ^ Yei
3. Tighten the top yoke clamp bolts to 20 Nm. _
Care must be taken when removing the forks, to ensure

that the outer surfaces do not become scratched. 4. Refit the front mudguard (see page 16-16).
S. Install the front wheel (see page 15-7).
6. Slacken the bottom yoke damp bolts. 6. P (see page
Refit the front brake calipers a e 14-18).
P9
7. Lower the motorcycle to the ground and park it on
I//I IUI\ ,J 11 the side stand.
1. Bottom yoke clamp bolts

7. Using a downward, twisting action, withdraw the
forks from between the yokes.

TWUMEH
4. Set the scale on tool 3880160 to the level specified
for the model being worked on (see the fork oil table
opposite for the correct level setting).

the motorcycle.
1. Remove the fork (see page 13-4).
2. Remove the top cap assembly (see page 13-7).
3. Remove the fork spring (see page 13-7).
4. Holding the inner and outer tubes together, invert
the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable
container. Pump the damper rod to remove all the
oil.
it Refilling
The oil level is measured from the upper surface of the
fork outer tube, with the fork fully compressed and the
spring installed.
;IiiiiilIll
Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed and spring

installed)
1. Refit the fork spring, close wound end uppermost.

2. Fill the fork with the grade of oil specified in the fork
oil table opposite, to .a level above that which will
finally be required.
3. Pump the fork assembly and damper several times
to expel any trapped air then fully compress the fork
and support it in an upright position. Leave the fork
for a few minutes to allow the oil to stabilise.

UMP
i 1
Fork ÎI Level Chart .
Oil Level Oil Oil Fork Pull

Volume Grade Through Do not change the fork adjustment settings. If they are
changed, this will change the handling of the motorcycle
30 mm, 581 cc Showa Top of the from those which the rider is used to. Riding _ with
measured SS8 outer tube unfamiliar fork settings may cause unexpected handling
with the -flush with the characteristics leading to loss of control and an accident
spring flat upper face
installed of the top yoke Note:
• The fork seals can be renewed without
Front Fork removal of the damping cylinder. Unless
removal of the damping cylinder is
necessary, omit items 15 and 16 of this
Disassembly procedure.
3. Very gently clamp the fork in the soft jawed vice to
prevent it from turning, hold the outer tube, then
unscrew the top cap from the outer tube.
and adequately suppo rted. This will help prevent it from
the motorcycle.
Note:
• Before removing the forks, slacken the top
yoke clamp bolt to release pressure on the
top cap threads, then slacken top cap a lit tl e
to allow easier removal during strip-down.
1. Remove the forks (see page 13-4).

2. Note the position of the preload adjuster relative to
}
the fork cap to ensure the setting is retained on re- ccun

assembly.
1. Fork
2. Soft jaws
3. Top cap
. ..
x,::}:^ }}:...:}...>:: ';:: A.. ,.rv:' :... : .. x .. .. .. . ; :g :>:}}•';:,;:^s>.>:. .
..i .:rv rv,.,., rv::.::<::.. }•:• ::. + :'.>. h: in :, „<};.>
:}
, Caution
.sE
tli
ya
A' .
... <s
°•'s:. a;.
}`
'v.
<.^^... • Y:,,^.er# : c:
.;.aa:.:;} ,,.', sn:>.'.
:::•.•^y,^ ^
^^.'^+^ :^.:.
t:}';;
Never tightly clamp the outer tube as this will cause the
tube ` to permanently distort. A distorted tube is not
serviceable and must be replaced.
Note:
• The top cap is not under spring tension and
will not spring upwards when the threads
disengage.
1.Compression/rebound adjuster 4. Holding the inner and outer tubes together, invert
the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable
2. Preload adjuster marks
container. Pump the damper rod to remove all the
3. Fork top cap
oil.
5. Return the fork to the soft jawed vice.
6. Allow the outer tube to slide down into the inner.

er 13.7
TWUMBM 9
11. Remove the washer, nylon spacer, spring cap and
spring. It is not necessary to remove the bump
rubber if still attached to the top cap.
Whsle compressing the fork spring and while the spring 1

holder is in place always wear protective equipment for
the face and eyes and never stand directly above or look
directly down on the -fork. If the spring compressor or
holder should dislodge or detach, the resulting release
of spring tension could cause parts to fly off resulting in
injury to the user.
7 Fit tool T3880067 over the top cap. Position the two
adjustable arms to the holes in the spring spacer.
Screw in the arms until they positively engage in the
spring spacer holes.
8. Using tool T3880067, manually compress the fork
spring and insert the spring holder as shown, below
the damper locknut. ccwz
1.Top cap
2. Washer
3. Nylon spacer
4. Spring cap
5. Bump rubber
12. Invert and mount the fork assembly to tool
T3880002.
1.Damper locknut
2. Tool T3880067
3. Spring holder (part of T3880067)
9. Slacken the locknut, unscrew and remove the top
cap and damper rod. If necessary, remove the 0- 0
ring seal from the top cap assembly. The top cap
assembly cannot be dismantled.
10. Recompress the fork spring to remove the holder. 1. Fork
2. Tool T3880002
13. Raise the inner tube and remove the dust seal and
circlip from the outer tube.
While compressing the fork spring and while the spring

holder is in place always wear protective equipment for
the face and eyes and never stand directly above or look
directly down on the fork. If the spring compressor or
holder should dislodge or detach, the resulting release
injury to the user.

uMP
1 1 ', '1
14. Remove the fork from the tool and, using a slide 16. Remove the tool, then the damping cylinder from
hammer action to release the oil seal and bushes the inner tube.
from the outer tube, separate the inner and outer
tubes leaving the seals and bushes in place on the
inner tube. Note the relative positions of all bushes
and seals before removal.
2
/ ow 1. Damping cylinder
w
CC Inspectson
1. Inner tube
1. Inspect the inner tube for stone `chips, scoring,
2.Outer tube
scratches, excessive wear and any other damage.
15. Insert the slotted end of tool T3880004 over the Renew as necessary.
damper rod and locknut, engage the slots in the tool
to the corresponding slots in the damping cylinder Note:
inside the fork. Hold. flats of the tool to prevent • Small inclusions in the inner tube may be
the cylinder from turning while removing the removed using a fine grade stone or similar.
damper bolt from the bottom of the fork.
2. Inspect
p the spring p 9 for damage, cracks
a
9, and
Note: deformation. Renew the spring if necessary.
• Tool T3880004 is designed to fit over the 3. Inspect all the bushes and seals for damage. Renew
top of the damper rod locknut any damaged items if necessary.
1 i
K
CWX
1. Tool T3880004
2. Damping cylinder bolt location

Iltlu M^'
1I 1Ii
Assembly _ 5. Position the seals and bushes to the inner tube as

noted prior to removal.
1 2
3 4
The front forks comprise many precision machined
parts. Total cleanliness must be observed at all times and 5
assembly must take place in a dirt/dust-free 6
environment.
Dirt ingress may cause damage to the fork parts, leading
to incorrect operation, instability, loss of control or an
J
accident.
Note:
® If the damper has not been removed, omit
operations I and 2. CCuP
1. Fit the damping cylinder to the inner tube and 1. Inner tube
engage tool T3880004 as during removal. 2. Dust seal
2. Clean the threads of the damping cylinder bolt and 3. Circlip
fit a new sealing washer. Apply a drop of ThreeBond 4. Seal
1342 to the threads then install the bolt. Prevent the S. Washer
cylinder from turning by holding the flats at the end 6. Bush
of tool T3880004 while tightening the damping 6. Position the inner tube assembly to the outer,
cylinder securing bolt to 19 Nm. ensuring that the oil and dust seal lips do not
become damaged.
I ,/ 7. Using the narrow end of tool 13880003, push/tap
I j the bush, washer and seal into place.
2
ccux
1. Tool T3880004
2. Damping cylinder bolt location
3. Invert and position the fork tube outer to tool
T3880002. 1.Tool T38800031
4. Apply a smear of fork oil to the bushes and seals. 2. Seal
3. Washer
4. Bush
5. Tool T3880002

UM
8. Retain the bush, washer and seal with a new circlip. 15. Rethread the damping rod locknut leaving 16 mm of
thread exposed above the nut.
dep
1.Dust seal
2. Circlip
3. Tool T3880002
9. Position the dust seal to the outer tube.
10. Invert tool 13880003 and, using hand pressure only, While re-compressing the fork spring and while the
push the dust seal squarely into the outer tube. spring holder is in place always wear protective
11. Fill the fork with oil (see page 13-7). equipment for the face and eyes and never stand
directly above or look directly down on the fork. If the
12. Position the fork assembly as for compression of the spring compressor or holder should dislodge or detach,
fork spring during strip down. the resulting release of spring tension could cause parts
13. Refit the fork spring, close wound end uppermost, to fly off resulting in injury to the user.
spring cap, nylon spacer and washer.
16. Refit tool T3880067 as previously described,
compress the fork spring and refit the spring holder.
!`rat
1.Spring cap mut

2. Nylon spacer Gower)
1. Damper locknut
33. 5Spring
p 9
2. Tool T3880067
14. Attach tool 3880085.TO301 to the threads of the 3. Spring holder (part of 13880067)
damper rod and pull the damper upwards.
If removed, the damping rod locknut must be fitted with

the flat face facing to the top of the fork. The slightly
tapered face must face the fork spring. Incorrect
orientation may lead to a loosening of the locknut.

P
M.T.l II1J1It,
17 If removed, fit a new 0-ring to the top cap.
18. Refit the top cap and the damper rod, turning the
IJ-giTh iit: ^
damping rod down to the pre-load adjuster mark
noted prior to dismantling.
19. Hold the top cap while tightening the damper rod Check
locknut to 22 Nm.
1. Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
While compressing the fork spring and while the spring

holder is in place always wear protective equipment for Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised
the face and eyes and never stand directly above or look and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
directly down on the fork. If the spring compressor or falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
holder should dislodge or detach, the resulting release the motorcycle.
injury to the user.
20. Recompress the spring to remove the spring holder.

21. Lubricate the 0-ring on the top cap with a smear of
fork oil then screw the top cap fully into the inner
tube.
22. Tighten the top cap to 35 m.
Note:
® It is much easier to tighten the top cap when
the fork has been refitted.
cecy ^—3
Checking Headstock Bearing Adjustment

2. Hold the lower end of the front forks as illustrated
and 'rock with a front-to-rear motion. If free play can
be detected, the headstock bearings require
adjustment.
Adjustment

2. Slacken the top yoke clamp bolts.
If the lower yoke fixings are also slackened, the forks will
no longer support the weight of the motorcycle.
Do not slacken the lower yoke fixings as, in this
condition, the motorcycle could topple over causing
damage and/or risk of injury.

uMf
Front Suspension
3. Release the fixings securing the handlebar clamps to

the risers, detach the clamps and carefully position
the handlebars clear of the headstock top nut.
It is essential that the adjuster nut is not over-tightened.

if the adjuster is over-tightened it will cause a pre-load
on the headstock bearings. This will introduce tight
steering, which could cause loss of control and an
accident.
1.Upper clamp
2. Fixings
4. Slacken the headstock top nut.
cdbo
1.Adjuster nut
2. Locknut
3. Tool T3880024
7. Refit the top yoke assembly to the forks.
8. Tighten the top nut to 90 Nm.
9. Tighten the top yoke clamp bolts to 20 Nm.
10. Locate the handlebar in the lower halves of the
clamps. Fit the upper clamps and fixings.
11. Align the handlebar punch mark with the front right
c 0 hand split line of the clamp/riser, then tighten the
clamp bolts, front first, to 26 Nm.
1. Headstock top nut
5. Ease the top yoke from the forks.
6. Adjust the bearing free-play as follows, all using tool
T3880024:-
. Remove the locknut and tab washer.
• Slacken the adjuster nut then tighten to
40 Nm.
Slacken the adjuster nut, then retighten to
15 Nm.
• Fit the tab washer and adjuster nut.
• Tighten the locknut to 40 Nm.
1.Right hand front clamp split line

2. Handlebar punch mark
12. Recheck the bearing adjustment (see page 13-12).
13.13
gTRJUMEHService Manual - Tiger
Front Suspension
Ia: : 1;4'; 1 [!II'1 4. Slacken the headstock top nut.
ry
and adequately supported. This will help to prevent it
the motorcy cl e.
Removal
1. Remove both forks (see page 13-4).

2. Release the fixing and detach the horn from the
lower yoke. Without disconnecting any wiring, lay
the horn aside. 1. Headstock top nut
5. Ease the top yoke from the forks.
6. Using tool T3880024, remove the locknut and tab
washer. Discard the tab washer.
1. Horn fixing
3. Release the fixings securing the handlebar clamps to
the risers, detach the clamps and carefully position
the handlebars clear of the headstock top nut. cdb° / /
1. Locknut
2. Adjuster nut
3. Tool T3880024
7. Using the same tool, remove the adjuster nub
° 8. Remove the bo ttom yoke from below the frame
headstock.
Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using

a hammer and drift. Use of a hammer and drift can
cause bea ri ngs to fragment. Pieces of fragmented
bearing could cause eye and soft tissue inju ri es if
suitable protective apparel is not worn.
1.Upper clamp
2. Fixings 9. Using a suitable drift, evenly and progressively drive
the bearing races from the frame headstock
10. Remove the inner race and dust seal from the
bo ttom yoke using a press or puller.

!^M
nstaHationn
1. Fit a new dust seal to the steering stem on the

bottom yoke. Lubricate the seal's knife-edge with
grease to NLGI 2 specification (we recommend
Mobil HP222).
Only remove raised witness marks from within the
frame. Removal of material below any raised areas will
reduce the level of interference between the frame and
the bearings. Loss of interference could cause the
bearing to become loose in the wheel leading to loss of
Examine the frame for any raised witness marks

caused by the removal process. Remove any such
marks with fine emery paper or a gentle file.
cdgo
1. Bottom yoke
2. Dust seal
. . . ..
..: ; y n;n
.vm.:::
,..,v}„pk
,. .. .
a.,i ,. ,..v}{h:..v ,. h: .: : rab . :\.. ,.e:.:,,,.. :., :....Lv y..,.:;".: •:):i j^'.,'!.L} A^:. . ^':'r:^,. ^ : :,YH ìYi'!rii: ; <:}:i.:.
•, :s ...
A
ry l vv:;s ^ ^^`• kY.-0:,^.^'a ••sga;^
r YX. ^ ^\3 7i tl ^JY ^^}!3 ^ta Ys ^ }', <y n:, ^.,:^H
Y :.i:...:i:::,:.
#
Wt} 1^`( f^" d 2 h r! S \1h:. } 'I •"pv.Y+^:'?'tY,
yQ .{p•}i5^: x:k::4;;u:;.
v:.?.,., YY li
.y^ :::e,c7.;^,:s
.:. '.:'rl•:,:•: i
,s;..v$^:.S}: , ..
S
"'!^:;F;?^
''^•vx n :;,ss: rY^< ^ . ,
is^^•.,^r^ •"ram,
} s :{y,'tv•,
n^
}"vu.{r^.i^bfr ,^'
.
\'RU^y,, i,
i : ?
^'M^ '" #
rts:, rr.Y?:;;5. ::.rrS

::.a..,•
,:,.:::::::.ai;.c,:..3.^; E.^l,,.:::.^^ .,.. .....aî:,.."vz;..:}::.:,•: ::r`.i'^'.4s:s'.\:tn
,., t:s$5'i
r;^:..:,,:...:..^..R{ t^:>:S.'.. , k::;H..:
'?.^:. r.^r'a^1,,.un::: ,.^.à. `, .. \
" ,,.a:, .:\:''+.y:
a..^:'xu'\....s.:%
Protect the threads of the bottom yoke when using a

press or puller as damaged threads may mean replacing
the yoke completely.
2. Press a new lower bearing inner race onto the

steering stem of the bottom yoke. Fit the bearing to
the inner race.
1. Stee ri ng stem
2. Bearing
3. Press bed
3. Evenly and progressively drive a new upper bearing
outer race into the frame headstock.
4. Evenly and progressively drive a new lower bearing
outer race into the frame headstock.

er 13.15
INJUMM
5. Lubricate the lower and upper bearings with grease
to NLGI 2 specification (we recommend Mobil
HP222).
6. Insert the lower yoke to the frame, fit the upper Removal
bearing and inner race, and retain with the adjuster
nut.
7. Adjust the headstock bearings (see page 13-12).
8. Locate the upper yoke to the steering stem. Install
but do not fully tighten the headstock top nut at this Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised
stage. and adequately supported. This will help to prevent it
9. Fit the forks (see page 13-5).
the motorcycle.
10. Tighten the headstock top nut to 90 Nm.
11. Tighten the top yoke clamp bolts to 20 Nm. 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
12. Locate the handlebar in the lower halves of the 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
clamps. Fit the upper clamps and fixings. (see page 17-7).
13. Align the handlebar punch mark with the front right 3. Undo the fixing screws and remove the end weights
hand split line of the clamp/riser, then tighten the from the handlebars.
clamp bolts, front first, to 26 Nm. 4. Undo the screws and free the left hand switchgear
assembly from the handlebar. Without disconnecting
any wiring, lay the switch aside.
5. Unscrew the bolts and remove the clamp from the
clutch lever assembly. Without disconnecting the
clutch cable, lay the lever aside.
6. Slide off the rubber boot and release the screws
which secure the two halves of the twist grip guide to
each other.
1.Right hand front clamp split line

2. Handlebar punch mark
14. Check that no freeplay exists in the headstock
bearings. Adjust as necessary (see page 13-12).
1.Twist grip
2. Twist grip guide
3. Screws
7. Note the. position of the guide relative to the
handlebar then separate the two halves of the twist
grip guide.
8. Note and mark the position of each cable relative to
the twist grip in order to correctly identify their
location during reassembly.

UMr
9. Release the inner cables from the twist grip. Installation
1. Locate the handlebar in the lower halves of the

2
/ ._^ clamps. Fit the upper clamps and fixings.
' \\ t-0 2. Align the handlebar punch mark with the front right
1\ \\ O
I, O hand split line of the clamp/riser, then tighten the
I \l\ 1 I clamp bolts, front first, to 26 Nm.
-b'/
1. Closing inner cable
2. Opening inner cable
10. Slide the twist grip off the handlebar.
11. Undo the screws and free the right hand switchgear
assembly from the handlebar. Without disconnecting
any wiring, lay the switch aside.
12. Unscrew the bolts and remove the clamp from the
front brake master cylinder. Taking care to not invert 1• Right hand front clamp split line
the brake fluid reservoir, lay the assembly aside. 2. Handlebar punch mark
13. Release the fixings securing the handlebar clamps to 3. Slide the twist grip onto the right hand side of the
the risers, detach the clamps and collect the handlebar.
handlebar. 4. Reconnect the inner throttle cables as noted during
removal. Ensure that the positions of the opening
and closing cables are not transposed.
1
1 °
1. Upper clamp
2. Fixings 1.Closing inner cable
2.Opening inner cable
14. Remove the left hand handlebar grip.

TWU
1 1 ' 1
5. Assemble the two . halves of the cable guide ensuring 13. Align the left hand switch cube to the handlebar and
that the outer cables are correctly located in the secure with the screws. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm.
guide and the guide is positioned on the handlebars 14. Fit the handlebar end weights, tightening the
as prior to removal. fixings to 5 Nm.
15. Check the throttle cable free play setting. Adjust as
necessary (see page 10-110).
16. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first (see
page 17-7).
17 Refit the seat (see page 16-9).
18. Check for correct operation of the front brake and
clutch. Check ` that the throttle opens and closes
without sticking and that the cables do not bind or
restrict the steering when the handlebars are turned
from lock-to lock. Rectify as necessary
1.Twist grip Operation of the motorcycle with incorrectly adjusted,

2.Twist grip guide incorrectly routed or damaged throttle cables could
3. Screws interfere with the operation of the brakes, clutch or the
6. Tighten the cable guide fixings to 6 Nm. throttle itself. Any of these conditions could result in loss
7. Position the right hand switch cube to the handlebar of control of the motorcycle and an accident.
and tighten the fixings to 4 Nm.
8. Position the front brake master cylinder assembly to
the handlebar. Fit the clamp (Up arrow pointing
upwards) and clamp fixings.
9. Align the split line of the master cylinder clamp to Move the handlebars to left and right full lock while
the punch mark on the upper surface of the checking that cables and harnesses do not bind or that
handlebar and tighten the clamp fixings, upper first, the steering feels tight or difficult to turn. A cable or
to 15 Nm. harness that binds, or steering that is tight/difficult to
turn will restrict the steering and may cause loss of
1.Punch mark
2. Clamp split Line
10. Fit the left hand handlebar grip.
11. Position the clutch lever to the handlebar. Fit the
clamp (UP arrow pointing upwards) and clamp bolts.
12. Align the split line of the clutch lever with the punch
mark on the upper surface of the handlebar, then
tighten the clamp bolts, upper first, to 15 Nm.
13.18 • Service Manual - Tiger

uM
I, iiii
Ex lodedView
p - Front Brake Master Cylinder ................................................. 14.5
ExplodedView - Front Brake Caliper ........................................................ 14.6
Ex lodedView
p - Rear Brake Master Cylinders ................................................ 14.7
ExplodedView - Rear Brake Caliper ........................................................ 14.8
ExplodedView - ABS System .............................................................. 14.9
BrakingSystem Maintenance Safety Precautions ............................................. 14.10
FluidLevel Inspection .................................................................... 14.11
ChangingBrake Fluid .................................................................... 14.11
BrakePads ............................................................................. 14.11
BrakeWear Inspection ................................................................... 14.11
Bleedin the
g Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid ............................................ 14.12
FrontBrake Pads..... ................................................................... 14.15
Removal .......................................................................... 1415
Installation........................................... . ...............0......0....... 14.15
FrontBrake Caliper ....................................................................... 14.16
Removal ........................................................ 0 ................. 14.16
Disassembly........................................ . .............0................ 14.17
Assembly.......................................................................... 14.17
Installation......................................................................... 14.18
FrontDiscs ............................................................................. 14.19
Wear ............................................................................. 14.19.
Removal ......................................................................... 14.20
Installation.... ..................................................................... 14.20
Front Brake Master Cylinder .............................................................. 14.21
Removal .......................................................................... 14.21
Disassembly.................:..................................................... 14.21
Inspection........................................................................ 14.22
Assembly......................................................................... 14.22
Installation........ ...............................................................0.. 14.22
Bleedingthe Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid ............................................. 14.23
RearBrake Pads ......................................................................... 14.25

714MM
.0,00M
Removal......................................................................... 14.25
Installation....................................................................... 14.25
RearBrake Caliper ...................................................................... 14.26
Removal......................................................................... 14.26
Disassembly...................................................................... 14.26
Inspection........................................................................ 14.27
Assembly.................................................... . ................... 14.27
Installation....................................................................... 14.28
RearBrake Disc ......................................................................... 14.28
Wear............................................................................ 14.28
Removal.......................................... .0.0......0.0.................. 14.28
Installation....................................................................... 14.29
RearMaster Cylinder .................................................................... 14.29
Removal......................................................................... 14.29
Disassembly...................................................................... 14.30
Inspection........................................................................ 14.30
Assembly......................................................................... 14.31
Installation........................................................................ 14.31
Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid, Motorcycles with ABS ........................ 14.32
Front ABS Wheel Speedensor
Sensor......
........................................................... 14.3 2
Removal......................................................................... 14.3 2
Installation ........00.......0.0........0 ........... ...00..............0.0......... 14.3 2
FrontABS Pulser ring ..................................... 0.00.....0..................... 14.33
Removal ................0....., 0.................. .........,..................... 14.33
Inspection........................................................................ 14.33
Installation....................................................................... 14.33
Bleeding the Rear Brakes,Renewing Brake Fluid, Motorcycles with ABS ......................... 14.34
RearABS Wheel Speed Sensor ............................................................ 14.34
Removal......................................................................... 14.34
Installation............... 0 ........................................................ 14.34
RearABS Pulser Ring .................................................................... 14.35
Removal......................................................................... 14.3 5
Inspection........................................................................ 14.3 5
Installation....................................................................... 14.3 5
ABSHydraulic Modulator / ECM ........................... .......................0000.... 14.35
Removal......................................................................... 14.35
Installation........................................................................ 14.37
ABS.......................................................... . ........................ 14.38
SystemDescription ................................................................ 14.38
ComponentLocations ...............0....000. , ...................................... 14.39
ABS System Circuit Diagram - Tiger ....................................................... .14 40
ABSSystem Circuit Diagram - Tiger ................................................... 14.41
SystemDiagnostics ...................................................................... 14.42
TriumphDiagnostic Tool .................. . .......................... 0 0....0..0...... 14.42
CurrentData ..................................................................... 14.42
1 4:2 Service Manual - Tiger uM

t a
^^ J
Bleed System O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.42
data
Build /ta .......................................................................: 14.42
14
Diagnostic Trouble Codes ................................:.......................... 14.43
Diagnostic Trouble Codes ........................................................... 14.44
Service Diagnostic Tool ................................................................... 14.46
ToolKeys ......................................................................... 14.46
Initialisation ............................................................................ 14.48
Diagnostics............................................................................. 14.49
Electrical Connectors ..................................................................... 14.59
BeforeDisconnection . .......... .................................................... 14.59
WhenDisconnecting a Connector :................................................... 14.59
WhenInspecting a Connector ....................................................... 14.59
WhenConnecting a Connector. ...................... . ............................... 14.59
.
Disconnectionof ABS ECM connector ................................................ 14.59
Reconnectionof ABS ECM connector ................................................ 14.60
14.60
FurtherDiagnosis ....................................................................... 14.60
Pinpoint Tests ............. . . . 14.60
Before starting pinpoint tests . 14.60
14.60
Aftercompletion of the pinpoint tests: ................................................ 14.60
ABSWarning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) ................................................... 14.61
PinpointTests ................ . ..................................................... 14.61
ABS Warning Light Does not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored) ..................................... 14.62
Pinpoint Tests ..................................................................... 14.62
FrontWheel Sensor Open Circuit / Short Circuit ............................................. 14.64
Pinpoint Tests ..................................................................... 14.64
Front Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input / Loos
ing Con
ta ct .....
. 4
................................. 1 .66
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 14.66
Rear Wheel Sensor Open Circuit / Short Circuit. ................................. . ........... 14.67
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 14.67
Rear Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input / Loosing Contact. . ...................
. .........
. . ... .... 14.69
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 14.69
FrontWheel Pulser Gear Missing Teeth ...
.. ...................
.. .....
. ..................... 14.70
PinpointTests .........................................................0........,.. 14.70
RearWheel Pulser Gear Missing Teeth ...................... . ......................
. ........ 14.71
Pinpoint Tests ...................................................................... 14.71
Front or Rear Input/output solenoid Open I Short Circuit. ................. .. ....
. .1
. .....
... ... 4.72
PinpointTests........0.0 ...................................04........0..0......... 14.72
Front or Rear Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock ..........00.........00.......... 14.73
PinpointTests ........................................0.0.....00................... 14.73
Motor- Lock; Motor Stuck OFF; Motor stuck ON ............................................ 14.74
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 14.74
PowerSource Voltage DropNoltage Rise ................................................... 14.75
PinpointTests ..................................................................... 14.75

MP
Brakes
DifferentTyre Diameter .................................................................. 14.76

PinpointTests ..................................................................... 14.76
AbnormalECU ......................................................................... 14.77
PinpointTests ...................................................................... 14.77
ABS Hydraulic Circuit Layout ............................................................. 14.78
14.4 Service Manual - Tiger AMP

Expbded View - Front Brake Master Cylinder
cm
0
000 ^-
5 Nm - '-
1 Nm
15Nm
o (
25 Nm
( V
/
0
_ IJ - - -
6Nm
25Nm
1.2 Nm //

TWumpt
Exp^ o a^ d Ve - Fc© nt ra ke CaUpers and
S Nm
5.5 Nm
\ 00
I
17 Nm
/// W?
o m o°o moo
fa/ Qf
fc
mo
O o
m o mo° m o mo
00o O o
0 0 0 /^
r
^ oom °m O (y ^
m
o 0^ o ^ ^ O o Om
° o^ ^
m Ô^ m m
0
O' ^ ^ °o moo ^mm
0 0° m m
m
oo ^Ô mo
00 ^ B om
22 Nm moo m o 0
0 0 00 0

25 Nm
15 Nm
7Nm
1) -
/1
7/ - - -
35 Nm -
22 Nm

TRRM
...,P
OA
Brakes
5.5 Nm
17Nm
4O Nm
oo°000^
0 00
o°
o ^ o
o ^
o °
o °
o ^ °
•
-7
22 Nm

UMp
Ld1 41
xpbd ed View - ABS System - see also
I^ page 14-7E
9Nm
14.9
NUMM Service Manual - Tiger
Brakes
:
3 a â
Use only D.O.T. 4 specification brake fluid as listed in

the general information section of this manual. The use
of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in
Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb the general information section may reduce the
moisture from the air. The absorbed moisture will effi ci ency of the braking system leading to an accident.
greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid Failure to change the brake fluid at the interval specified
causing a reduction in braking efficiency. in the scheduled maintenance chart may reduce braking
Replace brake fluid in line with the scheduled efficiency resulting in an accident.
maintenance chart. A dangerous riding condition could
result if this important maintenance item is neglected.
Do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork
as this will damage any painted or plastic surface.
Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container and
Never use mineral based grease in any part of the
never use fluid from an unsealed container or from one
braking system or in any area where contact with the
which has been previously opened.
braking system is possible. Mineral based grease will
Do not mix different brands of fluid. Check for fluid damage the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master
leakage around brake fittings, seals and joints. cylinders.
Check regularly for brake hose damage. Damage caused by contact with mineral based grease
FAILURE TO OBSERVE ANY OF THE ABOVE may reduce braking efficiency resulting in an accident.
WARNINGS MAY REDUCE BRAKING EFFICIENCY
LEADING TO AN ACCIDENT.
If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the

fluid in either brake fluid reservoir, consult your
authorised Tri umph dealer for advice before riding.
If the brake lever or pedal feels soft when it is applied, or
if the lever/pedal travel becomes excessive, there may
be air in the brake lines or the brake may be defective.
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle under such
conditions and remedial action must be taken by your
authorised Triumph dealer before riding the motorcycle.
Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking
efficiency leading to an accident

tUMIR
^ ^ a
• z
/1
\2
jajc
1. Front reservoir upper level cbmz
2. Front reservoir lower level

3. Safety clip 1. Lining material thickness
2. Centre groove
Do not replace individual brake pads, replace both pads

in the brake caliper. On the front where two calipers are
mounted on the same wheel, all the pads in both
calipers must be replaced together. Replacing individual
pads will reduce braking efficiency and may cause an
accident.
1. Rear reservoir
2. Rear reservoir upper level
3. Rear reservoir lower level

l^
Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is ^°
stabilised and adequately supported. This will help
prevent it from falling and causing injury to the
IcT:pI
operator or damage to the motorcycle.
1. Note the original se tting of the brake lever adjuster 1. Bleed nipple
in order that it can be returned to the same position 2. Spanner
when the bleeding operation is complete. Set the 3 . Bleed tube
brake lever adjuster to position No.1. 4. Container
% 4. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable
receptacle containing new brake flui d.
' 5. Turn the handlebars to bring the fluid reservoir to a
level position.
o
o© ..
3
7
1. Brake lever r^
2. Adjuster
3. Indicator mark
2. Remove the rubber cap from the bleed nipple on
the right hand caliper. laic
I. Front reservoir upper level

2. Front reservoir lower level
3. Safety clip
6. Remove the safety clip from the brake reservoir
cover.

u^r
Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to Use only D.O.T. 4 specification brake fluid as listed in
the brake fluid reservoir. Do not allow moisture or debris the general information section of this manual. The use
to enter the cylinder as this will adversely affect the fluid of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in
properties. Always use fluid from a sealed container and the general information section may reduce the
do not use fluid from a container which has been efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident.
opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier
leakage around hydraulic fittings and for damage to in this section of the manual.
hoses.
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident 14. Remove the transparent bleed tube.
could result if this warning is ignored. Note:
• To fully remove any air from the braking
A
YL ` •
4' 1 .,^v}^,.. u{, '^.+, <^ ^ t ta+,r•^3 :. ,
^ ^'' < htwk^{^ ^, <33t YY3 X ^ ft,1,'^.•^giyk'^}^` .r'^ Y>^ t}t^^^
system, carry out the additional bleeding

< # f n..
te ,x.:.S <, s"^
>: x r s , M e• fi nx x'.
.• D, :, py' : ?';Caution:'
.ti
'^r
*i
,Sq
h,::
iii`(^. S
.:n:. procedure to each caliper as listed below:
;su` : >:li, ...a
hg::, a....:C; P.^ r'' t, ` i^G 3 ^, b 3i
+:,,.v3 y ... ..,,.a....,:.;,.),:.;,,,.;..::5.;).^ )h:
a
;.. . . }.
ff' sc
.^.^•n"wY'3::^:q>;
^î
'^;. .•:;.^r.
Y:a.,,: •^'. ,fi +}Y:.;fi
:: t.;.,.1.
:.:n^. :q;..,.;,r,.'A..,..,yjY... ;t^:..,ab:,^;,h,,.r.,,+ °.â
` :. a.>,•z
^
:da;^:":..à;•p,.^.^.,m,.,},?;+r::;.,,,
~ !^. C'o'::^,'5,.,;iF... . f.{ •>^':>,
^f F, g .
To prevent body damage, do not spill brake fluid onto

any area of the bodywork.
15. Undo and remove the bolts securing the front brake
7. Carefully remove the reservoir cover taking care not caliper to the fork and manoeuvre the caliper clear of
to spill any fluid. the brake disc. Do not remove the brake hose(s)
connected to the caliper.
8. Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm for the
reservoir. Replace if necessary.
9. Release the bleed nipple.

the general information section of this manual. The use 16. Obtain a suitable, wide, flat metal plate which is
of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in approximately 2 mm thick and place it between the
the general. information section may reduce the f
brake pads. Pump the front brake lever a few times
efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident. until the metal plate is held in place by the brake
Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier pads.
in this section of the manual.
Note:
During. bleeding, do not allow th e. fluid level
to fall below the lower level mark in the
reservoir If the level is allowed to fall below
this mark, air may enter the system and the
sequence of bleeding must be repeated.
10. Slowly pull the brake lever to the handlebar and,
holding the lever fully in, close the bleed nipple.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 'until no more air appears in
the bleed tube.
12. When all air has been expelled from the system,
hold the lever in and close the bleed nipple. Tighten
the nipple to 5.5 Nm. 1. Plate
2. Brake pads
13. Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4
fluid. 17. Whilst supporting the caliper, attach a transparent
tube to the bleed nipple and place the other end of
the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new
brake fluid. Keep the tube end below the level of
fluid.

UMW
18. Support the caliper so that the bleed nipple is Note:
uppermost. o
Maintain th e brake fluid level between the
upper and lower rese rvoir levels whilst
bleeding is carried out
28. Tighten the bleed nipple to 5.5Nm.
29. Repeat the bleeding procedure for the left-hand
caliper.
30. Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4
fl uid.
Use only D.O.T. 4 specification fluid as listed in the

general information section of this manual. The use of
brake fluid other than those D.0.T 4 fluids listed in the
1. Bleed nipple
general information section of this manual may reduce
19. Release the bleed nipple. the efficiency of the braking system leading to an
Note: accident.
® During bleeding, do not allow the fluid level Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given in
to fall below the lower level mark in the elsewhere in this section.
rese rvoir. If the level is allowed to fall below
31. Refit the reservoir cover and diaphragm. Refit the
thos mark, air may enter the system and the
safety clip and screw.
20. Get an assistant to slowly pull the brake lever to the
handlebar.
21. With the lever held fully against the handlebar, close
the bleed nipple. Once the bleed nipple is closed,
release the brake lever.
22. Repeat steps 19 to 21 until no more air appears in
the bleed tube.
23. When all the air has been expelled from the system,
hold the lever fully against the handlebar and close
the bleed nipple.
24. Remove the transparent bleed tube.
25. Using the flat metal plate, gently push the brake
pads apart to allow clearance for the brake disc when
the caliper is refitted. It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective
take remedial action before you ri de the motorcycle
reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle
Brake fluid may be displaced as the caliper pistons are control and an accident.
compressed. To prevent bodywork damage, ensure that
the displaced fluid does not come into contact with any
part of the bodywork or wheel.
26. Secure the caliper to the front fork using the original
fixings. Tighten the fixings to 35 Nm.
27. Refit the transparent bleed tube and repeat steps 19
and 21 until no more air appears in the bleed tube.
•
1414
^ci vicc I na i i va i - i iyc I
IIM
F 4. Remove both brake pads and inspect for damage
and wear beyond the service limit.
Note:
® Complete the assembly of the brake pads to
one caliper (see assembly for details) before
removing the pads from the other caliper.
Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised Installation

the motorcycle.

damage the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master
cylinders.
Damage caused by contact with mineral based grease
may reduce. braking efficiency resulting in an accident.
1. Fit new brake pads as an axle set or, if all the pads
are in a serviceable condition, clean the pad grooves
before refitting all pads in their original positions.
1.Retaining pin
2. Anti-rattle spring Do not apply more than a minimum coating of grease
3. Brake pads to the pad retaining pins. Excess grease may
contaminate the brake pads, hydraulic seals and discs
1. Remove the brake pad retaining pin after removing causing reduced braking efficiency and an accident.
the 'R' clip from its inner end. Inspect the pad
retaining pin for damage. 2. Lubricate the pad retaining pins using a minimum
amount of proprietary high temperature 'Copperslip'
2. Remove the anti-rattle spring and inspect the spring type grease.
for damage.
3. Fit the anti-rattle spring over the pads and push
down in the cent re to allow the pad retaining pin to
slide across the top of the spring.
4. Tighten the pad retaining pins to 17 Nm, and secure
Never lever directly against the disc, caliper or the pad with the 'R' clip.
lining material as this will damage these components.
Always use a levering tool made from a soft material 5. Pump the brake lever to correctly position the caliper
which will not cause damage to the load bearing pistons.
surfaces.
Brake fluid will be displaced as the caliper pistons are
compressed. To prevent body damage, ensure that the
displaced fluid does not come into contact with any part
of the bodywork.
3. Ease the brake pads apart to force the caliper pistons

back and allow withdrawal of the pads.

1t!WH
Brakes
Front Brake Caliper
Removal
Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
in this section of the manual. falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
the motorcycle.
6. Check the front brake fluid level and top up as
required with new DOT 4 fluid. ,^
a'
y Kf ê°, y7^yr r'^,''. s.:a
7. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as

necessary. y,,:^"
+ 1, 3i•
;:?2'f+} {7. ,C
^,<
a
., n.
ACaution
^,^q
.3sa+ r
K.. N
,âs
:
.i
`..'
,Sk'
f
L'. . :iS,e ^:atq{.r. .^.;":,.^^f,°y
^ ^^:.`^, Tti:X'a^'•fY^'?^."£' ^`.^`'
t;;;
•.•+;`.'f R \r,.>:;.93a'•`'CJ, .iii•; t,^
^:, ,<•£" 5^ "r"^.a.
,^.1^•L'":!n'I''•.'f
^^<+S^`r'•`
i:f '^,'ti AY:s]
7;
^t^ ti.'i
• . YYa,;•"§;^^'a^;
3
. , :`':; . r r:: .
e :,̀ ' ..

1. Disconnect the brake hose at the caliper, and place

It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective the free end of the hose in a suitable container to
brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer collect brake fluid.
take remedial action before you ride the motorcycle 2. Remove the 'R' clip and slacken the pad retaining
again. Failure to take remedial action may result in pin.
x`::n`S:\f'S^'"i;,`+.^•,>w^:ir•'.:,.^C' .
f ,ny S , f 3
e nt
control and an accident. r ko r,?,..
E K +
.. x'.
' s:. 3^
:..'^r....v. ^5..:^..,R. n. .. nn• i^f ' . 'sa.L.v.J^.. .:. a.,. : ^:r. :.X . , ^. nv..:. ni
n : .: y Y
;f.:: : ' ^... : L.
n ^^ A
?a f ^.^.n^.iir
r`v .>,;,..:
. K /v,.:$ ......... ....:.... .w.. S. x..,n. ^
.:,.E. .^^Lt u:,.::v: is,.:,:v:.:.;:n::..r.,:"^n.....i;:i'<. `W:.1.: '. :,,
`^' ''•.`^,^•"
.,:k.`^'f::^`,.:. ` `^crivYil... n.::
u3:•f.:.hÛ.'s`::?; i;g?
q.^ •.
,:..:::ì>....{
,ae .
^:3..>..^^ ::.:;;.8
'
.yw
^• p^^:,?.2^.Q,
:f:i^.:..}^):••y>:'.:•n...::i Y.}tt;<G.;.., 1.a:vv.
Never lever directly against the disc, caliper or the pad

lining material. Always use a levering tool made from a
soft material that will not cause damage to the load
bearing surfaces.
Brake fluid will be displaced from. the hose joint as the
caliper pistons are compressed. To prevent body
damage, ensure that the displaced fluid does not come
into contact with any part of the bodywork.
3. Remove the brake pads.
1. Retaining pin
2. Anti-rattle spring
3. Brake pads

UMW
•
t ra a
4. Remove the two caliper bolts.
Ensure the seal grooves in the caliper bores are not

damaged during the removal of the seals. Damage to
the seal grooves may allow brake fluid to leak past the
seals resulting in a dangerous riding condition leading to
loss of motorcycle control and an accident
4. Remove the old piston seals and dust seals then

thoroughly clean and dry the caliper bores and
pistons. Discard the old seals, these must not be re-
used.
1. Caliper bolts
Always renew caliper seals and pistons after removal
5. Manoeuvre the caliper clear of the disc, taking care
from the caliper. An effective hydraulic seal can only be
not to damage the wheel.
made if new components are used.
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident
Disassembly could result if this warning is ignored.
1. Undo and remove the four bolts which secure the 5. Check the pistons and caliper bores for corrosion,
two halves of the brake caliper together. Discard the scoring and damage. Renew as necessary.
bolts.
2. Carefully split the two halves of the caliper then Assembly
.remove and discard the joint seal.
To prevent injury, never place fingers or hands inside

the caliper opening when removing the pistons. Always
wear eye, hand and face protection when using
compressed air. Eye, face and skin damage will result
from direct contact with compressed air.
ii
Ensure that the caliper bores do not become scratched

during piston removal and assembly. Ensure that the odif
1. Piston seal
pistons remain square to their bores during fitment
2. Dust seal
otherwise damage to the caliper could result.
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident Note:
could result if this warning is ignored. • The piston seals are slightly thicker than the
dust seals.
3. Cover the caliper half with a clean, heavy cloth and,
using compressed air, remove the pistons one at a
Fit the piston seals and the dust seals to the caliper
time.
bores in the position shown above and apply a
smear of silicone seal grease (Triumph part number
T2020338) to the face of each seal which will
contact the caliper piston in use.

TwumeH
Ins BlatQ©r
1. Position the caliper over the disc and tighten the

caliper bolts to 35 Nm.
Ensure that the silicone seal grease (Triumph part
number T2020338) is applied to the face of the piston
seal and dust seal which will contact the caliper piston in
use, this will help to prevent the caliper piston from
sticking.
Never omit to lubricate both seals with the seal grease.
Failure to lubricate both seals with the correct seal
grease may cause the caliper piston to stick. A sticking
caliper piston will result in a dangerous riding condition
leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Only use the silicone seal grease specified in this

instruction (Triumph` part number T2020338) to 1. Caliper bolts
lubricate the piston seal and the dust seal. Using 2. Fit the brake pads to the caliper and locate the anti-
lubricant other than the silicone seal grease specified in rattle spring over the pads.
this instruction may damage the hydraulic seals in the
calipers and master cylinders.
could result if this warning is ignored.
Do not apply more than a minimum coating of grease
2. Carefully push the dry pistons fully into the caliper
to the pad retaining pins. Excess grease may
bores by hand.
3. Clean off any excess grease from the calipers. causing reduced braking efficiency and an accident..
4. Once all seals and pistons have been fitted, carefully
clean the mating faces of both sides of the caliper 3. Lubricate the pad retaining pins using a minimum
then fit a new joint seal to the recess in one half of amount of proprietary high temperature 'Copperslip'
the caliper. type grease. Push down in the centre of the anti
rattle spring and fit the retaining pin.
4. Tighten the brake pad retaining pin to 17 Nm. Refit
the 'R' clip.
5. Connect the brake hose to the caliper, incorporating
Ensure the mating faces of the caliper halves are clean new sealing washers on each side of all hose
and free from dust prior to assembly. Failure to ensure connections.
that the mating faces are clean and free from dust will
6. Tighten the banjo bolt to 25 Nm.
result in a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of
5. Apply a small drop of threadlocking solution

(ThreeBond 1305 or equivalent) to the threads of
new caliper bolts and secure the two halves of the
caliper together. Tighten the caliper bolts to 24 Nm.
1 4.1 8 •

hUM^
Use only D.O.T. 4 specification brake fluid. as listed in
the general information section of this manual. The use Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised
of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from
the general information section may reduce the falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to
efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident. the motorcycle.
Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier
Wear
7. Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid
from a sealed container. 1. Replace any brake disc if worn beyond the service
8. Bleed the front brake line (see page 14-12). limit or exceeds the disc run-out limit
9. Check for correct brake operation. Front Disc Thickness
Standard: 4.5 mm
Service Limit: 4.0 mm
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective Disc Run-out
take remedial action before you ride the motorcycle
Standard: 0.1 mm
reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle Service Limit: 0.3 mm
Measure disc run out using an accurate dial gauge
mounted on a surface plate.
vein
1.Disc
2. Dial gauge

9
Brakes
take remedial action before you ride. the motorcycle

1.Wheel
2. Support blocks
Note:
• The discs are handed. Observe the offset of
each disc to its hub and the orientation of
the cooling holes, for correct installation.
5. Remove and discard the bolts.
6. Detach the disc.
7. Repeat for the other disc.

L1M
the motorcycle.
1.
•
Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
., ) . 0 ,•>, r.ffSSiJ;: rk'kî•:.to;x,': ,c::'.:+',>;f^ì.E, +.;•x.S .^rs^y, r t,vF:,'.^, .'i:; ^'^'4,, ^k•:.i3+•:;ky`^ •.vF'
vS;:^`^\t;{,i.:.•,:.sn,•:r`..,r:,£.'4,t^+:,i,^.J„.^Q.,;,:;,^h.^,:î^•,;a.,r:.nfsf:,.ei.":ap.f.al':^tf.,:'•>:i,.kF;;:^t.'a%:^b?b^,.w'f;..,:;ay.^,+:„£t;.:^t2.^}°'vk,:q+•`S«<.kiRtn:}:io,'x•;.;:^v,:%;ixv`.+t.•.`^bl,1,.rx:.^:;fxâ:x,.y',"^`f••.',<t,^7{i
v
.^ t •; ^#'•..i.k,:,J;::§.;st,. Jt)^'
: ^:;t\.p4'.^,5x^.''^ti+Et
:..., ;.J} -:1:•' + ,:
1.:`.+: ; : :\J:.^:u;ykr.:.; •' cniaf; x

.^;;Vii•.. i:A,"
ia'arf'.^fx^^}àiNk:,`'+,..':^x:w^.0G.:•^„^`v?; `^Gt
.,".n ,• i' 2'..s^.•
%',;;.R: :, .
i:.^<t+9^G, ,dtv,;
,^•:^F ('f..,•
...,.!k.G.'y^: M r,.,.;^,^.`•'' '^:+,a^^l'
. •5
!:
!YY:f::tYl:;,.:<k^5h::K::i:;'YkS.i:>S.':^.w:4i^.,w.i:;}}h:J,:^::L^•t:S:K:• tv^t^. Ai` ^ :oa;;?v

'tYi 'k< a:;.iA:i•., :Cj,: ••. •
'p ' ,.,,.' ..
;.iYt.;:'."ni.+ji:v:,:a:.`v:lMSi:^)•;?tni,.i:vJ,C}•,%:.
^p^^: kiric'.:;nnC•ir..J,r+9:f.:`.^'i:;{t5).:1JatuvV5:
,;'•:.\^x:^n'•i^S;;;S:^:`.;:vig?;.;:iA}Rt.,.Q,N'•^kY"'^+'
î^:
'J J:•R^:.^vx,•<':^:Y,.)y5:" , '^+
::.a: `.n.
'
r'.k^
F.,xW`^pY.^.1;î:;f^,^\:
t(.FJ:,'^`k§.,p.,:^G.;n^k.v`;:,5.W:}^rry i
^. ;.,;'... ::i:` :Ja:.
..,
S : ^ Z . y ,^: + . ^ }; t :'N f
^::R,\?•Q,J},.A:• ,:A.:.^^?.. J.v^.. .>.: k, J `k,.:. .`3w`:'S<:i. ^..,f:kn':';':^°.. \. roN' .:a+r;ta"'$io:%' ^.:.:â;.:5b,. .^;.:, '^,. . . „1Y7
Di
v.::: M
' ,
<. i" .^. ?k;:.
F `
^+ ,
P :.:. Y.:...
G^ f
^"^^ '• 1^,:;v

To drain the fluid from the master cylinder, attach a 1. Circlip

3.
tube to the right hand caliper bleed nipple, slacken 4. Remove the piston set from the master cylinder bore
the nipple and allow the fluid to drain into a suitable noting the relative position of the seals and piston
container. Operate the brake lever until all fluid has components.
been expelled.
4. Note the setting of the brake lever adjuster to ensure
it is returned to the same position when the overhaul
operation is complete.
5. Remove the pivot locknut and bolt ' se cu ring the
brake lever to the master cylinder, and remove the
lever.
1.Spring
2. Piston seals
3. Circlip
4. Piston
1. Pivot bolt
2. Nut
6. Disconnect from the master cylinder:
• brake hoses,
• brake light switch connections.
7. Release the clamp screws from the handlebar to
remove the master cylinder.

1%quMpi •
w 1
Ins ion 2. Fit the new piston set into the master cylinder and
retain with a new circlip.
1. Check the following for wear, damage, cracks or 3. Refit the mastercylinder boot
deterioration:
0
Cylinder bore Installation
® Dust cover
0
Spring
0
Piston
® Pivot Bolt
2. Always renew the piston and seal set if the cylinder is
dismantled.
3. Check that the ports in the cylinder are not blocked.
cdtf
1. Arrow mark
1. Locate the master cylinder to the handlebars and

position the clamp with the 'UP arrow pointing
upwards. Align the master cylinder/clamp split line
with the dot mark on the handlebar.
2. Tighten the clamp bolts, upper first and then the
lower to 15 Nm.
cdfn
3. Connect the brake light switch.
1. Port
4. Position the brake lever ensuring that the pivot boss
is correctly aligned to the push rod. Fit and tighten
Assembly the pivot bolt to I Nm, and the locknut to 6 Nm.
5. Connect the brake hose to the master cylinder using
new sealing washers. Tighten the banjo bolt to
25 Nm.

damage the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master Use only D.O.T. 4 specification brake fluid as listed in
cylinders. the general information section of this manual. The use
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in
could result if this warning is ignored. the general information section may reduce the
Lubricate the piston and cylinder with new, clean Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier
brake fluid. in this section of the manual.
6. Fill and bleed the front brakes (see page 14.9).
Ensure that the piston and piston seal are fitted facing
the same way as noted during removal. A dangerous
riding condition leading to an accident could result from
incorrect assembly of the master cylinder.
14.22 Service Manual - Tiger IUMp

Always return the lever adjuster to the original setting
noted during removal. Operating the motorcycle with
lever settings which are unfamiliar may lead to loss of
control or an accident.
7 Reset the brake lever adjuster to the original setting.

8. Examine the system for correct operation and fluid
leaks. Rectify as necessary.
9. Connect the battery positive, (red) lead first. Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is
10. Refit the seat (see page 16.9). prevent it from falling and causing injury to the
11. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as operator or damage to the motorcycle.
necessary.
1. Remove the cap from the rear bleed nipple.
2. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed nipple.
it is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective

brakes and you must have your. authorised Triumph
dealer take remedial action before you ride the
motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may
result in reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of
motorcycle control and an accident
NJ _^
1. Bleed nipple
2. Spanner
3. Bleed tube
4. Container
3. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable
receptacle containing new brake fluid.
A
,::^..o•:`,:aY:;•: tr
h
at *Y •:` D• Nn .; ,.. ;:: eY;s...::.. p;.:ay: ': ,:. .. ,. • v` . 'o^.. M`: •, rN: . .
..Y.;.^.N :;..i>'.''`î;'••`
::i'',`:2s; • `':ir. s35:a .t.•. '?2; n ' a
.`;^:^ ^ ,; ;7#? y a;; nY y
ry^ . .c:,, µ f
: : :' >^tt ry. ff^%\.^>Iv.,' 4?Y`. :

^,: Y"a S;S;. ,3^'^ , ^'^>";> X•r ^:' .., :M'^r ;"S o^..^• ^ x^.;^ J^ Sih
^S.aYf^< ,e''^`x'^t.^
. ,y:J `,S'
.
,. ry
.'.`'' i5,.?;;^•3a.,. :.•n^4..>

^+.•,''SiÙ > t,^.
q•^^^.
î°f,^ n: 'yy..+°.. ' ,rwi ^ "

,+^(p
'î.<w^ .v ^v, :G. 5
^.v. M
^vp`v .\v,^.'^n'^':p;,g.'^ ^.uA' :A'1\T ;


TwuM
Brakes
4. Remove the rear . brake reservoir cover taking care

not to spill any fluid.

11. Fit the reservoir cover and diaphragm. Check for

correct diaphragm fitment before final tightening of
the cover.
12. Remove the bleed tube from the nipple.
13. Replace the bleed nipple dust cap.
1. Rear brake fluid reservoir cap
14. Check that the brake operates correctly.
Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective
the brake fluid reservoir. Do not allow moisture or debris brakes and you must have your authorised Triumph
to enter the cylinder as this will adversely affect the fluid Dealer take remedial action. Failure to take remedial
properties. Always use fluid from a sealed container and action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of
do not use fluid from a container which has been motorcycle control and an accident.
opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid
leakage around hydraulic fittings and for damage to
hoses.
5. Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm.

Replace the diaphragm as necessary.
6. Release the bleed nipple.
Note:
• During bleeding, do not allow the fluid level
to fall below the lower level mark in the
reservoir. If the level is allowed to fall below
this mark, air may enter the system and the
7. Slowly depress the brake pedal and, holding the
pedal fully down, close the bleed nipple. Repeat
steps 8 and 9 until no more air appears in the bleed
tube.
8. Maintain the brake fluid level between the upper
and lower reservoir levels whilst bleeding is being
carried out.
hold down the brake pedal and close the bleed
nipple. Tighten the nipple to 5.5 Nm.
10. Fill the reservoir to the maximum level with new
DOT 4 fluid.

UMr
gaedl
1. Brake pads
2. Anti rattle spring
5. Remove the anti-rattle spring and inspect for
damage, replace if necessary.
2. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and position the

caliper to allow withdrawal of the pad retaining pins. Installation

cylinders.
Damage caused by mineral based grease may reduce
braking efficiency resulting in an accident.
''j
Brake fluid will be displaced as the caliper pistons are
1. Caliper mounting bolts compressed. To prevent body damage, ensure that the
2. Pad retaining pins displaced fluid does not come into contact with any part
3. Press downwards on both pads and remove the pad of the bodywork or the rear wheel.
retaining pins.
1. If fitting new pads, use hand pressure to compress
the caliper pistons fully into their bores.
2. Fit the anti-rattle spring into the caliper.
3. Renew the brake pads as a pair or, if both pads are
in a serviceable condition, clean the pad grooves
before fitting them.
Service Manual -Ti9 er 14.25

P
Brakes
Rear Brake CzElper

causing reduced braking efficiency and an accident.
4, Lubricate the pad retaining pins using a minimum Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is
amount of proprietary high temperature 'Copperslip' stabilised and adequately supported. This will help
type grease. Press down on both pads and fit the prevent it from falling and causing injury to the
retaining pins. operator or damage to the motorcycle.
5. Position the caliper over the disc ensuring both pads ^ .. ^ Y .. a
^G t `S " u fi ti R', 4i ^'^n ,
^'. • rg °SYY^.u:, 3^^Y , s'^w ^^; f ^ 'r
+,'\; ro ;"C3 }^ tt, S'^
3
e :;.>
Vf ^ \ '{'St^ 3f4^^3'
ar correctly
are '
ct y aligned > \) G ^• S. ::Yfi Y
^c { ro^Y , 3fi Y
e :f• hs tfi ^,^^^k)< if^7^ ;^ "'^^• ' 'h. ,îK^ a ^ Y4. i^ of r ^fi i
. vn'^2f.Âfi^ x ^y. .'n'`'`^^:'3.^^
.,k• f ^ ,f<^^' .;vy;',• ^4- ..ut^'rh xi:^ •
^{ i>^y • '^ l ^ '.Û^•.
`: y
^ :^`r:Y4 n.::WF`:..w3''^^: M 0,^, '
F
. G^^. ; t i â,^t'v
.
^f^' .<^., ^'w "
5. i;' ti.Y^`^' .ry^; C M'^'•, ^ ^,%•, ^^{ ^` ^ ^ . y ^.. .:
\Y$f '1 & '\•.>,Y. ;^ C.:
^\,:tx,a
, ? ^' k: :f Y^S "^,t,: .Soz. • 1 '.,^5 `'^S. f^ y ,a,. ^ 's• ;k^• us ^ /Y t s ^\ ' <^?„t •":•t:,,'^,.. 7ki '
t.` R
$y. tY S.
6. Fit the caliper retaining bolts, and tighten to 40 Nm. ^?2^k'•..:F?r>
C\ 4..f'^':.
kn:.C•^s^...h
v ,5:^+^:• : '^
'1`^•:) ^.^..
'o.:^.....:
1f^ 'tffis:^,
:f7¢ a.9
o J '.'..4xa^,.,..•.,^:p
o.
r
:, •. C;^>9C:
' 4:^. sift. ^J .
^'N :"`•'.4\e^' . F":>sf .fy;s
^ ^.
:^rst^^^^r•,..... ^,. .'^ ^k 't

(:^ / ..:.a
i RY .
^; q;^' '+,c;»>"
ns.,'C.:,;.
t
wa
••.^'
`
+.p' • ,. ^,^âY,t f^{'

^,:.s....•",,^
f
„^,', ............:.> :^;<;r^f ::^;^^<..".,r.: :^^K
• s
^d.,•
'ri
.. '^:Y,^: f^31•
L^ '^^
Y,
S Ynf
.,
f ^` y.:fit..
:a ''^ C`^:;,.r',,:X'^;i.
^#.S:.Y ts..
,.:^!s'^S.et^'RS^v^:%.C^."A{.':
^
:M,
t.rn?'•:̀a^.t..cR....::^s.^.§.^';^\a:.c.,•.i>.:•^^
\
^^•
•.Y^,^C• ' +, p
x'u^f's
ti.,u,'^s:`\2:3a.^•
3, ^Â :,:..t
.oK.o`. +..v^• <:'kx^.,`
l?:
tit::?.. x u;:
7. Tighten the brake pad retaining pins to 17 Nm. To prevent body damage, do not allow brake fluid to
iY
8. Pump the brake pedal to correctly position the contact any area of the bodywork or the rear wheel.
caliper pistons.
1. Disconnect the rear brake hose at the caliper and
9. Check the brake fluid level and top-up as required place the free end of the hose in a suitable container
with new DOT 4 fluid. to collect brake fluid.
10. Check that the brake operates correctly. 2. Slacken the pad retaining pins.
3. Remove the caliper mounting bolts.
4. Remove the brake caliper assembly.

brakes and you must have your authorised Triumph
Dealer take remedial action. Failure to take remedial
action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of
motorcycle control and an accident
ti
1. Caliper mounting bolts

2. Pad retaining pins
Disassembly
1. Remove the brake pads (see page 14-25).
To prevent injury, never place fingers or hands inside

the caliper opening when removing the pistons. Always
wear eye, hand and face protection when using
compressed air. Eye, face and skin damage will result
from direct contact with compressed air.

IUM
2. Cover the caliper opening with a clean, heavy cloth 1. Fit new fluid seals to the caliper. Apply brake fluid to
and, using either compressed air or by reconnecting the outside of the caliper piston and fluid seal.
the master cylinder and pumping the brake lever,
remove the pistons one at a time.
Inspccon
1. Check the piston and caliper bores for corrosion,

scoring and damage. Renew as necessary.
Always renew caliper seals and pistons after removal

from the caliper. An effective hydraulic seal can only be
made if new components are used. N
could result if this warning is ignored. 1.Pistons
2.Seals
2. Inspect the brake pads for damage and wear beyond
the service limit. Renew as necessary (see page 14-
15).
Assembly Ensure that the pistons do not tip during assembly as

this could damage the caliper.
2. Carefully push both pistons into the caliper by hand.

braking system or in any area where contact with the 3. Install the anti-rattle spring into the caliper.
cylinders.
Ensure that the caliper bores...:.do not become scratched

. . ......
during removal and assembly.
1. Anti rattle spring

causing reduced braking efficiency and an accident.

• TPt.H
uMr
4. Position the brake pads in the caliper. Lubricate the
pad retaining pins using a minimum amount of
proprietary high temperature 'Copperslip' type
grease. Press down on both pads and fit the pad Wear
retaining pins.
1. Replace any brake disc if worn beyond the service
limit or that exceeds the disc run-out limit.
Rear Disc Thickness

1. Position the caliper over the disc ensuring the pads
are correctly aligned on both sides of the disc.
Standard: 6.0 mm
2. Fit the caliper retaining bolts, and tighten to 40 Nm.
3. Tighten the brake pad retaining pins to 17 tam.
4. Connect the brake hose to the caliper using new Disc Run-out
washers on each side of the banjo bolt.
5. Tighten the brake light switch to 15 Nm. Standard: 0.1 mm
Measure disc run out using an accurate dial gauge
mounted on a surface plate.
q
6. Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid

from a sealed container.
7- Bleed the rear brake (see page 14-23).
8. Refit the upper chain guard and rear brake hose
cover.

Dealer take remedial action. Failure to ' take remedial

9 UP
2. Support the wheel on blocks as illustrated to avoid
damage to the wheel centre.
Removal

: : : rc:: .: : :
.. W :.^5.4iv{ V':::::::::.:
::s..6':^::•
r^;fi,':.ti v e...
::.a
' n ::
stns:!p'y^::: r...,.::4.
'iii..'n<
:.::n:::::•::.,:.:::::•n»v:::.w:rcrov:.n»v,.:.,':::....n.:::::::':.^:..:
W"'(..
.3. :. .. ;e'(:u•<r ...rovn::;'
xYG : v . .ry
£."^°i'E:'/.°
, v' i:': :w,lS..; A.
,u:\J :^, ^':;^
, s;,
:k:"^ •..i ^..4^{. "^^À;^. I :.w :::::'::::..:.:::...
,:t',:w,i,vu
..;.:^;<`!.'tia..;,
} ..^:.
• .
}. ..v:::._vv.::::.:::..
'.,;ado."L:.>:'^.''
•. S'I"^•'4:4:n..yY.:}:1
: :^• t>..,;d»
^.• ..• 'i::4'
.:t..^ '•
r. .00\}
.. Ji:,., .C.+'{^`Jv.
.
.y:.: n : ;i;i\r v::i:::.
^ ez :. \
.e::4:!;:::
..,!,;>. :.
1.;^.'!.:
:^:o ^.'':h",;, :..4::}?^%;a : ^^»•:, i!^^C:: <v4^:7r!:g:;y's;2:}
3 ^.^^ h3.;^:rif:,^: !:•^.>':
,. ::.:. ^,^ > "^.^'ar' :^^JS:i
I.;^• a.:
+:^ s . s!
»4r . :^k44f:s'^:
4iSY:i
X9 fii : :C:
5i,:est
4;:r..;!r' ff,^'Y^y s:..':;,.x's
s' '^',N"'.,
n•; ,^ "N ,. ',^ .4; ,: a ' ^
^ i:^.s.<7r .fis;^'? ' . î'74.,,<,
.
^^'.}
r 1 a 'KY,,.
âk^..,
C1 . W nj`,:
:'uS: l+'
:
:.
„;. :.^^`}'<: `£•,:.
xn.
C1UtIOfl
r< .;R,•!r+w :f:.v
:C
L"' y^'
, _
»5f,y y
.: ?$', .
..F..
r... ..x„v
,:i';
wS;a
î mr'i'^.•'2^
:a. ,. ;
^
,x ''y:i
'",:'"''vG'^::i'. i t:.. i.
+^'r..^^^`5 'a.f
w
'a,... >:.. .^^..;

Z' à :Ar ^^Si.»,'.,
,...,^<s .?,y 4
y ^5
^ •^
,SS^
•»7.;:^'.^;i:9Y:r%^
^, ^
., l`• v r'^4:b: ^K^:+S^Xk:C:i!:•';.;;i.,';: ,i:'i:YCr:i?

any area of the bodywork or wheels.
3. Drain the fluid from the master cylinder by bleeding

the system at the rear caliper until all fluid has been
expelled (see page 14-23).
4. Release the two fixings and remove the heelguard.
1.. heel
2. Support blocks
3. Motorcycles withABS: Remove the ABS pulser
ring (see page 14-35).
4. Remove and discard the four bolts to detach the disc.
1. Locate the disc on the rear wheel.

2. Fit new bolts and tighten to 22 Nm.
3. Motorcycles with ABS: Refit the ABS pulser ring
(see page 14-3 5)
4. Thoroughly clean and degrease the disc.
5. Refit the rear wheel (see page 15-9).
1. Heelguard
6. Check that the brake operates correctly. 2. Fixings
5. Remove the dip from the clevis pin at the lower end
of the brake pushrod. Remove the clevis pin.
6. Carefully slide the cover off the brake light switch
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective and disconnect the brake light switch multiplug.
brakes and you must have your authorised Triumph 7 Note the setting of all brake lines and hoses to
Dealer take remedial action. Failure to take remedial ensure they are returned to the same position when
action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of the overhaul operation is complete.
motorcycle control and an accident 8. Disconnect the reservoir hose from the rear brake
fluid reservoir.

INJUMBH 9
9. M©dels without ABS brakes: Release the rear 11. Ail models: Remove the two bolts securing the
brake light switch and disconnect the rear brake master cylinder to the frame and collect the master
hose from the master cylinder. Remove and discard cylinder.
the sealing washers from the brake light switch.
k
: 1— \\\ \\
:4)- J `" \ J ce i \ \ \\\ I \M5 ^J

cell 1. Master cylinder
1. Master cylinder 2. Fixings
2. Brake light switch
3. Brake hose
^sdSSen^bly
9 washers
4. Sealing
10. Models with ABS brakes: Release the rear brake 1. Detach the boot from the cylinder and pushrod.
light switch and disconnect the rear brake line from
the master cylinder, taking care not to bend the 2. Remove and discard the circlip retaining the pushrod
brake line as it is disconnected. Remove and discard to the cylinder.
the sealing washers from the brake light switch. 3. Remove the pushrod and piston set from the master
cylinder bore noting the relative position of the seals
and piston components.
' ::r-
\\ 2 ',
4 0 3 0 Inspection
1 0 1. Visually inspect the master cylinder bore for wear,

^ scratches or corrosion. RePlace as necessarY.
2. Check the piston and cylinder bore for damage,
..-- o ^ ^ wear or deterio, ration. Replace as necessary. AIways :
renew the piston seals if the cylinder has been
dismantled.
3. Examine the pushrod for bends and damage .
© o o Replace as necessary.
1.Master cylinder
2.Brake light switch
3.Brake line
4.Sealing washers
14.30 9
Service Manual -Tier .
UP
Assemby
1. Allmodels: Secure the master cylinder to the frame

studs. Tighten the securing bolts to 27 Nm.
2. Connect the reservoir hose to the rear brake fluid
Never use mineral based grease in any part of the reservoir.
braking system or in any area where contact with the 3. Models with ABS brakes: Incoporating new
braking system is possible. Mineral based grease will washers, fit the brake line and brake light switch to
i damage the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master the master cylinder. Ensuring the brake line, is located
cylinders. as noted on removal, tighten the switch to 15 Nm.
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident 4. Models without ABS brakes: Incoporating new
could result if this warning is ignored. washers, fit the brake hose and brake light switch to
the master cylinder. Ensuring correct orientation of
1. Clean the master cylinder bore, piston and seals, with the brake hose, tighten the switch to 15 Nm.
new brake fluid.
5. Refit the heelguard, tightening the fixings to 7 Nm.
2. Ensure all ports are clear of obstruction.
b. Connect the push rod to the brake pedal using the
clevis pin and a new clip.
7 Connect the brake light switch multiplug and refit
the cover.
Ensure that the piston and piston seal are fitted facing
the same way as noted during removal. A dangerous
riding condition leading to an accident could result from
incorrect assembly of the master cylinder.
3. Install the spring and piston set together. the general information section of this manual. The use
4. Apply a small amount of brake grease to the of brake fluids other than those D.O.T. 4 fluids listed in
pushrod. the general information section may reduce the
5. Install the pushrod in the master cylinder and retain efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident.
with a new circlip. Refit the boot. Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier
8. Fill and bleed the rear brake (see page 14-23).


galb
1. Clip
2. Clevis pin
3. Reservoir hose
4. Dust boot
5. Cirdip
6. Piston set
Service Manual - Tiger 1 4.31

TWUMEH
Brakes
Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing

Brake FlUd, Motorcycles moth ABS
1. Complete the brake bleed procedure as for models
without ABS brakes (see page 14-12). 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
2. Connect the Triumph service diagnostic tool (See 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
page 14-50). 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor multiplug.
3. Follow the on screen menu to ABS diagnostics. From 4. Release the wheel speed sensor harness from the
the menu, select 'BLEED SYSTEM' (see page 14- brake hose clips.
55). 5. Release the bolt securing the wheel speed sensor
4. Select BLEED SYSTEM? from the menu (see page harness to the fork leg.
14-s 6). 6. Release the bolts securing the wheel speed sensor to
Note: the fork leg, and remove the sensor.
® When the ABS modulator 2 n d circuit is
activated by the bleed command, the front
brake lever travel will increase as ABS
modulator solenoids are opened and will
then decrease as the solenoids are
automatically closed.
® Pressure must be applied to the front brake
lever before operating the bleed sequence
on the diagnostic tool. An assistant will be
required to open the bleed nipple while
pressure is applied to the brake lever.
5. Apply pressure to the front brake lever, activate the
bleed sequence on the diagnostic tool, and with
assistance, release the bleed nipple.
1.Front ABS wheel speed sensor
6. Repeat the above procedure as necessary until all air 2.Fixings
is expelled from the system.
apply pressure to the brake lever and close the bleed Installation
nipple. Tighten the nipple to 5.5 Nm.
1. Position the wheel speed sensor to the fork leg and
8. Repeat the brake bleed procedure as for models
tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
without ABS brakes (see page 14-12).
2. Secure the wheel speed sensor harness to the fork
leg and tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
3. Secure the wheel speed sensor harness to the brake
hose clips.
4. Connect the wheel speed sensor multiplug.
5. Connect the battery, positive (red) lead first.

UMW
o .
1. Wheel
2. Support block

UM
Brakes
Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing ^^ ^= ^î^g^ ^ t `^ a

il ' 1 ' - 1
Fluid, Motorcyces with ABS
1. Complete the brake bleed procedure as for models

without ABS brakes (see page 14-23). 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
2. Connect the Triumph service diagnostic tool (See 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
page 14-50).
3. Follow the on screen menu to ABS diagnostics. From 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor multiplug.
the menu, select 'BLEED SYSTEM' (see page 14-
55). 5. Release the wheel speed sensor harness from its
retaining 'P' clips.
4. Select 'BLEED SYSTEM? from the menu (see page
14-56). 6. Release the bolts securing the wheel speed sensor to
the rear brake caliper carrier, and remove the sensor.
Note:
• When the ABS modulator 2" circuit is d
activated by the bleed command, the rear

brake pedal travel will increase as ABS
modulator solenoids are opened and will
then decrease as the solenoids are
automatically closed.
® Pressure must be applied to the rear brake
pedal before operating the bleed sequence
on the diagnostic tool. An assistant will be
required to open the bleed nipple while
pressure is applied to the brake pedal.
5. Apply pressure to the rear brake pedal, activate the
bleed sequence on the diagnostic tool, and with
assistance, release the bleed nipple.` 1. Rear ABS wheel speed sensor
6. Repeat the above procedure as necessa ry until all air 2. Fixings
is expelled from the system.
7. When all air has been expelled from the system, Installation
hold down the brake pedal and close the bleed
nipple. Tighten the nipple to 5.5 Nm. 1. Position the wheel speed sensor to the brake caliper
8. Repeat the brake bleed procedure as for models car ri er and tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
without ABS brakes (see page 14-23). 2. Secure the wheel speed sensor harness to its
retaining clips. Tighten the 'P' clip fixings to 4.5 Nm.
3. Connect the wheel speed sensor multiplug.
5. Connect the ba tte ry, (red) lead first.
14.34 Service Manual Ti

- 9g er
UMP
P
^ A
B Fula c° Rbg r;iA]
Removal Removal
1. Remove the rear wheel (see page 15-9). 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
2. Remove the five bolts and detach the pulser ring 2. Disconnect the batte ry, negative (black) lead first.
from the rear brakes disc. 3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10-99).
,^. . . .5:,JJ:i%i,.;>;:':.} :...;wY::r;•n:::.n:..,.;..;;: %u::
:. ..^;5:
'^s.':x:. ;^,V.: J5: ' r;:;:if6:yS{fi
A'L^ ^,
^.
}
n
i_-w k
. "4.,i' ' E. a 1
'^ •; ` ^ .
^ X S
'' ^y^ >' Lr d' .^' '1,
.
i:^
, : «3' a'}x"' . ^•
:^^'.::.^?.;^,
::?t:::: ?><; , Sto't ,.:
:., 'ta"
x4. x^li^.., r,$,^
J
Y,^3:
. `sf{Si:s.`J'
îL ?,3' a ,{5
^•"'<. ..xs..J:
^^ ^ 'c. ;^^, "3:; Sk• :,^53c`.: ,.3 ,•^v.. :s,
,^ 5 • ::o,. ^'^ .#.^'t, }
tfu5
r ^.',^,
^, v
t rya,,.
v
au,.
t fix
:'`t
a.;^`''v..t^:

any area of the bodywork or wheels.
4. Drain the fluid from the front master cylinder, attach

a tube to the right hand caliper bleed nipple, slacken
the nipple and allow the fl uid to drain into a suitable
container. Operate the brake lever until all fluid has
been expelled (see page 14-12).
5. Drain the fluid from the rear master cylinder by
bleeding the system at the rear caliper until all fl uid
has been expelled (see page 14-23).
6. Disconnect the ABS modulator multiplug (See page
1. Pulser ring 14-59).
Inspe ction
1. Check the pulser ring for damaged, missing or

cracked teeth or distortion. Renew the pulser ring as
necessa ry.
Installation
1. Locate the pulser ring on to the rear brake disc and

tighten the fixings to 5 Nm.
2. Refit the rear wheel (see page 15-10).
1.ABS modulator
2. Multiplug.

UMW
7. Release the two fixings and remove the heelguard. 11. Loosen the four brake line unions and, taking care
not to bend the brake lines, detach the lines from the
ABS modulator.
cein
\\ j j/
\\
1.Heelguard
2. Fixings
8. Carefully slide the cover off the brake light switch 1• S modulator
and disconnect the switch wires. 2. Brake line unions
9. Release the rear brake light switch and disconnect 12. Remove the right hand rear engine mounting nut
the rear brake line from the master cylinder, taking and bolt (located above the clutch) and discard the
care not to bend the brake line as it is disconnected. nut and bolt. It is not necessary to loosen the frame
adjuster sleeve.
10. Remove the fixing securing
9 securin the front brake lines to
the frame (located behind the left hand side fairing). 13. Withdraw the engine mounting bolt sufficiently to
It is not necessary to loosen the brake line unions or allow the ABS modulator bracket to be removed.
to separate the two halves of front brake hose
connector housing.
2
3
1 I yam\ \ I
1. Right hand rear engine mounting bolt

2. Nut
1. Front brake hose connector housing 3. ABS modulator bracket
2. Fixing
3. Front brake line from master cylinder
4. Front brake line to calipers

tutor
14. Remove the two upper ABS modulator fixing bolts. 6. Incoporating new washers, fit the brake line and
brake light switch to the master cylinder. Ensuring
the brake line is located as noted on removal, tighten
the switch to 15 Nm.
1.ABS modulator
2. Upper fixings
15. Carefully manoeuvre the modulator from the frame, 1.Master cylinder
taking care not to damage the brake lines. If the 2. Brake light switch
modulator is to be renewed, remove the mounting 3. Brake line
bracket from the modulator. 4. Washers
7. Connect the brake light switch multiplug and refit
Installation the cover.
8. Refit the heelguard, tightening the fixings to 7 Nm.
1. Install the mounting bracket to the modulator. 9. Refit the fixing securing the front brake lines to the
Tighten the fixings to 9 m. frame and tighten to 9 Nm. Ensure the brake lines
2. Carefully position the modulator to the frame, taking are fully inserted into the retaining clip located
care not to damage the brake lines. Fit but do not between the airbox and the frame, directly below the
fully tighten the upper fixing bolts. MAP sensor.
3. Fit a new rear engine mounting bolt and install a 10. Tighten the brake line unions at the modulator to
new nut. Tighten to 85 Nm. 17 Nm.
4. Tighten the upper ABS modulator fixings to 9 Nm. 11. Reconnect the ABS modulator multiplug, ensuring
5. Taking care not to bend the brake lines, refit the lines the locking device is fully engaged (See page 14-59).
to the modulator. Do not tighten the brake line 12. Bleed the front brakes (see page 14-32).
unions at this stage. 13. Bleed the rear brakes (see page 14-34).


17. Check that the brakes operate correctly.

H
:I ty_
.
i R^ Pg
VA1IIi dealers. In this way, precise diagnosis of a fault can be

made and the fault quickly rectified.
Under normal operation, the ABS warning light will stay
illuminated after ignition on until the vehicle speed
The ABS versions of the Tiger are fitted with an electronic exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). The ABS performs a self check
anti-lock brake system (ABS) which is designed to prevent and if no faults are found the light is extinguished. If a
the wheels from locking or skidding by reducing braking trouble code is stored the ABS warning light will stay
effort to the front or rear brake caliper as required. illuminated and the ABS will not function, however the
The system consists of a hydraulic modulator and ECM brakes will operate normally. If the ABS warning light does
not extinguish, or illuminates whilst the motorcycle is
assembly mounted to a bracket beneath the fuel tank, a
being ridden, refer to the ABS system diagnostics (see
front wheel speed sensor mounted to the front fork, and a
page 14.42).
rear wheel speed sensor mounted to the rear brake
caliper carrier.
Both front and rear wheels have a pulser ring mounted on
to the wheel, the front being mounted to the wheel hub,
the rear being mounted to the rear wheel hub.
The front and rear master cylinders are connected via
lines to the modulator and from the modulator the pipes
connect to the brake calipers. The calipers and master
cylinders are identical to the non-ABS equipped
motorcycle.
The front and rear brake circuits operate as separate
systems. The front and rear brakes are not connected in
any way inside the modulator.
The modulator ECM continuously calculates the front and
rear wheel speeds, and from these inputs the ECM
calculates the estimated motorcycle speed, wheel
deceleration/acceleration, the wheel speed difference and
the wheel slip (skid) rate. This is calculated by comparing
the calculated wheel speeds with the calculated vehicle
speed, so that if one wheel speed deviates significantly
from the other two readings, this wheel is calculated to be
slipping (skidding).
Under braking,. if the modulator detects that either wheel
is about to slip, due to the brake force exceeding the
available traction between the tyre and road surface (the
wheel will begin to slip or 'skid'), the ECM very rapidly
releases and re-applies the brake pressure to prevent the
wheel from slipping.
This is felt through the brake pedal or lever as a rapid
'pulsing'.
If the rider reduces braking effort, or traction increases (so
that traction exceeds braking force, the wheel will rotate
once more) the wheel will no longer lock up. The - ABS
system will detect this and stop controlling brake pressure,
and return to its monitoring state.
The system has a self diagnostic function built-in which
monitors the fail safe relay, solenoid valves, motor relay,
wheel speed sensors, power supply and ground, as well as
internal ECM functions. In the event of a malfunction
being detected, the ECM will illuminate the ABS warning
light, and store a diagnostic trouble code in the system
memory. This stored data can then be recovered using a
special service tool which is mandatory for all Triumph

UMP
Brakes
Component Lccations
FRONT BRAKE ABS REAR

SWITCH MODULATOR BRAKE REAR PULSER
N SWITCH RING
Nf c: \
FRONT FRONT REAR

PULSER WHEEL WHEEL
RING SPEED SPEED
SENSOR SENSOR

UMW
drakes
ASS System Craft Di a r - Tiger

Key To Wiring Circuit Diagram Key To Wiring Colour Codes
Code Wiring Colour

Key Item Description
1 Regulator/Rectifier B Black
2 ABS Fuse Box U Blue

3 ABS Module N Brown
4 Ignition Switch G Green
5 Main Fuse Box S Slate/Grey
6 Diagnostic Connector
0 Orange
7 Engine Control Module
K Pink
8 Front Whel Speed Sensor
R Red
9 Rear Whel Speed Sensor
10 Instruments P Purple
Rear Brake Light Switch W White

i____
12 Front Brake Light Switch Y Yellow
13 Brake Light LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
ABS ECM Connector Pin Numbering
17 23 16 24 25
\ \ ^r
C' r: ==:I R
10 u ^^V V
IVP1JI
V
I
__ j
1 7 8 9
cdhg
The above illustration shows the pin numbering system

used in the ABS circuit diagram.
As viewed on the mating face with the ABS ECM (as per
the illustration), pins are numbered from left to right with
number one in the bottom left hand corner.

IUM
drakes
'i L' iii tJ-
-- N
1 2 3 4
L___: E
2
G i r--WU. • RU 16
10
----J
1 4 5 r
iii1 J
6 1 a ^
4
BU
B -
^B-

TWU
Brakes
Current Data
The ABS system has an on-board diagnostics feature By using the Triumph diagnostic tool, live ABS data can be
which allows service technicians to retrieve stored data recovered from the motorcycle. The data available is:
from the ECM using a Triumph service tool. Full details
of the tool's operation and how to interpret the Function Examined Result Reported (Scale)
results are given elsewhere in this section.
Front wheel speed KPH
The tool is connected to the motorcycle using a dedicated
Rear wheel speed KPH
diagnostic plug located under the seat (see page 14-50).
By using a dedicated plug, no electrical connectors Brake switch status ON / OFF
associated with the system are disturbed, reducing
ABS warning light status ON / OFF
potential connector damage.
The tool allows the user to retrieve data associated with
the system sensors, read build data and bleed the brake Bleed System
system. The data and tests available are described on the Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, it is possible to bleed
following pages. the ABS modulator of trapped air. This is necessa ry when
the hydraulic brake system has been dismantled, or the
ABS modulator renewed.
Full details of this procedure are provided later in this
section.
Build data
The following items of build data can also be read.
w^
Function Examined
ECM serial number
Triumph Diagnostic Tool

Described on the following pages is the range of
information which can be retrieved from the ECM's
memory and the adjustments which can be performed
using the Triumph service diagnostic tool.
The tables indicate which tests are performed by the on-
board system and what information can be retrieved by
the Triumph diagnostic tool.
Full details of how to operate the tool and how to interpret
the data follow later in this section.

^M'
r .
boa gnostic TroubNe Codes DTCs can be removed at any time using the Triumph
diagnostic tool
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the ABS
ECM memory when there is a confirmed fault in the The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed
system. below:
The codes are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a
four digit code.
Diagnosti Trouble Code Fault Description
(DTC)
C1611 Front Wheel Sensor Open Circuit / Short Circuit
C1612 Front Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input/ Loosing Contact
C1613 Rear Wheel Sensor Open Circuit / Short Circuit
C1614 Rear Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input / Loosing Contact
C1621 Front Wheel Pulser Gear Missing Teeth
C1623 Rear Wheel Pulser Gear Missing Teeth
C1631 Front Wheel Input Solenoid Open I Short Circuit
C1632 Front Wheel Output Solenoid Open / Short Circuit
C1633 Rear Wheel Input Solenoid Open I Short Circuit
C1634 Rear Wheel Output Solenoid Open I Short Circuit
C1641 Front Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock
C1643 Rear Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock
C1651 Motor - Lock
C1652 Motor - Stuck OFF
C1653 Motor - Stuck ON
C1654 Solenoid Relay - Stuck OFF/ON
C1661 Power Source Voltage Drop
C1662 Power Source Voltage Rise
C1671 Different Tyre Diameter
C1681 Abnormal ECU

MP14
:mt!:
Diagnostic Trouble Co es d
Once the ABS ECM has inhibited ABS function, the ECM
will act in one of three ways:
Dependant on the DTC stored, the ABS ECM will act in
one of two ways: • Allow the ABS to resume operation if the
fault clears.
® Inhibit ABS p
operation y
immediately,
irrespective of the ABS operating mode. Or:
Or: • Allow ABS operation after an ignition cycle if
the fault dears.
• Allow the ABS operation to complete before
inhibiting the ABS. Or:
• Inhibit the ABS function until the fault is
rectified and the DTC erased.
The ABS system will act on the DTC stored according to
the following table:
Fault Descnption ABS warning ABS ABS continues ABS will resume operation
light operation is to operate if fault clears
illuminated inhibited when fault is
when fault is when fault is logged
lo9ged logged (Only when ABS
is Active. When
ABS is no longer
active, operation
is inhibited)
Front Wheel Sensor Open Yes Yes No
Circuit) Short Circuit
Front Wheel Sensor Abnormal Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition cycle, no
Input / Loosing Contact fault is detected. DTC remains
stored
Rear Wheel Sensor Open Yes Yes . No
Circuit / Short Circuit
Rear Wheel Sensor Abnormal Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition cycle, no
Input I Loosing Contact fault is detected. DTC remains
stored
Front Wheel Pulser Gear Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition cycle, no
Missing Teeth fault is detected for 1 second
and speed exceeds 30 km/h.
DTC remains stored
Rear Wheel Pulser Gear Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition cycle, no
Missing Teeth fault is detected for 1 second
and speed exceeds 30 km/h.
DTC remains stored
Front Wheel Input Solenoid Yes Yes No
Open / Short Circuit
Front Wheel Output Solenoid Yes Yes No

UMW
Fault Description ABS warning ABS ABS continues ABS w ll resume operatio
light operation is to operate if fault dears •
illuminated inhibited when fault is
when fault is when fault is logged
logged logged (Only when ABS
is Active. When
ABS is no longer
.active, operation
is inhibited)
Rear Wheel Input Solenoid Yes Yes No
Rear Wheel Output Solenoid Yes Yes No
Front Wheel Actuator Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition cycle, no
(Hydraulic Control) Wheel fault is detected. DTC remains
Lock stored
Rear Wheel Actuator Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition cycle, no
(Hydraulic Control) Wheel fault is detected. DTC remains
Lock stored
Motor - Lock Yes Yes No

Motor - Stuck OFF Yes Yes No
Motor - Stuck ON Yes Yes No
Solenoid Relay - Stuck OFF/ Yes Yes No
ON
Power Source Voltage Drop Yes, Light will Yes Yes, if voltage rises above a
extinguish if preset threshold for more
fault clears than 10 seconds
Power Source Voltage Rise Yes, Light will Yes Yes, if voltage drops below a
extinguish if preset threshold for more
fault clears than 10 seconds
Different Tyre Diameter Yes Yes No
Abnormal ECU Yes Yes No

Tt!: H
Brakes
Se we Dia ostic Tool At the left of the screen, one or more symbols as detailed
below may be displayed.
7
5
2 sue_ .^,.
miII iiIIIguIIIII
isiiiuu
gc
Typical screen showing symbol examples
1.Memory card
2. Screen ®® Cursors to indicate that further lines of text are
3. Return key available to be seen above and/or below those already in
4. Up key view, by scrolling the text up or down using the 'Up or
5. Down key 'Down' keys.
6. Validate key Cursor to show which line of text is 'active'.
7. Help key
? Indicates further help/guidance information available on
The memory card (1) contains all the information that line by pressing the help key.
necessary to allow the technician to follow a number of
different paths to:
. Tool Keys
• Diagnose faults
In most cases, the Return key ( E1) enables the user to
• Obtain data return to the screen last displayed.
• Bleed the system
It is removable to allow replacement / update cards to be
inserted.
Ii EI__]
The screen comprises four horizbntal lines and twenty
vertical columns forming a series of boxes into which
r ^r
letters and numbers can be displayed to provide the
necessary question, message, answer etc.
9a&
Return Key

UMI^
The Up and Down. keys - press to move the lines of text The Help key can be used when the 7 symbol shows, to
up or down. get more information about that line of text. To return to
the diagnostic screen from the help area, press the help?'
:
`:i button again.
gaeg r I I1
I ^^
Up/down Keys (2 separate keys)
Press the Validation key (*) to move on to the next gam ( I
Help Key
message.
Test Procedure
iEi The following describes the procedure to follow when

using the service diagnostic tool. It does not cover the
further diagnosis that must be carried out once a fault
area has been identified. For details of the procedure to
follow when a fault area or fault code has been identified,
refer to the diagnosis details later in this section.
I
Note:
The tool does not retain any memory of
faults, diagnosis etc. carded out on any
particular motorcycle. Any such memory is
only retained in the motorcycle's ECM.
gaef' The following pages describe the tool
Validation Key operation in flow chart form.
Service Manual-Tiger 14.47

TRIUMpm
rni
CONNECT BIKE
SELF TEST SYSTEM ERROR

False
CHECK CARD
Absent
Present
SELECT LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
FRANCAIS
INSERT MEMORY CARD
DEUTSCH
ESPANOL
NEDERLANDS
TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
SOFTWARE VERSION
2005 01
SELECT ECU ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS

ENGINE
SEE SECTION 10
ABS
SWITCH ON BIKE IGNITION
False DATA LINK FAULT

VALIDATE
RETRY
ABS DIAGNOSTICS
CURRENT DATA
READ STORED DTCS
CLEAR CODES
BLEED SYSTEM
READ BUILD DATA

1l^MP

L _
gr©tic3
ABS DIAGNOSTICS
CURRENT DATA Current Data CURRENT DATA
READ STORED DTCS Read Stored DTC ?FRONT WHEEL 0 KPH
Clear Codes REAR WHEEL 0 KPH

CLEAR CODES
BRAKE SWITCH OFF
BLEED SYSTEM Bleed System
y
ABS LIGHT OFF
READ BUILD DATA
Read Build Data I READ STORED DTCS
I t 4 DTC COUNT
? C1611
2
C1671
READ BUILD DATA

CLEAR CODES
T -0
ERASE ALL DTC DATA
YES
NO
READ BUILD DATA

I
BLEED SYSTEM
ECU ID XXXXXXXXXXXXX
DTCS PRESENT CLEAR
BEFORE TEST ACTION
BLEED SYSTEM
BLEED SYSTEM?
CANCEL
PROCEED
BLEED SYSTEM
BLEEDING SYSTEM
RUNNING ...
BLEED SYSTEM
SYSTEM BLEED
COMPLETE

Brakes
1. Connection Power-Up 2 SELECT LANGUAGE
1. Connection to main harness

2. Triumph service diagnostic tool
Connect the tool to the dedicated multiplug in the storage
compartment under the seat.
A message appears on the screen and certain checks are
made automatically, e.g. Is the memory card fitted?
'SELECT LANGUAGE' will then be displayed.
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to move the cursor in

column 1 and select the language required.
Note:
• The tool will always select English as the
default language, and it is only necessary to
use the cursor to select one of the other
languages. The entire diagnostic session will
then continue in the chosen language.
Press the validation key'*' to move on.

lUM
3 TRIUMPHMOTORCYCLESS 4 SELECT ECU
you f j® 1 I I
The screen will display the message' Triumph Motorcycles Use the Up and Down' keys to scroll the text until the
Diagnostic Tool' and will also give the diagnostic software horizontal arrowhead is positioned opposite the 'ABS
9
g year .
version and the software release 9 and press theValidation key's'.
Press the validation key * to move on. 'SWITCH ON BIKE IGNITION' will appear on the screen
(see operation 5)
If the Return key (J) is pressed, the tool will return to the
'SELECT LANGUAGE' display.

:I tY. 14
Brakes
Switch on the ignition. Do NOT start the engine. If the above is displayed, check that the ignition is
switched on.
Press the validation key Y W. During9- a short dela YP
eriod
the tool will carry out certain validation checks.. If the ignition is already on, the problem may be caused
by bad connections, faulty ignition switch, cable break,
If it detects a problem which will invalidate the test, DATA
p faul' ABS ECM, flat battery -etc.
LINK FAULT RETRY?' will be displayed (see operation 6). ^
Press the Help key'?' for advice.
If all is OK, 'ABS DIAGNOSTICS' will appear on the
screen. Rectify the problem and press the Validation key '*' to
return to 'SWITCH ON BIKE IGNITION'.
Press the Validation key '*' again. If the tool accepts that
the problem has been rectified, 'ABS DIAGNOSTICS' will
be displayed (see operation 7).

uM^
^z
A T= • , , -
IHHIIIHHIHIHII°
•:ii
II
iiinini
I EUIII
1I u umHhI
I
aa a •iiiirivau
'CURRENT DATA includes the information shown in the

i^
\ A table below which can be accessed by scrolling, using the
'Up' and 'Down' keys. At the end of each line of text, the
9actual readin at that instant is provided to assist dia9nosis
9ai u I ^ (1
7'
e.g. FRONT WHEEL 3 KPH
This display is the ' ABS DIAGNOSTICS' menu.
For a complete list of the items reported, see the table
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to scroll the text until the titled 'CURRENT DATA' earlier in this section.
horizontal arrowhead is positioned opposite the desired
choice, and press the Validation key's'. Press any key to return to the 'CURRENT DATA' text.
When all information has been noted, press either the
The choices are Validation '*' or Return (.1) keys.
• 'CURRENT DATA' (see operation 8)
'READ STORED DTCS' (see operation 10)
Function Examined Result Reported (Scale)
• 'CLEAR DTCS' (see operation 11)
FRONT WHEEL KPH
• 'BLEED SYSTEM' (see operation 12)
REAR WHEEL KPH
• 'READ BUILD DATA' (see operation 18)
BRAKE SWITCH ON/OFF
• If 'QUIT' is selected, the display will return to
'TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES'. ABS LIGHT ON/OFF

:rRtq^H
Brakes V
E! IrT ;i 'I: (.1 1

&!1L IiMflr; I7;Tfl;1
^ fr 1
HHhuIIIIfliluHhI
IIIIIIIIIIIUIIII
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIII
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
The second line - 'DTC COUNT', shows the number of

DTCs stored in the ABS ECM memo ry.
Lines 3 and 4 display up to two of the DTCs stored (if
any). If additional DTCs are stored, this will be indicated by
a downward pointing arrowhead, and it/they can be
accessed using the 'Up' and 'Down' keys.
gaiu / '
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to position the cursor If there are no DTCs shown, press the Return key (, J) to
opposite 'READ STORED DTCS'. return to MAIN MENU.
Press the Validation key'*'. (If DTCs are present when the Return key is pressed,
display will read 'STORED DTCS, ERASE ALL DTC DATA
'STORED DTCS' will be displayed. YES/NO').
Information about each DTC can be obtained by scrolling
the text until the appropriate code is opposite the '?' in
line 3; then press the Help key (?).
DTC example: C1b17
Help text:
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR OPEN / SHORT
CIRCUIT
Press the Validation key'*' to continue.
Scroll to 'CLEAR DTCS' and press the Validation key'*' to
go on to operation 11
Note:
A full list of all the possi ble DTCs can be
found earlier in this section (see page 14-43.

Tq! ^M P
12 To select ' LEE SYSTEM'' from the
MAINMENU:
III il gHIH ,
Iu u,.Il'I
gain TI "''-"' t I \
Scroll to position either'YES' or'NO' opposite the cursor.

_ ( \
If 'YES is selected, press the Validation key '*' to erase all
DTC data from the memory. 'ABS DIAGNOSTICS' will
then be displayed. •
If ' NO' is selected, press the Validation key'*' to return to gain I

operation 7. Select 'BLEED SYSTEM', and press the Validation key'*'.
That completes the DTC cycle If no DTCs are stored 'BLEED SYSTEM?' will be displayed
(see operation 14).
If one or more DTCs are stored, the message 'DTCS
PRESENT CLEAR BEFORE TEST ACTION' will be
displayed (see operation 14-56).
Note:
• The diagnostic tool will not allow the 'BLEED
SYSTEM' command to be accessed until all
DTCs in the memory are removed.

TR!Lm^
p
Brakes
•.
to clear the u I Ls, press the Validation key W. 'STORED If you wish to bleed the brakes, scroll to 'PROCEED' and
DTCS' will be displayed (see operation 70). press the Validation key'*'.
Scroll to 'YES' andpress the Validation key '*' to erase all If you do not wish to bleed the brakes scroll down to
DTC data the MAIN MENU will be displayed again. 'CANCEL and press the Validation key W. The display
Note: will return to the 'BLEED SYSTEM?' command.
The ABS modulator solenoid valves are energised when
• The fault(s)
s which
c caused the DTCs to be set
the test is confirmed and ended when the bleed system
must be rectified and cleared before
command completes automatically (after approx. 7
continuing the Bleed System command.
seconds).
• A full list of all the possible DTCs can be
found earlier in this section. See Bleeding ABS Brakes earlier in this section (see page
14-32 for the front brakes or page 14-34 for the rear
Select the 'ABS DIAGNOSTICS' menu and 'BLEED brake).
SYSTEM' again pressing the Validation key '*' each time.
Note:
Because the DTCs have now been erased, the 'BLEED
SYSTEM?' (see operation 14) will now be displayed. • If the Return key (.1) is pressed, the tool will
return to 'TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES'
(operation 3).

Brakes
15 BLEEDING 13 SYSTEM BLEED COMPLETE
If you wish to bleed the brakes, scroll to 'PROCEED' and When the bleed system command is completed the
press the Validation key'*'. display will read 'SYSTEM BLEED COMPLETE'.
The ABS modulator solenoid valves are energised when Press the Validation key'*' to return to 'BLEED SYSTEM?'
the test is confirmed and -ended when the bleed system if the bleed system command is to be repeated (see
command completes automatically. operation 14).
See Bleeding ABS Brakes earlier in this section (see page If you do not wish to repeat the bleed system command,
14-32 for the front brakes or page 14-34 for the rear press the Return key (.1). The display will return to
brake). 'TRIUMPH MOTORCYCLES' menu (operation 3).
Note:
• If the Return key (J) is pressed, the tool will
return to 'DIAGNOSTICS' menu
(operation 7).

INJUMPji
Brakes
18 READBUILD DATA
- iTY! :1 1] VXc1 [. ii[*iimiiui
flhIfluhIflRflhIHl
iii OGIiit^G ;; ,
IIIII uIIuaII
Ii r 1 '1
gaJ1(
The display will show the following information relating to
1\\ J
'\
//J the motorcycle under test.
I
NN\`
'
f/* ABS ECM Serial number
Use the 'Up' and 'Down' keys to position the cursor Press the Validation ' key to return to 'ABS
opposite 'READ BUILD DATA'. DIAGNOSTICS' menu (operation 7).
Press the Validation key'*'.

'BUILD DATA' will be displayed.

uMr
L it F Disconnection of ABS ECM connector
Before beginning
be 9 9 any
Y diagnosis,the olio
followingconnector
9
Aution
F:oud'>4x'<:::• ::ys^::%,,{iz> SkF"i ;'•;,V:tt i:
a:;i sFi.'>:r> ".:,, ,::'c" ."S L £¢\ BtiL.::. .iiiFh;:}attar%.
,} : u}: .n.... ::.A Yea...
.'h;:
.,S9
^'..
;x;:«„
^:,ai.^:t .
related information should be noted: ^.•}.:^5`
. F
^ <q^,`,:
. <
i}Ci^:M1:: r°..i:.'\•{m^"`+.
•
r.
s. `
.. . ,, . ` \
k'.'4Y"Y. `
:
,^
rya•:.:
^' }•.^
v
^,:"iq^4C::<F
...Q+• ,.•^k:#s....:;...
:l ,:
:nFSi
•:x<Stst^.) ,::::.w.>"tr _?..

^.,^ "^'.î
,c.;....? :^^`"'^::i 5:<ti:'..^:«•5:>,,+c:.i^•:

:
3: U'.i 5¢ :^:.i n4.;r ..n2r
:, <:::.n.n.....5,x:.:.,^:cst?+^^:,......:::.:,.,:..:.: i.H:x.^'^'<`
i':s{^.:,
ret ^;S
v'.'
°w+^Hw::::^^:t^.^?^,.'S.:ti.>...
:FFl.44dR^.'î
^;q
,i$1 ^t\'"^'v'.%'Fi:'"::Fki.
:zyke''^, .., .. ;,:^}.^,;:?:. ^ ^`^:to.:.ra.5:^>ct..,'a`^t,,5'^`
,.,.^^^, }..:.,.ka ,zw.:^;
:}r}k
^;Fi:'\ ti}}x}.
l
.n... :aa:^:t.}:;.
^',"
' ..:.:.,.
'''
:C^#z,:.;+^?.i
Note: A major cause of hidden electrical faults can be When disconnecting a connector, never pull directly on
traced to faulty electrical connectors. the wires as this may result in cable and connector
For example: damage.
• Dirty/corroded terminals.
• Damp terminals.
• B roken or bent cable pins within multi-plugs.
Never disconnect the ABS ECM when the ignition
For example, the ABS electronic control module (ABS switch is in the 'ON' position as this may cause multiple
ECM) relies on the supply of accurate information to fault codes to be logged in the ECM memory.
enable it to monitor and control the brake system. One Always disconnect an ECM after disconnecting the
dirty terminal will cause an excessive voltage drop
. battery negative (black) lead first.
resulting in an incorrect signal to the ECM.
1. Lift up the locking device and gently pull back on the
If, when carrying out fault diagnosis, a fault appears to
connector to release it from the ECM.
clear by simply disconnecting and reconnecting an
electrical plug, examine each disconnected plug for the
following.
Before Dsconnechon:
• If testing with a voltmeter, the voltage
across a connector should be virtually
battery volts (unless a resistor is fitted in the
circuit). If there is a noticeable : change,
suspect faulty/dirty connections.
When Disconnecting a Connector:

• Check for a security device that must be
released . before the connector ' can be
separated. E.G. barb, hook and eye etc. 1. Locking device
2. ABS modulator
When Inspecting a Connector: Note:
4 Check that the individual pins have not been • The ABS ECM is an integral part of the ABS
bent. modulator. Under no circumstances should
Check for dampness/dirt/corrosion. the ECM be removed from the ABS
• Check cables for security. modulator. If a new ECM is required, repair
is by replacement of the ABS modulator and
• Check cable pin joints for damage.
ECM as an assembly only.
When Connecting a Connector.

• Ensure there is no dirt around the
connector/seal.
® Push together squarely to ensure terminals
are not bent or incorrec tly located. '
• Push the two halves together positively.

UMM
Brakes
Reconnection of ABS ECM connector •

FurTher bgross
The tables that follow will, if used correctly, help to
A
.0 ; .n;
:;. ., .w.i.'_t:}E^: `•. ',e.x^
r j'
k.t^:ar,^^
S' t"^''Cw
S ^:\...h ;r•,( k\ °e.^^t ^^1 }^:`, ^^ ^
r` } \,Kw,c^'.°} \} C`}
.).::x:C.
:^,,`yi%;;,k.f,\a:r3tâ^;w;
1^fM•.^'Cx,;î4i,;4•cr^rrs ."'• .r ;,::..y o} ... ;^r;^r..<•.'ff^7r.^^Jr.^y•a;„.C!.• ^^:^bo;::}.. c,X..,;..2
".^Y4.: :gC9' <:xr.:
u: :bx.,..:;::. ..
..FL ,x.n . : v,.:..,^r.;,:r:>.:::}}.^<:. } f! )•)};
.,t v \r.. cu:,^f`Y: .:.5.
; , •x,<.;^`x. <}>T>^:<"
..,o•
^ .::b?}r.•r
A.•:F+C: .}; :t ,. .. :.:F`,.'os•2
^ i?,:f,^, pinpoint a fault in the system once a diagnostic trouble

+.,:ff: .. a.,.:x•}:;^kw.: . Fr
. ^...
.
'?.i ':^:Cir ♦
,w: .:: iit;}}:C.:.rIX'n::}'
.fx
.:.rl..
•^•:
x•.y)rsR#?fi`,,,...^ :%^:•
i5<j;
A, .:)x..A. .,.„:xA^cu' ^:^•'
.^
.C..
..
.::?nk<
:. }., x
^ n`R.k'
"lf1:; :::<:. ...h..
.h
:.5, + : o:. `.S`^f7R;<;r
5 ^ '^.i&3f^,: ^ `.C1, ....:..
$. ^?h.
;C:i^'.vpi:•ni}Y::}^:i:vfff:pî}:^^v ^^:f code has been stored.
Damage to the connector pins may result if an attempt
to fit the connectors incorrectly is made.
Pinpoint Tests
Before starting pinpoint tests:
1. Delete the stored DTCs.

2. Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
If the ABS is not functioning, the brake system will

continue to function as a non ABS braking system. Do
not continue to ride for longer than is necessary with the
indicator light illuminated. Ride with extreme caution
when performing diagnostic troubleshooting on a non-
functioning ABS system. In this situation braking too
1. Locking device hard will cause the wheels to lock resulting in loss of
2. ABS modulator motorcycle control and an accident.
2. Fit the connector into its socket and, whilst holding
3. Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30
the connector in place, push down gently on the
Km/h. If the DTC is repeated proceed to the relevant
locking device until it locks.
pinpoint test.
4. If the DTC is not repeated this indicates the DTC may
have been stored due to external influences such as
bad road surfaces or electrical interference.
After completion of the pinpoint tests:
1. Delete the stored DTCs.

2. Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
3. Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30
Km/h. If the DTC is repeated proceed to the relevant
pinpoint test
4. If a DTC is stored there is a further fault Read the
stored DTC and refer to the relevant pinpoint test.
14.60 Service Manual - Tiger luM^

. t Cif N ^ r ^-
Fault Code Possible cause - Action

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTC's ABS Ignition supply fuse/circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Stored) ABS Warning light circuit fault Disconnect ABS ECM connector and
proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

-1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Proceed to test 2
- ABS ECM connector pin 16 and Ground Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
pin 24
2 Check cable continuity of the ABS ignition Same as 'across Proceed to test 3
supply circuit: With the Ignition 'ON', check battery' voltage
voltage between:
- ABS ECM connector pin 16 and Ground Less than 'across Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
battery' voltage 5
3 Check cable continuity of the ABS warning Voltage greater than Proceed to test 4
light circuit: 1.5 V
Check voltage between:
- ABS ECM connector pin 21 and Ground Voltage less than Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5
1.5 V
4 Check cable continuity of the ABS warning ABS warning light Proceed to test 5
light circuit: - Short ABS ECM connector pin 'OFF'
21 and Ground pin 24 together:
Turn Ignition 'ON' ABS warning light Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5
'ON'
5 Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault OK Action complete - quit test
code and test ABS to verify fault cleared
Circuit Diagram
--• N
r 1
I I
ABS Fuse Box
1 234 i [J]
1 20A I I LA I Control Module

I J
Rugulator/Rectifier
Main Fuse Box Li_____
I I 8
J wu •- RU 16
10A
L-----I
1 4 S
14 BU 21
n
B
-î 24
Ignition Switch
P
Instruments
B
PKI B 25

:1uRt p,t
1?P;rilL'j1!i

ABS Warning Light OFF (No DTC's Warning light circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Stored) ABS ECM ground circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM ground connection
is secure.
Disconnect ABS ECM connector and
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

2 Check the ABS warning light circuit fuse OK Proceed to test 3

(fuse 2):
Faulty Replace fuse, proceed to test 6
3 Check cable for short to voltage: With 0 V Proceed to test 4
Ignition 'OFF', check voltage between:
- ABS ECM connector pin 16 and Ground Above 3 V Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test
6
4 Check cable for short to ground: With Voltage greater than Proceed to test 5
ignition 'ON', Check the ABS warning light 1.5 V
circuit voltage between:
ABS ECM connector pin 21 and Ground Voltage less than 1.5 Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 6
V
5 Check cable for continuity: ABS ECM OK Proceed to test 6
connector pin 24 and Ground:
Turn Ignition 'ON' Faulty Locate and rectify fault proceed to test 6
1 4.62 Service Manual - Tiger UP

ri i
N
N
B
ABS Fuse Box
1 234
II ILI
AII I Control Module
t JL J
Rugulator/Rectifier
Main Fuse Box R 9
Y 8
2
G 16
o RU
: wu
L----J
1 4 5
14 BU 21
B
24
P Instruments g 25
Ignition Switch B

Tt!!?H
Brakes
Front WheelSensorOpen Coreaat / Short Corcu*rt

C1611 Front wheel speed sensor circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Ensure wheel speed sensor connector
is secure.
Test Result Action

- ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ABS ECM Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 9
connector pin 12

- ABS ECM connector pin 12 and Ground Short circuit Proceed to test 3
3 Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor OK Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to
connector. Check cable for short circuit: test 9
Wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness fault,
(motorcycle harness side) and Ground proceed to test 9
5 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to
test 9
- Wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness fault,
- ABS ECM connector pin 12 and Wheel Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness fault,
speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle proceed to test 9
harness side)

harness side)
8 Reconnect the front wheel speed sensor 3 mA to 14 mA Proceed to test 9

connector. Check the wheel speed sensor
operation:
- Connect a suitable voltage supply Faulty Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to
between 4.5 V and 16 v between ABS ECM test 9
connector pin . 12 (positive) and pin 3
(negative), and measure the current
consumption of the wheel speed sensor

!iM!
Brakes
Circuit agram
Wheel speed sensor current consumption data under typical conditions:
FrontWheel ABS
Speed Sensor Control Module
1 UW 3
2 BG 12

TOUMEH
Brakes .

C1612 Front wheel speed sensor poor signal Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap Ensure wheel speed sensor connector
Damaged or dirty pulser ring is secure.
Loose or incorrectly installed wheel Proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
speed sensor
M!
Test Result Action

1 Measure the air gap of the front wheel OK Proceed to test 2
speed sensor between the sensor and the
pulser ring:
-Air gap between 0.1 mm to 1.5 mm Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5
2 Check the pulses ring for damage or OK Proceed to test 3
contamination by road grime or ferrous
metal filings
Faulty Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed
to test 5
3 Check the wheel speed sensors for correct OK Proceed to test 4
installation, and the fixings for correct
torque
Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5
4 Check the wheel speed sensor circuit (See OK Contact Triumph service
page 14.64)
5 Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault OK Action complete- quit test
cleared

UM
C1613 Rear wheel speed sensor circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Ensure wheel speed sensor connector
is secure.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

- ABS ECM connector pin 2 and ABS ECM Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 9
connector pin 18
3 Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor OK Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to
connector. Check cable for short circuit: test 9
5 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to
test 9
harness side)
harness side)
8 Reconnect the front wheel speed sensor 3 mA to 14 mA Proceed to test 9
connector. - Check the wheel speed sensor
operation: .
- Connect a suitable voltage supply Faulty Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to
between 4.5 V and 16 v between ABS ECM test 9
connector pin 2 (positive) and pin .18
(negative), and measure the current
consumption of the wheel speed sensor
Test continued overleaf

U
r n.
Test Result Action

9 Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear OK Action complete - quit test
fault code and test ABS to verify
fault cleared
Circuit Diagram
Wheel speed sensor current consumption data under typical conditions:
Voltage Mm Typica Max

Low (4. 3.1 m m mA
High (16V) .--. 13.6mA
Rear Wheel ABS

Speed Sensor Control Module
1 UR -- 2
Z BG 18

Brakes
â
Fault Code I Possible cause Action

C1614 Rear wheel speed sensor poor signal Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap Proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
Damaged or dirty pulser ring
Loose or incorrectly installed wheel
speed sensor
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

pulser ring:
- Air gap between 0.1 mm to 1.5 mm Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5
2 Check the pulser ring for damage or OK Proceed to test 3
metal filings
to test 5
torque:
4 Check the wheel speed sensor circuit (See OK Contact Triumph service
page 14.67)
5 Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault OK Action complete - quit test
cleared

1'kty H
FaultCode Possible cause Action
C1621 Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Damaged or dirty pulser ring Proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
speed sensor
Damaged/incorrect wheels
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

pulser ring:
metal filings
to test 5
torque:
4 Check the motorcycle wheel for damage/ OK Proceed to test 4
incorrect size
cleared
1 4.70 Service Manual - Tiger .

I MP
Rear Wheal PÎ se ea M i ssi ng Teeth
Fault Code Possible cause Acti on

speed sensor
Damaged/incorrect wheels
Test Result Action

pulser ring:
metal filings
to test 5
torque:
4 Check the motorcycle wheel for damage/ OK Proceed to test 4
incorrect size
cleared.

TWUMEM
Brakes
Front or Rear Input/outpt t solenoid Open /Short Crcult

Front: 01631; C1632 ABS solenoid circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Rear: C1633; C1634 Disconnect ABS ECM connector and
C1654 proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
Test Result Action

2 Check the ABS solenoid fuse (fuse 1 in ABS OK Proceed to test 3

fuse box):
Faulty Replace fuse, proceed to test 5
3 Check cable continuity: With Ignition 'ON', Same as 'across Proceed to test 4
check voltage between batte ry' voltage
batte ry' voltage 5
4 Check cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 5
- ABS ECM connector pin 24 and Ground Faulty Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5
cleared
Circuit Diagram
Box
^B
Control Module
Rugulator/Rectifier
Y 8

C1641; C1643 Binding brake Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap Proceed to pinpoint test 1:=
speed sensor
Test Result Action

1 Check the relevant wheel for brake bind OK Proceed to test 2
caused by caliper or master cylinder faults,
or other mechanical causes
2 Measure the air gap of the wheel speed OK Proceed to test 3
sensor between the sensor and the pulser
ring:
torque
cleared

GIMP
Brakes •
. _______
OFF; Mot .
t ON
C1651; C1652; C1653 Motor circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Motor runs continually Turn the ignition 'ON'.
Motor does not run at a ll Proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Check the motor function: OK Proceed to test 2
Check that with the motorcycle stationa ry Motor runs Contact Triumph service
and the ABS ACM modulator connected, continually.
the motor does not operate.
2 Check the ABS motor circuit fuse (fuse 2 in OK Proceed to test 3
ABS fuse box)
Faulty Replace fuse and proceed to test 5
3 Check cable continuity: With Ignition 'ON', Same as 'across Proceed to test 4
check voltage between: ba ttery' voltage
ba ttery' voltage 5
4 Check cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 5
- ABS ECM connector pin 25 and Ground Faulty Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5
Circuit Diagram
BS Fuse Box
E--,
Control Module
Rugulator/Rectifier
R 9
X 4.74
IUM^
C1661; C1662 Power supply circuit fault Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Battery charging circuit fault Disconnect ABS ECM connector and
Pinpos t Tests
Test Result Action

•1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Proceed to test 2
pin 24
2 Check the cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 3
- ABS ECM connector pin 24 and Ground Faulty Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5
3 Check battery voltage: With ignition 'ON', Voltage greater than Proceed to test 4
Check the voltage between: 10 V
- ABS ECM connector pin 16 and Ground Voltage less than Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5
pin 24 1OV
4 Check battery voltage: Reconnect ABS Voltage between 10 Proceed to test 4
ECM connector and start the engine, V and 16 V
Check the voltage between:
- Battery positive (red) terminal and Voltage greater than Check the battery charging circuit. Locate and
negative (black) terminal 16V rectify fault, proceed to test 5
5 Clear fault code and test ABS to verify OK Action complete - quit test
fault cleared.
B
I I I ABS, Fuse Box
I 1 I I 2
1 2 3 4
I I I
2oa I I I Control Module
Rugulator/Rectifier -j t
j
Main Fuse Box A 9
Y 8
2
G -- -- I WU RU 16
IOA
L----^
1 4 5
14 BU 21
^^. B 24
P
Instruments B 25
I
Ignition Switch B

TRJ,UMBH
Brakes
iT Jr i
C1671 Incorrect diameter wheels installed Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.
Incorrect tyre pressures Proceed to pinpoint test 1:-
Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap
Damaged or dirty pulser ring
Test Result Action

1 Check for installation of wheels and tyres of OK Proceed to test 2
the correct size
2 Check the tyre pressures OK Proceed to test 3
metal filings
to test 5
pulser ring:
- Air gap between 0 mm to 1.5 mm Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5
cleared

. uMt
iI] iI'11 tiThil 4U

speed sensor
Pin oint Tests
Test Result Action

1 Measure the air gap of the wheel speed OK Proceed to test 1
sensors between the sensor and the pulser
ring:
- Air gap between 0 mm to 1.5 mm Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4
2 Check the pulser rings for damage or OK Proceed to test 2
metal filings
to test 4
torque

cleared.

U
Brakes
A. Front Brake Circuit from Master

Cylinder to ABS Modulator
B. Front Brake Circuit from ABS

Modulator to Front Calipers
C. Rear Brake Circuit from Master

Cylinder to Modulator
D. Rear Brake Circuit from ABS

Modulator to Rear Caliper
E. ABS Modulator
1 4.78 Service Manual - Tiger UMP

15 Wheels/Tyres
r iT.1I
Explodedview - Front Wheel ............................................................... 15.2
ExplodedView — Rear Wheel & Final Drive ................................................... 15.3
Tyres................................................................................... 15.4
TyrePressures ...................................................................... 15.4
TyreWear eel Inspection .......................................................... 15.4
ImportantTyre Information .......................................................... 15.5
FrontWheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5.6
Removal.......................................................................... 15.6
Installation......................................................................... 15.7
FrontWheel Bearin
g ...................................................................... 15.8
Removal... ....................................................................... 15.8
Inspection......................................................................... 15.8
Installation......................................................................... 15.9
RearWheel .............................................................................. 15.9
Removal......' .................................................................... 15.9
Installation......................................................................... 15.10
RearWheel Bearings ...................................................................... 15.11
Removal.......................................................................... 15.11
Inspection .. . 0 ........ 15.11
Installation......................................................................... 15.11
FinalDrive ............................................................................. 15.12
Removal.......................................................................... 15.12
Inspection.......................................... . . . . ..............0............ 15.13
Installation......................................................................... 15.13

TWUMEH
Wheels/Tyres
o»> _1
95 Nm

uMr
Wheels/Tyres

TREM....OPOOH
b yq
'. P
Tyres Tyre Pressures

This model is equipped with tubeless tyres, valves, and Correct inflation pressure will provide maximum stability,
wheel rims. Only tyres marked 'TUBELESS' and tubeless rider comfort and tyre life.
type tyre valves mounted on rims marked 'SUITABLE Tyre pressures should be checked frequently and adjusted
FOR TUBELESS TYRES can be used. as necessary. Correct tyre pressures are:
Front - 2.34 Bar (34 Psi)
Rear - 2.90 Bar (42 Psi)
Incorrect tyre inflation will cause abnormal tread wear

and instability problems which may lead to loss of
Under-inflation may result in the tyre slipping on, or
coming off the rim. Over-inflation will cause instability
and accelerated tread wear.
Both conditions are dangerous as they may cause loss of
control leading to an accident.
Typical Wheel Marking
Tyre ear/Wheel Inspe ion

As the tyre tread wears down, the tyre becomes more
susceptible to puncture and failure. It is estimated that
90% of all tyre failures occur during the last 10% of tread
life (90% worn). It is false economy and unsafe to use
tyres until they are worn to their minimum.
All tyres are fitted with tread wear indicators. When the
tyre becomes worn down as far as the top of a tread wear
indicator, the tyre is worn beyond its service life and must
be replaced.
Typical Tyre Marking
Tyres that have been used on a rolling road

dynamometer may become damaged. In some cases,
the damage may not be visible on the external surface
of the tyre.
Tyres must be replaced after such use as continued use
of a damaged tyre may lead to instability, loss of control
and an accident.
1. Tread wear indicator
In accordance with the scheduled maintenance chart,
measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and
replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the
minimum allowable tread depth.
Inspect wheels for cracks, splits and kerb damage. , Always
replace wheels that are suspected of having become
damaged.

u^
Wheels/Tyres
combinations may lead to motorcycle instability. Always

refer to the owner's handbook data section for details of
approved tyres and tyre combinations.
.Operation with excessively worn tyres is hazardous and

will adversely affect traction, stability and handling which
may lead to loss of control or an accident.
When tubeless tyres become punctured, leakage is If a tyre sustains a puncture, the tyre must be replaced.
often very slow. Always inspect tyres very closely for Failure to replace a punctured tyre, or operation with a
punctures. repaired tyre can lead to instability, loss of control or an
Check the tyres for cuts, embedded nails or other sharp accident
objects. Never use an inner tube to repair a punctured tyre. The
Check the rims for dents or deformation. Operation with rough surface inside the tyre can chafe the tube leading
damaged or defective wheels or tyres is dangerous and to instability, rapid deflation, loss of control and an
loss of control or an accident could result. accident.
Always consult your Triumph dealer for tyre
replacement, or for a safety inspection of the tyres.
Minimum Recommended Tread Depth

The following chart can be used as a guide to the The use of tyres other than those listed in the
minimum safe tread depth. specification section of the owner's handbook may
adversely affect handling leading to loss of control or an
Speed Minimum Tread Depth accident.
Under 130 km/h 2 mm (0.08 in) Use the recommended tyre options only in the
(80 mph) combinations given in the owner's handbook.
Do not mix tyres from different manufacturers or tyres
Over 130 km/h (80 mph) Rear 3 mm (0.12 in) from the same manufacturer but from another option.
Front 2 mm (0.08 in)
On models fitted with ABS, the ABS computer operates

by comparing the relative speed of the front and rear
wheels. Use of non-recommended tyres can affect
wheel speed and cause the ABS function not to operate,
potentially leading to loss of control and an accident in
conditions where the ABS would normally function.
Only operate this Triumph motorcycle at high speed in

closed course on road competition or on closed course
race tracks. High speed operation should only then be
attempted by riders who have been instructed in the Always check tyre pressures before riding when the
techniques necessary for high speed riding and are tyres are cold. Operation with incorrectly inflated tyres
familiar with the motorcycle's characteristics in all may affect handling leading to loss of control and an
conditions. High speed operation in any other accident.
circumstances is dangerous and will lead to loss of
Important Tyre Information

All Triumph motorcycles are carefully and extensively
tested in a range of riding conditions to ensure that the
most effective tyre combinations are approved for use on
each model. It is essential that approved tyre combinations
are used when purchasing replacement tyres as the use of
non approved tyres or approved tyres in non approved

• UMW
Front eel
Removal
Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is

prevent it from falling and causing injury to the
operator or damage to the motorcycle.
1. Position the motorcycle on a paddock stand.

2. Detach both brake calipers (see page 14-16).
Note:
Accurate wheel balance . is necessary . for safe, stable
handling of the motorcycle. Do not remove or change • It is not necessary to disconnect the brake
any wheel balance weights. Incorrect wheel balance may hoses.
cause instability leading to loss of control and an
accident.
When wheel balancing is required, such as after tyre
replacement, see your authorised Triumph dealer.
Do not allow the calipers to hang on the brake hoses
Only use self- adhesive weights. Clip on weights will
as this may damage the hoses.
damage the wheel and tyre resulting in tyre deflation,
loss of control and an accident. Damaged hoses could cause brake failure leading
to loss of control and an accident.

4. Slacken both pinch bolts at the lower end of the
right hand fork.
When replacement tyres . are required, consult your
authorised Triumph dealer who will arrange for the tyres
to be fitted according to the tyre manufacturers
instructions.
When tyres are replaced, allow time for the tyre to seat
itself to the rim (approximately 24 hours). During this
seating period, ride cautiously as an incorrectly seated
tyre could cause loss of control or an accident. Initially,
the new tyre will not produce the same handling
characteristics as the worn tyre and the rider must allow
adequate riding distance (approximately 100 miles) to
become accustomed to the new handling characteristics.
After both 24 hours and 100 miles, the tyre pressures
should be checked and adjusted and the tyre examined
for correct seating and rectified as necessary. \ \4 \V%
Use of a motorcycle when not accustomed to its 1. Fork pinch bolts
handling characteristics may lead to loss of control and
an accident. 5. Release and remove the wheel spindle, which is
threaded into the left hand fork.
15.6 Service Manual - Ti er •

9 uMP
Wheels/Tyres
6. Remove the wheel and the wheel spacers. Installation
1. Lightly smear the wheel spacers with grease and

locate in the hubs.
2. Position the wheel between the forks ensuring
the spacers remain in position on both sides.
^ o
III
1. Wheel spacer (right hand shown)

3. Refit the wheel spindle from the right hand side
and tighten to 95 Nm.
4. Lower the motorcycle to the ground and pump
the front suspension to allow the right hand fork
to 'float' to its natural position on the wheel
spindle.
To prevent wheel and bearing damage, observe 5. Tighten the fork pinch bolts to 20 Nm.
absolute cleanliness and ensure there is no dirt
ingress to the wheel bearings while the wheel is
removed.
8. Thoroughly clean all components and inspect for

wear or damage.
1. Fork pinch bolts

6. Thoroughly clean and degrease the brake discs.
7. Fit the brake calipers (see page 14-18).

Tziumm
Wheels/Tyres
it Wheel Bearing 5. Using a suitable pin punch, through the centre of the
wheel, drift out the right hand wheel bearing. Collect
the centre sleeve. Remove the left hand wheel
bearing in the same way.
1. Remove the front wheel (See page 15-6).

2. Models with ABS brakes: Remove the ABS pulser
ring (See page 14-33).
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this

may damage the disc. Support the wheel on wooden
blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the
brake disc is raised above the ground.
3. Lay the wheel on its side while supporting the wheel

on wooden blocks to prevent damage to the brake
disc.
4. Remove and discard the seals and the bearing circlip. Wheel Bearing Removal
Inspection
Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using

a drift as use of a hammer and drift can cause bearings
to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could cause
eye and hand injuries if suitable protective apparel is not Only remove raised witness marks from within the
worn. wheel. Removal of material below any raised areas will
reduce the level of interference between the wheel and
the bearings. Loss of ; interference could cause the
bearing to become loose in the wheel leading to loss of
To prevent wheel damage and to aid bearing removal,
always apply force evenly on both sides of the bearing 1. Examine the wheel for any raised witness marks
to prevent it from 'tipping' and becoming stuck. caused by the removal process. Remove any such
Application of uneven force will lead to difficulty in marks with fine emery paper or a gentle file.
removing the bearing and to a damaged wheel.
Note:
• The right hand wheel bearing must be
removed first. The pin punch must be
located in the cut-outs provided in the
centre sleeve.
15.8
Service Manual - Tier
9 iu
Wheels/Tyres

the motorcycle.
Raise and support the rear of the motorcycle to allow

removal of the rear wheel.
Bearing insertion Support tool
tool
Left 3880070-10310 3880075-T0310
bearing Small face to Large face to wheel If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust
bearing system will be hot. Before working on or near the
Right 3880070-T0310 3880075-T0310 exhaust system, allow sufficient time for the exhaust
bearing Small face to Large face to wheel system to cool as touching any part of a hot exhaust
bearing system could cause burn injuries.
1. Fit the wheel bearings and centre sleeve using the

method described above.
Do not allow the caliper to hang on the brake hose as

this may damage the hose.
Damaged hoses could cause brake failure leading to loss
of control and an accident
2. Remove the brake caliper (see page 14-26) and tie

aside.
3. Remove the nut from the rear wheel spindle.
Tool 3880070 - T0301 in Position on Wheel

2. Fit a new circlip.
3. Lubricate and fit new seals to the front wheel.
Lubricate the seal's knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2
4. Models with ABS brakes: Refit the ABS pulser ring
(See page 14-33).
5. Fit the front wheel. (See page 15-7).
4. Support the wheel and withdraw the wheel spindle..
5. Noting its position, release the brake caliper carrier
from the slot on the swinging arm and roll the wheel
forward until the chain can be detached from the
rear sprocket.

uMP
Wheels/7yres-
6. Lift the rear wheel into position, aligning the wheel,

6. Withdraw the wheel and collect the flanged spacer
caliper carrier and swinging arm.
from the right hand side and the plain spacer from
the left hand side.
7. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive
sprocket uppermost.
8. If required, remove the final drive assembly (See Check that the spacers are still correctly positioned.
page 15-12). Incorrectly fi tted wheel spacers will cause a dangerous
9. If required, remove the brake disc (see page 14-28). riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control
and an accident.
Installation 7. Fit the wheel spindle, ensuring the right hand chain
adjuster block is installed, with the threaded end
1. If removed, refit the rear brake disc (see page 14- facing to the left.
29). 8. Fit the left hand chain adjuster block, washer and a
2. If removed, refit the final drive assembly (see page new nut
15-12). 9. Keeping the chain adjuster blocks in contact with the
3. Position the wheel within the swinging arm and refit adjuster bolts, tighten the wheel spindle nut to
the chain to the final drive sprocket. 110 Nm.
4. Position the rear brake caliper carrier to the swinging
arm as noted prior to removal. Align the boss on the
carrier with the raised slot on the swinging arm.

10. Refit the rear brake caliper (see page 14-28).
ce a
j ! — \\^ 11. Lower the motorcycle to the ground.
1. Swinging arm
2. Caliper car ri er
5. Refit the wheel spacers, flanged spacer to the right
hand side (flange facing outwards) and plain spacer
to the left. It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective
take remedial action before you a ttempt to ride the
Q0^ O^^QQ^QQ m motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may
0^ COQ reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle
0^ Op
12. Check the operation of the rear brake.

13. Check and, if necessa ry, adjust the chain (see page
12-6).
cdga 0)
1. Wheel spacer (right hand shown)

uMf
Wheels/Tyres
Rear W Bahgss Qnspec oon
1. Remove the rear wheel (see page 15-9).

Only remove raised witness marks from within the
2. Remove the final drive assembly (See page 15-12). wheel. Removal of material below any raised areas will
reduce the level of interference between the wheel and
the bearings. Loss of interference could cause the
:f a f ,7 t
<Yv
Sr
V y
'
A^ kA
'$' .:.>1.t ^:::\.;:. 0
C.
•3%"'t, } M t `Y: 13. '
'. , ,fC ti >:^ „ ^3'.
vl..•Y.:bx is .,i@:.,
..j' .. w is',r
,^1.
^!,',.` R
.Cr:': ^'ar .7^
`.Uf:ant; ^.
' ...b
'
2`
.i'
^"
r 'fi
•a • r'"
it`:
,1
i':^rc,•..'
P`• '
'.',î.?^",̀msF;$^..:"ts#^,t.n
".c:YNS%?S,x"
YM
,t S: o3 .
). ,,i C1
Y ,..^"::
>
,,: .:e
^1.. bearing
a 9 to become
b omelooseo ein theawheel
eel leading
ead9 tto loss of
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this motorcycle control and an accident.
blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the 1. Examine the wheel for any raised witness marks
brake disc is raised above the ground. caused by the removal process. Remove any such
marks with fine emery paper or a gentle file.
3. Place the wheel on wooden blocks to prevent
damage to the brake disc. Installation
4. Remove and discard the seals and the bearing circlip. Note:
• Refer to the chart below for the correct tool
and tool face when inserting bearings.
Bearings are inserted by means of a draw-
Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using bolt acting on the insertion tool. A support
a hammer and drift. Use of a hammer and drift can tool is located on the opposite side of the
cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented wheel to the insertion tool and as the bolt is
bearing could cause eye and soft tissue injuries if tightened, the bea ring is drawn into the
suitable protective apparel is not worn. wheel.
® Insert the bea rings with the marked or
b
M1,.^...
^" a `F'.^.^,.... ^Y. ^:J':: ;Sq i
q
:
a,.c.. .3s5
\a+.
<ti
.
:^,'
i
^.S ^ ';'ît`.: {:. o by {t 'i
3 :y)tl' ♦ to S` ^,rpt n s. shielded side facing outwards and always fit
'"SL
.'.,`
_ ,
a new bearing circlip and seals.
'+,.^' ;: ,
.
R.
r.:tf^
s¢,, < 4
'
` {., ^.
^ {.
...:h.i.k^.v`,^'...
^M }4y Dt}`}tF:i
l ">•:.
Y n .^
A•^
(' :}°v:.^'a.S'n}i::t^?: w^ :tip , ^"L^
t. :1:::>.h::Sn
^p .S ^`S
:.%'3,.
,f
y
^ Y4'
^
.i}" ..:tZ .. ... ^...f
^ ..
r
i
Y
( ,t Yl u ^^y
"f
^
^t
^S,yF
^q^ ^z
^>' `7.'i^ ..ry. ^^ ^'
To prevent wheel damage and to aid bearing removal, Bearing insertion Support tool
always apply force evenly on , both sides of the bearing tool
to prevent it from 'tipping' and becoming stuck. Left T3880053 3880075-T0301
Application of uneven force will lead to difficulty in bearing Large face to Large face to
removing the bearing and to a damaged wheel.
bearing Wheel
5. Using a suitable pin punch, through the centre of the Right T3880053 3880075-T0301
wheel, drift out the wheel bearings. Collect the bearing Large face to Large face to
centre sleeve. __________ bearing wheel
gaeo
Rear Wheel Bearing Removal
•
nW.!:!iH
Wheels/Tyres

the motorcycle.
1. Remove the rear wheel (see page 15-9).
:< d• {
: ., •i;^,,G.rv.,Y
....
C. ^^:^.>. 9. ^ti.,ai..k . .,^
a.`'^^rr. ?n^ • 2^f" ...
CE"f: :.'k ^?:•'<. t,., .4 ; :;'?. C: e ^.,L.o:•:R^..} ti, v,.}:s^..,•`...4,`.,;.::?.
:`:> ` :
r ,^ Na£6:
.,:1Y y`:^
1.Tool T3880053
?§."T'':^
':^wRi ,y
tiy
:., ":F•• n i 4. •n : ^r^ ..%: ;:dkt.+:.:.,".,,

. .r.:. w ..>. i,F..)..,^
i $Y :,.., ::.,..
.3x ..•...•:.•.:.......
:.::..,
^+ ^ ;
u^. s ^^
^ ti ':
..:Xk
^ L.^..
,e^ ,•^+, \:
.,^ :.^;..rrrY:1:. \.S^r.:
2. n
Fit a new circlip. Do ot allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this
3. Lubricate and fit. new seals to the rear wheel. blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the
Lubricate the seal's knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 brake disc is raised above the ground.
4. Refit the final drive assembly (see page 15-1,2). 2. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive
5. Fit the rear wheel (see page 15- 10) sprocket uppermost.
3. Gently lever the drive flange from the wheel hub.
1.Rear wheel
2. Drive flange

IUM^
Wheels/Tyres
4. Remove the cush drive rubbers.
ce /// / '. I
1. Cush drive
inspection
1. Check the cush drive rubbers for deterioration,

cracks etc.
2. Inspect the sprocket teeth for wear, damage and
chips.
3. Check the wheel and drive flange for wear, cracks
and damage.
Installation
1. Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel.

2. Refit the drive flange to the wheel.
3. Refit the rear wheel (see page 1S-9).

TR4Lqj3H
Wheels/Tyres

UM
h iiiitii
a II!
Exploded View - Frame 16.3

ExplodedView - Seat Rails ................................................................ . 16.4
ExplodedView - Cockpit and Mountings...................................................... 16.5
Vi w
Exploded e - Lower Fairings ........................................................... . 16.6
ExplodedView - Rear Panels, Mudguard and Seat............................................. 16.7
ExplodedView - Footrests and Mountings .................................................. . 16.8
Seat.................................................................................... 16.9
Removal......................................................................... . 16.9
Installation........................................................................ . 16.9
Frame, Footrests and Fixings .............................................................. . 16.9
Inspectiion........................................................................ . 16.9
RearPanel ............................................................................. 16.10
Removal......................................................................... . 16.10
Installation....:................................................................... . 16.10
SidePanels ............................................................................ . 16.10
Removal......................................................................... . 16.14
Installation........................................................................ . 16.10
FairingInfill Panels ...................................................................... . 16.11
Removal ......................................................................... . 16.11
Installation........................................................................ . 16.11
FaciaInfill Panels ........................................................................ 16.12
Removal.......................................................................... 16.12
Installation........................................................................ . 16.12
SideFairings ........................................................................... . 16.13
Removal......................................................................... . 16.13
Installation........................................................................ . 16.13
Windscreen 16.14
Removal ......................................................................... . 16.14
Installation........................................................................ . 16.14
Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.14
Removal......................................................................... . 16.14
Installation....................................................:.................... 16.15

TWUMEH
RearMudguard ...........................:............................................. 16.15
Removal.......................................................................... 16.15
Installation......................................... . ..0.................,......... 16.16
Front Mudguard ........................................................................ 16.16
Removal.......................................................................... 16.16
Installation........................................................................ 16.16
BellyPan ............................................................................... 16.17
Removal. . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . • .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.17
Installation........................................................................ 16.17

uMr
ir.iriim I : . kv v ,]j
All engine mounting fixings - see text in section 9
6Nm
^^^ IIIIIIIIÎ
TRjumw Service Manual - Tiger • 1603

- r
64 Nm
48 Nm
48 Nm

tUM^
Li:ij i iii, I Y o]j
25 Nm
1.5Nm
1.5 Nm
Nm
3Nm
3Nm
30 Nm

IDUUMEM
imiiim=i ;s' i.iifl
a;i-' • S
All fixings 3 Nm

IUMp
6Nm
6Nm
!11
6Nm
6 Nm
i Nm
uM Service Manual - Tiger 16.7

Liiiiii im I;: e €ifl
Tiii Ii'
Q p4 ,
27 Nm
4 Nm
IW
1:1
riJ
c'\
/9Nm
7Nm
7Nm
\LL7 \
--'`' 4Nm
9 Nm
7 Nm ,
c /! '1/!
' 9Nm
9Nm 4Nm

i1M
' 1 i . 1
skYkfk.]iij
The seat lock is located on the left hand side of the battery
1. Inspect the frame, footrests and fairings for damage,
tray,. in line with the footrest mounting.
cracks, chafing and other dangerous conditions.
Check fairing and frame fixings for security.
1. Insert the ignition key into the seat lock and turn it
anti-clockwise while pressing down on the rear of the 2. Inspect the bank angle indicators on the rider's
seat. This will release the seat from its lock and allow footrests for wear. The bank angle indicators are
it to be slid rearwards for complete removal from the worn out when 10 mm of the bank indicator
motorcycle. remains.
1. Bank angle indicator

1. Seat lock
Installation
Use of a motorcycle with bank angle indicators worn
1. Position the seat to the upper fuel tank bracket and beyond the maximum limit will allow the motorcycle to
engage the top lip. be banked to an unsafe angle.
2. Ensure the seat's centre hooks slide under the frame Banking to an unsafe angle may cause instability, loss of
bridge and press down on the rear of the seat to control and an accident causing injury or death.
engage in the seat lock.
3. Grasp the seat and ensure that it is securely retained.
Note:
• An audible 'click' can be heard when the If the motorcycle is involved in an accident or collision it
seat is correctly engaged in the lock. must be taken to an authorised Triumph dealer for
repair or inspection.
Any accident can cause damage to the motorcycle
which, if not correctly repaired, may cause another
accident which may result in injury or death.

Numm
E*i1tL iitk I T'AL.ri
Rear P
Removal Removal
Note:
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. • Follow the same procedure for both left and
right hand sides.
3. Remove the side panels (See page 16-10).
4. Remove the grab handles. 1. Remove the seat (see page 16:9).
3. Remove the two fixings securing the side panel to
the fuel tank.
4. Remove the fixing securing the side panel to the rear
panel.
1.Grab handles
2. Fixings
5. To release the rear panel assembly, remove the
fixings shown in the illustration below.
1.Side panel
2. Fixings
5. Remove the side panel.
Installation
1. Installation is the reverse of removal noting the

following:
Note:
• lighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
• Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead
1. Rear panel fixings first
6. Gently pull the panel outwards.
7. Withdraw the panel assembly from the rear of the
motorcycle.
Installation

following:
Note:
• Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
first.
1 6.1 0 Service Manual - Tiger •

UMP
FLIgQ lPaIs 4. Install the rear fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
Removal
Rote:
® Follow the same procedure for both left and
right hand sides.

3. Remove the three fixings securing the infill panel to
the cockpit and detach the panel.
1.Fairing infill panel

2. Rear fixing
5. Align upper edge of the infill panel to the lower edge
of the cockpit and install the centre fixing. Tighten to
3Nm.
1. Fairing infill panel

2. Fixings
4. Disconnect the turn indicator electrical connectors.
5. Remove the fairing infill panel.
Installation
1. Fairing infill panel
1. Align the fairing infill panel to the cockpit and side
2. Centre fixing
fairing.
3. Cockpit
2. Connect the turn indicator electrical connectors.
3. Position the fairing infill panel to the cockpit,
ensuring the lip on the upper edge of the infill panel
hooks under the lower edge of the cockpit.
Note:
To ensure correct fitment of the fairing infill
panel, the following installation sequence
must be adhered to:

Twumem
L tjiit: ]iis I iii.ii
6. Adjust the position of the side fairing, so that the gap F d I f ilkPanels
between the side fairing and the infill panel is even
along the panel's length, and install the front fixing.
While maintaining the alignment, tighten the fixing Removal
to 3 Urn.
Note:
• Follow the same procedure for both left and
right hand sides.

3 0 1 ® 2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
3. Remove the fairing infill panel (see page 16-9).
0 4. Remove the screw securing the facia infill panel to
/ the cockpit.
5. To remove the facia infill panel pull to the rear to
extract the bayonets from the grommets in the
2
cockpit.
n om' r \ _ \\\
1. Infill panel
2. Side fairing
3. Front fixing
} 1. Infill panel
2. Bayonets
3. Grommets
6. Remove the panel.
Installation

following:
Note:
• Tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
first.

uM
N tiiiri-iii' AL']LI1
Sidi Fairings Installation
1. Position the side fairing to the motorcycle, ensuring

Removal the is panel is located behind the lower hook on the
Note:
radiator.
2. Refit the side fairing to the fuel tank, tightening the
® The cockpit does NOT need to be removed fixings to 3 Nm.
in order to remove the side fairings.
3. Refit the side fairing to the facia infill panel,
® Follow the same procedure for both left and
tightening the fixing to 3 Nm.
right hand sides.
4. Refit the radiator infill panels, tightening the fixings
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). to 3 Nm.
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. 5. Refit the fairing infill panel (see page 16-11)
3. Remove the fairing infill panel for the fairing side to 6. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first.
be removed (see page 16-11). 7 Refit the seat (see page 16-9).
4. Remove the two screws securing the radiator infill
panel to the radiator and remove the panel.
1. Radiator infill panel

2. Fixings
5. Remove the screw securing the side fairing to the
cockpit infill panel.
6. Remove the two screws securing the fairing to the
fuel tank.
1. Side fairing (right hand shown) .

2. Side fairing retaining screws
7. Ease the side fairing forwards to release it from the
securing hook on the radiator
..
IP Service Manual -Tiger :V 16.13
Litr imI;]=.'&x.ii
1?{ }I r
Removal
Note:
• The cockpit is removed as an assembly. It is
not necessary to remove the side fairings,
instruments, windscreen or headlight unit.
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9)

3. Remove the facia and fairing infill panels (see page
16-11).
4. Remove the two lower screws securing the cockpit to
the headlight assembly.
1. Windscreen
2. Fixings
1. Release the six windscreen fixings.

2. Remove the windscreen.
Installation
Installation is the reverse of removal noting the following.
Note:
• Tighten the fixings to 1.5 Nm.
1. Cockpit
2. Headlight
3. Cockpit lower screws
5. Remove the two upper screws securing the cockpit
to the headlight assembly.
1. Cockpit
2. Cockpit upper screws
6. Remove the cockpit in a forward direction.

uMf
instanation Rear Mudguard
1. Position the cockpit locating stud to the headlight
grommet. Removal
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9)

4. Remove the licence plate.
5. Remove the lower mudguard fixings, located behind
the licence plate.
oo
1. Cockpit
2. Cockpit locating stud
3. Headlight grommet
2. Refit the cockpit to the headlight, tightening the
fixings to 3 m.
3. Refit the facia and fairing infill panels (see page 16-
I 1).
cedm
4. Connect the battery, positive (red) lead first. 1. Lower rear mudguard fixings
5. Refit the seat (see page 16-9). 6. Remove the fixings securing the rear panel bracket
and remove the bracket.
1.Rear panel bracket

2. Fixings

TRJUMEM
Frame and Bodywork
7. Remove the upper mudguard fixings and detach the

mudguard.
Removal
1. Detach the front brake hoses from the two retaining

clips on the front mudguard.
2. Remove the four fixings securing the front
mudguard to the front forks.
3. Remove the front mudguard.
E!
1. Lower rear mudguard fixings
8. Noting their positions, disconnect the indicator and
licence plate lamp electrical connections.
cecy
1. Front mudguard
2. Fixings
3. Brake hose retaining clips
Installation
Installation is the reverse of removal noting the following:

Note:
1. Licence plate lamp connector • Tighten the mudguard fixings to 3 Nm.

2. Right hand indicator connectors
3. Left hand indicator connectors
9. Remove the rear mudguard.
Installation
Note:
• Connect the indicator and licence plate
electrical connectors as noted during
removal.
• Tighten the rear mudguard fixings to 6 Nm.
• Tighten the rear panel bracket fixings to
9Nm.
first.

IUM^
' oIyFan Installation

Removal Note:
0
1. Remove the four fixings securing the belly pan to the Tighten the belly pan fixings to 3 Nm.
mounting brackets.
2. Remove the belly pan.
1
rahc
1. Belly pan
2. Fixings (right hand shown)

INJUMEM
Frame and Bodywork ___

17 Electrical
ExplodedView - Instruments ............................................................... 17.3

ExplodedView - Starter Motor & Alternator .................................................. 17.4
View
Exploded - Headlight ................................................................ 17.5
ExplodedView - Rear Light and Indicators ................................................... 17.6
Battery.... .............................................................................. 17.7
BatteryRemoval ..................................................................... 17.7
BatteryRefit ........................................................................ 17.7
BatteryCommissioning and Charging ........................................................ 17.8
NewBattery ......................................................................... 17.8
BatteryMaintenance ..............................:.................................. 17.8
Battery Already in Service ..... 17.8
Tableof Battery Charging Ti mes ....................................................... 17.9
........................................................
Fuses................................................................................... 17.9
FuseIdentification ................................................................... 17.9
s
ABS(Anti-lock Brake System) fusebox .................................................. 17.9
RelayPack .............................................................................. 17.10
Identificationof Relays .............................................................. 17.10
HeadlightAdjustment ..................................................................... 17.10
HeadlightBulb Replacement .....:................................................... 17.11
FrontPosition Light ................................................................. 17.12
HeadlightAssembly Removal ............................................................... 17.12
Removal.......................................................................... 17.12
Installation......................................................................... 17.13
RearLight ............................................................................... 17.13
Removal .......................................................................... 17.13
Installation......................................................................... 17.14
IndicatorBulb Replacement ................................................................ 17.14
NumberPlate Light Bulb .................................................................. 17.14
Alternator ............................................................................... 17.15
Removal......... .................................................................. 17.15
Assembly.......................................................................... 17.15
AlternatorRectifier ....................................................................... 17.16

UMW
StarterMotor ............................................................................ 17.16
Removal.......................................................................... 17.16
Inspection......................................................................... 17.16
-
installation ........................................................................ 17.16
InstrumentPack ......................................................................... 17.17
Removal........................................................................... 17.17
Installation........................................................................ 17.17
Lighting Circuit Diagram .................................................................. 17.18

circuit diagram ...............................................................
Keyto 17.18
Keyto wiring colours ................................................................ 17.18
Starting/charging Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 17.20
Keyto circuit diagram ............................................................... 17.20
Auxiliaryand Accessory Circuit ............................................................ 17.22
circuit diagram ...............................................................
Keyto 17.22
Main Wiring Circuit Diagram - Models without ABS Brakes .................................... 17.24
Keyto circuit diagram ............................................................... 17.24
Key to wiring colours ................................................................ 17.24
MainWiring Circuit Diagram - Models with ABS Brakes ....................................... 17.26
Key to circuit diagram ............................................................... 17.26
17.2 Service Manual - Tiger UMt

Electrical

Twumpj4
Electrical
10 Nm
l^J
17.4 Service Manual - Tiger UMp

1r ! 1Yi VAT :
^^Lllll
ro.
7
3Nm

TR!!M^p
Electrical
rr
(C ^rrrrrrr^
, ,1 ^
4Nm
1!
3Nm
1.5 Nm
0
'^J
3Nm
17.6
uM
L 1
a LUy BatteryRemoval.
The battery gives off explosive gases; keep sparks, Ensure that the battery terminals do not touch the
flames and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation motorcycle frame as this may cause a short circuit or
when charging or using the battery in an enclosed spark, which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of
space. personal injury.
The battery contains sulphuric acid (electrolyte). Contact
with skin or eyes may cause severe burns. Wear 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
protective clothing and a face shield. 2. Disconnect the battery leads, negative (black) lead
• If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with first.
water immediately. 3. Take the battery out of the case.
• If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with
water for at least 15 minutes and SEEK
MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.
• If electrolyte is swallowed, drink large
quantities of water and SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.
KEEP ELECTROLYTE OUT OF THE REACH OF
CHILDREN.
The battery contains harmful materials. Always keep

children away from the battery whether or not it is fitted 1.Battery
in the motorcycle. 2. Negative (-) terminal
Do not jump start the battery, touch the battery cables 3. Positive (+) terminal
together or reverse the polarity of the cables as any of
these actions may cause a spark which would ignite
battery gasses causing a risk of personal injury. Battery Refit
Ensure that the battery terminals do not touch the

The battery electrolyte is corrosive and poisonous. Never motorcycle frame as this may cause a short circuit or
swallow battery electrolyte or allow to come into contact spark which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of
with the skin. Always wear eye and skin protection when personal injury.
adjusting the electrolyte level.
1. Place the battery in the battery case.
3. Apply a light coat of grease to the terminals to
prevent corrosion.
4. Cover the positive terminal with the protective cap.

71tiumpli
Electrical
11. After charging is complete, press down firmly with

both hands to seat the caps (do not use tools or force
[ ;U!]JjJ
the caps into position).
12. Disconnect the charger and allow the battery to
stand for 1 hour before fitting to the motorcycle.
In order to correctly and safely commission a new battery, 13. Fit the battery to the motorcycle, positive (red) lead
the battery commissioning procedure listed below must first.
be carefully followed. This is the only battery
commissioning procedure that Triumph recommends. Battery Maintenance
The procedure is designed to ensure that the battery is at
its best when fitted to the motorcycle, and will provide the The battery is a sealed type and does not require any
best possible performance and reliability. maintenance other than routine recharging such as
during storage.
Failure to comply with this procedure may lead to reduced
battery performance and/or shorten the life of the battery. It is not possible to adjust the electrolyte level in the
battery.
Battery Already in Service

Use the guidelines in the table on the following page for
The electrolyte solution is SULPHURIC ACID. Ensure
charging. Always verify the ` battery condition before
that you read all the warnings supplied with the battery charging, and 30 minutes after charging.
and are familiar with the necessary safety precautions
and remedial actions should a spillage or contamination Note:
occur. ® A fully charged battery should read 12.8
1. Read the instructions and warnings delivered with volts or higher after the battery has been off
the battery. the charger for 30 minutes or more.
2. Place the battery on a flat level surface and remove
the sealing foil.
3. Remove the battery sealing strip from the electrolyte
container (if applicable) and save for later in this
procedure. Do not break the seal on the electrolyte
container.
4. Place the electrolyte container and adapter (if
applicable) on the battery and fill the battery
according to the manufacturers instructions.
5 After starting to fill the battery with electrolyte, allow
the battery to stand for 30 minutes with the filling
container in place.
b. Check that all of the electrolyte has drained from the
container. Do not remove the container at this point.
If the container has not completely drained, tap the
sides of the container to start the electrolyte flowing
again.
7. After the electrolyte has drained into the battery,
allow the battery to stand with the electrolyte
container in place for a further 30 minutes for
batteries 3Ah - 12Ah or 1 hour for batteries greater
than 12Ah.
8. Remove the electrolyte container and adapter
carefully, and dispose of immediately.
9. Place the sealing cap strip LOOSELY over the filling
holes of the battery.
10. Charge the battery using the BatteryMate 150-9.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
BatteryMate 150-9.
17.8 Service Manual - Tiger UMM

Electrical
Table of Battery Charging Tomes

State of charge Voltage Action Charge time (using
BatteryMate 150-9)
100% 12.8V - 13.OV None. Check at 6 None required
months from date of
manufacture
75% -100% 12.5V - 12.8V May need slight charge. 3 - 6 hours
If no charge given,
check in 3 - 4 months
50% - 75% 12.OV - 12.5V Needs charge 5 -11 hours
25% - 50% V 11.5V - 12.OV Needs charge at least 13 hours
0% - 25% 11.5V or less Needs recovery using 20 hours
BatteryMate 150-9. Re-
test after recovery
the main fuses and should be replaced if used.
1 2
The fuse box is located beneath the seat.
To allow access to the fuse box, the seat must be
removed.
A blown .fuse is indicated when all of the systems
protected by that fuse become inoperative. When
checking for a blown fuse, use the table below to establish
which fuse has blown.
Fuse Identification
1. Fuse box
Circuit Protected Position Rating 2. Fuse box cover
(Amps) 3. Spare fuses
Dip and main beam headlights, 1 15
starter relay ABS (Anti - lock Brake System) fusebox
Ignition switch, starter circuit 2 10 Models equipped with ABS have an additional fusebox
Accessory socket, GPS (Global 3 10 located under the seat, at the forward edge of the
Positioning System), heated underseas storage box.
grips
Indicators, alarm, horn, auxiliary 4 10
lights
0
2
Cooling fan 5 15
Engine management system 6 20
Note: n ^
• The starter solenoid has an additional 30
Amp fuse, attached directly to the solenoid,
beneath the seat.
The fuse identification numbers listed in the table
correspond with those printed on the fuse box cover, as
shown below. Spare fuses are located at right angles to 1. ABS fuse box
2. Main fuse box
Service Manual - Ti er 17.4

T;tL!!j3FI 9
The fuel pump relay is located under the seat, adjacent to
the diagnostic connector.
1. Fuel pump relay
0
0 1 1
1.Engine Management System (EMS) relay

2. Cooling fan relay
3. Starter relay
The indicator relay is located inside the cockpit, attached
to a blade on the right hand side of the headlight.
1. Indicator Relay
17.1 0 Service Manual - .Tiger

Electrical
êa d 0 kht Q¢III^S eit Headlight Bulb Replaceme nt

The headlights can be adjusted by means of vertical and
horizontal adjustment screws located on the rear of each
headlight.
The bulb becomes hot during use. Always allow
sufficient time for the bulb to cool before handling.
4 5 1 ' Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb. If the glass is
touched or gets dirty, clean with alcohol before re-use.
Note:
• It is not necessary to remove the headlights
when bulb replacement becomes necessary.
Right Hand Side
0 4
csdg
Honzontal adjustment screw (right hand)

Horizontal
2. Vertical adjustment screw (right hand)
3. Vertical adjustment screw ®eft hand)
4. Horizontal adjustment screw (left hand)
5. Pivot screws (DO NOT adjust these screws)
Note
® If the horizontal headlight aim is to be
adjusted, remove the cockpit infill panels to
gain access to the adjustment screws.
cean
1. Headlight unit
2. Bulb : and bulb retainer
Do not adjust the pivot screws as this may cause the 3. Multi-plug
headlight reflector/projector to become detached from
the pivot screw, leading to irreparable damage to the 1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9).
headlight.
• Switch on the headlight to be adjusted. 3. Remove the four screws and remove the right hand
bulb cover.
• Turn the vertical adjustment screws on each
headlight clockwise to lower the beam or anti- 4. Disconnect the multi-plug. from the bulb retainer.
clockwise to raise the beam. 5. Remove the bulb and bulb retainer from the
headlight assembly by rotating it clockwise.
• On the right hand headlight turn the horizontal
adjustment screw clockwise to move the beam 6. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
to the right or anti-clockwise to move the beam
to the left.
• On the left hand headlight turn the horizontal
adjustment screw clockwise to move the beam
to the left or anti-clockwise to move the beam
to the right.
• Switch the headlights off when the beam
settings are satisfactory.
Se rvice Manual - Tiger 1711

TWU .M
Electrical
Iu I .- Front Position Light
c ed i 1
4
1. Posi ti on lamp bulb (left hand)
1. Headlight unit 2. Position lamp bulb (right hand)
2. Bulb
3. Multi-plug Bulb Replacement
4. Wire retainer
• The position lamps are fitted to the left and
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9). right of each headlight.
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. • To replace a bulb, remove the cockpit infill
3. Remove the four screws and remove the left hand panel for the bulb to be replaced, detach the
bulb cover. rubber retainer from the headlight and pull out
the bulb.
4. Disconnect the multi-plug from the bulb.
5. Detach the wire retainer from its clip (do not remove • Installation is the reverse of the removal
the screw) then remove the bulb from the headlight procedure.
unit.
6. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
•
Y :;
;'\.f....f.
2k5 ' ,^ `^^sx \,,,<r :• 3 ^},{.:} ., .?}'•+^ti+
...JC.'ri•
` .,. "J^v::n,,,\
. >..:,^:. "lss#},:"
u'•J;:"^"ii:{•'..:.:,..
:}.
:::v!:t•!:f#'.y ^,
n,^"t':.:.): t :.. "::i•'
;•Y;' :.:s"'<tf<S:
i^,'•..v..y..
'•St.C.'.R'ifi
:
,y,^ 'e\` \fiS^
C` 'Xi^„ } ^(
:.n:..+.Z..>\t>.
^^,,;SY
.r^'.n^'3'a^. tf^Yr'y^c : v :•i^.:' b ^ :c..

..?:.
^:4,
?X'3 n} .
..vt ..},
^':ty;•.f,;:\ j<`^1.. i. ;;r• •;:}>:h:,..4 \.
';.Y)Ya :., :•`.^C \. :..t1
:';^<.. :` ^
?.;,3.. .inr^•.^,;. ^+y;
•: '!.,
,;,,'}':,.^^,,,:;
• } }'S^`
;J; •,,t
..^..:::; :+o».}^,...
^... ::. Y•^„i;<r. x\
..
'u ' is .,. >Sr<z

.»1^3p ::}: ,rf;t,
Acauti^ri } :....^^4
^••':;•:: ^;; ^+ {{£:'s \ ;<.
F Sn ": $.i:if%.
:
.
: .}\.tr :.
+'ct.::•:},^;"'s::::rtt.:::
,...,..t.....c e'`.^•.J:. a.H, .;,t?A.. .;,.F.ro. . . ;y°l:. r. :,.;. : : +.:i}. "^.:.`}'.:' F.;' ` .;::'^5 ,.:^"r. `:
. ,
^g'ifi^.^{1h
. .............
..;
n.M.:vt{. .......2f
:: ;>,,3}^;t}^c:a;r..
13,....r+..,.n...:
;::
ti. '• :. { .}Y
,3.^''•.?Si'Ck;•.61SO'.:
.. .
`^S ^
.'\;:kY,k.:
.....,, ... ?^,.ii'? ..r .......:.....,?
,
.,..iif^,•i..
w...f.:. '+.fi}7 :.,.r;
,
i3 xA!.,..
: ,^''t3;,:\^:?nu<.
,;:^ i
`Lt.,..,.. i., 3.. ;?., .4.;. S. ..l^:Y^:.r`,h^
FG}^'..3.Â:.S..:<^: FR3,"'•.:L:{:Hd^, .. . ."
When reconnecting the battery, connect the positive

(red) lead first.
Do not reconnect the battery until the assembly process

has been completed. Premature battery reconnection
could result in ignition of the battery gases causing risk
of injury.
1 7.1 2 Service Manual - Tiger uM!'

6. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the
headlight

3. Remove the cockpit (see page 16-14).
4. Detach the indicator relay from the blade on the
headlight.
1. Headlight assembly
2. Electrical connector
Installation
1. Position the headlight to the motorcycle and connect

the electrical connector.
2. Position the headlight to the subframe ensuring the
1. Indicator Relay following:
2. Relay mounting blade
• The indicator relay is positioned above the
5. Remove the four fixings from the headlight assembly headlight adjacent to its blade.
and detach the headlight from the subframe.
• The headlight electrical connector is located
inside the cockpit subframe and the wiring is
not trapped between the headlight and
subframe.
• The heated grip and GPS (Global Positioning
System) accessory electrical connectors are
located above the headlight and not trapped
between the headlight and the subframe.
3. Refit the headlight fixings and tighten to 3.5 Nm.
4. Refit the indicator relay to the tang on the headlight.
5. Refit the cockpit (see page 1615).
CE 7 Refit the seat (see page 16-9).
1.Headlight assembly 8. Check the headlight adjustment (see page 17-11).
2. Fixings (left hand shown)

TWUMEH
Electrical
Rear Lighit 6. Release the three fixings securing the rear light unit
to the rear mudguard.
Note:
® The rear light is a sealed for life LED unit
and must be replaced in the event of a
failure.
Removal

4. Release the two fixings securing the seat lock
mechanism to the subframe and detach the seat lock
mechanism.
2. Fixings
7. Release the light from the rear mudguard and
remove the assembly upwards.
Installation
1. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure,

noting the following:
Note:
• Tighten the rear light fixings to 4 Nm.
• Tighten the rear panel bracket fixings to
9Nm.
1.Seat lock mechanism • Connect the battery positive (red) lead first.
2. Fixings
5. Disconnect the wiring harness.

9 er UMP

r iri
Number Rate Light Bulb
2 Bulb Replacement

2. Disconnect the ba ttery, negative (black) lead first.
3. Remove the licence plate.
Do not pull the rear mudguard more than is necessa ry

? <' to access the licence plate light's inside fixing nut.
4 `L < <
^` ^< < Damage to the rear mudguard will result from bending
the mudguard too far.
I. Indicator lens 4. Remove the two lower rear mudguard fixings.
2• Lens screw Gently pull the mudguard rearwards to allow access
The lens on each indicator light is held in place by a to the licence plate light retaining nu t.
securing screw located in the body of the light. 5. Counter-hold the nut to prevent it from turning and
remove the licence plate light fixing screw Collect
1. Release the screw and remove the lens to gain the nut from the mudguar d .
access to the bulb for replacement.
2. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. '
(4J
// r . `
cedm
1. Lower rear mudguard fixings
2. Licence plate light fixing screw
6. Detach the licence plate light from the rear
mudguard.
u M Se rvice Manual -Tiger 17.15

Electrical
o
cedn
1. Licence plate light ccyo

2. Bulb holder I. Left hand engine cover
8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure, 4. Remove the cover.
noting the following: 5. Withdraw the cover from the crankcase against the
Note: pull of the alternator magnet.
6. To remove the stator from the cover, release the
Tighten
g the licencep
plate lamp 9 to
p fixing three bolts in the centre of the cover and release the
3 Nm.
bolt securing the cable bracket.
Tighten the lower rear mudguard fixings to
6 Nm.
® Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead
first ,1 ^1
1. Stator
2. Stator bolts
3. Cable bracket
4. Cable bracket bolt
7. Withdraw the stator.

8. To remove the rotor, prevent the crankshaft from Assembly
rotating using tool T3880375, and remove the
centre bolt from the left hand end of the crankshaft. 1. Assemble the rotor to the keyway on the crankshaft.
2. Refit tool T3880375 to prevent the crankshaft from
rotating.
3. Tighten the rotor retaining bolt to 105 Nm.
1. Rotor
2. Tool T3880375
9. With the rotor bolt removed, insert tool T3880203
to the centre of the alternator.
1.Rotor
10. Tighten tool T3880203, while preventing the
2. Tool T3880375
crankshaft from turning with tool T3880375, to
release the taper seating of the rotor from the 4. Remove tool T3880375.
crankshaft. 5. Locate the stator to the engine cover.
b. Apply silcone sealer to the cable grommet and align
the cable to the exit slot.
7 Fit the cable retainer bracket and tighten the retainer
bolt to 12 Nm.
8. Tighten the stator bolts to 12 Nm.
9. Refit the left hand engine cover incorporating a new
gasket. Tighten the cover fixings to 9 Nm.
1. Rotor
2. Tool T3880375
3. Tool T3880203
11. Withdraw the rotor and tool as an assembly and then
separate the tool from the rotor.

TRJUMM
Electrical
Starter M t r. Inspection
1. Ensure the motor turns freely and without binding.

Removal 2. Check the starter 0-ring for damage and
deterioration. Replace as necessary.
Installation
3. Remove the fuel tank (see page 10 10-99).
4. Remove the low oil pressure warning light switch 1. Fit the starter motor to the right hand engine cover
(see page 8- 11). ensuring that the 0-ring does not become damaged
5. Ease the boot from the starter lead and then release during installation.
the lead nut. 2. Fit the starter motor bolts, then, whilst holding the
6. - Detach the lead. starter motor firmly in position against the engine
7. Release the bolts securing rin the starter to the cover, tighten the starter motor bolts to 10 Nm.
crankcase.
I/I
ka kk
`^ 11 // ''"'' /1 t Starter Motor Installation
1. Starter motor
3. Refit the lead and secure with the nut. Tighten to
2 . Bolts
7Nm.
8. Ease the starter motor from'the right hand engine
cover while gently moving the camshaft oil feed pipe 4. Refit the boot.
out of the way. 5. Refit the low oil pressure warning light switch (see
page 8-11).
7 Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first.
1 7.1 8 . Service Manual - Tiger T uM H

L r- i
I tEr t Pack Installation
1. Position the instrument pack to the cockpit subframe

Removal and locate on the bayonet and grommet fixings.
2. Refit the fixing securing the instrument pack to the
1. Remove the seat (see page 16-9), cockpit subframe and tighten to 3 Nm.
2. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first. 3. Reconnect the electrical connector to the instrument
3. Remove the cockpit (see page 16-14). pack and refit the covering boot.
4. Detach the covering boot and disconnect the 4. Refit the cockpit (see page 16-15).
electrical connector from the instrument pack. 5. Reconnect the positive(red) lead first.
ositive
5. Release the fixing securing the instrument pack to 6. Refit the seat (seepage 16-9).
the cockpit subframe. g
J
Alternator Rectifier
Note:
• The alternator rectifier is located on the left
hand side of the frame, above the gearbox.
The rectifier does not contain any
serviceable parts and must be replaced if
faulty.
1.Instrument pack
2. Instrument pack connector
3. Instrument pack fixing
6. Ease the instrument pack away from the bayonet
and grommet fixings and remove the instrument
pack.

11t!:!!!?Ît
Electrical
Circuit Dig r
Lighting
Key to circuit diagram Key to wiring colours
Key Item Description Key Wiring Colour

1 Fuse Box (Fuses 1 and 4) B Black
2 Ignition Switch U Blue
3 Direction Indication Unit N Brown
4 Starter Relay G Green
5 Tail Light S Slate/Grey
6 Number Plate Light 0 Orange
7 Left-hand Switch Cube Assembly K Pink
8 Main I Dip Beam Switch R Red
9 Pass Switch P Purple
10 Instrument Assembly W White
11 Oil Pressure Switch Y Yellow
12 Oil Pressure Warning Light LG Light Green
13 Main Beam Warning Light LU Light Blue
14 Headlight Assembly
17.20 Service Manual - Tiger lUM

Electrical.
I I
I I
1
4 I 2
! I
i i
IQ P
4 0
0 6
a I.,
1 UY-^
4
4 6
8
5
UA

71kIUMBH
Electrical
Starft & 1dharq!.nq Circu!t Diagram
Key to circuit diagram Key t® wiring colours
Key Item Description Key Wiring Colour

1 Battery B Black
2 Starter Solenoid U Blue
3 Starter Motor N Brown
4 Regulator/rectifier G Green
5 Starter Relay S Slate / Grey
6 Ignition Switch 0 Orange
7 Fuse Box K Pink
8 Cooling Fan Relay R Red
9 Engine Control Module Relay P Purple
10 Engine Control Module w White
11 Instrument Assembly Y Yellow
12 Engine Kill Switch LG Light Green
13 Starter Switch LU Light Blue
14 Alarm
15 Fuel Pump Relay

Electrical
1 2
2 5 3
m m m m
U
u P Service Manual - Tiger 17.23

Mectrical
Ats^^6ia y and Accessary Corcao t Key to ing colours
(ey to circuit diagram Key Wiring Colour

B Black
Key Item Description U Blue
1 Fuse Box (Fuses 3 & 4) N Brown
2 Accesso ry Heated Handlebar Grips G Green
3 Accesso ry Satellite Navigation system S Slate / Grey
4 Accesso ry Socket 0 Orange
5 . Ignition Switch K Pink
6 Indicator Relay R Red
7 Front Brake Light Switch P Purple
8 Horn Switch W White
9 Direction Indicator Switch Y Yellow
10 Horn LG Light Green
11 Rear brake light switch LU Light Blue
12 Brake light
13 Instrument Assembly
14 Diagnostic connector
15 Direction indicator (Instruments)
16 Alarm LED
17 Front right direction Indicator
18 Front left direction Indicator
19 Alarm unit
20 Rear right direction indicator
21 Rear left direction indicator

IUMr
Electrical

TL!: H
Electrical
Main Wiring Circuit Diagram - Models with ABS Brakes
Key to circuit diagram 43 Rectifier I Regulator

44 Alternator
Key Item Description
45 Fuse Box
1 Instrument Assembly
46 Ignition Switch
2 Vehicle Speed Sensor
47 Accessory Socket
3 Front Brake Lever Switch
48 Satellite Navigation Connector (Accessory)
4 Engine Kill Switch
49 Heated Handlebar Grips Connector (Accessory)
5 Starter Button
50 Fuel Pump
6 Engine Control Module
51 Direction Indicator Unit
7 Lambda Sensor
52 Clutch Lever Switch
8 Fuel Injector 1
53 Horn Button
9 Fuel Injector 2
54 Direction Indicator Switch
10 Fuel Injector 3
55 Headlamp Dip Switch
11 Exhaust Air Injection Solenoid
56 Oil Pressure Switch
12 Fall Detection Switch
57 LH Front Indicator
13 Inlet Air Temperature Sensor
58 Position Light
59 Headlight
15 Throttle Potentiometer
60 Horn
16 Ambient Pressure Sensor
61 RH Front Indicator
17 MAP Sensor
62 Fuel Pump Relay
18 Engine Management Relay
63 ABS Modulator
19 Fuel Level Sender
64 ABS Fuse Box
20 Neutral Switch
65 Front Wheel Speed Sensor
66 Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
22 Cooling Fan
23 330 ohm resistor
Key to wiring colours
24 Purge Valve
25 Ignition Coil 1
Key Wiring Colour
26 Ignition Coil 2
B Black
27 Ignition Coil 3
U Blue
28 Side stand Switch
N Brown
29 Engine Earth
G Green
30 Crankshaft Sensor
S Slate / Grey
31 Idle Speed Control Actuator
0 Orange
32 Diagnostic Connector
K Pink
33 Rear Brake Lever Switch
R Red
34 RH Rear Indicator
P Purple
35 Rear Light
W White
36 Number Plate Light
Y Yellow
37 LH Rear Indicator
LG Light Green
38 Alarm Connector (Accessory)
LU Light Blue
39 Starter Motor
40 Starter Solenoid
41 Battery
42 Starter Relay
17.28 Service Manual - Tiner Tln111aanu
1
•
I^ cv
•
101 101 10► ^=1 a,...„.....,a....a ..
C M
III III III II^
U S N
-e ti
oaM ^ Q
u '
u ' u u ' u .^.^' N l
81" z
_ I -_____ LrJTl
r
d'
-^^ aM 9
- aM 9
^^Ânwe l
e^
: I :
: IEiiiiiii
tnn l. n AIL
. I HI !: I .
IF
r -
'a
IÌ I
,raa 9 gM r t
d 11 !I
A 8 9M
f18 I
'0 z n j
I
N L M '
r^^ •An, 7
^ N .
5 A
U I
U
1111_ill- LIiUL __
I I ^^ I^11n 19
III
'!"
s: 1^ _
I ^ I ^ I II.I flU ii -
:: .
i:1u ih
. I .
i um E
I
11111 11
L
I " -
RI _____ I
I ^
IN
Li II
•
• U II _-
I H.
.i ^. ^ E i• A^ nss
It 9
LO
i^
lt -1
N M9 Z
^. â0 l _A9
m¢ D m cr d mm ^m
!
•
O
CO f^ O
N m O
' _______
r a N N cA M N
mz)
D m
m a m
^^ m
m>
N (n z
T ' A N
H
G
W
LO
LO
co
^zb 5+o 6.9
ze
ozv no tC f^
£zv Mo d M ^' c' M ('+)
tiv M N N a
( 1Im
— m M n
ZZH NO
f
III
f III III III u u u u n u u u u n u u M
6V 9n z M O N
^v do e M
• 9 b
-I
5£`d 9
M
5£9 I ^d E O
I N
99 9 ® ®ii 1 1
® ® II ^N z
.. N
z£d 89 M z
a ^ N
6l9 e ^
bzH `08
0)
lIN Z h IA N
a II
see • N
)IN Z
sad do N
--^--^ aM a N
4N n vNA
LS C
)I J
' Z L!
CM ,1 Wf OHM 9
b
d,
^_ . An r l
Fiiiiiiiu
69 =5) dA z N
Elil
l£'d
Me
M
N
N
I
N
B ^{N-,
b AeJ
I
IIIIIIIRII IIF
^^811 Z T^ 9 ^N^
it
i
E
L: c E-
___IB i 1i
1 ^
jj:I 9IU'
I
, .
.
6Z8 iw d9
dl
sl-
dl
RI
• - .
III
11
.I
l.
•
'•
'I
.: : !
•
—
T. T
I
cza
sze
b£b /
n
"° wr. am.rn e^ .eg waa.m a rn *sa ^^ :; T :. :
.
-
:
Ii---
d e b dM
f as e I "
dA z nM
No
d s --
I
;1 M I e
8 £ d^J
9 ne ^^^^
N £ ÂN _n J
1
N M9 Z 9
,.,., A8
.lj0 I ^ ,
1
1
m Q m d m m 0 0 m C7 _______ u n •
^
..
^
u
u u
N1 N ^ r
o a
a N N N
m
3 J m
r m a III
® 111
^ O
ABS MODEL
Electrical
Main Wi1i Cipcuft liar - MoeEzwthoit A rakes
Key to circuit diagram 43 Rectifier /Regulator

44 Alternator
Key Item Description 45 Fuse Box
1 Instrument Assembly Ignition Switch
46
2 Vehicle Speed Sensor Accessory Socket
47
3 Front Brake Lever Switch Satellite Navigation Connector (Accessory)
48
4 Engine Kill Switch Heated Handlebar Grips Connector (Accessory)
49
5 . Starter Button 50 Fuel Pump
6 Engine Control Module Direction Indicator Unit
51
7 Lambda Sensor Clutch Lever Switch
52
8 Fuel Injector 1 Horn Button
53
9 Fuel Injector 2 Direction Indicator Switch
54
10 Fuel Injector 3 Headlamp Dip Switch
55
11 Exhaust Air Injection Solenoid Oil Pressure Switch
56
12 Fall Detection Switch LH Front Indicator
57
13 Inlet Air Temperature Sensor Position Light
58
14 Coolant Temperature Sensor Headlight
59
15 Throttle Potentiometer Horn
60
16 Ambient Pressure Sensor RH Front Indicator
61
17 MAP Sensor Fuel Pump Relay
62
18 Engine Management Relay
19 Fuel Level Sender
Key to wiring colours
20 Neutral Switch
22 Cooling Fan Key Wiring Colour
23 330 ohm resistor B Black
24 Purge Valve U Blue
25 Ignition Coil 1 N Brown
26 Ignition Coil 2 G Green
27 Ignition Coil 3 S Slate / Grey
28 Side stand Switch 0 Orange
29 Engine Earth K Pink
30 Crankshaft Sensor R Red
31 Idle Speed Control Actuator P Purple
32 Diagnostic Connector W White
33 Rear Brake Lever Switch Y Yellow
34 RH Rear Indicator LG Light Green
35 Rear Light LU Light Blue
36 Number Plate Light
37 LH Rear Indicator
38 Alarm Connector (Accessory)
39 Starter Motor
40 Starter Solenoid
41 Battery
42 Starter Relay
17.26 Service Manual - Tiger . lump

Workshop Manual Triumph Tiger - 1050 - 2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Workshop Manual Triumph Tiger - 1050 - 2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Workshop Manual Triumph Tiger - 1050 - 2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

U MpH

UMW Service. Manual - Tiger

Table oof Contents

Service Manual - Tiger V

vi Service Manual - Tiger •

Repairs and Replacements

This page intentionally left blank

V ile Service Manual - Tiger UP

IgnitionSystem Safety Precautions ........................................................... 1.3

Press. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7

BallBearing .......................................... 0 ............................... 1.7

ElectricalTesting ......................................................................... 1.10

The ignition system produces extremely high. voltages.

Wearers of surgically implanted heart pacemaker

Many liquids and other substances used in motor

Health Protection Precautions

Service Manual - Tiger 1.3

1.4 Service Manual - Tiger

The coolant anti-freeze contains -a corrosion inhibitor

Precautions against Damage

Coolant mixture, which is blended with anti-freeze and

TMumpi Service Manual - Tiger 1.5

Joints and Joint Faces

Liquid gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent

Fuel Handling Precautions

Oil and Grease Seals

Service Manual - Tiger 1.7

No one should be permitted to repair components

1.8 Service Manual - Tiger

any protective covers and substances are replaced if

The ignition system produces extremely high voltages.

Electrical Wires the current flowing in the circuit can be

By transposing either of these formulae, the value of any

1.10 Service Manual - Tiger

This symbol is used to show ground points. This is the

Connector Lamp or Bulb

This illustration is used to show all multi-plug type

Service Manual - Tiger 1.11

Normally Normally Change

An electric motor. This could be the starter motor or a

The following is a description of two types of

A device placed in a cable to reduce a voltage or restrict

Splice A 'short cut' in an electrical circuit - current by-passes the

1.12 Service Manual - Tiger . UMP

Ensure the circuit being tested is switched off before

Service Manual - Tiger 1.13

To check a switch, set the multimeter to resistance/ ECM

1.14 Service Manual - Tiger

uses diodes to convert the alternator output to dc volts

ENSURE THE BATTERY IS IN GOOD

STOP THE ENGINE AND DISCONNECT THE

RAISE THE ENGINE SPEED ABOVE

FAULTY RECTIFIER( REGULATOR

Service Manual -Ti9er 1.15

• Check the frame and engine earth

_C[4T:;I 1 1 IfI Thw 51aii ii I

Symptom Possible cause(s)

1.16 Service Manual - Tiger UMw

WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH ON AND